V  -r.t 


V|K,^^-X 


^.' 


i  r? 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


TRINITY  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.C. 


The  Gift  of. 


Date_ 


T 


k 


REVISED    SYSTEM 


OF 


CAVALRY   TACTICS, 


FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE 


Cavalry  and  Mounted  Infantry^  C.  S.  A. 


BY 

MAJOR  GENERAL  JOSEPH  WHEELER, 
Chief  of  (^a^alry,  Army  of  Ti^rmeeee^,  C.  S.  A. 


MOBILE: 

S.  H,  Gk)BTZEL  &  Co. 

1863 


X 


Entered  according  to  Aoi  of  Congress  in  the  year  186S,  by 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 

In  the  ClerJc'e  Office  of  the  District  Coiirt  of  Alabama,  for  iJi-e 
Confederate  States  of  America.   • 


FARRO'W  &  DENNETT,   PRINTERS 


■  INTRODUCTION. 

Much  kas  been  saicl  iTgaiHiiDgJlre  relative  atJvaafage 
of  single  aM  double  rank  formation.  "We  have  sc/*u  that 
the  depth  of  fowuation  has  been  gradually  decreasing 
during  the  last  t^vo  thousand  years  fropi  ten  or  even  six- 
teen ranks  to  the  present  system. 

The  most  perfect  system  of  formation  is  that  which  en- 
ables the  comnaandcr  to  do  the  most  service  with  a  given 
number  of  men.  We  will  suppose  a  Cavalry  Brigade  of 
four' regiments  to  be  drawn  up  to  chftrge  bho  enem}'. 
With  the'  single  rank  formation  the  Brigade  will  be 
formed  in  four  lines  and  inflict  upon,  the  enemy  four  suc- 
cessive shocks,  each  of  which  would  be  "nearly  as  severe 
as  a  charge  in  two  i*anks,  and  the  number  of  shocks  being 
double,  the  amount  of  execution  would  certainly  be  much 
greater. 

Another  advantage  in  single  rank,  is  the  greater  facil- 
ity with  which  troops  can  be  Iiandled  and  reformed,  after 
the  confusion  of  a  charge,  and  what  is  of  more  impor- 
tance, disorder  or  confusion  are  less  liable  to  be  incurred. 


1  R  0 

-—      V.J-       T--* 


r^  T)  i^ 


ii  INTRODUCTION. 

These,  together  with  several  other  minor  considerations, 
hate  induced  cavalry  officers  of-caost  experience  both  in 
Europe  and  America,  to  prefer  the  single  to  double  ran^s. 

By  forming  the  flank  squadrons  in  echelon,  the  enemy 
would  be  ignorant  as  to  whether  the  Regiment  charging 
them  was  in  one  or  two  ranks,  and  therefore  the  moral 
effect  would  be  the  same  in  both  cases. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS, 

FOR  SINGLE  RANK  FORMATIONS. 

. «  ag,  •  -  ' : ; — 

PART    FIKST. 
TITLE  FIRST. 


ARTICLE  FIRSSr. 

TO  FORM  A  REGIMENT  OF  TENkSQUADRONS 
'in  line  of  BATTLE. 

A  Regiment  of  Cavaliy  coBsists  of  one  Colonel,  on€ 
Lieuleliant  Colonel,  one  Major,  one  Adjutant,  one  Ser- 
geant Major,  one  Quartermasfer  Serjeant,*  and  ten  Com- 
panies^ each  of  which  consists  of  one  Captain,  one  Firet 
Lientenant,  two  Second  Lieutenants,  five  Sergeants,  four 
Corporals,  cue  Farrier,  one  JBl'acksmitli,  and  from  sixty 
to  eighty -privates.  "^       '     . 

Quartermasters;  Commissaries  atW  Surgeons  are  sonle- 
tira^s  appointed  for  ]«rovisional  purposes,  but  are  gene- 
rally detailed  from  Lieutenants  of  tlie4ine. 

A  Band  is  eoraetimes  formed  Ly  selecting  musicians 
from  the  rank  and  file. 

Companies  will  be  designated  as  squadrons  in  all  ma- 
nceuvres  and  exercises,  and  each  will  be  composed  of  two, 
three  or  four  platoons,  according  to  its  size. 

i  8  0  5  7 1) 


2  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  • 

"When  of  40  or  more  files,  it  is  divided  into  four  pla- 
toon's; of  30  to  40  files,  into  three  platoons;  of  20  to  30" 
files,  into  two.  If  possible  the  files  of  the  platooi^s  "are 
of  even  numbers.  The  firat  and  fourth  platoons  are 
made  the  largest  if  necessary  to  accomplish  thi?.  The 
platoons  are  numbered  at  first  from  right  to  left,  and  re- 
tain their  numerical  designations  whatever  relative  posi- 
tions they  may  subsequently  occupy. 

The  formation  will  be  in  one  rank.  That  w-hich  has 
been  prescribed  for.the  formation  mounted,  is  applicnble 
to  the  formation  on  foot..   ; 

"^The  squadrons  of  a  regiment  in  line,"  are  j3osted  with 
intervals  equal  to  a  platoon  front  betv/een  the  sergeants 
on  their  fianks;  the. intervals  are  equal  at  any  one  time, 
and  never  less  than  12  paces.  When  the  average  of  pla- 
toon front  is  much  above  this,  the  colonel  announces  the 
increased'  uniform  interval. 

The  squadrons  are  distinguished  by  the  denourmatiou 
-of  first,  second,  third,  etc.,  counting  "^from  right  to  left ; 
they  retain  these  designations  in  the  evolutions  whatever 
may  be  their  relative  positions.  But  the  l-st  capt'ain 
commands  the  squadron  on  the  right:  the  2d,  the  tenth 
(on  the  left;)  the  3d/tRe 'fifth  from  the  right;  the  4th, 
the  third  from  the  right;  tha  oth,  the  seventl;  from  ^the 
right ;  the  Gth,  the  secpnd  from'  the  right;  the.'Ztb,  \he 
ninth  from  the/ight;  the  8th,  the  sixth  from  the  right;- 
the  9th,  the  fourth -from  the  right;  niid  the  lOth^the 
eiglith  from  the  right. 

This  is  the  habitual  and  parade  order  of  the  squadrons; 
but  in  sudden  formations,  they  will  take  post  as  they  sev- 
rive  at  the  plaice  of  assembly,  and  should  a  captain  be 
permanently  atjsent,  or.  absent  for  a  campaign,  the  com- 
naandeii'of  the  regiment  wnll  assign  his  squadron  position 
according  to  the  rarfk  of  the  actual  commander. 

Post  of  the  Officers  and  Non- commissioned  Officers  of  the 
Field  and  Staff  of  a  RegimerH  in  line  of  Battle. 

The  colonel,  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  cenfre  o^-the reg- 
iment, having  a  chief  trumpeter  near  hipi.  • 


dASIS  OF'IJ?STRW!tY«iNj^  3 

""  The  lieuteuaiit  coldng>,-tfeo?'pdfMsAi  ajjvanoe  of  tlie  cen.- 
^tre  of  the  riglit  "wing.  • 

Tiie  majpr,  25ij)acc3'iu  nJvanfe.of  tlie^ceifltre  of  the 
left  wing.  ^^         -*  ^  , '    *      '    « 

The  colUP  moves  ^ber.e'yfei* 'his  presence  raay  bjl  ne- 
cessary^. Tlielieuftnawt  f'dlonel  and  ra^rfor,  mo>«  v/herc- 
cver  the  colonel  may  tliink'^'oper  to  •li'l^ct  thorn. 

Tlie  adjutant  accompanies  the  colonel.  , 

The  regimental  qnar'terin^'^eter  and,  coi^rai^ary,  if  there 
be  any,  are  placed  two  paces  to  the  righ|  of  the  sei-gcant 
major,  or  they  accompany  the  colonel^n?  hd'may  direct^. 

Tiie  sergeant?  major  is  in  line  wiili  theni-egimeat  2  pa« 
ces  from  the  right  flank. 

The  qnarternia.-ter  sergoaHt  k  ^in-  Hne  ^Itft  the  regi- 
ment 2,j;ace9-from  tlieJeft  flaok.  r 

The  standard  bearer  is  oh  ^-  right  of  the  guidoir  of 
the  of.ntre,  or  right  centlv  scfuadron^  a  corporal  is  1  pace 
behind  him.  / 

T\ve  regimental  marjjcr  is-l  pacebeWtid  the  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  rogiruent. 

General  staff  office^ 'serving  with  the  regirn^t  23  da- 
ces  in  rear  of  the  riu:Iil  of  the  liegimont. 

The  band,  fcrmeit  in  two  raniWj  i3"2o  2)nc©s..in  rear  of 
the  coirlre  of  the  i-^giineat. 

Post  of  t'lte  Oji&ii's  and  ]X'on-t<ysnmi^0>ncd  C^c.rs  of  a 

Squtitdron  in  I  me  of;^<xlUe. 
-'  •  "  .,  ' 

TTlie  ©aptaiu  is  posted  in  front  of  the  contre  of  the 
equalron,  tl>e.- eroiij^  of  his  horg)^  *  pacegl.n  advance  of 
the  heiids  of  the  hoiycs  in  line.         '    .;"   ^  '    .    * 

The  senior  lieutenant  eommaniSs  th6  ^st  phatoon  ;  the 
nc.Kt  in  rank,  the  4th  platoon  ;^the  uext,  the  2d ;  and  the 
next,  the  3d.  Each  is^^sted  iVi  front  of  the. centre  of  his 
pldtodn,  with  the  cuuuppf  his  horse  1  pace  in  advance  of 
the  heads  of  the  horses  i;i  Mne.  Sergeants"  supply  the 
places  of  commanders; o'f  platoons,  when  there  are  not 
enough  officers  present.     •  '  .    ^         * 

The  1st  sergeant  is  ported  on  the  right  of  the  squadron 
not  counted  in  the  rank ;  he  is  the  squadron  right  guide. 


4  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

The  next  sergeaut  in  rank  is  posted  on  the  left  d 
the  squadron,  nofc  counted  in  th^  rank  ;  he  is  the  squad- 
ron left  guide.  •  • 

The  third  sergeant  in  rank  is  the  guidon  bearer,  and  is 
theieft  file  of  the  2d  platoon. 

The  other  sergeants  and  corporals  are  placed  according 
to  rank,  as  follows-:  «r 

Left  of  1st  platoon. 

Right  of  4th  platoon. 

Right, of  3d  platoon. 

Right  of  1st  platoon. 
'Left  of  4th  platoon.  . 

Left  of  3d'  platoon. 

Right  of  2d  platoon. 

The  1st  trumpeter  is  posted  one  pace  behind  the  4th 
file  from  the  right  of  the.  ist  platoon. 

The  other  trumpeter,  one  pace  behind  the  4lh  file  irom 
the  left  of  the  4th  platoon. 

The  farrier,  one  pace  behind  the  centra  of  the  second 
platoon. 

The  saddler,  one  pace  b.ehind  the  centre  of  the  third 
jdatoon. 

There  is  ?k  size-roll  of  .the  squadron,  and  with  some  al- 
lowance for  weight  of  man  and  horse,  the  tallest  horses 
are  assigned  to  the  tallest  men;  the  men  are  poste(J  ae- 
co.rdi.ng  to  this  roll,  the  tallest  men  to  the  right  and  left 
of  the  centre,  the  lowest  at  the  flanks* 
V  This  invariable  position  of  the  soldiers  is  also  impor- 
tant for  its  encouragement  to  companionship  and  mutual 
assistance  in  the  sets  of  fours,  and  to  a  feeling  of  respon- 
sibility of  each  to  the  others  in  conduct  and  bravery. 

Assmibly  of  a  Regirneni  3founted. 

When  a  regiment  is  to  mount,  boots  and.  saddles  is 
sounded.  At  this  signal  the  horses  are  saddled;  bridled, 
and  fully  equipped  for  the  occasion.      - 

At  the  signal  ^  horse,  non-commissioned  oificers  and 
troQpers  lead  into  rank.    The  1st  sergeant  calls  the  roll, 


.  bIsis  of  instruction.  5 

or  the  setgeants  of  divisiops  raay  be  required  to  call  the 
division  rolls;  th-c  officers  are  pre?eBt  in  ;in|:ierintendence. 

The  captain,  then,  or  the  senior  lieutenant  by  his  oi'der, 
orders  the  squadron  to  count  fours  in  each  platoon,  and 
to  mount,  »■  . 

The  captain,  first  observing  that  cverj  onje  is  in  his 
prescribed  place,  and  the  general  appearance  of  th« 
»f]aiadron,.  marches  it,  habitually  by  •fours,  to  the  place 
of  a^enibly.  If  1-oquired,  on  reaching  there,  he  reports 
al^entees,  by  his  1st  sergeant,  to  the  adjutant.* 

In  case  o£ alarm  or  surprise,  to  horse  is  founded;   the 
men  then  saddle,   pack  up,  bridle,  and  mount  "with  the 
utmost  celerity,   and  repair  to  t^e  place  of  assembly,  • 
which  is  always  previously  designated. 

On  occasions  of  parade,  .the  trunppet^-s  And  band  wiU 
proceed,  as  soon  as  mounted,  to  the  right  of  the  parade 
ground^  and  be  there  formed  in  two  or  more  ranks.  ^wFif- 
tGcn  minutes  arfter  to  Jwrse,  the  trumpeters  sound  the  aS' 
sctnbl//,  for  marching  the  squadrons  t©  the  parade. 

Assembly  of  a  Iie<jimcnt  DiSitnovnted. 

When  a  regiment  is  to  turn  out  under  arnis  on  foot, 
"to  arms"  will  be  sounded ;  at  this  signal  the  squadrons 
will  be  formed  and  inspected  as  pre?cribe<l, 
,  For  parade,  the  rogipieut  will^be  foimed  in  liee  of  col- 
umns, as  when  mounted,  but  with  intervals  of  two  paces. 

The  squadron  officers,  will  take  pla'ce  four  paces  in  front 
of  the  first  platoons,  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left, 
with  equal  intervals;  the  left  guides  on  the  right  of  the 
second  platoons. 


DRE3S  PARADE  AND  GUARD  ^MOUNTING. 

Dress  parade  and  mounting  of  guards,  mounted,  are 
conducted  as  prescribe'S  in  Array  Regulations,  with  the 
following  and  other  more  obvious  variations,  necessary 
from  tjie  diiTerence  of  cavairy  and  infantry. 


6  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

Th$  officers  take  post  12  paco?,  the  uon-i2om.!iDi6sioned 
officers  6  paces,  in  front  of  tbe'guarcl.    "         . 

After  iuspection,  tlie.pfiicers  take  post  2  paces  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  their,  gnard  or  their  pialoons;  a  non-com- 
missioned officer  commanding  a  guar  J,  the  same. 

The  guard  passes  in  review  bj  gziard,  platoons,  ■or  fours, 
having  regard  to  its  strength. 

In  wet  weather  the  sabres  will  not  be  drawn  by  guards 
for  inspection,  or  any  occasion. of  ceremony.     ■ 

At  regijnental  parade  the  field  officers  and  ■captains 
are  placed  as  in  line;  the  platoon  commanders,  exel'u- 
sively  commissioned  officers,  ai»e  aligned  on  the  captains; 
the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  are  posted  4  paces  from 
the  right  guide  of  squadrons.  '    * 

After  the  music,  the  adjutant  rides  to  a  point  25  paces 
in  front  of  the  centre  bf  the  line,  faces  it,  and  comnvands: 

■  "i.  Attention, 

2.  Draw — Sabre. 

3.  Present — Sabre. 

The  Colonel  coDclndesthe*  exercises  with,  Rclnrn — 
Sabre. 

The  cominandscfor  the  advance  of  tlic  line  of  officers 
are  given  in  "a  tone  only  loud  enough  -to  be  heard  by 
them.  '  .  ,j»   ' 

If  the  colonel  desii-es  it',  for  the  pwpose  of,parade,  he 
\vill  divide  the  Pojiadi"On  into  two  platoons,  and  form  the 
regimental  parade- in  line  of  platoon  columns  at  U  paces 
distance — ^froro  the  liorses'  croups  in  the  front  line  to 
their  hea<y9  in  the  other— with  intervals  of  6  paces. 

The  of^cers  take  post  4  paces  in  front  of  the  first  pla- 
toons, in  order  of  rank,  from  right  to  left,  with  equTil  in- 
tervals; if  but  one  officer,  in  front  of  the  cenire  of  the 
platoon;  left  guides  on  the  right  of  the  2d  platoons. 

To  leav6  the  parade^  the  squadrons  will*b^C9inaHind- 
ed;  1.  Right  forward — Fours  right.  2.  MARon.  Or, 
ifby  tlie  rear,  \.' Fours  left — Cohimns  left.  2.  Maecu. 
In  both  cases  the  rear  platoon  does-not  march  until   the 


^ASIS  OJ*  INSTRUCTION.  t 

Iea(^in'g  platoon  has  gniiied'  sufficient  ground  for  th%h' 
properly  uniting.' 

.THE-^STANDAKD. 

Genorall}^,  when  the  standard  is  used,  the  stftiidavd 
bearer  goes  Tor  it  to  the  qnarrters  or  tent  'of  th^  colonelt 
csGO];ted  by  l\70  sergeai^ts.  . 

0u  special  occasions, iiu J  at  leaet  once  a  year,  it  is  es- 
corted and  received  with  ceremony. 

Two  platoons  of  the  standard  squadron,  or  one  of  the 
Hank  sc^u-adrons,  will  be  detached,  under  the  orders  of 
the^oloi^l,  to  proc^d  to  liiBtiuaners,  as  soo?  asmoun- 
t'od.  It  will  boiJialtecV  irt  thejr^froHt,  in  column  ofe  pla- 
todtiP,  with  either  flank  tcrward  tlie -quarters,  'ilie  slah- 
dawi  bearer,  receives  the  standard- from Jlie  hantls  of  the 
adjutant  or  sergeant  major, ^nd*  takes  his  po?tin  the  cen- 
tre of  tbe  interjt-al  Between  the  platr^on?,  with  ft  sergeant 
on  each  side  of  him  ;  the  eohiijui  is  then  put  in  inution. 
preceded  2£)^acG3  by  a  chief  ti'umpeter  and  fpxfv  trum- 
peters. ^ 

The  column  approaehe%a  flank  of  tlw  regiment,  march- 
ingjparallel  with  and"  about  lOQjjiaces  lram*'its  front,  the 
trumpets  3ouj3ding*i,he  mar'gh.  «  ^ 

The  colon*!  aomraands  the  sabreri  to  be  dra^wu.  The 
escort. is  halted  \fhen»nQaply  opposite  fha  flank,  thejgtan- 
dard  bearer  and'two  sergeants  pass  on,  and  v\'hen  50  pa- 
ces in  froi^  of  the  colonel  face  him  and  the  regiment,  and 
halt.  =      .    ■ 

The  colonel  then  orders  sabres'presented,  and  presents 
sabre  himself ;  the  trumpets  .sound  to  the  stahdanl  The 
standard  bearer  then  takes  hit  place  in  lin^'     -^ 

The  escort,  the  iuomeut  the  standard  bearer  leaves  it, 
CiirBS  and  is  marehed  by  thereat  to  its  place  in  line. 

.  Wh^  there  is  st  band,  it  may.  be  substituted  for  Ihe 
cht^f  twimpeter  and  four  trumpeters. 

On  the  raturn  of  the  standard  it  has  the.sanie  escort. 


8  BASIS  OF  instruction;. 

Salute  with  the  Standard. 

"When  the  standard  is  to  pay  honors,  the  standard  bear- 
er salutes  in  the  following  manner,  in  two  times: 

1.  At  4  paces  from  the  person  who  is  to  be  saluted, 
lower  the  lance  gently  lo  the  front,  bending  as  near  to 
the  horizontal  line  as  possible. 

2.  Raise  the  lance  gently,  when  the  person  saluted  has 
passed  4  paces. 

Salute  with  the  Sabre. 

When  the  superior  and  other  officers  are  to  salute, 
whether  on  horseback  or  on  foot,  at  a  halt  or  marching, 
tI[3;ey*do  it  in  four  times.  * 

1.  At  4  paces  from  tlie  person  to  be  saluted,  raise,  'the 
sabre  perpendicularly,  thep.oint  upwards,  the  edge  to  the 
left,  the  hand  opjwsite  to  and  one  foot  from  the  right 
shoulder,  the  elbow  6  inches- fram  the  bx)dy. 

♦2.  Lbw^er'^he  blade,    extending   the   arm   to   its  full 


13 


length,  the  hand  m  quarte,  until  the  pointof  the  t^abre 
near  the  foot.      .     *  , 

3.  Rajae  the  sabre  quickly,  the  point  upwards,  as.  in 
tlre.first  time,  after  the  person  saluted  has  passed  4  paces. 

4.  Car.ry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder.  ,* 

THE  OICDEII  OF  BATTLE.     - 

The  order  of  battle. for  a  regiment  of  ten  squadrons,  is 
the  four  right  or  left  squadrons  deployed  in  line;  the  four 
squadrons  of  th-e  other  flank  in-line  of  squadron  columns 
SOO  paces  in  rear  of  the  first  line.  The  Sthsquadron,  in 
column  of  platoons,  generally  left  in  front,  is  60  paces 
behind  the  right  flank  of  the  first  linfe,  the  line  of  its  left 
guides  being  a  platoon  front  to  the  right  of  the  extremity 
of  that  flank  ;    the  6th  squadron,  in  column-. of  platoone, 


J^J. 


Feme  S 


1 1 


I'll 

.50 


',■■!■  !■',! 


23 


r    '  I  "  I   '     I'      '!    '  I    '    I-     I'      T r 


^<?<? 


■f 


TT" 


'     '■   '     '     ■    .1     ■ 


■^ 


50 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  9 

rigbt  iu  front,  similarly  disposed  to  the  rear  of  the  left* 
flank  of  the  first  line. 

If  a  squadron  be  absent,  the  second  line  will  Le  com- 
posed of  3  squadrons,  in  columns  immediately  in  rear  of 
the  first  line ;  the  5th  and  Gth  squadrons,  counting  from 
the  flank  which  composes  the  first  line,  being  always  the 
flankiuff  squadrons; 

The  lieutenant  colonel  commands,  the  second  line,  and 
is  posted  26  paces  in  froi^  of  its  centre. 

The  order  of  battle  for  a  regimont  'of  eight  squaiin)n8 
is  as  follows:  ' 

The  six  rightJ  or  left  squadrons  deployed  in  line  ;  the 
7th  and  8th  (or  1st  and  2d)  squadrons  are  posted  in  col- 
ifmns  of  platoons,  in  rear  of  the  right  and  left  flanks  of 
the  line  of  Lattle,  as  described  for  the  flank  squadrons  of 
the  regiment  of  ten  squadrons. 

In  the  order  of  battle,  each  field  officer  is  attended  by 
a  trumpeter.  '  ^  .        . 

To  change  from  line  or  order  of- review  to  order  ot  bat- 
tle in  an  eight  squadron  regiment,  the  7th  and  8th  squad- 
rons arq,  wheeled  by  platoons  (or  by  fours)  to  the  right, 
and  conducted  by  their  captains  by  the  shortest  lines  to 
their  positions.  » 

"  In  a  ten  squadron  regiment,  the  same  for  the  6th  and 
Gth  squadrons;  the  lieutenant  colonel  takes  commaml  of 
the  next  four  squadrons,  wheels  platoons  right,  column 
right,  and  to  the  left,  after  marching  the  proper  distance 
to  the  rear,  . 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

FORMATION  OF  A  REGIMEN'T  IN  COLUMN. 
Order  in  Column  by  Twos  or  by  Fours. 

In  this  order,  the  squadrons  preserve  distances  of  3  pa- 
ces more  than  platoon  front,  counting  from  the  croups  of 
4he  horses  of  the  last  set  of  fours'  of  one,  to  the  heads  of 
the  'horses  of  the  ^rst  set  of  the  next 


10  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTIO;*!. 

■->• 
The  eojonel  marches  at  the  centr.e.of  the  regii):icnt,  on 

"the  side  of  tb.e  guides,  50  paces  from  the  flauk  of  the  col- 
umn, liaving  behind  Lim  a  chief  bugler. ,  He  moves 
wheijever  his  j^resence  may  be  necgsaary. 

,  The-  lieutcnant'colooel  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  25  pa- 
ces from  the.  flank  of  the  column  ;  he  marches  hnbituallv 
on  a  line  vfith  the  captain  eorrtrjanding  the  1st  squadron. 

The  major  miirches  25  paces  from  the  same  flank  of  the 
column,  and  on  a  line  with  the  .captain  comnaanding  the 
lOth^quadrou,   »  '^  ■*-:    .* 

The  adjutant  and  regimental  quartermaster  accom- 
pany the  colonel.  ' 

The  sergeant' major  mfirches  on  the  side  of  the.  guides, 
2  paces  from  the  flankof  the  column,  and  «n  a  line  with' 
the  first  files  gfthe  cohimTi.v    ' 

■  The  quartermaster  sergeant  marches  on  the  side  of 
the  guides,  2  paces  from  the  flank' of  the  column,  on  a 
line  with  the  last  files  of  the  column. 

,  The  regimental  marker  marches  on  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guides,  2  paces  from  the  flank,  and  on  a  line  with 
the  first  files  of  the  column.   • 

The  captains  march  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  and  '8 
paces  from  the  flank  and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their 
squadrons.  • 

The.4st  lieutenant  of  eaJch  squadron  marches  at  the 
head  of  the  let  platoon,  1  {>nce  in  advance  of  the  fi<i'st 
files,  liaving'the  right  guide  on  his  lyght. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  march  on  the  side  of 
the  guides,  1  pace  from  the  fiaiik  of  the  column,  and 
abreast  of  their  first  files  ;  the  trumpeters  marcli  on  the 
side.oppbsite  to  the  guides,  1  pace  fwm  the  flank,  and 
on  a  line  with  the  second  file  from  the  front  and  rear 
of  their  squadrons.;  the  farrier  and  the  saddler  in  the 
direction  of  the  trumpeters,  and  opjVosite  the  centres  of 
the  second  and  thir4  platoons.    . 

They  all  march  in  a  similar  manner  g»  the  flanks  of 
the  column  when  the  left  is  m  front ;   an%  in  this  pase, 


BASIS  OF  INSTftUGTiaN.  _^il 

it  iatlie  commander  of  the  4Ui -platoon  avIio  mai-clies  at 
its  tfend  and  in  fi\ont  of  the  squadron  columns;  and  the 
maior  is  nean  the  head  of  the  regimental  colmiin.- 

Tlie  left  guide  marches  behind  the  last  files  of  the 
squadron ;  when  the  column  is  left  in  front,  he  takes 
post  on  the  left  of  the  officer  commanding  the  4tli  pla- 
toon, 1  pace  in  front  of  the  left  file. 

When  the  nature  of  the  ground  obliges  the  officers 
and  others  to  enter  the  columh,  the  movement  is  made 
succesmely  ;  the  superior  officers  and  others  opposite 
the  1st  divisions  of  squaj^rons  place  themc-elv^^a.at  theif 
head;  those  opposite  tlTe  2d  xlivi^ions,  in  rear. 

The. primitive  order  is  resumed  as  soonras'the  nature 
of  the  ground  will  permit. 

Order  in  column  of  Platoons  {open  column)., 

In  this  order  the  squadrons  preservo-  distance-J>f-2 
platoon  fronts,  less  one  pnce  betwe.en  each  otlier,  count- 
ing from  the  platoon  horses;  the  distance  of  one  platoon 
from  another,  measured  from  the  forefeet  of  the  hnrsea 
of  one  platoon  to  thpse  .of  the  Hext^is  equal  to  the  front 
of  the  platoons.-  r    -    '  ■ 

The  colonel  marches  at  the'centl'e  of  the  regiment,  on 
the  side  of  the  guides,  50"  paces  froiti  the  flank.of  the 
column,  liaving  behind  him. a  chief  trumpeter;  lie  moves 
wherever  his  presence  may  be  required. 

The  lieutccant-eolonel.marehes  habitually  on  the  side 
of  the  guides,  26  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column, 
and  on  a  line'vN'itkthe  lieutenant  commanding  the  2d 
platoon  of  tlie  Ist  squadron. 

The  major'  niarches  at  the  same    distance    from    the 
j^'amc -flank,  on  -a  line  with  the  commander  of  the  last 
j5latoon. 

The  adjutant  and  regimental  quarterniastei"  accom- 
pany the  colonel',  '*■ 

Tl'^e  serg<3ant  major  marches  on  the  side  of  the  guides, 
2  paces  from  the  flank,  of  the  column,  and  abreast  of 
the Jeadbg  platoon.  ■  .  " 


n  BASIS  OP  INSTRUCTION. 

Th 3  quaTterm aster  sergeant  marches  on  the  side  of 
the   gtiides,  2  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  rear  phitdon. 

The  regimental  marker  marches  one  pace  in  rear  of 
the  second  file  of  -the  leading  platoon  on  the  side  of  the 
guides. 

The  captains  march  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  8  paces 
from  the  flank  of  the  column,  and  habitually  abreast  of 
the  contre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  commanders  of  platoons  march  one  pace  in  front 
of  their  centres;  those  of  leading  platoons  are  answer- 
able for  the  distance  to  the  squadron  in  front.     * 

•  When  the  column  mai'ches"  right  in  front,  the  right 
guide  of  each  squadron  mai'ches  on  the  right  of  the  1st 
platoon,  and  the  left  guide  one  pace  behind  the  '2d  file 
from  the  left  of  the  -ith  platoon.  The  posts  of  these 
sergeants  is  the  reverse  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

The  trumpeters,  -farrier  and  saddler  march  in  rear  of 
their  platoons  as  in  the  squadron  in  line. 

The  squadron  being,  composed  of  64  files,  when  it  is 
broken  into  sections,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon 
marches  at  the'head  of  the  leading  section  ;  the  chiefs 
of  the  other  platoons  one  pace  from  and  on  a  Hue  with 
their  leading  section,  and  on  the  Bide  of  the  guides.  The 
second  sections  will  be  consmanded  by  their  guides,  who 
retain  their  places. 

Order  in  close  Cohimn. 

The  regiment  is  in  column  of  squadi'ous  at  platoon 
distance ;  the  distances  are  equal  at'  any  one  time,  ahd 
never  less  than. 9  paces  (from  the  croups  of  the  horses  of 
one  squadron  to  the  heads  of  the  horses- of  the  next). 

The  colonel  is  posted  25  paces  from  the  centre  of  the 
column,  at  the  side  of  the  guides.  '  _  * 

The  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  march  habitually  on 
the  side  of  the  guides,  12  paces  from  the  flanks  of  the 
fir.st  and  laat  squadrons.  .    ^_       '        -    , 

The  sergeant  major,  quartermaster  sergeant,  and  regi- 
mental marker,  march  as  in  column. of  platoons. 


BXiilS  OF  INSTUUCTIGN.  18 

AlHlic  members  of  the  sqnndrons  ai"e_|)o»tod  as  in  Jine 
except  the  caplnins,  who  march  on  the  side  of  the  _i;nkies, 
4  paces  from  the  Hank,  and  on  a  line  with  the^  ehief^i  of 
the  platoons. 

When  the  guide  is  centre,  "  side  of  th^-guidoa"  -will 
'mean  tlio  left  flank  of  a  colnnin  right  in  front;  th.o  right 
flank  if  left  in  front. 

The  order  in  open  column  of  squadrons  (or  of  attack) 
is  the  same  as  in  dose  column,  except  the  cai'tains; 
they  are  posted  as  in  line. 

Order  in  double  Cdlnmti.       * 

Jut"The  cofenel  marches  at  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  lievtenant-colonei  marchxjfe  abreast  ui€  oentrc  of 
tl.  J  riiiht  column,  26  paces  difetant. 

The  major  nwrches  abreast  the  centre  of  the  left  col- 
umn, 25  paces  distant.      '  « 

The  ch.]itains  of  each  column  on  tlio  outer  flankp.    ■ 

Tlie  1  'IL  s<]uadron  guides  of  the  right  column  on  tWb 
left  of  ih'st  ])latoons;  the  right/'-squadron  dfuides  •€  the 
left  column  on  t'le  right  of  fourth  platoons.  * 

All  otliers  the  same  as  iif  column  of  platoons. 

COMPLIMENTS  By  CAVAr.R.Y  ♦UNDER  all  VIEW. 

The  regiment  being  in  line;  the  colonel  com\uhnds: 

1.  Attention.  ';'  "  * 

2.  Prepare  for  Revic\v. 

At  ^his  conmiand,  the  commanders  of  platoons  ad- 
vanl^e  3,  paces*  to  the  line  of  squadron  commanders ;Jhe 
adjutant  p>occeds  to  the  right  of  fehc  regiment,,  and 
places  himself  2  pacesvto  the  right  of  the" sergeant  major, 
wllo^■^  (Tvi  the  right  of.  {lie  line  ^vithout^  interVal;  the 
r^'imental  qup.Ttei*mast"er  is  2  p  icei^to  the  left^of  tJUe 
qur.rfermast'er  sergeant,  who  is  oi\'the  left  of  fhe  liji'e 
without  interval.  The  staft' oflioers  place  thgrnsel^yes 
on  tlic  right  of  the  rank  olf  squadron  officevi!,  acc^dUng 
J^o  their  roliitive  rank^'and  with  iutervals  of  1  pa^K  ■ 


li  FASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 


The  bniid  ""and  trumpeters  oiVa  line,  each  in  que  or 
tV'o'  ranks'  ficcordiug  to  their  strength — the  band  on 
^e  riijht^-at'^  the  right  of  tlie  regiment,  with  au  in- 
terval of  12  paces. 

The  cotori&l  then  ooin^mands: 

1.  Aiteniion. 
2  Drmo — Sabrk. 
'  ?>.  Right — Dress. 
4.  Front.  .* 

In  tills  yarade  order,  the  regiment  awaits  the  ap- 
pvoneli  of  the  personage  who  is  to  rfeviev/  it;  for  whoso 
guidance  a  eamp-eoloV  will  have  been  placed  one  hundred 
to  two^huntlred  paceg'in  front  of  the  centre,,  according 
to  tlrS  extent  of  the  line  and  the  plaifi  in  front  of  it. 
.  When  the^revlpwing  pQj'sonage  is  midway  between 
ilic  camp-tiiolor  and  the  colonel,  the  latter  turns  his 
b«Drse  to  the  right-about  on  his  ground,  and  commands: 

].  Present — Saeuk.  . 

And  i^esumes  in\mediatelj  hie  pvoper  front.     The  officers 
alTsalute.  .      •       '    ..    * 

AVlien  the  reviewing  pev:»onage,  who  has  halted  until 
the  prijip^r  complimentg  are  paid,  advances,  the  colonel 
brings  his  sabre  to  a  carry,  turns  ^out  as  before  to  the 
linc^  aifd -commands:  '     . 

1.  Carry — Sab 5^. 

AVheu   the    whole   line    remarns   peVfectlj;.  steady,  the 
Colon<iLxesuming  his  propel' fi'ont.       '         j     ,        -«  ><^ 

The. reviewing  personage  now  turns  off  to  like- right  of 
the  rer?inn^nt,  passes  thence,  in  fe'ont  of  all  the  officers, 
to  thc^l eft,  around  the  left,  aiHb%  the  rear. tso  the  right 
again.  "^Vhila.  her  is  passing  ajronnd  the  regiment,  no 
njAiteiv.'wHat  his  mii,  the  uirrsic  will  pl-ay  ;  and  when 
ho  turns  off  to'tpke.*hi3  station  near  the  camp-color,  the 
music -will  cease,         '       '  -^ 

.  Tli£  reviewing-  perpQaage -having,  taken  a  position 
uearthe  camp-color,  previously  placed  at  a  j-fi'O'per   dis^. 


BASIS  OF  INSTRCCTION'.  15 

tance,  the  colonel  causes  the  regiment  to>  break  into 
colunni  right  in  front  by  platoon  or  fc-quadron.  The 
band  and  trumpter's.  each  wheel  at  the  same  time",  .the 
hitter  closing  upon  the  former;  .  (this  -wil^  bo  the  habit- 
ual formation  of  the  music) 

The  po?itioiji  of  fhe  colonel  in  column  of  revie-^v  is  C 
paces,  in  front  of  the  captain  of  the  first  squadron^  or 
officer  commanding  the  leading  "p^'^toou;  the  adjutant 
and^ regimental  quartermaster  arc  on  Jus  left. 

.Striff  officci-s  in  one  rank,  according  to  ]ir.eeedence, 
from  riglit  to  left  6  paces  in  rear  of  the  column."' 

The  field  otTicers  arc  6  paces  from  the  "fiaiTlc  o|ipo?tte 
tJic  guides;  the  lieutenant  colonel  opposite  tlie  feading 
division;  the  major  that  in  rear. 

Tlie  pergeant  major  and*  quartermaster  sergeant  2 
paces'from  the  flank  opposite  the  guides;  the  foiaiicr 
opposite  the  loardiug  division  ;  the  la-tter  thel'ear. 

In  a  column  of  platoons,  the  captains  4  ^")aces  ^oui 
the  flank  opposite  the  guides,  opposite  t\i*Q  centres  of 
their  squadrons.  .  _  ; 

Chiefs  of  j^atoons'l  pace  in  admhcc  of  tlie  cehtres  of 
their  platoons.  •          /  '  \  ' 

The  column  is  then  pifl  iamaj^clrl  at  a  walk,  with  tlie 
guide  right.    _  ■         , 

The  adjutant  places  the  regimental  inark«r  at-tjie 
second  turn,  so  thai  the  ri*ht  flank  of  th?  Ci;lumn  shall 
pass  G  [laees  from  the  rtvieAv'ing  pai'sonag^. 

The  column  first-posses  at  a  wlalk,  a.nd  afterward,  if 
required,  at  a  trot. 

When  the  head  of  ^le  column  a^'riyes"\\athin  50  paces 
of  the   reviewing  parsonage,  th'e  music   commences  to 

ThT?  miisic  having  passed,  the  <3rHefJbugler  causes  it  to 
turn  out  of  the  column,  so  as  to  take  a  position  fi-icing 
the  reviewing  pei'sonage,  ai^d, about  .12  paces  from  the. 
flank  of  llic. column.  It  contlnuos  to  play  until  the  rear 
of  *-t]io  cohmm*  has^pj^ssed*';  it- then  wheels,  and  fallows 
in  real*.  "■      •   '•  '  ^ 

Pnssiti^j -ata -^alkj'-the  colbn£litaaiKl  'all   the  ofTKjers 

w  « 


16-  BASIS  0*"  INSTRUCTION. 

Bftlute  witli  the  sabre  as  they  successively  arrive  v.'ithiu 
6  paces-of  the  reviewing  personage)  turning  the  heads 
ttnx'anls  him. 

Thc'Standnrd  Joes  not  salute,  except  to  the  President 
or  Vice  President  of  the  Confederate  States,  Governors 
of  Sla^tes,  Heads  of  Departments,  or  GoneraL  Officer  ; 
when  the  trumpets  are  to  flom'ish  in  passing,  the  band 
ceases -playing,  and  resumes  the  same  air  or  marelrwheu 
the  flouri-?hes  have  ceased. 

Arrived  near  its  original  ground,  the  colonel  changes 
the  guide  of  the  column.;  on  the  ground,  be  lialtsit,  and 
formaline  ;  othcr~wise  lie  command^  the'  trot,  and  passes 
•  the  reviewing  cff.cer. again.  I-u  thia..case  .the  bnird  v.ill 
have  j-etaincd  its  place  near  the  reviewing  personage, 
*and  \*rill  commence  toplay^at  the  approach  of  .tlie  head 
of  t4ie  column,  wheel  in  front  of  it,  and  thus  march  off. 

The  officers  now  do  not  salute;  and-  the  colonel 
marvches  oa.  the  left  of  the  column. 

The  regiment  being  formed  in  line  on  its  original 
ground — if  an  inspection  is  not  to  follvtv — the  colonel 
marches  the  .regiment  forward  in  line,  at  the  v.alk  or 
trot;  regulating  u|)on  tb.e  slaiularJ  squadron,  and  halts 
'  it»50  5^ar(Is'from  the  reviewing  personage.  The  instant 
the  lijpe.is  motionless,  all  the  officers,  takirfg  their  .time 
■from  til e^olooel,  salute  with^ the  sabre.  This  advance 
of  tlie  reginxent  is  oiijilted  when  other  troops  are  in- 
cluded. 

When   there   are  two  or  nwre  regiments,  the  coluniu 
.    bein^  ia  motion,  the  regiments   will   take  60  paces  dis- 
tance one  from  another. 

The  brigadier  general  will  .place*himself  10  paces  i|i 
front  of  the  leading  cojonel,  his  staft^pfficers  on  his  left ; 
the  music  of  that  regiment  20  paces  in  front  of  th^brig- 
adier  general. 

The  colonels  do  not  leave  their  places  in  the  coliiDiD. 

Ihrm  and  course  <ff  Inspection.  • 

The  re^imeat  being  in  line,  the  colonel  pauses  the 
sqiiadrons'to  wheel  f6  the  right.  "   ^,- 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  17 

*  -  . 

Tho  colonel  seeing  the  squadrons  alignctl,  commands: 

1.  OlJicers  and^non-coinmissiomd  Gfficcra  to  the  frmit  of 
yoT.ir  squadrons.  2.  Maucii.  The  oflicers  t^iko.  places  jn 
one  rank,  12  paces,  and  tl>e  non-conMnissioncd  ofilcers 
in  one  rank,  six  paces  in  advance,  along  the  whole  front 
of  their  rcrpective  squadrons,  in  the  order  of  rank,  tlie^ 
highest  oixthe  right;  ^  the  trumpeters  at  tho'sanic  time 
take  post  on  the  alignment  of  the  squadron,  G  paces 
from  the  right,  and  the  fan'ier  and  saddler  oiie  paceoa 
ihejr  left,  .and  one  pace  apart. 

Seeing  the  last  order  in  a  train  of  execution, ,  the 
colonel  commands  :  I.  FieM  and  Staff  to  tlic  front.  2. 
Makcii.  ftlie- commissioned  officers  felius  designated  form 
themsel-vtjs  in  one  rank,  12  pa<:e3  in  front  of  tire  olBCcTs 
of  the  Isfc  squadrons,  in  tlK  following  brdcr,  bej^iuuing 
cm  the  right:  lieutenant-colonel,  nuijor,  adjutant,. qjuar- 
tevmaster,  sui'geon,  and  assistant  surgeon.  The  non- 
commissioned staff  iu  a  similar  mainneiV  C  paces  in  viyltv 
of  the  preceding  rank.  The  standard  bearer  will  take 
post  in  thc,ccutre  of  this  rank.  The  bflud  is  formed  iTi 
one  rank,  l2  paces  in  rear  of  the  column. 

The  colon-el  n^w  takes  pogt  on  the  right  qf  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel;  but  such  of  the  field  otiicers  ils  ma_y  be 
superior  in  rank  to  the  inspector  da  not  tivke  post  as 
above.  •» 

Tlie  inspection  commiaHces  in  front.  After  iu^pceting 
the  dress  and  general  appearance  of  the  field  a"fed''com- 
missiuned  staff,  the  inspector,  accompanied  by  these 
ofHcers,  passes  down  the  colutjan,  looking'lat  each  squad- 
ron in  front  and  rear,  w>ith  a  view  to  the  same  objects. 
He  afterwards,  in  a  like  manner,  passes  and  inspects 
the  arms^;  as  he  suceessivqly  approaches  each  squndron, 
^  its  captain  commands    • 

1.  Atlenfiou. 

2.  Inspection — Arms, 

Trhich  is  executed  as. prescribed,  No.  72. 

If,    then,    the   inspector   wishes'  to  make  a  particular 


i?  Basis  of  instruction. 

inspeetit)a  of  equipage,    ammunition,    <tc.,   the   coloael 

l^Aiteiition'. 

%  J^iou-co:mmis.'iio7ied  officers — ^To  your  posts. 

o.  PRBr!.A;iE  TO  DTS^JOUNT. 

-1.  prs^iouNT. 

At  the  third  eomTiiand.  Biiiiibera  one  and  three, 
itfrou^lioilt  the  squadrons,  ride  forv,rard  G  paces,  dress- 
ing by  the  ri^it;  the  trumpeters  moY-e  forward  wi-tli 
the  numbers  one'and  three,  and-  take  position  in 
frbat  ol"  tlie  farrier  and  saddler,  'v\'ho  stand  fast. 

The' regiment'  being  dismounted,  the  non-commissioned 
staff  wiiho«t  changing  position,  the  captains  coiumand: 
'i .IiigJit--D^t^^.  2.  Front.  The  ranks  in  front  and 
^fear-cvofullypreserve  the  iiiterytd  between  the  files, 

T%e  inspector' having  inspected  the  non-commissioned 
staff,  the"  captains,  as '  he  approaches  each  squadron, 
oommr.nd  :      \.  Atteoition.     2.   02')en — Boxes; 

As'the  inspection  of  each  squadron  is  completed,  the 
colonel  may  dismi.^s  it  from  the  parade;  two  platooiis 
vscorting'tlie  standard. 


I 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

•  ■  *  ■  .  . 

DUTIES  OF  MSTS*U0TORS. 

The  colonel  is  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  the 
regimont,/aud  he  shalj.hot  change,  im(5eir  any  pretext, 
the, dispositions  contained  in  thi;i  book. 
■  lie  will *be  present,  a§  often  as  Ids  dtlier  duties  per- 
mit, lit  tlfe  theoretical  and- pjractical  instructions,  aifd 
especially*  at  that  of  the  officers^assembled  together. 

T'he  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  are  especially 
cjpiarged  wi^tli  the  supervision,  of  the  instruction- of  their 
rpspecstive  wifig?.  .  * 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  19 

IndiTidual  instruction  being  the  Lasis  pi  tlie-insti-ue- 
tion  of  tcjuadronp,  'on  which  that  of  a  rouimcnt  dopends, 
and  the  first  principles  Itavijjg  t^!c  jA'reatcst  inlim^nc<! 
t:pon  this  indivicTtial  instnic'liou,  tlie  classes  ^f  recruit? 
should  be  watched  with  the  greatest  care. 

Tlie  instructors  place  tlieinsQlves  liabituiTTly  aWr.oJi  a 
distance  tlmt  they  can  sec  their  a\  hole  troop  at  a  glance, 
flii^td   rnake   themselves^  distinctly    Icaid    by  •^..  *  They 
leave   their   places  as  seldom  as   possible,    iwul   only  to  ^ 
make  the  con-ectious   which*  arc    indispensabre   i»    tli# 
position  of  thd  men    and   the    execution  .of  the    move- 
ment*. ■  J 
.    The}'   repeat,    in  a-few  eljear  and  precise, x^^ord^  Jlho 
explanations  whicli  have  not  been  well  und^r?tof)cU 

They' sliould  often  .join^  example  to  pr^c^ti^^,  skoukl 
keep  up  the  attention  of  the  mcii^i^y.an  q^jif^ihtcd  to^e, 
apd  pass  to  another  movement  as  Foon  as  Mijtt  "V^'h'ich 
they  command  has  been  executed  in  ii  saTisfaetorJ'  man- 
ner. They  should  not  bc'j.oo  exaeUng,  at  fir§t  as  to  pr^ 
cisio'n  and  unity.    «  .,.**■.       ^^  ■'     . 

The  instructor  should  soraetimes  qucstinli  the  mfin,  t^ 
tbst  their  attention  to  his  words';    and    wheji  at  fcst,  to 
satisfy  himself  that  the  lessof;  is  welHnitl^rstood!' 


APwTICLE   FOURTH. 
DIVISION,  ORDER,  A>?^D/PRO^RESSIO]S^   OF  IN- 

As  instruction  crtnnot'bc  establislied  on  a  s..»]id  basiE; 
without  joining  theory  to  practice,  there  is  iu  each  I'egi- 
menjL  a  theoretical  ingtructi^VQ/ independent  of  the  exer- 
cises^iu  the  field.  ,      • . »  *.    ^, 

.  The  colonel  assembles. .the  ofiicefs  once. a  week,  or 
oftener,  if  he  deem  it  neccssaiy,.  ?or  the  theory  of  tlx) 
different  parts  of  their  instruction.      * 

The   captains   assemble,  in  a  like  mannei',  their   t'eiv 


80  BASIS  OF  instrtction: 

gean-ts  iTud^cyr^^orals ,'  a  selcqljon^of  pi ivales  is  iucludcd. 

>  Inatrudion. 

.  Eacli  drill  la>ts  one  liour  aud  ton  minutes,  including 
Ihyj^rejjJ^s ;  those  should  not  excee'd  two  minutes  at  a 
flme.  ' 

TTie.  liorses  of  .the  trumpeters  should  not  be  excusjitl 
from  participating  iu  the  different  classes  of  instruction. 

All  the  hordes  must  be  exercised  at  least  three  times 
"a  Avcck. 

During  the  summer,  and  until  the  end  of  October,  the 
regiment  is  exercised  occasionally  in  the  details  of  the 
service  in  War.'  For  this  j^ftrj^ose  the  Qolonel  takes  the 
regiment  into  the  country,  in  oidev  to  accustom  it  to 
pa^^s  over  all  kinds  of  ground,  and  to  apply  the  evolu- 
tious  to  the  different  localities. 

On  tliese,  ain:!  on  other  occasions,  the  colonel  will 
practice  all  the  officers  of  tlicr regiment  in  judging  dis- 
tances^ j^  is  ft  point  of  mucB  impoi^ance  in  the  educa- 
ilfcion  of  a  cavalry  officxn*.  ' 

When  the  regihiejit  is  asscuibled,  the  colonel  should 
direct  lihe  superior  officers  to  command,  occasion  all  3%  in 
tl^.  different  evolurions,  in  order  to  judge  of  the  pi'ogress 
of  their  instruction. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 
Gil  AD  ATION  OF  INSTRUCTION.   , 

liccniits. 

.'^  •  ,i*        ■>» 

The  recruit  c.omm"fences  Ids  instructioii.,on  fobt.  vTh<^ 
first,  v/eck  after  hid  arrival  at  the  regiment  is  employed 
CKcluBiveTy  in  instructing  him  in  all  the  details  of  disci,- 
pline,  police,  and  interior  service,  agd  Jn  those  I'elating 
to  bis  dress  a^Vlthe  groomilig  (^f  hisiiorrc. 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  "  21 

He  is  taught  to  mount  witliout  saddle  on  both  sides 
of  tlie  Uoi^o. 

He  is  taught  tli.G  name  and  use  of  the  principal  parts 
of  the  anus  and  oquipnionts,  and  tlie  niannor  of  keeping 
them  clean  ;  the  manner  of  rolling  the  clordc,  of^i'olding 
the  effects,  and  of  placing  tliem  in  the  valise. 

These  different  instructions  are  given  .by  th?  corporal 
of  the  squad,  und,er  the  super-intendcnce  of  tlie  sergeant 
and  officer  of  the  platoon. 

At  the  end  of  tins  week,  the*^recj'uit  corameiiccs  clic 
first  lesson  on  foot ;  ho  continues -to  be  instritfeted  in  tjje 
aboVc  rnenti(;ned  dC-tails        "  ■      ^ 

The  recruits  are  driUed  on  foot  twice  a  day,  wlicii 
possible,  an  hour  each  time.  Their  instruction  on- horse- 
back is  conuncneed  at  the  same  time  with  tlie  pabre 
exercise. 

C\jrpqrals. 

The  corporals  should  be  capable  of  executing  ail  the 
lessons  mounted  and  dismounted,  and  should  be  quali- 
fied to  teach  the  school  of  iJic  trooper  dismounted,  and  at 
least  four  lessons  mounted. 

Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include,  in  addi- 
tion to  these  lessons,  all  the  details  relative  to  the  func- 
tions of  their  grade  in  the  interior  service,  botii  in  g;ar- 
rison  and  in  campaign. 

Sergeants. 

The  sergeants  should,  .be' capable  of  executing,  dis- 
mounted and  mounted,  all  that  is  prescribed  by  this 
book ;  and  should  be  able  to  teach  the  lessons  of  the 
school  of  the  trooper,  and  to  command  a  platoon  "in  the 
school  of  the  squadron  mounted. 

The  theoretical  instrnction  of  the  sergeants  should  iir- 
dud(^thc  basis  of  ?nstrnct4on,  the  school  of  the'  trooper,' 
the  school  of  the  platoon,  and  the  school  of  the  squad- 
ron; also,  the  regulations  for  the  interior  service  in  gar- 
rison and  in  campaign,  so  far  as  their- grade  is^^joncerned. 


22  DAjiS  OF  WSTKUCTipN. 

,  ,  Officers. 

^vor^'-b^cor  ■  liourd  be  at  'least-  alilc  to  cotnmand  ac- 
d5rJiiii;-.!<)  lys  i-ank. "  .Ifo  one  will  be  considered  fully  iu- 
vSlU'ucLediinloss  ho'ctn  also  explain  and  execute  all  that 
is  con'iain' d  in  .this  book. 

The  tifhory  pi  i\\(i.  officel^  should  include  this  book 
and  all  the  roii^ilnttions  which  j^rescvibc  tlu.ir  duties  In 
their  different  fositians,  either  in  peace  or  Avar. 

If  tiirt  faults  cojnuutted  on  diill  by  an  oflicer,  of  any 
vaqk  whatsoever,  atise  from  negligence  or  want  of  in- 
struotiofi,  the  coluiicl  of  the  fegimeut  shaJl  cause  him  to 
b^  itntiicsliatoly  r'-'pliwed.  •  -•  ■  '. 


ARTK3LE  3fKTH. 

INSiiiUUTIOK    TO  MUUIST    ^wiliiuLi    SADDLE, 
A'ND  fo  SADLLE. 

»   Planner  of   Vaulting. 

Seize  the  m«no  \ni\\  the  Mt  hand,  hold  the»l!eius  of 
tlie  snaflle  in' the  rii;ht  hand,  and  plticc  it<)n  tlve  with- 
ers, the  thumb  to  tiie  left,  the  ffngers  to  the  right;  raise 
yourself  by  a'spriii/>  on  tlie  two  wrists,  the  body  straight, 
pass  the  rightrleg  e„\tended  over  the  croup  of  the  horse, 
without  rouchiiig  liim,  and  seat' yourself  on  hjs  back. 

To  dismoimt,  pass  the  kft  rein  of  the  snaffle  into  the. 
rio^ht  Iffind';  place  Lhis  hand  on  the  withers  ;  seize  the 
mane  with  the  left  hand,  raise  joureelf  on  the  two 
wrists,  pass  the  right -leg  extended  over  the  croup  of 
the  horse,  without  touclii.ng  him,  bringing  the  legs  to- 
gether, the  body  straight,  and  come  to  the  ground  lightly 
on  the  tocf5,  bending  the  knoes  a  little. 


BAgIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  '23 

Manner  of  Rolling  the  Cloak. 

*Yhc  cloak  being  eniircly  unfolded,  the  sleeves  src  laul 
ilat  and  extended  parallebto  the  two  front  oda'cs  of  the 
cloak;,  each  one  is  then  turi\cd  up  and  foldcd'noar  the 
elbow,  so  as  to  give  a  length  of  3  feet  C>  inches  from  ono_ 
elbow  to  the  other,  the  middle  of  the  cloak  •remaining- 
uncovered.  The  cape  is  then  turned  down  dyer  t^^. 
sleeves,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  front' edges  iiQay  ^- 
aetly  cover  those  of  the  clonk."    '**  -        '      •*">    •     • 

Tlic  lower  extremity  of  the,clpak  is  turned  up  about 
10  inches;  the  skirts  "are*  ]i!:owfse  turned. toward^  each 
other,  so  that  thoy  ntaj'  to\ich  the  fold  of  the  vjleevee, 
and  tliafr,  being  folded  a  second  time  upoit  tlieyi'selves, 
they  may  give  to  the  cloak  the  form  of  a  rectangle  ;  the 
lowen*  extremity  of  ,the  cloak  is  then  turned  up  about  7 
inches,  and  it  is  rolled  as  tightly  as  possible,  com- 
mencing at  the  collar  and'pressiijg  the  knee  upon  it  a?5 
it  is  rolled,  to  hold  it.  The  part  of  the  cloak  wliieh  is- 
rolled  is  then  introduced  ijito  the  sort  of  pocket  formed 
by  the  part  which  was  tiirned  back. 

Manner  of  Saddling, 

Approach 'the  horse  on  the  leftside,  and  lay  the  blan- 
ket, folded  into  six  thicknesses,  on  his  back;  the  edges 
on  the  left  side. 

Seize  it,  then-,  with  the  left  hand  on  the  withers,  and 
with  the  right  on  the  loins  ;   slide  it  once  or  twice'  from 
front  to  reai:,  to  smooth  the  hair,  taking  .care  to  rais.e'ifc  ■ 
in  carrying  it  forward,  so  as  not  to  brush  .up  the    hau',' 

The  blanket  should  be  so  arranged  as  to  'pr©je'ct  one 
finger's  breadth  bej'dud  the  bars  in  rear. 

'Seize  the  saddle  at  the  puinmel  with  the  leftJmnd,  at 
the  cautle  Avith  the  right  hand,  and  place  it  geiitly  on 
the  horse's  back,  bringing  it  from  the  direction  of  his  ' 
croup,  in  order  not  to  frighten  him,  and  p1ace.it  a  little 
in  rear,  that  the  crupper  may  bo  put  on  without  draw- 
ing it  back. ,  Let  down  the  girth,  breaststrap,  and  crup- 
per ;•  step   behind  the  horse,  seize  the  tail  with  the  \fiit 


BASIS  OP  INSTRUCTION. 


liailcl,  aii'l  hvist  tlio  liair  around  tli9  doiSk  with,  the 
rieht,  v.-liich  llion  seizes  the  (?vui>pcr  nnd  passes  the  tail 
throu^lh it,  taking  care  that  none  of  the  hah*  remaijft 
UDilcrlt,  NVlilcU  woidd  Inirt  tht;  ho:  so.  * 
,  Stop  t<j*tho-. right  side  otf  the  norse,  and,  seizing  the 
saddle  at  tlvc  caTiUc  ^'ith  llic  left  hand,. and  atrthc  p'onv- 
r.K'^^Yit•h  Die  right  hand,  I'aiseit  and  carry  itiorwaVd, 
witraouf'moving  the  blanket;  see,  at  the  same  time,  that 
th^re  are  no  straps  ca.u^ht  under  the  saddle  ;  place  the 
..girth  flat,  and  pass  it-tlft-ough  the  loop  of  the  false  mar- 
tingale; return  to  the  Igf^ide  bj  the  liTea.d  of  the  horse  ; 
run  \h6  lefo  hand  between  tjie  vrithers  and  the  blanket; 
raise  the  l)lanket  up  a  little,  so  that  it  will  not  conipresa 
the  witUers ;  inickla  the  girtli  and  the  l)rcaststra'p. 


ARTICLE  SEVENTH. 

OF  TRAINING  HORSES  WHICH  HAVE  BEEN  AL- 
•  "  •     READY  KIDDE'N. . 

"whenever  a  horse  ih-it's  or  is  restive  without  an  ap- 
parent cause,  the  saddlery  shouM  be  carefully  examined 
in  ord'^*to  se'c  if  any  part  hurts  or"  tickles" him.  Mere 
forCGj  and  \vant  of  skill  jxnd  coolness,  tend  .to  confirm 
^Ice  and'  bad  habitfi.  Resistance  in  horses  is  often  a 
work  of  vig«'>r,  and  proceeds  from  high  Bpirits ;  purdah 
ment  >vould  turn  it  into  vice.  * 

Rearing  is  a  bad  and  dangerous  habit;  while  tha 
hoi'sc  is  tip,-tjici  rider  niU^t  yield  the  Hand,  iand"  at  the 
lime  ho  is  coming  down  must  vigorously  determine 
him  forward';  if  Ihig  is  done  at  any  other  time,  it  may 
add  a  eprfng  to  his ,  rearing,  .  and  make  him  come  over. 
If  this  fail,  he  must  be  whipped  \)y  a  person  from 
behind. 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  35 

Kicking  can  be  prevented  by  lidldiiig  the  liorse's 
iiead  well  up  and  closing  the  legS: — if  ncccssar}',  forcing 
hlra*  forward.  ,  • 

jSf.artivcf' somot'imes  proceeds  from  defect  oif  eight; 
whi«li,  if  only  in  one  eye,  cao'ensilj'  be  ascertained.  If 
from  fearj  the  liorse  must  be  taken  up  to  the  object  with 
great  patience  and  gentleness,  and  be  allowed  to  toueh 
it  with  his  lip.  In  no  case  should  a  hor&c  he  punished  for 
timidity.  The  dread  of  chastisement  will  increase  bj.9 
ftjar  of  the  object.  But  if  a  horse  persistently  turns 
back,  he  must  be  punished  ;  always,. however,  while  his 
head  is  away  from  the  object.  Finding  that  he  o^nly  suf- 
fers while  he  is  turned  back,  and  his  head  is  away,  he 
will  desist.  .    •     . 

If  a  horse  turns-against  a  fence,-  and  leans  to  it,  t^irn 
his  head  <o  it,  and- not  from  it. 


PREPARATORY  LESSON. 

To  make  a  horse  tractah'le  and  steady  at  -Moimtinr/. 

A  first  act  of  subjection,  v/hich  may  appear  of  little 
importance,  will  prove  of  great  service ;  it  makes  the 
hor^e  quiet,  gives  him  confidence,  and  the  man  such 
ascendancy  that  the  hor?c  from  the  outset  is  inclined  to 
yield  to  the  means  employed  to  bring  him  under  con- 
trol. Two  lessons  of  half  an  hour  \till  Buflice  to  exe- 
cute this.  .      . 

Go  up  to  the  horse,  pat  .him  on  the  neck,  and  speak 
to  him  ;  then  taking  the  bit  reins  at  a  few  inches  from 
the  rings  with  the  left  hand,  place  yourself -so  as'to 
offer,  as  much  resistance  as  possible  to  the  horse  when 
he  tries  to  break  away  ;  take  the  whip  in  the  full  of  the 
right  hand,  with  the  point  down,  raise  it  quietly  and 
tap  the  horse  en  the  breast ;  on  this  he  will  naturally 
try  to  escape  from  the   annoyance,   and   back  to  avoid 


U  ^      BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

the  whip;  folftTw  ihe  horso/pulling  at  the  8«ine  time 
against  him,  but  without  discontinaing  the. whip  iiiithe 
same  quiet  way,  sliowiiig  no  signs  of  anger  or  any  symp- 
toms of  yielding.  The  horse,  soon  tired  of  trying  in^l- 
fectually  to  avoid  the  inrtiction  by  jnillingback,  will  move 
towards  yoii;  you  amisl  then  stop  aud  make  niuoli  of 
him.  Tliis  i-e|)eated  once  or, twice  will  prove  wonder- 
fully successful,  'even,  in  the  first  lesson.  Tlio  horse, 
having4ound,  out  how  to  avoid  the  punishmcnl,  will  not 
wait  for  the  application  of  the  whip,  but  anticipate  it, 
by  moving  up  at  the  slightest  gesture;  this  wiilj!)e  of  ' 
great  afe6isLn.nce  in  the  subsequent  bending  le-sons,  as 
also  of 'great  use  in  mounting  and  dismounting,,  atid 
inuch  acccU'rate  the  training  of  the  horse. 

To  bend  or  supple  the  IJoa'sc^s  neclc.. 

The  balance  of  the  horse's  body  and  his  lightness  in 
han^  depend  on  the  proper- carriage  of  the  head  and 
neck,  and  to  there  two  points  attention  must  fii^t,  and 
chielly,  be  directed.  ■  They  should  always  precede  and 
prepare  the  horse  b}' .their  attitude  for  every  movement 
about  to  be  executed ;  and  the  rider  has  little  power 
over  the  animal  until  he  has  rendered  both  these  points 
susceptildc  of  every  impulse  communicated  by  him.' 

The  horses,  with  the  curb  bridle  on,  are  fornjcd  in 
line,  at  two  paces  apart,  their  riders  standing  at  their 
Jieads,  preparatory  to  the  first  bending  lesson  with 
the  bit.  -  * 

A  young  horse  generally  attempts  to  resist  the  bit, 
either  by  bending  his  neck  to  a  side,  setting  his  jaw 
against  it,  carrying  his  nose  high  up,  or  low  down.  We 
must  therefore 'render  him  manageable  by  teach.ing  him 
to  bring  his  head  to  position,  and  arching  his  neck  on 
the  reins  being  felt.  And  it  will  bo  found  in  a  short 
time  that  horses  that  required  the  whole  strength  of  a 
man's  arm  to  make  them  obey  the  action  of  the  bit  will 
bend  to  the  slightest  feeling  of  the  reins;  for,  finding 
that  they  cannot  resist  the  power  of  the  bit,  used  in  the, 
manner  hereafter  shown,  their  instinct  ^ill  teach  them 


BASTS  0F  INSTRUCTION.  27 

to  ob^}'',  and    habit  accustom-  them   to   the  impnlre  rc- 
eeiv'6(l  I'rom  the  riclor. 

As  a' general,  rule,  iii  all  the  ensuing  ben dfng  lessons, 
when  a'horse  cha'mps  the  bit,  it  is  a  sign  tliat  he  no 
longer  resists  the  action  of  the- hind;  tlien  make  much 
of  him,  and  allow  hitn  to  resume  his  natural  pot^ition.  It 
is  of  the  utmost  importance  tluxt  the  horse  never  be 
allowed  to  take  the  initiative.  Always  oppose  the  raising 
j3f  thejiorse's  head — always  lower  your  jiands  and  bring 
it  down. «       •  • 

See  ■.that  the  bit  is  properly  placed  in  the  horde's 
mouth,  and  the  curb-chain  so  that  you  can  pass  3'our 
finger  under  it,  place  yourself  on  the  near  side,  close  to 
the'  horse's  neck  and  facing  his  head,  the  feet  a  little 
apari  to  give  you  more  power. 

Takotiio  off  bit  rein  in  the '<'ull  of  the  right  hand, 
close  up,  with  the  ring  of  the  bit  between  the  foreringer 
and  thumb  ;  the  near  rein  in  the  same  way  with  the 
left  hand,  thumb  nails  toward  each  other,  and'the  little 
fingero  outwards;  bring  the  right  hand  towards  the 
body,  extending  the  left  one  from  j'ou  at  the  same  time, 
so  as  to,  turn  tlic  horse's  head  to  the  right.  The  strength 
employed  must  be  gradual,  and  proportioned  to  the 
resistance  met  with,  taking  care  at  iirst  not  to  bring  the 
horse's  nose  too  much  in,  or  too  close  to  his  chest,  which 
would  make  the  bend  very  difficult ;  if  the  horse  backs,, 
continue  the'  pressure  until  he,  finding  it  impossible  to 
escape  from  the  restraint  imposed  upon  him  by  the  bit 
held*  thus  crossways  in  his  mouth,  stands  still  and  yields 
to  it. 

When  the  bend  is  complete,  the  horse  will  hold  his 
head  there  without  any  restraint,  and  champ  the  bit; 
then  make  much  of  him,  and  allow  him  to  resume  gentiv 
his  natural  position,  but  not  to  throw  his  head  round 
hurriedly.  '  Practice  this  in  the  same  manner  to  the  left. 

This  lesson  not  only  teaches  the  horse  to  follow  the 
indication  of  the  rein  to  both  hands,  but  also  to  yield 
his  under  jaw  to  Jhe  pressure  of  the  bit,  the  advantage. 


28  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

of  which  will  soou  become  apparent.    And  now,  before 
inoiiriting,  prepare  the  horses  io  rein  in. 

For  tills  purpose  cross' the  snalHe  reins  lehirid  the 
horse's  jiw,  talcing  the  near  rein  in  the  right  hand,  and 
tlie  off  rein  in  the  left;  at  about  six  inches  from  the  ring, 
and  dravr  tiiem  across  each  other  till  the  horse  giyee 
way  to  the  pressure  and  "  reins  in."  Do  not  foi-get  to 
oppose  the  raising  of  the  horse's  head  by  lowering  your 
hands  and^ bringing  it  down  again.  When  the^hprse. 
giv.eaway  to  the  cross  pressure  of  the.snaiile,  ease  your  ^ 
hand  and  make  much  of  hirn.  - 

The  insti-uctor  now  orders  the  men  to  mount,  and 
then  to  bend  tlie  horses'  lieads  to  the  right  nnd  left. 
The  reins  being  properly  adjusted  in  the  left  hand  to 
bend  the  horse's  head  to  the  rU/ht,  seize  the  right  rein 
with  the  right  liand  well  down,  so  as  to  have  the  r-eine 
short  on  the  off  side.  Thcji  draw  tliem  o^uietly  towards 
you  till  you  get  the  •  horse's  head  completely  round  to 
the  right,  in  the  same  position  as  in  the  bend  dis- 
mounted. When  the  horse  champs  the  bit  mahe  much 
of  him,  and  allow  him  to  resume  his  natuVal  position. 

When  bending  the  horse's  head  to  the  left,  pass  the 
right  hand  over  the  left  one,  seize  the  left  rein  and  draw 
the  horse's  head  gently  to  the  left. 

Next  teach  the  horse  to  rein  up,  arch  his  neck,  bring 
his  nose  into  proper  position,  and  there  remain  steady 
imtil  the  rider  loosens  the -reins.  At  the  word,  rein  m 
your  liorses,  lower. the  bridle  hand  as  much  as. possible, 
and  turn  it  so  that  the  back  shall  be  uppermost ;  with 
the  right  hand — nails  down — take  hold  of  the  curb  reins 
close  to  the 'left,  and  shorten  them  by  degrees,  drawing 
them  through  the  left,  which  closes  on  the  reins  each 
time  they  are  shortened. 

When  the  horse  resists  much,  and  holds  his  nose  up, 
keep  the  reins  steady;  do -not  shorten  them,  npr  lengthen 
tliem  ;  close  the  legs  to  prevent  the  horse  from  backing; 
he  will  remain  perhaps  a  minute,  or  more,  with  his  nose 
up,  and  his  jaw  set  against  the  bit,  but  will  then  yield, 
bring  his  nose  in  and  champ  the  bit;  n>ake  much  of  hioi 


/  .  BASIS  OF  INSliRUCTION.  2d 

•v,'itb  the  right  hand,  loosen  Ihe  reins,  and,  after  a  few 
seconds,  rein  him  in  again. 

The  Iiorse  will  thus  learn  to  bring  his  head  into  posi- 
tion whenever  you  feel  the  reins,  and  this  practice  gives 
him  confidence;  for  most  young  horses  are  afraid  of  the 
bit,  and  if  frightened  at  first  by  any  sudden  jerk  otthe 
reins  will  not  after  go  kindly  "  up  to  the  hand,"  or  let 
you  have  that  decree  of  bearing  which  is  requisite  not 
only  to  the  rider,  as  it  forewarn*  him  of  what  the  horse 
is  going  to  do,  and  whether  he  requires  more  collecting 
(v.-luch  he  does,  if  the  bearing  on  the  hajid  is  too  heavy;) 
or  more  freedom,  (.which  is  requisite  if  the  horse  rises 
too  much  in  his  action,)  but  is  also  necessary  to  induce 
the  horse  to  work  boldly  and  well. 

Some  horses  fire  So  shaped  that  they  overdo  the  rclu- 
i?ig  in,  and  rest  the  lojver  jaw  against  the  breast ;  to 
counteract  this,  raise  his  head,  by  the  use  of  the  snaffle, 
whilst  the  leg  drives  him  forwai'd  to  the  hand. 

Some  horses  will  not  work  up  to  the  bit;  that  is,  will 
not  bear  on  it  at  all.  Such  a  horse  Is  unfit  for  cavalry 
duty;  his  paces  can  never  be  equal  and  steady  ;  and  in 
;i  melee  or  single  combat  he  could  turn  to  either  side,  or 
stop,  and  go  about,  before  his  rider  oould  prevent  ^im. 

Mow  to -teach  a  Jtorse  to  obey  the  pressure 'of  the  lea. 

On  the  word  of  command,  circle  to  the  right  on  ili^ 
fore  hand,  the  horse's  head  remains  straight  to  the  front; 
apply  the  left  leg  well-  behind  the  girth  very  quietly, 
and  without  touching  with  the  spur ;  press  against  him 
until  he  takes  a  step  to  the  right  with  his  hind  Icts  • 
tuke  the  leg  from  him,  and  make  much  of  him  ;  then  re- 
peat the  same,  and  get  another  step  from  him,  and  eo 
on  until  he  has  turned  about,  always  pausing  at  the  half 
turn.  The  horse's  fore  legs  remain  steady,  and  his  hind 
quarters  circle  round  his  fore.  At  first  the  men  may,  if 
necessary,  assist  themselves  by  feeling  the  rein  on  tho 
same  side,  and  touching  the  horse  very  lightly  with  the 
whip  close  to  where  the  leg  is  applied.  The  s'pur  may 
also  be  used  if  ..necessary,  with  a  sudden  and,Bomew"HM 


mo  BASIS  OP  INSTRUCTION. 

decided  thrust ;  but  not  Treqxiently,  and  never  with  a 
steady  pressure,  for,  instead  of  yielding  to  it,  the  horse 
Tfill  soon  begin  to  press  against  it. 

Circle  to  flie  left  on  the  fore  hand  on  the  same  princi- 
ple. It  raust  be  an  invariable  rule  never  to  hurry  a 
hor^e  in  his  bending  lessons. 

By  degrees,  as  the  horse  improves  in  this  Jesson  and 
steps  freely  from  the  pressure  of  the  leg,  let  the  rider,  at 
the  word,  circle  to  the  right  on  the  fore  hand,  pass  the 
right  hand  down,  shortening  the  off  rein,  and  bend  the 
horse's  head  a  little  to  the  right,  so  that  he  may  see  his 
hind  quarters  coming  round  ;  apply  the  left  leg  as  usual ; 
should  the  horse  not  answer  the  pressure,  use  the  reins 
on  the  same  side  with  the  leg,  and  resume  the  opposite 
rein  the  moment  the  horse  yields. 

All  this  must  be  done  gradually,  for  if  you  bend  the 
horee's  head'  round  as  far  as  it  can  go,  and  attempt  thus 
to  circle  him  the  first  time,  he  will  resist,  finding  it  too 
difficult;  but  if  done  by  degrees,  he  will  soon  come  to  it. 

The  leg  opposite  the  one  which  presses  the  hind  quar- 
ters to  circle  round  the  fore  must  be  kept  close  to  th.e 
horae,  to  assist  in  keeping  him  in  his  place,  by  commu- 
nicating a  forward  impulse,  whilst  the  other  leg  com- 
municates the  impulse,  which  makes  the  hors§  step  from 
right  to  left,  or  left  to  right ;  and  in  order  that  the  pres- 
sure of  the  one  shall  not  counteract  the  effect,  of  the 
other,  the  leg  applied  to  make  the  horse  step  to  either 
hand  should  be  further  behind-  the  girth  than  the  leg 
used  to  keep  him  up  to  hand.  Both  legs  should  be  close 
to  the  horse  at  all  times,  the  pressure  on  either  side  be- 
ing increased  as  occasion  requires. 

At  first  dismounted  men  are  useful  with  the  unsteady 
horses,  by  taking  hold  of  the  curb  reins  on  the  apposite 
side  to  that  which  the  horse  is  to  step  to,  and  thus 
assisting  the  rider,  who  then  only  uses  the  snaffle  ;  but 
all  extraneous  assistance  should  be  as  much  as  possible 
avoided. 

The  instructor  now  exercises  the  hoi*ses  in  the  riding 
house,  trotting  out  to  both  hands.    The  bits  should  not 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.'  81 

be  used  much  the  first  few  days;-  but  the  horses  brought 
by  degrees  to  bear  slighthi  on  it.  Ride  them  in  the  5r« 
cles  ;  trot  tliem  at  a  collected  pace  ;  walk  and  trot  again  ; 
walk,  halt,  and  make  the  men  bend  their  horses  to  the 
hand  they  are  working  to. 

Explain  to  the  men  that  the  horse's  head  and  neck 
must  always  be  bent  the  way  he  is  to  go,  and  prepare 
the  animal  by  their  attitude  for  all  turns,  circles,  &c. ;  and 
whenever  they  feel  tlie  curb  reins,  and  the  horse  does  not 
yield  to  them,  let  them  keep  the  bridle  hand  steady,  and 
play  with  the  snaffle  rein  until  the  horse  champs  the  bit. 
The  sufttiie  should  be  continually  used  to  prevent  the 
liorse  from  leaning  on  the  hand. 

Go  through  the  bending  lessons  on  foot  and  raounted,- 
"aud  then  file  home. 

No  lessen  with  young  horses  should  exceed  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour. 

CIRCLING  ON  THE  HAUNCHES. 

A  few  minutes  being  devoted  to  the  dismoiiuted  bend- 
ing lessons,  mount  and  begin  by  reining  the  horses  in, 
bending  them,  and^ircling  thorn  to  the  right  and  left  on 
the  fore  liaud  ;  this  being  done  once  or  twice,  proceed 
to  the  circling  on  the  haunches. 

By  circling  the  horse  on  the  fore  hand  we  have  taught 
him,  on  applying  the  leg,  to  move  hie  haunches  to  either 
hand  ;  and,  as  he  has  thus  learnt  to  obey  the  leg,  we  can, 
bj'  making  use  of  it,  prevent  him  from  moving  hi^  hind 
legs  to  the  right  or  left ;  therefore  he  will  now  bo 
taught  to  circle  on  them,  and  in  a  few  lessons  he  will  be 
led  to  go  completely  round  on  his  haunches,  and  thus  in 
time  perform  the  pirouette — a  very  important  accom- 
plishment for  the  cavalry  soldier;  for  when  engaged, 
sword  in  hand,  with  an  enemy,  he  can  turn  his  horse, 
right  and  left,  and  about,  in  an  instant,  and  thus  gain 
the  advantage  over  his  antagonist.  In  a  contest  on 
hoMcback,  it  is  not  the  strongest,  but  the  most  skillful 
rider  who  is  likel^bto  be  victorious. 


32  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

At  the  command,  On  the  haunches,  right  aJow^,"  bend- 
the  horse's  head  a  little  to  fhc  right  with  the  bit,  pass  the 
right  hand  over,  and  take  hold  the  near  snaffle  rein  (not 
only  as  an  assistance  to  the  horse,  but  to  make  th^i  men 
sensible  of  the  necessity  of  iising  the  outward  rein  in 
these  movements;  when  the  horse  is  broken  in  it  will  bo 
sufficient  to  carr}'  the  bridle  hand  to  the  side  you  wish 
to  turn  to),  apply  the  left  leg  behind  the  girth  to -keep 
the  haunches  steady ;  at  the  word  March,  make  the 
horse  step  to  the  right  with  his  fore  feet,  turning  on  his 
hind  feet,  by  feeling  the  left  snaffle  rein,  bringing  both 
hands  a  little  to  the  right  at  the  same  time,  and  apply- 
ing the  left  leg,  while  keeping  the  horse  up  to  the  band 
.with  the  right  leg. 

At  first  the  horse  must  be  halted  and  inade  niuch  oi" 
three  or  four  times  during  each  turn,  andifliishaunchcsare 
thrown'out,  they  must  be  brought  back  again  by  apply- 
ing the  lefx  leg ;  and  thus  gradually  led  on,  the  horse 
will  learn  to  go  a' lOut  to  both  hands  on  his' haunches, 
v\'ithout  touching  the  ground  with  his  forefeet. 

Go  through  the  trotting  lesson,  then  form  up  and  re- 
peat the  bending  lessons  on  foot  and  mounted. 

REINING  BACK 

In  reining  back,  the  hors<i  must  be  \vell  in  hand  and 
well  balanced  ;  he,  can  then  make  an  equal  use  of  all 
four  legs  and  raise  them  equally  from  the  ground.  Be- 
fore reining  back  the  horse  should  be  square  to  the  front, . 
his  head  home,  and  light  in  hand  ;  then  apply  both  legs, 
retaining  a  steady  feel  of  both  reins  to  make  the  horse 
lift  one  of  his  hind  legs.  It  is  at  this  moment  that  a 
double  feeling  of  Loth  reins  will  oblige  him  to  recover 
his  balance  by  stepping  backwards.  Place  him  straight 
to  the  front 'by  bringing  his  haunches  to  the  right  or  . 
left  as  may  be  required ;  then  give  him  his  head,  and 
make  much  of  him. 

At  first  a  few  steps  backward  is  all  that  should  be  re- 
quired of  a  horse;  if  he  bring  his  ^ind  legs  too  much 


BASIS- OF  INSTRUCTION.  88 

uiiJer  him,  ease  the  hand  and  apply  both  lege  to  maHe 
hini' regain  his  balance  forward;  and  for  this  reason 
always  use  the  legs  first,  and  then  feel  the  reins  ;  because 
if  you  feel  the  reins,  l^rst,  tlie  horse  throws  his  weight 
back;  and  the  more  weight  he  throws  on  his  hind  legs, 
the  less  able  he  is  to  lift  tliera,  which  is  a  necessary  pre- 
liminary to  stepping  back.  ,  * 

Tlie  horse  should  never  be  allowed  to  hurry,  or  run 
back  out  of  hand,  or  to  diverge  from  the  straight  line. 

The  squad  must  be  frequently  halted  during  the  walk- 
ing, trotting  and  bending  lessons,  to  practice  the  reining 
back;  and  independently  of  the  dressing,  until  all  the 
horfies  rein  back  welL 

Attention  must  now  be  directed  to  making  the  men 
kee^  their  horses  v/ell  up  to  the  bit,  and  putting  them 
together  with  the  use  of  the  hand  and.  leg  ;  to  see  that  in 
all  turns,  circles,  &c.,  the  men  bend  their  horses'  heads^ 
and  necks  in  the  new  direction  before  leaving  the  side  of  * 
the  horse.  Endeavor  to  make  them  perfect  in  their 
bending  and  trotting  lessons;  practice  the  going  abovi 
on  the  haunches  by  frequently  hailing  at  the  side,  and 
giving  the  word,  On  the  haunches  about,  march. 

THE  HORSE'S  PACES. 

Walk,  7}'of,  and  Canter. 

,  Before  moving  foi-^vard  the  horse  should  be  h'ght  in 
hand,  the  head  brought  home  (not  with  the  nose  stuck 
out),  the  neck  arched,  and  he  should  stand  evenly  on 
both  hind  legs. 

Close  the  legs  and  communicate  a  sufficient  impulse  to 
carry  him  forward  without  giving  the  haiid  ;  for  if  you 
do,  the  head  <vid  neck  may  relapse  into  a  position  which    , 
will  defy  the  control  of  the  hand. 

The  rider  should  always  have  a  light  feeling  of  the 
reins;  and  when  the  horse  bears  hard  on  the  bit,  keep 
the  hand  steady,  use  both  leg^,  which,  by  bringing  hia, 
haunches  under  him,  will  oblige  the  horse  to  take  his 
weight  off  your  hand. 


34  BASIS  OP  INSTRUCTION. 

•It  is  necessary,  in  order  to  make  the  liorse  handy,"^ 
exercise  bim  at  trotting  out ;  but  it  is  not  eno\-gb  that 
he  should  trot  fast;  the  quickuess  of  the  pace  should  not 
detract  from  bis  lightness  in  hai^d,  or  tlie  case  witb 
which  he  should  be  capable  of  answering  all  indications 
of  the  hand  and  leg. 

The  hand  must  be  constantly  at  work  to  retain  the 
head  and.  neck  in  their  proper  position  without  counter- 
acting the  forward  impulse  communicated  by  the  leg; 
thus  the  horse  will  acquire  regularity  of  pace,  increased 
speed,  and  that  safety  which  is  natural  to  a  horse  well 
balanced  and  light  in  hand. 

The  cantor  is  a  repetition  of  bound;?,  during  which  the 
fore  hand  risea  first,  and  higher  than  the  hind  quartern. 

The  horse  being  properly  placed,  light  in  hand'  and 
well  balanced,  throw  his  weight  from  the  fore  hand 
4oward8  the  haunches,  (by  increasing  the  pressure  of  the 
lege  and  restraining  him  with  the  reins)  and,  according 
to  the  band  you  wish  to  strike  off  to,  throw  the  weight 
of  the  horse  to  the  opposite  side  ;  that  is,  if  he  is  to  lead 
off  with  the  off  fore  followed  by  the  off  hind,  (or  canter 
to  the  right)  throw  the  weight  to  his  near  side.  This  is 
done  by  pulling  both  reins  equally  to  the  left  and  closing 
the  right  leg  ;  the  horse's  head  remaining  placed  to  the 
right,  and  the  left  leg  preventing  him  from  throwing  out 
his  haunches.  The  horse's  off  legs  are  thus  at  liberty, 
and  the  forward  impulse  obliges  him  to  use  them ;  he 
could  not  do  otherwise  without  difficulty. 
•  Cantering  to  the  right,  if  the  left  fore  leg  leads,  the 
horse  canters  false.  To  rectify  this,  feel  both  reins  to  the 
left,  in  or4er  to  bring  hia  weight  towards  that  side — the 
horse's  head  reTnaining  bent  to  the  right — and  close  firmly 
the  left  leg,  to  bring  his  haunchefe  in  again. 

Teach  the  horse  to  strike  off  on  the  circle  first,  then  on 
the  straight  line.     After  that,  try  him  at  changing  leg. 

At  this  stage,  when  circling  on  the  forehand,  stop  the 

horse   with  the  inward  leg  and  outward  rein  at  each 

'step ;  make  a  pause,  feel  both  reins,  close  both  legs,  and 

prcBB  him  up  to  the  hand  J   ease  the   rein  and  leg,  t-ake 


BASIS  or  INSTRUCTION.  85 

another  step  withltic  liaunclies,  stop  liini'  again,  "rein 
him  in,"  and  close  your.  legs. .  This  is  very  useful ;  it 
prevents  the  horse  fropa  getting  into  a  habit  of  running  . 
round  v.-ith  his  haunches  ;  it  makes  him  obedient,  as  it 
teaches  him  not  to  yield  to  habit,  but  to  trust  to  the 
rider's  liand  and  leg  alone  for  guidance ;  andyi7  accustoms 
hyn  to  collect  himself  at  all  times,  ajd  thus  he  is  always 
ready.     It  is  very  important. 

Before  moving  off  the  ground  give  the  word,  Hein  hi 
your  horses  ;  caution  the  men  to  close  their  legs  to  their, 
horses'  sides,  and  to  bring  the  spurs  cIqso,  without  touch- 
ing them.  Give  the  word,  Spur;  the  left  hand  is  held 
st<mdily  down,  and  the  spur  applied  on  both  sides,  very 
gently  at  first ;  the  horse  should,  not  move  from  his  ground, 
but  merely  arch  his  neck.  This  must  be  repeated  two  or 
three  times,  always  quieting  the  horse  after  the  spur 
has  been  given. 

■Repeat  this  at  intervals. 

Tl\xQ  reining  &ac^•  is  to  be  practiced  often.  Be  careful 
that  the  men  apply  the  legs  first,' and  then  feel  the  reins, 
to  make  the  horses  step  back.  See  that  they  sit  upright 
in  theii-  saddles  ;  do  not  hurry,  and  be  satisfied  with  one 
step  at  .a  time. 

Demi-pirouette. 

Halt  the  squad,  riding  in  file,  on  the  side  of  the  riding 
house,  and  give  the  command.  On  the  haunches,  about ; 
.at  this  caution  the  rider  must  throw_  the  horse's  weight 
from  the  forehand  to  the  haunches,  by  closing  the  legs 
•  and  restraining  him  with  the'  reins  ;  at  the  command 
MAEcn,  given  almost  iqimcdiately,  he  must  carry  the 
reins  decidedly  to  the  side  to  which  the  turn  is .  to  be 
made,  and  close  firmly  the  opposite  leg,  to  prevent  the 
horse  from  throwing  around  his  haunches,  and-force  him- 
to  turn  on  his  hind  legs.  When  the  aboiit  is  completed, 
the  horses  should  be  squared  and  made  much  .of  before 
they  are  put  about  again. 

Canter.on  the  circle  to  both,  hands,  striking  off  from 


86  •  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

>i  wftlk,   and   froquently  bring  tbomto  n  v.-alk  without- 
allowing  thoni  to  fftll  fust  into  n  trot. 

Thcso  lesions  -will  require  at  Ief\st  tbirtj'.daj's,  witb  ai- 
len.=t  one  lcs.^OD'a  (lay. 

^  ^fanurr  of  acnisiomlv^  the  Horse  to  Leap. 

The  (Jitcli  is  Icaj.vTl  Lcfurc  thf  ]>;ir.  Thi'  hor.  -  ;.:_ 
lo«]  at  first  with  a  Eoi'sc  accustomed  to  the  exercise  in 
front,  Tlic  -enaffle  must  be  u?e<:l.  If  necessary,  the  hoi-sc 
must  bo  urgGd  by  a  wliip  from  behind.  A  low  fence  is 
preferable  to  the  bar ;  and  the  horse  should  not  be 
leaped  often  back  and  forward  over  the  same  thiftg«or 
at  the  same  place. 


Td  accxtatom  Horses  to  Military  Noises  and  Fir'n 


■>■/. 


The  horse,  broken  to  obedience  to  the  hand  and  lege, 
can  be  brought  to  face  most  things  with  little  trouble. 
Encouraged  gradually  to  approach  anything  which  he 
fears,  as  a  drum  being  beaten,  until  he  feels  it  with  his 
lip,  he  will  then  cease  to  be  alarmed.  Tho  field  music 
should  be  practised  at  the  exercise  grounds  or  riding 
house. 

A-few  trained. horses  are  mi.xod  -nith  the  new  ones, 
and  towards  the  close  of  the  less'on  .separated  a  litUOj- 
and  the  troopers  who  ride  tlnin  fire  thcir.pistoJs,  the 
riding  being  continued  without  change.'  .  "*' 

If  the  horses  become  much  cxcitod,  discontinue  the 
firing  until  they  become  calm. 

In  firing  from  tho  hox'seV  back,  the  pistol  should  at 
first  be  held  vertically. 

Especial  care  should  be  taken  not  to  alter  the  feel  of 
the  horse's  mouth  when  tiring,  or  suddenly  to  close  the. 
legs;  the  rider  being  cool  and  quiet,  the  horse  will'soou 
follow  the  exam] lie.  .      .    • 

In  all  .lessons,  if  one  or  more  horr;ca'at*o  so  restless  or 
unmanageable  as  to  excite  and  throw  tho  others  into 
•coufu.':ion,  they  should  bo  .sent  off  and  sop.'^.rately  dealt 


BASIS  OP  INSTKUCTION.  8T 

Avith;  they  require  more  j)ains,  and  much  caressing  nnd 
other  encouragement.' 

When  the  Iiorses  are  accustomed  to  the  firing,  tliey 
are  formed  at  the  end  of  the  riding  ground  and  marched 
abreast  slowl}'  toward  a  party  of  dismounted  men 
placed  at  the  other  end  ;  these  fire  several  volleys,  until 
the  horses  are  within  forty  or  fifty  j'ards,  when  the 
.  firing  ceases ;  tlic  hoi-ses  are  ridden  steadily  on  until 
thej'  reach  the  men;  they  are  then  stopped  and  caressed. 

Young  horses  are  in  like  manner  accustomed  to  the 
manual  of  arms,  waving  of  flags,  music, 'Ac. 

Practice  of  Paces  for  Manceuvrc. 

The  Himount  horses  must  now  be  carefully  practised, 
as  all  the  regimeBtal  hoi'sea  must  be,  at  the  paces  of 
ruanfeuvre. 

Nothing  can  be  more  important  to  the  regularity  and 
order,  and  often  the  success,  of  large  bodies  of  cavahy, 
than  uniformity  in  the  gaits.  The  walk  should  be  at 
the  rate  of  three  and  three-fourths  miles  an  hour,  the 
trot  seven  and  a  half  miles  an  hour,  and  the  gallop  ten 
miles  an  hour.  To  confirm  the  horses  in  these  uniform 
rates,  measure  off  a  half  mile  and  practice  the  horses  to 
walk  it  in  eight  minutes,  trot  it  in  four  minutes,  and 
gallop  it  in  three  minutes. 

ARTICiiE  eighth; 

DEFINITIONS  AND  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

A  Rank  is  composed  of  men  abreast  of  each  other. 
A  FiLB  is  a  man  in  rank;  or  two  or  more  men,  one  bo- 
hind  another  in  ranks. 

Feoxt  is  the  direction  perpendicular  to  the  alignment 
of  a  boJy  of  troops  and  btfore  it,  either  in  coVamn  or 
in  line. 

CisNTRK  is  the  middle  of  .siua  a  bod^ . 


iJ3  ■  BASIS  -OF  INSTRUCTION, 

Wings  are  the  two  grand  divisions  into  -^vhich  a  regi- 
ment, or  an  army,  is  divided,  wlign  in  line. 

Flank  is  the  right  or  left  side  of  a  column,  or  line. 

Interval  is  the  vacant  apace  between  two  bodies  of 
troops,  or  between  files, :,      . 

The  interval  between  two  troopers  in  rank; is  4  in<5heB 
from  knee  to  knee.  '~ .'  * 

Distance  is  the  vaTcant  space  between  any  two  subdi- 
visions in  column. 

When  a  body  of  troops  is  formed  in  column'  of  pla- 
toons; the  distances  prescribed  are"  measured  from  the 
fore  feet  of  the  horses  of  one  ?ank  to  the  fore  feet  of  the 
hai*se3  of  another  rank. 

DErrn  is  the  space  included  between  the  head  and 
rear  of  a  column.  -     * 

The  depth  of  a  regiment  in  close  column  is  about 
equal  to  a  platoon  front  multiplied  by  the  number, of 
squadrons. 

To  estimate  the  front  of  a  troop,  and  the  depth  of  a 
column,  it  is  necessary  to  know  that  a  horse,  when 
mounted,  occupies  in  breadth  one  yard,  The  length  of 
a  horse  is  considered  three  yards. 

By  the  Croup  is  alwa^'s  meant  the  rear  extremity  of 
the  horse. 

Alignment  is  the  placing  of  men,  or  troops,  on  the 
same  line. 

When  a  body  of  troops  is  to*form  and  align  itself  on 
another,  it  halts  one  horse's  length  in  rear  of  the  lino  of 
formation.  .        . 

■    A  Column  is  the   disposition  of  a  body  of  troops  in 
subdivisions,  one  behind  another. 

Open  Column  is  formed  of  subdivisions,  having  be- 
tween them  the  distance  necessary  to  form  in  line  in 
every  way,  being  generally  of  platoons,  the  column  of 
manoeuvre.  That  column  is, distinguished  by  the  name^ 
Open  Column.  '  *  ,    •  ; 

Close  Column  is  formed  of  equadrons,*witha  ^i^3QC.e 


BASIS  OP  INSTRUCTION.  39 

of  platoon  front  from  one  to  another.  The  object  of 
this  disposition  is  "to  give  the  least  possible  depth  to  the 
column.  .         ^ 

Double  Column  is  formed  by  the  advance  from  the 
centre  of  a  line,  by  platooits  at  wheeling  distance,  the 
right  wing  left  in  fronts  the  left  wing  right  in  front ; 
the  t"\vo  columns  preserving  an  interval  between  their 
flanks. 

Points  of  Direction  serve  to  point- out  the  direction 
in  which  a  troop  in  line,  or  in  column,  is  to  march  ;  or 
else  to  mark  the  right  and  left -of  a  line. 

Intermediate  Points  are  those  taken  between  the 
fixed  pointa  They  are  used  to  preserve  the  direction 
during  the  march,  or  to  insure  the  rectitude  of  the  form- 
ation of  the  lines. 

The  two  sergeants  on  the  flanks,  who  are  not  counted 
in  the  rank,  are  the  right.guide  and  left  guide  of  their 
respective  squadrons. 

In  the  oblique  march  the  giiide  is  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  march  is  made  ;  and  when  the  primitive  di- 
rection is  resumed,  after  having  obliqued,  the  guide  is 
where  it  was  before  having  obliqued. 

In  a  column  composed  of  cavalry  and  infantry,  the 
guides  of  the  cavalry  cover  the  second  file  of  the  subdi- 
visions of  infantry  on  the  side  of  the  guides.  In  line, 
the  officers  who  are  in  front  of  the  squadrons  alignthem- 
selvee  on  the  rear  rank  of  the  infantry. 

Wheel  is  a  circular  movement  executed  by  a  body  of 
troops  in  line  ;    each  of  the  men  describes  the  arc  of  a ' 
circle,  larger  in  proportion  to  hie  distance  from  the  pivot. 

About  Face,  or  "Wheel,  is  to  face  or  wheel  so  as  to  re- 
vecse  the  front.  . 

.    Right,  or  Left  Face,  is-  to  face  at  right  angles  to  tke 
former  front. 

Right  Half,  or  Left  Half  Face,  or  Wheel,  is  a  ri^heej 
of  45  degrees.  ' 

Pivot  is  the  mafi  of  the  flank  oil  which  the  wheel  is 


40  BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

made;  there  are  tR^o  kiuus,  the  fixed  pivot  and  the 
movable. pivot:  .n     " 

The  pivot  is,  fixed  whenever  lie  turns  upon  himself;  it 
is  movable  when  he  describes  an  arc  of  a  circle. 

The  arc- of  a  circle  described  by  the  pivot  of  a  rank 
of  two,  cf  foui",  of  eight,  or  of  a  platoon  making  the 
fourth  of  a  wheel,  is  5  yards ;  and  for  a  squadron  it  is 
20  yards.  *         ..  ,      ■    " " 

Ploy^ient  is  the  movement  by^which  a  regiment  forms 
from  liue  into  close  column. 

Deployment  is  the  movement  by  which  a  regiment 
forms  from  close  column  into  line. 

Formation  is  the  regular  placing  of  all  the  fi'actions  of 
a  body  of  .troops  in  any  prescribed  order. 

Paces  :  There  are  three  kinds  ;  the  walk,  the  trot,  and 
the  gallop. 

On  foot  there  are  three  Mnds  of  step;  the  common 
step,  the  quick  step,  and  the  double-quick  step. 

On  foot  the  movements  are  executed  habitually  at 
the  quick  step,  without  the  command  being  given. 
When  they  are  to  be  executed  at  the  common  step,  or 
doublc-qirick,  the,  command  sliould  signify  it. 
.  Tlie'pace,  \\'Then  used  as  a  measure,  is  3  feet. 
'  On  foot  the  common  step  is  at  the  rate  of  90  per  min- 
ute; the  quick  step  is  at  the  rate  of  110  per  minute;  the 
double-quick  step  is  at  the  rate  of  165  per  minute.   . , 

The  Direct  March  is  that  which  is  executed  by  troops 
in  line  or  in  column,  to  move  off  perpendicularly  to 
their  alignment.        '  ^  . 

The  March  by  a  Flaxe  is  that  by  which  ground  is 
gained  to  the  right  or  left,  after  having  made  the  fourth 
of  a  wheel. 

The  Oeiique  MARcn  is  that  by  which,  when  moving 
forward,  ground  is  gained  towards  one  of  the  flanks 
without  changing  the  front.  There  are  two  kinds,  thc- 
indlvidaal  oblique  march,  and  the  oblique  march  h^  troop. 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  41 

The  individual  oblique  march  is  that  ^vhich  is  cxecu- 
ted  by  tin  individual  movement  of  each  man. 

Tlie  oblique  march  by  troop  is  that  which  is  executed 
by  the  movement,  at  t]ie  same  time,  of  each  of  the  sub- 
divisions of  a  troop  in  line. 

Countermarch  is  a  movement  by  which  tha  men  of  a 
rank  march  to  form  themselves  facing  tlic  rear,  parallel 
to  the  first  formation. 

The  Charge  is  a  direct  and  impetuous  march,  the  "ob- 
ject of  which  is  to  strike  the  enemy. 

Skirmishers  arc  men  dispersed  in  front,  in  rear,  or  on 
the  .flanks  of  a  troop,  to  cover  its  movements  or  its 
poeition.  *       ■ 

Obstacle  is  anything  in  the  nature  of  the  ground 
which  obliges  troops  in  line  to  ploy  apart  of  their  front. 

Defile  is  a  passage  which  compels  a  line  to  ploy  into 
column,  or  a  column  to  diminish  its  front. 

Evolutions  are  the  regular  movements  by  which  a 
regiment  passes  from  one  order  io  another. 

Evolutions  of  the  line  arS  these  same  movements  exe- 
cuted by  several   regiments.     Their   applicatit/i',   com- 
bined with  tho  position  or  movements  of  the  euctny,  is . 
called  manoiriwes.  ^ 

CoMMA^jiDs :  There  are. three  kinds: 

The  command  of  caution,  which;  is  "Attention."  It  is 
the  signal  to  preserve  immobiHty  and  to  give  attention. 

The  preparatory .  command.  It  indicates  the  move- 
ment which  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution^  at  which  the  '  iction  is 
commenced. 

The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct, 
and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  troop  wtuch  is 
commanded. 

Preparatory  commands  should  be  uttered  vith  all 
passible  distinctness. 

In  commands  of  execution  articulation  is  not  so  neces- 
sary ;  but  they  should  be  prolonged,  because  the  move- 


42  BASIS  or  INSTRUCTION. 

•  '     . 
raent  wiiich  h  to  follow  tlieqi  being  communicuted  fi'ora 

•the  man  to' the  horse,  all  jerking  or  abruptnessis  thereby 
avoiiled;  and  thev  "will  bo  better  heard  amid  the  noise 
of  cavalry  in  motion,  ^  -, 

la  the  manual"  of  arms,  the  part  of  the  command 
■which  causes  an  execution  should  be  pronounced  in  a 
firm  and  brief  tone. 

The  command  of  caution,  and  the  preparatory  com- 
mands, are  distinguished  by  italics';   those  of  execution, 

by  CAPITALS. 

..  A  TrMKis  one  of  the  parts  info  which  an  action  is  di- 
vided to  facilitate  the  instruction  and  execution.-  A 
motion  is  a  further  subdivision  with  the  same  object.- 

ARTICLE  NINTH. 

(The  book  of  signals  is  at  the  end  of  the  work.) 

1.  The  general. 

2.  Boots  and  saddlea 

3.  To  horse. 

4.  The  assembly.  * 

5.  To  arms. 

6.  To  the  standard. 

7.  The  march.  (Il^also  an3wers  for  a  quick  step 
on  foot.)  ■  • 

8.  The  charge. 

9.  The  rally.     .  ' 

•  10.  Reveille, 
ll.  Stable  call. 

12.  Watering  call. 

13.  Breakfast  call. 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard. 

15.  Orders  for  the  orderly  sergeant. 
f6.  Assembly  of  the  trumpeters. 

17.  Retreat.   • 

18.  Fatigue  call. 

19.  Dinner  call. 

20.  Distributions. 

21.  Drill  call. 


HASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION.  43 

22.  Officer's  call. 

23.  The  rednll. 

24.  Sick  call. 
£5.  Tattoo. 

26.  To  extinguish  lights. 

'  For  the  Service  of  Skirmishers. 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Halt. 

C.  To  the  left.  •  ■ 

4.  To  the  right. 

5.  The  about. 

6.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 
T.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 

8.  Trot. 
0.  Gallop. 
10.  To  commence  firing. 
■         11.  To  cease  firing. 

12,  To  charge  as  foragers. 
The  rally  is  No.  9,  general  signals. 
To  change  the  gait  to  a  walk,  halt  aud  fortvard  are 
sounded. 

Note. — The  recall  serves  to  withdraw  trooji?,  so  that 
they  rejoin  the  main  body,  or  the  commander,  at  the 
ordinary  gait';  and  also  for  the  cefesatiou, of  exercises. 


TITLE  SECOND. 


INSTRUCTION  ON  FOOT. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED. 

1. — Th^bbject  of  this  school  being  the  individual  and 
pro^-iossive  iustruclion  of  the  recruits,  the  instructor 
docs  not  require  ft  movement  to  be  executed  until  -he 
has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it;  and  he  executes 
himseltthe  movement  wfiich  he  commands,  so  as"  to  join 
example  to  precept.  He  accustoYns  the  recruit  to  take 
by  himself  the  position  which  is  explained,  teaches  hiin, 
to  rectify  it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of  intelli- 
gence, and  sees  that  all  the  Inovemeiits  are  performed 
without  precipitation.  -        ; 

Each  movement  should  be  perfectly  understood  before 
passing 'to  another.  After  they  have  beeh  properly  ex- 
ecuted in  the  order  laid  down  in  tach  lesson,  the  in- 
structor no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order;  on  the 
contrar}^,  he  should  change  it,  that"  he  may  judge  of  the 
intelligence  of  tlie  men.  ,   ,  . 

2. — The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  two*  or 
three  times  in  the  hour ;  for  this  purpose  he  commands. 
Rest.  *  . 

At  the  command  kest  the  trooper  is  no  longer  required 
to  preserve  immobility,  but  will  keep  his  left  heel  in  its  ■ 
place. 

3.— "When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the 
instruction,  he  commands,  attention  ;  at  this  command 


46  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

t!ic  trooper  takes  his  position,  remains  motionless,  -and 
lixee  his  attention. 

4. — The  first  principles  of  the  position,  ancl  those  of 
the  march,  are  taught  to  each  man  individually,  or,  -at 
most,  to  eight  at  a  time.  In  the  latter  case  they  iye 
placed  on  the  same  line, -one  yard  from  each  other, 
without  being  required  to' align  themselves. 

V     POSITION  OF  THE  TROOPER  DISMOU]STED. . 

S. — The  heels  on  the  same  line  as  near  each  other-a? 
the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming -with  oaxh 
^ther  sometliing  less  than  a  right  angle;  ' 

"  The  knees  straight  without  stiffness; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward  ; 

The  belly  rather  drawn  in,  and  the  breast  advanced; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally  ; 

The  arms  hanging  near  the  side  ; 
^  The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front ; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  con- 
straint ;  . 

The  chin  somewhat'drawn  in  ; 

The  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

When  the  trooper  is  armed,  the  left  hand  hangs  by 
the  side  over  the  saT^re.* 

EYES  RIGHT,  EYES  LEFT. 

Jii,, — The  instructor  commands  : 

.1.  JSyes — Right. 
12,.  Front, 

At  the  first  command,  turn  the  liead  gently  to  the 
iight,  BO  that  the  corner  of  the  left  eye,  next  to  tlw  nose, 
may  be  on  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  jacket. 

M  ih&  command  feont,  turn  the.  head  gently  to  the 
iront^    •       . 


TROOPER,  DISJTO.UNTED.  *47 

7. — The  movement  eyes  left  is  executed  nfter  the  same 
principles,  at  the  commands :         ' 

1.  Eye's — Lkft, 

2.  Front. 

^. — The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  th<5 
movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  squnrenese 
of  the  shoulders,  which  would  happen  if  it  were  too 
siudden,  or  if  the  head  were  turned  more  than  is  neces- 
sary. .  .     . 

As  the  trooper  should,  turn  the  head  only,  to  align 
himself,  and  in  the  wheelings,  it  is  important  that  he 
(should  be  accustomed  to  turn  it  but  verv  little. 


RIGHT  FACE,  LEFT  FACE,  ABOUT  FACE,  RIGHT 
OBLIQUE  FACE,  LEFT  OBLIQUE  FACE. 

•     9. — The  insfi*netor  eoraraands:: 


1.  Right  (or  left). 
''*2:  Face. 


1  time. 

At  the  second  <}ommand,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly, 
tufn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little,  and  tli;n 
replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side-of  tlie  left^  and  on  the 
*ame  line.. 

1 0. — A  bout — Face. 

2  times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  xnhka  a  half  face 
to  tht  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  place  the  rigHt  foot 
nquare  behind  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to,  and 
three  inches  from,  the  kft  heel. 

2".  At  the  command,  fack,  turn  on  both  heels  to  fooe 
^  to  the  rear,  raising  the  toes  a  littl<?,  the  knees  straight, 
and  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 


4S.  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

11,— -J.  Right  oblique  (or  left  oblique.) 
•    2.  Face, 

1  time. 

At  the  second  commancl,  raise  the  right  foot  a  little, 
turn  upon  the  left,  raising  the  toes  slightly,  and  then  re- 
place the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  on  the  same 
line,  making /acl?  80  degrees  to  the.  right  or  left,  (one- 
third  of  a  right  or  left  face. ) 

.  12. — The  instructor  pays  particular  attention  that  the 
position  of  the  body  shall  not  be  deranged  by  these 
movements. 

COMMON  STEP. 

nf%  13. — The  length  of  the  common  step  is  2  feet  4  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel ;  its  quifckness  is  at  the  rate 
of  90  per  minute, 

14. — To  explain  the  principles  and  mefiianism  of  the 
step,  the  instructor  places  himself  8  or  10  paces  in  front, 
facing  the  squad ;  he  executes  the  step  slowly  himself. 
■He  commands:      . 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Marcu. 

* 
At  the  com'marid,  forward,   throw  the  weight  of  the 
body  on  tlie  right  leg.''  - 

At  the  command,  makcd,  carry  forward  the  left  foot, 
smartly  and  without  a  jerk,  2  feet  4  inches  from  the  right, 
the  knee  straight,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and  slightly 
turned  out,  the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  forward; 
plant  the  left  foot,  the  whole  weight  of  the  body  being 
thrown  on  it;  carry  forward  the  right  leg,  smartly  and 
without  jerk,  the  foot  near  the  ground ;  plant  it  at  the 
same  distance,  and  in  the  same  manner  as  has  just  been 
explained  for  the  left  foot,  and  continue  to  march  with- 
out crossing  the  legs  or  tmrning  the  shoulders,  and  with 
the  face  always  to  the  front.  ^ 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  49 

16. — To  halt,  the' instructor  commands : 

1.  jSquad. 

2.  Halt. 

At  the  compaand,  bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by 
the. side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

^  16.— rThe  instructor  marks  the  cadence  of  the. step  from 
time  to  time  by  the  command  one,  at  the  moment  when 
the  left  foot  should  be  planted  ;  this  cadence  being  regu- 
lated at  the  rate  of  90  steps  per  minute. 

TO  CHANGE  FEJET. 

17. — The  instructor  teaches  this  to  the  squad  one  at  a 
time ;  it  is  used  to  catch  the  step  when  lost. 

The  foot  that  is  being  advanced  from  the  rear  is  plan- 
ted by  tlie  side  of  the  other,  which  is  instantly  advanced 
in  its  stead  so  as  not  to  lose  the  cadence. 

TO  MARCH  BY  A  FLANK, 

18 --The  mdn  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
commands:  •    e      • 

1.  night — Face.' 
.2;  Fonocird. 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  whole  file  step  off  with 
animation  together,  with  the  left  foot.  " 

1 9. — A  well-instructed  man  should  at  first  march  by 
the  side  of  the  leading  man. 

The  instructor  will  cause  the  men  to  cover  each  other 
accurately.  He  will  see  tiiat  they  do  not  look  down- 
wards,-and  do  not  bend  the  knee. 

TO  FACE  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT  WHEN. 
MARCHING. 

20. — ^The  squad  marching,  the  instructor  commands : 


50  •  SCUOOL  OF  TlIK 

^l*'~By  ffie  rujhtjiank, 
*2.  March. 

At  the  command  JiAuciT,  turn  the  boily  to  the  right, 
and  step  off  with  the  right  foot  iu  the  new  direction, 
without  Josing  tlie  cadence  of  the  step. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  MAr.cii  at  the  mo- 
ment when  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

When  it  ia  to  the  left,W\Q  command  maucii  is  given  at 
the  moment  when  the  right  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
Bj  this  means  the  new  direction  is  always  commenced 
with  the  leg  on  the  side  towards  wliioh  the  turn  is  aiade. 

OBLIQUE  FACE  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEI<T  WHE.N 
;M  ARCHING. 

■  21. — ^The  squad  marching,  the  instructor  commands . 

1,  Right  oblique  {ov  left  oblique.) 

2.  Mauch. 

At  the  command  march,  the  men  make'an  oblique  face 
to  the  ric/ht  (or  to  the  left,)  ayd  march  iu  the  new  direc- 
tion. 

22, — ^Tp  rtsuine  the  primitive  direction,  the  instructor 
commands: 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  men  make  an  oblique  face  to  the 
left,  if  they  have  obliqued  to- the  right,  and  an  obHqy-i' 
face  to  the  right,  if  they  have  obliqued  to  tlio  left,  and 
march  straight  to  the  front. 

QUrCK  STEP. 

23. — Tlie  length  of  the  quick  step  is  the  same  as  that 
of  the  common  step,  and  its  quickness  is  at  the  rate  of 
110  per  minute. 

The  squad  being  at  a. halt,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Forward,  quiet:  time.  ^ 
%  March. 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  51 

At  the  command  makcu,  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 

-24. — The  squad  is  exercised,  when  marching  at  th-. 
qaick  step,  to  halt,  move  on,  face  to  the  right  and  left, 
half  face  to  the  right  and  left,  and  move  off  again,  aa  m 
Gonimou  time.  ^ 

25.— The  squad  marching  in  quick  time,  to  change  iv 
domraon  time,  the.instructor  commands : 

1.  Commo7i  time. 

2.  March. 

At  tlie  cqmnaand  march,  the- squad  takes  the  comnini 
slop. 

gf)_ — To  resume  the  quick  step,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Quick  time. 

2.  M.\RCU. 

At  the  eommanJ  MARCH,  the  squad  resumes  the  quick 
«tep.  .  -  ' 

DOUBLE  QUICK  STEr. 

2'7. — The  squad  marching  in  common  or  quick  time,  to 

ohange  to  double  quick  time,  thd  instructor  c'ommands: 

_     '  *■-■"■ 

.  1.  Double  quick.     ^  •  ' 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  men'  increase  the  length 
orstep  to  33  inches,  and  its  rapidity  to  165  steps  in  a 
minute. 

♦   In  this  march  the  carriage  of  the  Lody  is  different,  be 
ing  nearer  that  of  running.     The  body  is  more  advanced, 
(ho  knees  more  beat,  the  arras  Tvith  their  natural  mo- 
tion. •  '      <*• 

Trom  a  lialt,  the  command, is: 

1.  Forward,  double  quick, 

2.  Maucu,  _    ' 


52  SCirO^L  OF  THE 

^  SABRE  EXERCISE. 

28. — For  this  lesson  the  squaJ  is  composed  oi  from  G 
to  6  men,  armed  only  with  sabrea;.thoy  arc  placed  iu 
cue  rank,  9  feet  from,  each  other. 

The  object  of  the  moulinet  is  to  render  the  joints  of  the 
arm  and  wrist  supple,  and  as  it  adds  to  the  eonlidenoe 
of  the  men  when  isolated,  by  increasing"  their  dcxteiity, 
they  should  first  be  exercised  at  it,  as  a  preparation  for 
thfi  other  motions. 

Each  lesson  is  therefore  commenced  and  ended  with 
moulinete,  executed  with  a  quickness  proportioned  to  the 
pijpgress  of  the  troopers.  The  instructor  pays  particular 
auention  thiit  the  men  do  not  employ  a  degree  of  force 
in  the  sabre  exercise,  which  not  only  is  less  necessary 
than  skill  and  suppleness,  but  which  is  even  prejudicial. 
Kq  observes,  also,  that  they  do  not  lean  to  one  fide,  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  lose  the  seat,  when  mounted  ;  he  re- 
quires more  especially,  in  the  motions  of  the  sabre  to  the 
rear,  that  the  blade  shall  not  fall  too  near  the  body,  for 
fear  of  wounding  the  horse.  In  describing  a  circle,  the 
flat  of  the  blade  should  be  to  the  side,  and  the  edge  to 
the  front,  and  it  should  be  so  directed  as  not  to  touch 
either  the  horse's  head,  or  his  haunches,  or  the  knees  of 
tiie  rider. 

"When  the  troopers  execute  all  the  motions  -with  regu- 
larity, the  instructor  requires  each  cut  to  be  given  with- 
out decomposing  it ;  the  last  Syllable  of  a  command  is 
the  signal  for  the  quick  execution  of  it.  All  the  cuts  are 
then  terminated  by  a  half-moulinet,  which  brings  back 
to  the  position  of  guard.  "^ 

Thrusts  eliould  always  be  used  in  preference,  as  thej- 
require  less  force,  and  their  result  is. more  prompt,  sure, 
and  decisive"..  They  should  be  directed  quickly  /lojne  to 
the  body  of  the  adversary,  the  sabre  being  hold  ^Vith  the 
full  grasp,  the  thumb-pressing  against  tho  guard  in.  the 
direction  of  the  blade.         •     .  . 

The  parries  against  the  lauce  are  the  same  m  against 
the  point.  •  ^<'    ' 


TIIOOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  53 

29. — The  instructor  explains  what  is  meant  by  rigid 
and  left  side  of  the  gripe  ;  by  tierce,  and  by  quarte' 

The  right  side 'of  the,  gripe  is  tlie  side  opposite  to  the 
guard.  ^  "  -,. 

The  leftsfdc  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  next  to  the  guard. 

Tierce  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is 
turned  to  the  right,  the  nails  downwards.    .. 

Quarte  is  the  ]X)sition  in  which  the  edge  ojT  the  blade 
is  turned  to  the  If  ft,  "the  nails  upwards. 

To  rest,  the  sabres Jjeing  returned,  the  instructor, con- 
forms to  yvhat  is'^irescribed,  Ko.  2. . 

SO. — The  troopers  being  placed  as  prescribed,  No.  28, 

the  instructor  commands: 
■»  • 

2  times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  unhook  the  sabre 
•with  the  left  hand,  and  bring  the  hilt  to  the  front;  run 
the  right  wrist  through  the  sword-knot;  'seize  the  gripe, 
draw  the  blade  6  inches  out  of  tlie  scabbard,  pressing  the 
scabbard  against  the  thigh  with  the  left  hand,  which 
seizes  it  at  the  upper  ring.  '  • 

2.  At  the  command  sabre,  draw  the  sabre  quickly, 
raising  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  at  an  angle  of  about 
45  degrees;  the  sabre  in  a  straight  line  with  the  arm, 
make  a  slight  pause,  carry  the  blade  to  tUe  right  shoul- 
der, the  back  of  it  against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  tlvo 
wrist  resting  against  the  hip,  the  little  finger t>n  the  out- 
side of  the  gripe. .        ■ 

Return — Sabre. 

■*  2  times. 

31. — 1.  At  the  command  RETURN,  carry  the  sabre  ver- 
tically to  the  front,  the  thumb  opposite  to  and  6  inches 
from  the  neck,  the  blade  vertical,  the  edge  to  the  left,  ^the 
thumb  extended  on  the  right-side  of  the  gripe,  the  lilitlo 
finger  by  the  side  of  the  othel's. 


j^ 


5-k  SCUOOE  OF  THE 

■* 

2.  At  the  commaDd  sabhe,  cnny  iLe  wrist  opposit-e  to 
and  €  inches  frointbe  left  shoulder;  revolve  the  point  of 
the  blade  to  the  rear,  uutil  it  is  nearly  under  the  right 
hand,  which,  at  the  same  time,  is  raised;  the  left  hand, 
also  at  the  same  time,  takes  hold  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
seal'.bara ;  turn  the  eyes  slightly  to  the  left,  return  the 
blade,  free  the  wrist  from  the  sabre  knot,  drop  the  right 
hand  by  the  eide.;  turning  with  the  left  the  hilt  toward 
the  body,  rind  so  round  to  the  rear,  hook  up  the  Sa^bre, 
and  drop  the  left  hand. 

82, — The  eabres  being.drawn,  the  instructor  commands; 

Guard. 

1  time. 

At  the  command  guard,  carry  the  right  foot  about'20 
iDK'hes-froni  the  left,  the  heels  on  the  same  line  ;  place  the 
left  hand  closed,  6  inches  from  the  body,  and  as  high  as- 
the  elbow,  the  fiogers  towards  the^body,  the  little  finger 
liearer  than  the  ihumh,  {posilio7i  of  the  bridle-ha7}d;).'(it 
the  same  time,  carry  the  right  hand  about  10  inches  in 
front  of  the  right  hip,  the  blade  in  an  oblique  position, 
ih'e  point  a  little  raised,  the  edge  upward,  the  back  of  the 
Jdade  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  left  arm,  as  near  the 
body  as  possible;  the  right  hand  without  constraint,  or 
fe.clihg  the  weight  of  the  sabre. 

Ze/t — MouLi:iET. 
■    «    ■ 

1  iirhe,  2  moiions. 

33-. — 1.  At  the  command  moulixkt,  ext«nd  the  right 
arm  to  the  front  to  its  full  length,  the  hand  in  tierce  and 
a3  high' as  the  eyes  ;  the  point  to  the  front,  and  ^little 
higher  than  the  hilt, 
■  2,  Commencing  by  lowering  the  blade,  make  rapidly 
a  circle  round  tha  hand,  to  the  left  of,  and  as  near  as  safe, 
to  the  hcfi'se,  and  to  the  elbow^  returniDg  to  the  first  po^. 
aiiion,  and  then  to  guard,  «  •-.        ':  -       • 


iV  ^^ 


J03. 


Paa^  '^ 


(agre 


^a^  SS 


RujfM  -MouUn^f 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED,  55 

Right — JIouLiNiT. 
1  time,  2  rnotions. 

84. — 1.  At  tUc  command  MouONKT,  extend  the  righl 
ai'm  to  the  front  lo  its  fnll  length,  the  hand  ia  quarlc. 
Hntl  as  high  as  the  eyes,  the  point  to  llie  front,  and  a  lit- 
tle higher  than  the  hilt. 

2.  Commencing  Ly  lowerinc;  Die  LladTp,  make  rapidly 
•A  circle  round  the  hand,  to  the  riglit  of  tlie  horse  and 
body,  returning  to  the  first  position,   and  then  to  guard. 

JJo. — To  execute  the  monlinet'wilhout  stppping,  if  the 
instructor  wishes  to  b<?giu  by  the  left,  he  commands: 

Zeft  and  right — Moulinet. 

1  tiinc-,  2  7noiwns. 

3G. — If  he  wishes  to  begin  by  the  right,  he  command.-:: 

Right  and  left — MotJLl^'E'i•. 

1  time,  2  mctions.  , 


Pl- 


I 


At  either  of  these  commands,  the  troopers,  commencino- 
from  the  position  of  guakd,  execute  alternately  what  iei 
laid  down  in  Nos.  33  and  34,  Avithoul  'stopping  at  any 
motion. 

Rear — Moulinist. 

1  time,  2  motions.  .*    . 

3^.-1.  At  the  command  MouLi;ficT,  raise  tlie  arm  to 
the  right  and  rear  to  its  full  extent,  tiie  point  of  the  sa- 
bre upwards,  the  edge  to  the  right,  the  thumb  extended 
on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  the  body  slightly  turned  to  the 
right. 

2.  Describe  acircle  in  rear,  commencing  by  motion  of 
the  !«abre  towards  the  left,  the  aim  'beliig  m'otionless  to 
the  wrist,  return  to  the  let  position  and  then  to  guard. 

Wlien  the  troopers  execute  the  mouJinets  well,  the  in- 
structor requires  them  to  execute  severnl  in  succession, 
until  the  command  ciuaup. 


5G  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

*  In  tierce — Point. 

1  time,  3  7notions, 

■       •■♦ 

oS. — 1.  At  the  command  toint,  raise  the  hand  in  tierce, 
as  high  as  the  right  ear,  and  7  inches  from  it,  throw  back 
the  right  shoulder,  carrying  the  elbow  to  the  rear,  the 
point  of  the  sabre  to  the  right  of. the  horse's  head  and 
•neck,  and  a  little  below  the  horizontal,  the  edge  up-  . 
wards,  the  thumb  on  the  back  of  the  gripe. 

2.  Thrust  forward,  -extending  the  arm  to  its  full 
length,  the  edge  of  the  sabre  up. 

8.  Return'to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarts — Point. 
1  time,  3  motions, 

39. — 1.  At  the  command  point,,  lower  the  hand  in»«' 
quarte  near  the  right  hip,  the  thumb  extended  on  the 
right  side  of  the-gripe,  the  point  a  little  higher  than  the 
wrist*  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  right  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length,  the  edge  of  the  blade  to  the  left. 
~   3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left — Point. 

I  tithe,  5  motions. 

40.-:-l.  At  the  command  point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
(half  face  to  the  left  in  the  saddle,)  raise  the  hand  in 
tierce  as  high  as  the  right  ear,  and  7  inches  from  it,  the 
thumb  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,-  the  edg'e  of  the  blade 
upwards,  the  point  directed  to  the  left. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  left,  or  left  front,  extending  the  arm 
to  its  full  length,  the  edge  up. 

3.  Eeturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Hight—Voi^T:.     ' 
1  time,  Zihofions. 
41. — 1.  At  the  command  POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the 


'i^^' 


h  .-,■    .^ 


I"/(^ 


^a^^  57 


Hi^/r/  -  Pof'ni 


TROOPEIl,  DISMOUNTED.  57 

riglit,  (half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddre,)  carry  the 
hand  in  quarte  near  tlie  left  breast,  the  edge  upwards, 
the  point  directed  to  the  right/ 

2.  Thrust  to  the  right,  or  right  front,  extending  the 
arm  to  its  full  length,  edge  to  the  front. 

S,  Return  to  the  i:)Osition  of  guard. 

'Bear — Eoint. 
1  ti7)ie,  3  motions. 

42. — 1.  At  the  command  POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the 
right  and  rear,  (half  face  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,)  bring 
the  hand  in  quarte  in  front'of  the  right  shoulder,  the  arm 
half  extended,  the  blade  horizontal,  the  point  to  the 
rear,  the  edge  upwards, 

2.  Thrust  to  the  rear,  6r  right  rear,  extending  the  arm 
to  its  full  length,  edge  to  the  right. 

S'  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  left — Point. 

ir»M,ii  ^t  I    >t  1  time,  Z  moiiohs, 

43. — 1.  At  the  command  point,  turn  the  head  to  the 
left,  (half  face  to  the  left  in  the  saddle,')  raise  the  hand 
in  tierce  near  the  neck,  the  thumb  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  the  point  of  the  sabre  directed  at  the  heiglit  of  the 
breast  of  a  man  on  foot,  • 

2.  Thrust  down  in  tierce. 

3,  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Agai7ist  infantry  right — Point. 

1  time,B  motions. 

44. — 1.  At  the  command  point,"  turn  the  head  and 
body  toward  the  right,  carry  the  hand  in  quarte  near 
the  right  hip,  the  thumb  on  the  right  side  ot  the  gripe, 
the  point  of  the  sabre  directed  at  the  height  of  the  breast 
of  a  man  on  foot. 

2.  Thrust  in  quarte. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 


5S  SCTIOOL  OP  THE 

Against  infantry — Front  Point. 

\time. 

45,— -At  the  command  ^point,  bear  the  weight  on  the 
right  stirrup,  bend  well  down  to  the  right.,  extend  the 
rirjht  arm  well  downwards,  and,  with  the  back  of  th« 
sabre  lipwards,  thrust  forw'ard,  horizontally,  and  rcs«m<» 
the  guard. 

Front — Cut.  '  ■• 

■    '" ,  1  time,  3  motions. 

46. — -1.  At  tl'.e  command  cur,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm 
half  extended,  the  hand  a  ^little  higher  than  the  heacl, 
the  edge, upwards,  the  point  to  the  rear  and  higher  than 
the  hand.  , 

2.  Cut  to  the  right  of  the  hprse's  neck,  extending  th^ 
arm  to  its  full  length.  '^  I        ♦ 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard.  ^ 

USED  AGAINST  •CAVALRY  AND  INFANTRY. 

Xe/f— Cut. 

1  time,  3  mctiojrs. 

47.-_l,  At  the  command  out,  turn  the  head  to  the  Mt, 
(half  face  to  the  left  in  the  saddle,)  raise  the  sabre,  tb« 
arm  extended  to  the  front  and  right.,  the  hand  in  quarte, 
n.nd  as  high  as  the  h«ad,  the  point  higher  than  the  band. 

2.  Cut  diagonally  to  the  left,  in  quarta 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

This  is  also  used  against  infantry,  bending  well  for- 
ward and  down,  and  cutting  at  the  necessary  angle. 

RigJit — Cut. 

1  time,  3  motions. 

48.-^1.  At  the  command  cut,  turn  the  head  to  the 
right,  carry  the  hand  near  the  left  shoulder,  the  point  of 
the  Bftbre  upwards,  the  edge  to  the  left.  "        ♦ 


.T'^r. 


Il'd 


TROOPER,  DI!;M0UNTED.  r>0 

"2.  Exteticl  the  arifi  quick!}-  to,  its  full  length,   give  a 
batk-banded  cut  horizontal!}'',  in  lierce. 
3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

.  This  is  used  against  infant rj,  leaning  to  tlie  ngl>t,  and 
cutting  at  the  necessarj'  angle. 

Bed)' — Clt. 

1  time,  3  motions. 

49','. — 1.  At  tlxe. command  cut,  turn  the  l»ead  to  the 
right,  throwing  back  tlie  right  shoulder,  (half  face  to  the 
right  in  the  saddle,)  carry  tlie  hand,>near  tlio  left  shoul- 
der, the  salire  perpendicular,  the  edge  to  tlie  left. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quick! j  to  its  full  lengtli,  and  give 
a- back-handed  cut  horizontally  to  the  reSir,  in  tierce. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  gnnrd. 

Right,  in  iicrce  and  q^iari e-^-CvT, 

1  time,  4' motions. 

50.-^1.  At  the  command  cut,  execute  the  Ist  motloB 
(^^  right  cut, 'No.  48.  ^ 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  right  euf,  No.  48. 

3.  Turn  the  handia  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally  to 
th-e  left. 

4.  Return  to  tlie  position  of  guard. 

Left,  in  quarte  and  fierce — Cut. 
1  time,  4  motions. 

61. — 1.  At  the  command  cut,  execute  the  let  tnotloB 
oClcft  cut,  No.  47. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  left  cut.  No.  47. 

Z.  Turn- the  hand. in  tierce,  and  cut  horizontally  to  the 
rjg^it. 

4.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right — Parry. 
1  time,  2  motions. 
52.— -1,  At  the  command  parry,  grasp  the  sabre  firm- 


GO  SCHOOL  OF  THE  ■ 

ly,  extend  tlie  arm  to  the  right,  the*h!fn(l  moving  hori- 
zontall3',-the  point  at  tWo  same  time  describing  a  circu- 
lar motion  Hp^wlrd8,  and  with  the  edge  to  the  right, 
parry  as  strongl}'  as  possible  the  blo»v  aimed  at  the 
light  side.  i.:^S :i-y 

2.  Return  to  the  position  6f  guard. 

1  time,  2  ^notions. 

i '      ...._■■■■■ 

53. — 1.  Raise  the  hand  ahove,  and  about  seven  inches 
in  front  of  the  eyes,  the  elbov/  somewhat  bent,  edge  to 
the  left,  point  downwai'ds  and  aboxit  a  .foot  outside  the 
horse's  loft  shoulder,  and  parry  as  strongly-  as  possible 
the  blow  aimed  at  the  left  side. 

2.  Return  to"  the  position  of  guard. 

■    •  Head — Parry. 

1  ii7ne,  2  inotions.  ^^-^ 

'54. — 1.  At  the  command  i'arry,  raise  the  sabre  quick- 
ly above  the  head,  holding  it  with  the  utmost  firmness, 
the  arm  nearly  extended,  the  edge  upward,  the  point  to" 
the  left,  and  about  G  inches  higher  tlian  the  hand. 

The  hand  is  carried  more  or  less  to  the  right,  left^  or 
rear,  according,  to  the  position  of  the  adversary. 
2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  right— ^Tahvly^ 
1  time,  3  motions. 

55. — 1,  At  the  command  .PARRY,  turn  the  head  to  the 
right  (half  facing  to  the  right  in  the  saddle,)  raise  the 
sabre,  the  arm  extended  to  the  right  and  rear,  the  point 
upwards,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the.gripe, 
the  edge  to  the  left.  . 

2.  I'arry  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade,  by 
a  rapid  circular  motion  of  the  arm  and  blade,  from  rear 
to  front,  bringing  the  hand  as  high  as  the  head,  the  point 
upwards,  edge  to  the  front. 


7y^v/^.y    /,f/i,M/r^  Jj'i^.:j^a^^^ 


J^7/ 


Pa^  b'i 


3/    Uera  -J^ar/y. 


TROOrER,  DISMOUNTED.  :i 

8.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  left — Parby. 

1  time,  8  motions. 

56. — 1.  At  the  command  parry,  turn  the  head  to  the 
left,  (half  face  to  the  left  in  the  saddle,)  raise  the  sabre, 
the  arm  extended  to  the  front  and  right,  the  point  up- 
wards, the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe, 
the  back  of  the  blade  to  the  front. 

2.  Parry  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade,  by 
a  forcible  circular  motion  of  the  arm  and   blade  from.' 
front  to  rear,  bringing  the  hand  above  the  left  shoulder, 
edge  to  the  rear,  the  point  upwards. 

3,  lleturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

PARRIES  AGAINST  THE  LANCE,  (OR  SABRE.) 
In  tierce — Parry. 
1  iimef  2  motiont. 

57. — 1.  At  the  command  parry,  carry  the  forearm  and 
blade  quickly  to  the  front  and  right,  the  elbow  but  little 
moved,  edge  to  the  right,  thumb  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  the  point  being  carried  to  the  right  front,  at  the 
height  of  the  eyes. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Parry. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

68. — At  the  command  parry,  carry  the  arm  and  blade 
quickly  to  the  left  front,  edge  to  the  left,  the  point  as 
high  as  the  eyes,  the  thumb  on  the  back  of  the  gripe. 

2.*  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

69. — When  the  troopers  begin  to  execute  correctly  the 
above  cuts,  thrusts,  and  parries,  the  instructor  requires 
them  to  make  the.  application  of  them  by  combined  mo- 
tione,  such  as  follow: 


6C  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

In  tierce — Point  and  front  cut. 

Jn  quarte — Point  and  front  cut. 

Zeft — Point  and  cut. 

Right — Point  and  cut.    ■ 

Hear — Point  and  cut. 

Against  infantry  right — Point  and  cut. 

Against  infantry  left — Point  and  cut. 

Carry — Sabre. 

As  it  is  prescribed  in  K"o.  30,  and  carry  the  riglit  foot 
to  the  side  of  the  left. 

•      GENERAL  OBSERVATIOK'S  AND  DIRECTIONS. 

60. — Great  attention  should  at  all  times  be  paid  to 
maintain  the"  proper  position  and  balance  of  the  body  ; 
as  by  too  great  an  cxei;tiou  in  delivering  a  cut  or  point 
a  horseman  may  be  thrown,  or  be  so  discomposed  as  to 
lose  advantage  of  his  skill,  both  for  atlack  and  defence  ; 
and  he  should  have  confidence  in  his  parries,  and  not 
trust  to  his  avoiding  the  attack  of  his  opponent  by  turn- 
ing or  drawing  back  the  boily. 

In  delivering  a  forward  point  very  little  force  is  neces- 
sary when  the  liorsc  is  in  quick  motion,  as  the  extension 
of  the  arm,  with  a  good  direction  of  the  point,  will  bo 
fully  sufiicient;  nor  should  a  cut,  under  such  circum- 
stances, be  given  too  strong,  as  the  impetus  of  the  horse 
will  give  effective  force.  Even  the  drawing  of  the  edge 
can  frequently  be  applied  with  advantage,  particularly 
when  the  point,  by  being  given  too  soon,  may  not  have 
taken  effect;  by  a  quick  turn  of  the  wrist  the  edge  is 
drawn  along  the  face  of  your  opponent,  or  other  exposed 
part.  The  forcing,  also,  of  the  edge  can  bo  resorted  to 
'  v/hen  very  near  and  closely  pressed  upon  by  an  ad»ver- 
sary  by  suddenly  extending  the  arm  and  directing  the 
edge  across  his  face,  or  where  an  opening  is  given. 

When  sufficient  space  is  allowed  for  chosing  the  point 
of  attack  you  should  endeavor  to  take  advantage  of  it ; 
if  not,  at  all  events  to  avoid  its  being  made  on  your  left 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  03 

real',  when  a  change  of  position  alone  can  bring  you  up- 
on an  equality  ■with  your  opponent;  it  may  be  done 
either  by  making  a  sudden  halt,  so  as  to  allow  him  to 
pass,  and  then  pressing  upon  his  left  rear,  or  by  turning 
•  [uickly  to  the  loft  about,  and  thereby  having  your  right 
opposed  to  his.  Should  you  be  prevented  doing  this, 
and  he  still  keeps  upon  your  left,  you  must  bear  up  as 
close  as  possible  to  him,  otherwise  your  opposition  will 
be  ineffectual ;  for  in  his  situation,  by  keeping  at  the  pro- 
per distance  from  you,  his  cut  will  reach  when  yours 
will  not.  and  consequent!}'  you  will  be  reduced  to  the 
defence  alone.  . 

In  meeting  your  opponent  on  the  left  front  turn  sharp- 
ly to  the  loft  on  your  own  ground,  which  brings  you 
immediately  with  3'our  sword  arm  fiee,  and  at  liberty  to 
act  upon  his  left.  And  in  meeting  him  upon  the  right 
front,  press  j'our  horse  quickly  on,  and  by  a  shprp  turn 
to  the  right  gain  his  left  rear,  or  if  pursued  endeavor  to 
keep  your  adversary  on  the  right  roar.  When  attacked 
5iy  more*l1ian  one  you  Avill  naturally  endeavor  to  keep 
fb.cni  both  either  to  the  right  or  left,  but  when  they  have 
1  een  enabled  to  place  themselves  on  both  sides,  press  close 
upon  t!-e  left  opponent,  and  endeavor  to  keep  the  viirht 
one  at  adis'anee. 

The  attack  or  defence  against  the  lance  (it  is  the  com- 
mon weapon  of  the  mounted  Indians)  depends  much  up- 
on horsemanship,  and  the  judgment  of  the  rider.  It  is 
parried  like  the  sword  ;  and  you  must  press  in  at  your 
opportunity  to  close  upon  your  antagonist.  You  must 
invariably  endeavor  to  gain  his  j-if/Iit  ?rarwhen  he  is  least 
able  to  attack  or  defend  ;  the  left  rear  and  left,  weakest 
for  the  sabre,  are  the  strongest  positions  for  the  lance  ; 
the  same  may  be  said  of  the  bow  and  arrow;  in  pursuit 
alvrays  approach  at  the  right  rear. 

When  opposed  to  infantry,  endeavol'to  meet  an  oppo- 
nent on  your  right;  in  the  parry  the  bayonet  must  be 
struck,  and  by  the  stronger  part  of  your  sabre;  the  cut3 
form  a  defence  as  well  as  attack  upon  infantry,  but  the 
point  should  be  chiefy  used  in  pursuit. 


,4  SCHOOL  OP  THB 

In  the  use  of  the  sabre  at  speed,  it  is  important  that 
'.he  horeeman  ehould  aid  the  impetus  of  the  cut,  and  se- 
.ure  his  own  seat  by  supporting  the  sway  of  the  body 
with  the  opposite  leg  to  that  side  on  whicli  he  intends  to 
•ut  or  point ;  for  instance,  in  the  left  cut  he  should  sup- 
•ort  the  bod}'  by  a  strong'  pressure  of  the  inside  of  the 
light  thigh  and  leg  against  the  saddle  and  liorse ;  in  the 
right  cuts  support  the  body  with  tlie  left  leg,  the  lower 
-lown  the  grip  can  be  taken  the  better,  not  touching  the' 
horse  with  the  spur.  It  is  particularly  applicable  and 
r.eeessary  in  pursuit  over  rough  and  varied  ground. 

Cuts  very  often  fail  from  the  sabre  turning  enough  to 
aake  the  blow  one  with  the  flat;  at  best  the^wcund  is 
::enerally  trifling  compared  to  those  made  by  thrusts. 

The  instructor  thould  inopress  upon  the  recruits  such 
occasional  observations  as  become  applicable.  Oppor- 
tunities should  be  taken  in  j^auses  of  rests;  the  sq^uad 
should  not  be  kept  very  long  in  positions  or  movements. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL. 

01. — The  army  revolver  being  worn  in  a  belt -holster, 
suspended  by  the  belt  at  the  rigiit  side  of  the  back,  the 
instructor  cenimands: 

Draw — Pistol, 

1  tiine, 

02. — At  the  command  pistol,  with  the  right  hand  un- 
button the  flap  of  the  belt-holster,  draw  the  pistol,  and, 
holding  it  at  the  stock,  with  the  point  of  the  fore-finger 
1.  aching  above  the  trigger  guard,  carry  it  vertically, 
with  the  iiand  as  high  as  the  right  (shoulder,  and  six  in- 
<hes  in  front  of  it. 

OS. — The  instructor  commands: 
RE.\Dy. 
1  time. 

At  this  command,  place  the  pietol  in  the  left  hand,  at 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  .6.% 

the  hciglit  of  the  breast,  the  nmzzle  elevfltod  and  directed 
lo  the  left  front,  cock  and  raise  pistol,  (position  No.  62.) 

Aim. 
1  time. 

Ci. — At  this  command,  lower  the  pistol  to  the  front,  the 
arm  i\bout  three-fourths  extended,  tlie  forefinger  npon 
the  trigger;  aim  with  the  right  eye,  the  left  eye  closed. 

Fire, 
1  time. 

65. — At  this  command,  fire  and  raise  pistol. 

Gf). — At  the  position  of  aim,  the  instructor  ma}'  com- 
mand, raise — pistol,  at  "which  command  the  men  rais(- 
the  pistols  to  the  position  No.  62;  and  if  the  pistol  is  not 
fired,  at  the  command  return — risxoL,  first  let  down  the 
hammer. 

67.— To  cock  the  pistol  rapidly  without  the  use  of  tlie 
left  hand,  place  the  thumb  upon  and  press  down  the  ham- 
mer, throwing  forward  the  muzzle  with  a  rapid  motion, 
to  assist  the  action  of  the  thumb. 

G8. — In  a  possible  case  requiring  it,  the  revolver  mar 
ha  used  in  rank  dismounted  with  great  effect,  in  firing  to 
the  front,  or  right  or  left  oblique,  ^by  volley  or  file  firing. 

To  reload,  the  rank  would  be  ordered  to  sit  on  the 
ground  and  load  at  will. 

69. — Being  at  the  position  of  raise  pistol,  the  instructoi 
commands: 

Return — Pistol. 

At  the  command  pistol,  lowei'tbe  pistol,  carrying  it  to 
the  rear,  and  return  it  to  the  holster,  and  button  the  flap. 


Ou  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

INSPECTION  OF  ARilS. 

70. — The  instructor  commanda : 

In  i^pcction — Sabre. 
1   (hnc,  7  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  sadrk,  execute  the  first  lime  of 
draw  sabre,  No.  SO. 

2.  Execiite  the  second  lime  of  draw  sabre,  No.  SO. 

;}.  Present  sabre  as  it  isdescribed  in  first  time  of  No.  01. 

4.  Move  the  thumb  to  tlie  back  uf  the  grij)e,  and  turn, 
it  in  the  Imnd,  the  edge  turning  by  the  front,  to  the  right.- 

5.  Carry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder,  as  it  is  described  in 
No.  30. 

0.  Execute  the  first  time  of  return  sabre,  No.  31. . 

7.  Execute  the  second  time  of  return  sabre,  No.  31.   • 

71. — The  instructor  commande: 

Inspcctio:i — Pistol. 
1  Umc^  3  motions. 

1.  At  tlie  command  pistol,  draw  pistol,  and  come  to 
the  position  of  7'flt.sc^;/A'io/,  No.  62. 

2.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  at  the  height  of 
the  breast,  the  muzzle  elevated  and  directed  to  the  left, 
Iialf  cock  with  the  right  hand;  drop  the  loft  hand  by  the 
eide,  and  hold  tho  pistol  vertieall}',  in  front  of,  and  4  iu- 
ches  from,  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  butt  at  tlie  height 
of  the  belt,  the  guard  to  the  lelt ;  the  right  fore-arm 
again.st  the  side. 

3.  Take  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  as  in  No.  GS,  let 
down  the  hammer,  and  return  the  pistol  to  the  holster, 
button  the  flap,  and  drop  the  hand  to  the  side. 

72. — When  the  men  execute  the  details  correctly,  the 
instructor  commands; 


TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED.  67 

Jnfipection — Arms. 

At  the  command  arms,  the  men  execute  th«  first  and 
•second  motions  of  inspection  of  pistol,  No.  71. 

As  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  the  man  on  his  left, 
each  man  executes  the  third  motion  of  inspection  of  pis-, 
to^,  and  first  and  second  motions,  of  tn-s^cc^ton  of  sabre. 

Each  man,  as  the  inspector  reaches  him  the  second 
time,  executes  the  third  and  fourth  motions  of  inspection 
of  sabre ;  nud  as  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  again 
the  next  man,  he  executes  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh 
motions  of  inspection  of  sabre,  Xo.  70. 

•  73. — The  inspector  passes  from  right  to  left,  returning 
to  the  right  by  the  rear ;  he  handles  the  pistols  if  he  de- 
eives,  returning  them  to  the  troopers  in  the  same  position 
in  which  they  are  held  for  inspection. 

TARGET  FRACTICE. 

7-1. — Tlic  target  is  six  feet  high  and  two  feet  wide;  a 
black  stripe  3  inches  wide  is  painted  at  the  centre,  from 
top  to  bottom  ;  and  tv/o  feet  and  a  half  from  the  top  a 
white  square  of  three  inches  is  painted  on  tlie  black. 

When  practicable  a  man  is  placed  behind  a  ball-proof- 
obstacle," within  reach  by  a  wand,  of  the  target;  with 
this  he  points  out  the  position  of  each  iiit,  immediately 
nfter  it  is  made;  so  that  the  person  firing  can  see  from 
bis  place. 

When  each  has  finished  his  shots,  his  hits  are  marked, 
measured,  and  noted,  as  well  as  the  misses. 

Tiie  squad  first  fires  at  20  yards,  ench  man  fires  to  tho 
front,  rear,  right,  and  left;  one  shot  each  a  day. 

The  firing  is  next  at  thirty  yards,  and  is  carried  regu- 
larly by  the  decimal  increase  up  to  one  hundred  yards. 

An  oftieer  is  always  present  at  target  firing. 

PLATOON,  SQUADRON,  AND  REGIMENT, 
DISMOUNTED. 

75. — The  practice  of  field  movements  on  foot  is  useful 


fc  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

for  the  instruction  of  young  officers  and  men,  and  when^ 
for  any  reason,  mounted  exercises  are  not  practicable. 

The  formation,  telling  off  words  of  command,  and  all 
the  movements  are  the  same,  with  the  modifications, 
which  follow : 

The  walk  and  the  trot  are  the  only  gaits  substituted 
by  the  quick  time  and  double  quick  time.  The  word  of 
command,  "walk,"  will  be  substituted  hy  quick  time; 
*'  trot,"  by  double  quick. 

All  the  movements  will  be  in  quick  time  when  the  com- 
mand is  not  "  double  quick." 

^  'In  line,  at  the  command  right — facb,  after  all  face  to 
the  right,  all  numbers  two  and  four  step  up  to  the  left 
side  of  numbers  one  and  three  ;  if  the  command  is  left — 
FACE,  the  odd  numbers  step  up  to  the  right  of  the  even 
numbers. 

A  column  of  twos  right  in  front,  being  faced  to  the.left 
at  a  halt,  or  marching,  the  odd  numbers  step  up  into  their 
places  on  the  right  of  the  even  numbers;  if  left  in  front, 
and  faced  to  the  right,  the  even  numbers  step  up  be- 
tween the  odd  numbers. 

The  commands  and  methods  found  in  ISTos.  Y  to  27,  in- 
clusive, of  the  school  of  the  trooper  dismounted,  will  be 
folio  wed- 
To  form  twos  and  fours,  and  to  break  by  two?  and  fik, 
is  always  done  at  the  same  gait,  without  halting,  closing 
or  increasing  the  distances;  when  increasing  front,  the 
files  who  have  to  move  up  doing  so  with  a  step  or  two 
in  double  quick,  and  all  together. 

To  break  a  platoon,  marching  in  line,  by  fours,  at  the 
same  gait,  each  set,  but  the  foremost,  halts  until  the  one 
which  is  to  precede  it  has  moved  forward,  or  obliqued 
two  frteps. 

On  the  same  principle,  when  the  squadron  in  line  is 
broken  by  platoon,  each  platoon  waits  until  the  one 
which  precedes  it  has  gained  a  distance  of  three-fourths 
of  a  platoon  fr6nt. 

A  colvimn  of  fours  making  a  turn,  "the 'pivot  shortens 
his  step  to  18  inches,  (he  marches  ten  steps  in  making 


TROOPXR,  DISMOUNTED.  GiT 

tli'e  tiirn,)  and  the  man  on  the  other  flank  increases  his 
to  about  32  inches. 

In  a  platoon  turning,  the  pivot  man  doo5  the  same, 
the  outer  flank  moves  in  double  quick. 

To  countermarch  a  squadron  the  commands  arc: 

1.  Countei'march  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 

2.  Right  {pv  lc/t)—FACE, 

3.  Mahch. 

At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  places  himself 
three  paces  in  rear  of  the  left  guide  and  faces  to  the  rear. 
At  the  command  march,  all  step  off  together,  the  platoon 
commander  by  the  side,  and  conducting  the  two  leading 
imen,  who  turn  about,  and  march  close  to  the  column. 
When  arrived  near  the  guide,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Halt. 

2.  Left  (or  right) — Face. 

3.  Eight  (or  left)— Dress. 

4.  Feont. 

The  service  of  skirmishers  on  foot  is  the  most  impor- 
tant ;.  and  the  theory  can  thus  be  communicated,  and  in 
a  great  degree  put  in  practice,  with  much  more  facility 
than  when  mounted. 


TITLE  THIRD.' 
INSTRUCTION    ON    HORSEBACK. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOrEK,  MOUNTED. 

T6. — The  object  of  this  school  is  to  make  troopers  skil- 
ful in  the  mauagement  of  their  horses  and  arms.  The-- 
recruit  must  not  pass  from  one  lesson  to  anotlicr  until  lie 
fully  understands,  and  can  execute,  all  which  precedes. 

The  method  prescribed  to  instructors  in  No.  1,  for  giv- 
ing the  lesson,  is  applicable  to  this  school. 

The  instruction  is  always  commenced  at  a  valk  ;  the 
horses,  excited  on  first  leaving  the  stables,  are  tliUB 
calmed,  and  the  trooper  is  assured  in  his  scat.  The  in- 
struction is  also  termiqated  at  a  walk. 

The  most  quiet  and  best  instructed  horses  are  clioscn 
for  the  first  lessons. 

7*7. — When  the  instructor  wishes  to  rest  the  men  he 
commands,  ukst.  At  this  command  the  trooper  is  no 
longer  required  to  remain  motionless  or  restrained.  To 
resume  the  exercise,  he  commands,  attention. 

78. — The  first  lessons  are  given,  if  practicable,  to  each 
man  separatel}^;  spurs  are  not  used. 

The  horse  is  saddled,  and  in  the  snafiie,  the  reins  over 
the  neck ;  he  is  led  to  the  ground. by  ^le  right  hanr.1,  hold- 
ing the  reins  near  the  mouth,  and  his  head  up.  (When 
under  arms,  the  trooper's  sabre  is  hooked  up,  and  un- 
booked when  in  position  in  rank.) 

If  more  than  one,  the  troopers  are  placed  in  a  line  three 
paces  apart. 

Arms  are  not  used  before  the  'Tth  lesson. 


7*2  "  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

FIRST  LESSON. 

rOSITION  OF  THE  TROOPER  BEFORE 
MOUNTING. 

T9. — The  trooper  stands  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  left 
of  tho  horse's  head,  his  breast  on  a  line  with  its  mouth; 
ho. holds  the  reins  with  the  righthand,  at  six  inches  from 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  nails  downward  ;  his  body,  except 
his  right  arm,  in  a  position  of  a  soldier,  No.  6. 

TO  MOUNT. 

80. — The  instructor  commands: 

Pkepake  to  Mount. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  this  command  [when  in  close  order,  numbera  one 
and  three  lead  straight  forward  four  paces,  and  then  all] 
turn  to  the  right,  letting  go  the  reins  with  the  right,  and 
taking  the  left  rein  with  the  left  hand ;  step  two  short 
paces  to  the  rear,  right  foot  leading,  so  as  to  face  the 
saddle  ;  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand,  with  the  aid  of 
the  left,  takes  hold  of  the  reins  over  the  pommel,  feeling 
the  horse's  mouth  sufficiently  to  keep  him  steady,  and 
then  seizes  also  the  pommel ;  drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

2.  Insert  the  fore  part  of  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  with 
the  aid  of  the  left  hand  if  necessary,  and  then  with  that 
hand  grasp  the  horse's  crest  and  mane. 

.  Mount. 
1  time. 

At  this  command,  spring  up  from  the  right  foot  to  an 
erect  posture,  and  instantly  throw  the  right  leg  over, 
taking  yourseat  gently;  take  the  reins  in  the  left  hand, 
and  put  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup. 


Fa<^c  72. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  7* 

Form — Rank. 

At  this  command,  given  wlien  in  close  order,  numbers' 
two  and  four  ride  gently  forward  into  rank. 

TO  DISMOUNT. 

81. — The  instructor  commands  \ 

Prepare  to  Dismount. 
1  time. 

1,  At  this  command,  [when  in  close  order,  numbers 
one  and  three  ride  gently  four  paces  straight  forward, 
dressing  by  the  right,  and  then  all]  grasp  the  reins  with 
the  right  hand,  knuckles  to  the  right,  close  in  front  of  the 
left  hand,  which  lets  go,  and  ali^o  the  right  side  of  the 
top  of  the  pommel,  feeling  firmly  the  horse's  mouth ;  seize 
with  the  left  hand  the  horse's  crest  and  mane  at  a  con- 
venient distance,  at  the  same  time  disengage  the  riglit" 
foot  from  the  stirrup. 

Dismount. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  this  command,  rising  upon  the  left  stirrup,  with 
the  assisting  support  of  the  two  hands,  pnss  the  right  leg 
quickly  over  the  liorse's  croup  to  the  side  of  the  left,  the 
body  for  one  instant  erect,  and  descend  to  the  ground, 
the  heels  together ;  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

2.  Face  to  the  front,  the  right  hand  leaving  the  pom- 
mel, and  slipping  along  the  rein  as  you  step,  left  foot  first, 
to  the  position  of  Stand  to  horse,  'No.  79,  the  right  hand 
grasping  the  reins,  6  inches  from  the  horse's  moulh. 

Form — Rank. 

At  this  command,  given  in  close  order,  numbers  tw© 
and  four  lead  forward  into  rank. 


Tl  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

I'U^ITIOX  OF  THE  TROOPER  MOUNTED. 

-  82. — The  seat  nalnral,  wiLhoiit  drawiug back  the  tliigli ; 
the  legs  liang  vertically  from  the  knees,  and  close  the 
sides  of  the  horse  ;  the  balls  of  the  foot  supported  in  the 
stirrup  ;  the  heels  about  an  inch  lower  than  the  toes ; 
llicse  to  the  fjont ;  the  stirrups  supporting  the  weight  of 
the  logs  in  a  natural  position. 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front ;  the  shoulders 
?nnavc  ;  the  carriage  of  the  body  erect,  but  free  and  unr 
constrained. 

The  curb  reins  held  in  the  left  hand,  the  little  fingi-r 
between  them  ;  they  come  out  over  tlie  forefinger,  where 
they  are  pressed  by  the  thinnb;  the  forearm  grazing  tlie 
side,  and  nearly  horizontal ;  the  hand  about  six  inchc* 
in  front  of  the  body,  and  close  above  the  pommel;  its 
I  :^clc  is  turned  somewhat  under.  The  right  arm  and 
iuAiHl  hang  naturally  at  the  side. 

S3. — Riding  in  the  snaffle,  in  the  first  lessons  oiie  rein 
of. the  snaffle  is  held  in  each  hand,  the  loose  end  coming 
out  over  the  iPorefingcr,  or  with  a  turn  round  it,  tlie 
thumb  pressing  npon  il ;  hands  from  4  to  6  inches  apart, 
a  little  h.igher  than  the  elbows;  the  forearms  touching 
the  sides. 

Si. — The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Bight  (or  left)  Duess. 

2.  Front. 

As  prescribed  in  Nos.  G,  7,  and  8. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  REINS. 

55, — The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  for  the  raove- 
?ncnts  he  is  required  to  exemite,  to  direct  him,  and  iv 
atop  him.  Their  action  should  be  progressive,  and  in 
accordance  with  that  of  the  leg?. 

When  the  trooper  makes  use  of  tbo  reins  the  arras 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  75 

should  act  with  suppleness,  and  their  movementd  ought 
to  extend  from  the  wrist  to  the  shoulder. 


THE  USE  OF  THE  LEGS. 

36. — The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to  snp- 
l)ort  him,  and  to  aid  him  in  turning  to  the  right  and  to 
the  left.  Whenever  the  trooper  wishes  his  horse  to  move 
forward,  he  should  close  the  legs  by  degreos  behind  the 
girths,  causing  their  effect  to  correspond  with  the  sensi- 
bility of  the  horse,  taking  care  neither  to  open  nor  elevate 
the  knees,  of  Avhich  the  bend  should  be  always  pliant. 
The  trooper  relaxes  the  legs  by  degrees,  as  he  closed  Ihera. 

THE  EFFECT  GF  THE  REINS  AND  LEGS 
COMBINED. 

87. — In  elevating  a  little  the  wrists,  and  closing  the 
legs,  the  trooper  "gathers  his  horse;"  in  elevating  again 
the  wrists,  lie  slackens  the  pace  ;  in  repeating  this  move- 
ment of  the  wrists,  he  stops  the  horse,  or  "reins  back." 
Tlie  trooper  ought  to  elevate  the  %yrist3  without  curvirg 
them,  at  the  same  time  draM'ing  tJicra  tov.artls  the  body. 

In  opening  the  right  rein  and  closing  the  right  log,  thci 
trooper  turns  his  horse  to  the  right.  To  open  the  right 
rein,  the  right  wrist  is  carried,  without  turning  it,  more 
or  less  to  the  right,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the 
Jiorse. 

In  opening  the  left  rein,  and  closing  the  left  leg,  tlie 
trooper  turns  his  horse  to  the  left.  To  open  the  left  rein, 
the  left  wrist  is  carried,  without  turning  it,  more  or  le?3 
to  the  left,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse. 

By  lowering  slightly  the  wrists,  the  horse  is  at  liberty 
to  move  forward ;  the  closing  the  legs  determines  the 
movement. 

TO  MARCH. 

88.-- -The  instructor  commando : 


;-0  &CHOOL  OF  TEE 

1.  Forward. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  forward,  elevate  slightly  the  wrists, 
and  close  the  legs,  in  order  to  "gatlier  the  horse." 

At  the  command  march,  lower  slightly  the  wriste,  and 
close  the  legs  more  or  less,  according  to  the  sensibility  of 
the  horse.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists 
and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

89. — If  the  trooper  did  not  gather  his  horse  at  the  pre* 
paratory  command,  the  execution  of  the  second  command 
would  be  too  abrupt  or  too  slow. 

If  the  trooper,  at  the  command  of  execution,  did  not 
commence  by  lowering  the  wrists,  the  horse  would  not 
have  the  liberty  necessary  to  enable  him  to.  move  for- 
ward. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  close  equally  the  legs,  the  horsf 
would  not  move  directly  to  the  front ;  and  if  he  did  not 
close  them  progressiv-ely,  the  horse  would  not  obey  with- 
out irregularity, 

TO  HALT. 

90. — After  some  steps,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad. 

2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  squad,  the  trooper  gathers  hia  horse, 
without  slackening  his  pace. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  braces  himself  in 
the  saddle ;  elevate  the  wrists  at  the  same  time  by  de- 
grees, and  close  the  legs  in  order  to  prevent  the  boree 
from  receding.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  thr 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT,  AND  TO  THE  LEFT, 
FROM  A  HALT. 

OL — ^Tbe  instructor  commands : 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED,  77 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  open  the  right  rein,  and  close 
progressively  the  legs,  until  the  horse  moves.  In  order 
not  to  turn  the  horse  too  short,  perform  the  movement 
upon  a  quarter  circle  3  paces  round. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  slightly  the  wiiists,  and 
hold  the  legs  near,  in  order  to  keep  tlie  horse  straight  in 
tlie  new  direction ;  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

TO  TURN  ABOUT  TO  THE  RIGHT,  AND  TO  THE 
LEFT,  FROM  A  HALT. 

93. — The  instructor  commands  : 

1,  Right  about,  (or  left  about.) 
•2.  March. 
3.  Halt. 

Tiiis  movement  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  turn  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left;  but  the  horse 
passes  over  a  semicircle  of  6  paces,  and  faces  to  the  rear. 

9-1. — In  order  to  make  the  trooper  comprehend  better 
the  movements  detailed,  Nos.  91  and  93,  the  instructor 
places  himself  at  the  shoulder  of  the  horse,  and  describes 
each  movement  on  foot,  in  marking  off  the  arc  of  the  pre- 
•scribed  circle. 

TO  MAKE  A  THIRD  OF  A  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT 
AND  TO  THE  LEFT,  FROM  A  HALT. 

ti5. — The  instructor  comiiiands: 

1.  Right  oblique,  (or  left  oblique.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 


7S  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

At  the  command  right  oblique^  gfither  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  open  a  little  the  right  rein, 
and  close  slightly  the  legs,  in  order  to  make  the  horse 
execute  a  third  of  a  turn  to  the  right. 

The  command  halt  follows  immediately;  elevate  slight- 
ly the  wrists,  and  close  the  legs,  to  keep  the  oblique  di  • 
rection;  replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

90. — The  movements  detailed,  Nos.  91,  93,  and  95,  af- 
ter having  been  executed  to. the  right,  are  executed  to 
the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means. 


TO.  REIN  BACK,  AND  TO  CEASE  REINING  BACK. 

97. — The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Backwards. 

2.  March.  «" 

3.  Squad. 

4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  backwards,  gather  the  horse. 
At  the  command  march,  close  the  legs,  and  at  the  mo- 
ment the  horse  lifts  a  leg  elevate  the  wrists,  with  a  stron- 
ger feel  of  the  mouth.     As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  low- 
er and  elevate  successively  the  wrists,  which  is  called 
yielding  and  checking.     If  the  horse  throws  the  haunches 
to  the  right,  close  the  right  leg;  if  he  throws  them  to  the 
left,  close  the  left  leg.     If  these  means  are  not  sufficient 
.to  replace  the  horse  in  his  proper  position,  open  the  rein 
.  on  the  «ide  towards  which,  the  horse  throws  his  haunches, 
causing  him  to  feel,  at  the  same  time,  slightly  the  effect 
of  the  opposite  rein. 
At  the  command  squad,  the  trooper  prepares  to  stop. 
At  the  command  halt,  lower  the  wrists  and  close  the 
legs.    The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists  and 
the  legs  by  degrees. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  .79 

TO  FILE  OFF. 

98. — The  squad  being  dismounted  as  prescribed,  No. 
81,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  By  the  right  (or  hy  the  left)-y'FiL^  off, 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  file  off,  hook  up  the  sabre,  (when 
in  use,)  and  unhook  the  curb;  retake  the  reins  with  the 
right  hand,  and  replace  the  left  hand  at  the  side. 

At  the  command  jiarcii,  the  trooper  of  the  right  steps 
off  with  the  left  fo«t,  leading  his  horse  to  the  front;  h<^ 
takes  4  steps,  turns  to  the  right,  and  marches  in  the  new- 
direction,  holding  at  the  same  time  the  hand  high  and 
firm  to  prevent  the  horse  from  jumping.  Each  trooper 
executes  successively  the  same  movement  when  the  one 
who  precedes  him  has  moved  4  paces  to  the  front 

The  troopers  conform  to  the  same  principles  to  file  off 
by  the  left. 

SECOND  LESSON. 

99, — The  instructor  may  unite  for  this  lesson  8  trooi)- 
ers,  but  not  more ;  they  are  placed  on  the  same  line  o 
paces  apart;  they  are  without  spurs ;  the  horses  are  sad- 
dled and  in  the  snaffle. 

Two  corporals,  or  instructed  troopers,  are  designated 
to  be  conductors;  they  are  placed  on  the  right  and  on 
the  left  of  the  troopers. 

The  instruction  is  divided  into  several  stages,  commen- 
cing alternately  by  the  right  and  by  the  left. 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  RIGHT  HAND;  TO  MARCH 
TO  THE  LEFT  HAND. 

100.— The  instructor  commands: 

1.  To  the  rights  (or  to  the  left.)    ' 

2.  March. 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

At  these  commands  the  troopers  conform  to  what  m 
prescribed  in  order  to  execute  a  turn  to  the  right  from  a 
halt,  I^To.  91;  then  lowering  the  wrists  and  closing  the 
legs,  march  straight  forward,  and  follow  the  conductor. 

At  the  extremity  of  the  riding-housfr  the  conductor 
turns  to  the  right;  the  ti'oopers  follow,  having  between 
them  the  distance  of  4  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

101. — The  trooper  marches  to  the  right  hand,  when  he 
has  the  right  side  towards  the  interior  of  the  riding- 
house.    He  marches  to  the  left  ha7id  when  it  is  the  left  side. 

The  instructor  follows  the  troopers,  keeping  on  the  in- 
side of  the  track. 

He  observes  that  their  seat  is  not  deranged,  and  warns 
them  to  conform  with  suppleness  to  all  the  motions  of 
the  horse. 

Passing  from  one  trooper  to  another,  he  occupies  him- 
self successively  with  all  the  details  of  the  position  of 
each,  BO  as  to  instruct  without  confusing  them. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT,  AND  TO  THE  LEFT, 
IN  MARCHING. 

102. — The  troopers  follow  the  conductor,  and  make, 
on  arriving  at  the  angles  of  the  riding-house,  a  turn  to 
the  right  (or  to  the  left)  in  marching.  To  turn  to  the  right 
or  left  in  marching,  the  trooper  opens  the  rein  to  the  side 
towards  which  the  turn  is  made,  and  closes  both  leg?,  the 
outer  one  most. 

TO  HALT,  AND  TO  STEP  OFF. 

103. — The  troopers  marching  in  column  on  one  of  the 
long  sides,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad.  * 

2.  Halt. 

Tbe  troopers  stop  as  presci'ibed,  No.  90. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  Sk 

104. — To  recommence  the  marcb,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: 

1.  Forward. 

2.  MARcn. 

The  troopers  move  forward  as  preecribed,  No.  88.  The 
instructor  causes  the  squad  frequently  to  stop  and  to 
move  off,  to  habituate  the  troopers  in  conducting  their 
horses.  He  observes  that  they  do  not  incline  the  body 
too  much  forward  at  the  moment  of  stopping,  and  that 
they  do  not  lean  back  at  the  moment  of  starting.  When 
the  troopers  have  stopped,  he  rectifies  their  position. 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  WALK  TO  THE  TROT,  AND 
FROM  THE  TROT  TO  THE  WALK. 

105. — Tlie  troopers  becoming  habituated  to  the  move- 
ment of  the  horse,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  pass  to 
the  trot.  When  thej  are  in  column  upon  one  of  the  long 
sides,  he  commands^ 

1.  Trot 

2.  March. 

At  tli-e  command  trot,  gather  the  horse  without  in- 
creasing his  gait. 

At  the  command  march,  lower  a  little  the  wrists,  and 
close  the  legs  more  or  less,  according  to  the  sensibility  of 
the  horse.  As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists 
and  the  legs  by  degrees, 

*106. — ^The  in.structQi-  employs  this  gait  at  first  cauti- 
ously, and  at  a  moderate  trot,  that  the  men  may  not  lose 
their  position. 

He  makes  them  understand  that  it  is  in  remaining  well 
seated,  aTid  in  relaxing,  measurably,  all  the  parts  of  the 
body,  especially  the  thighs  and  legs,  that  they  can  ae- 

auire  the  necessary  ease  and  solidity.     He  observes  also 
lat  they  do  not  bear  too  much  upon  the  reins  in  this 
gait 


82  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

When  he  perceives  that  their  position  is  deranged,  he 
causes  them  to  resume  the  walk,  and  even  to  stop. 

107. — To  pass  from  the  h'ot  to  the  walk,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  Walk. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  walk,  gather  the  horse  without  affect- 
ing his  gait. 

At  the  command  march,  elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees, 
and  hold  tlie  legs  near,  in  order  to  prevent  tlie  horse  from 
stopping.  As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists 
and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

CHANGES  OF  HAND, 

108. — When  the  troopers  have  marched  some  time  to 
the  right  hand,  (or  to  the  left  hand,)  to  make  them  change 
bands,  iu  the  breadth  of  the  riding-house,  without  stop- 
ping, the  instructor  commands: 

Jiiffht  (or  /e/0— Turn. 

At  the  command  turn,  the  conductor  turns  to  the  right, 
and  crosses  the  riding-house  in  its  breadth^  followed  by 
the  troopers. 

The  conductor  being  at  two  paces  from  the  opposite 
track,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right) — Turn. 

'  At  the  command  turn,  the  conductor  turns  to  the  left, 
and  follows  the  track. 

All  the  other  troopers  turn  successively  on  the  same 
ground,  ♦ 

The  instructor  causes  these  changes  of  hand  to  be  exe- 
cuted at  a  walk,  and  at  a  trot. 

109. — ^The  in.structor  occasionally  orders  the  reinscar- 
ried  together  in  the  left  hand ;  -when  so  held,  the  trooper, 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  88 

iu  order  to  turn  to  the  right,  carries  the  hand  forward 
and  to  the  right ;  to  turn  to  the  left,  he  carries  the  hand 
forward  and  to  the  left,  the  nails  always  downward. 

TO   TURN  TO   THE  RIGHT   AND  TO  THE  LEFT 
BY  TROOPER,   IN  MARCHING. 

110. — The  troopers  raarching  in  column,  and  having 
arrived  about  the  middle  of  one  of  the  long  sides,  the 
instructor  commands: 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trOoper  executes  a  titrn 
to  the  right  iu  marching,  and  moves  straight  to  the  front. 

The  troopers  being  at  two  paces  from  the  opposite 
track,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Ih  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn 
to  the  right,  following  the  same  principles;  and  all  return 
to  the  track. 

The.  same  movements  are  repeated  to  resume  the  order 
iu  which  the  troopers  were  originally. 

TO  TURN-ABOUT  TO  THE  RIGHT  AND  TO  THE 
LEFT  BY  TROOPER,  IN  MARCHING  ON  THE 
SAME  LINE. 

lll.-7-The  troopers  having  made  a  turn  to  the  right, 
as  has  just  been  explained,  and  having  arrived  near  the 
opposite  tratik,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Right-about  (or  left-ahov.t.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  right-about,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn- 


84  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

about  to  the  right  in  marching,   following  the  princypleis 
prescribed,  No.  102,  and  moves  directly  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  conimaud  march,  at  the  mo- 
ment the  troopers  are  within  2  paces  of  the  track;  the 
troopers  are  then  reformed  in  column  upon  the  opposite 
track,  by  the  movement  of  to  the  right  (or  (o  the  left.) 

TO  TURN-ABOUT  TO  THE  RIGHT  AND  TO  THE 
LEFT  BY  TROOPER,  IN  MARCHING  IN  COLUMN. 

112. — Tlie  troopers  marching  in  column,  and  the  con- 
ductor having  arrived  near  the  end  of  one  of  the  long 
sides  of  the  riding-house,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Right-about  (or  left-about.) 

2.  March. 

At  th-e  command  right-about,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  cx)mmand  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn- 
about  to  the  right  in  marching,  and  moves  forward. 

On. arriving  at  tlic  opposite  short  side,  the  conductor 
turns  to  the  left  without  command;  the  squad  returns  to 
the  order  in  which  it  was  originally,  in  executing  tlie 
inverse  movement 

113. — The  object  of  the  turns  to  the  right,  to  the  k/t, 
rightabout,  and  left-about,  in  this  lesson,  is  to  habituate 
the  troopers  to  turning  in  all  directions  their  horses;  the 
instructor  causes  these  movements  to  be  executed  at  a 
walk  only;  he  not  only  observes  the  squad  generally,  but 
watches  and  rectifies  with  the  greatest  care  the  meanp 
employed  by  each  trooper  in  turning  his  horse. 

In'  the  instruction  to  the  right  hand,  the  turns  to  the 
right,  and  right-about,  are  executed;  and  in  the  work  to 
the  left  hand,  those  to  the  left  and  hft-ahout.  When  the 
troopers  have  become  accustomed  to  these  movementf^, 
the  instructor  causes  them  to  be  executed  in  returning  to 
the  tracks,  by  turns  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  without 
having  regard  to  the  change  of  hand. 

114. — To  rest  the  squad,  the  iustrnctor  causes  the  troop. 


Fa^  S^ 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  85 

era  to  tarn  to  ike  right,  or  to  the  left,  when  they  are  about 
the  middle  of  one  of  the  long  sides  of  the  riding-house, 
and  gives  the  command  halt,  when  they  arc  out  of  the 
track. 

Tlie  instruction  is  re-commenced  by  a  turn  to  the  right 
or  to  the  left. 

To  terminate  the  drill,  the  instructor  commands  the 
troopers  to  dismount  and  file  off. 

m 

THIRD   LESSON. 

115. — When  the  troopers  begin  to  execute  this  lesson 
correctly,  the  instructor  changes  their  horses  each  day 
of  the  instruction,  to  give  them  the  habit  of  managing 
different  horses. 

During  the  rests,  the  instructor  exercises  the  troopers 
in  vaulting  on  and/rom  their  horses,  without  commands, 
and  without  using  the  stirrups. 

To  leap  to  the  ground:  the  trooper,  holding  the  reins 
of  the  snaffle  as  prescribed,  No.  82,  seizes  with  the  left 
hand  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  fingers  well  closed  ;  places 
the  right  hand  upon  the  pommel,  raises  himself  upon  tjie 
wrists,  brings  the  right  thigh  to  the  side  of  the  left,  re- 
mains an  instant  in  this  position,  and  descends  lightly  to 
the  ground. 

To  Imip  on  the  horse :  the  trooper  seizes  the  Vnane  with 
the  left  hand,  places  the  right  hand  upon  tlie  pommel  of 
the  saddle,  springs  up,  raising  himself  upon  the  two 
wrists,  remains  an  instant  in  this  position,  and  places 
himself  lightly  in  the  saddle. 

All  the  movements  in  this  lesson  are  explained  in  de- 
tail by  the  right:  they  are  executed  by  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 

116. — From  12  to  16  troopers  are  united,  and  wear 

spurs. 

The  horses  are  saddled,  and  in  the  snafile. 

The  troopers  are  placed  with  the  horses  at  1  foot  from 

each  other.     Corporals  or  instructed  troopers  arc  placed 


so  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

one  oil  the  ii<<lit,  one  in  the  middle  of  the  rank ;  and  it 
•would  be  well  to  have  one  on  each  flank  of  the  two  di- 
visions. 

The  instructor  makes  tlic  troopers  count  off  by  foure, 
a3  prescribed,  No,  107;  he  then  orders  them  to  mount. 


OF  THE  SPUR. 


117. — The  instructor  exi^lains  to  the  troopers  the  use 
and  the  effect  of  the  spur. 

If  the  hoi'ic  does  not  obe^'  the  legs,  it  is  necessary  to 
employ  the  spur. 

The  spur  is  sometimes  used  to  chastise;  when  neccs- 
aary,  use  it  vigorously,  and  at  the  moment  the  horse  com- 
mits the  fault. 

In  order  to  use  the  spur,  it  is  necessary  to  keep  steady 
the  body,  the  waist,  and  the  wrists;  to  cling  to  the  horse 
with  the  thighs,  and  the  calves  of  the  legs;  turn  the  point 
of  the  feet  a  little  out ;  lower  a  little  the  wrists;  press  the 
spurs  close  behind  the  girths,  without  moving  the  body  ; 
rej)lace  then  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

When  the  troopers  employ  the  spur,  the  instructor  ob- 
serves that  thc}^  do  not  bear  too  much  upon  the  reins, 
whicli  would  counteract  the  effect  of  the  spur.  ^Ile  also 
observes  that  the  troopers  do  not  use  the  spur  unneces- 
sarily.    • 

118. — To  conduct  the  squad  to  the  riding  house,  the 
instrucior  conuuands: 

1.  By  file  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  maucii,  tlie  trooper  on  tlie  right  exe- 
cutes a  turn  to  the  right,  and  moves  forward ;  this  move- 
ment is  executed  by  all  the  other  troopers  successively. 


l'M)eS6. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  ST 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  RIGHT  HAND,  AND  TO 
THE  LEFT  HAND. 

119. — On  reaching  the  opposite  side  of  the  riding-house, 
the  instructor  commands,  right — Turn.  When  the  squad 
is  making  a  turn  from  the  long  to  a  short  side  of  the  ri- 
ding-house,  the  instructor  halts  the  half  of  the  squad  in 
rear,  with  a  corporal  at  its  head,  at  the  angle,  and  orders- 
it  to  move  forward,  when  the  leader  of  the  first  half  of 
the  squad  reaches  the  diagonal  angle. 

The  troopers  preserve  the  distance  of  4  feet  from  head 
to  croup. 

The  conductors  regulate  the  pace  of  their  horses  so  as 
to  arrive  at  the  same  time  at  the  opposite  angles  of  the 
riding  house,  the  conductor  of  the  second  division  regu- 
lating himself  on  him  of  the  first. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  position  of  tlie  troop- 
ers becomes  more  and  more  regular ;  that  they  march  at 
a  free  and  even  pace ;  that  they  keep  their  horses  straight 
and  look  constantly  before  them  in  order  to  maintain 
themselves  in. the  direction  of  the  conductors;  that  they 
preserve  their  distances,  and  recover  them  gradually 
when  lost 

120. — The  instructor  reminds  the  troopers  of  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed,  No.  102,  to  turn  to  the  right  or  to  tiio 
left,  and  directs  them  to  gather  their  horses  a  little  be- 
fore arriving. at  each  corner. 

The  horses  should  not  enter  the  corners  too  far,  neither 
should  they  commence  to  turn  too  soon.  To  pass  a  cor- 
ner to  the  right,  a  turn  to  the  right  is  executed  ;  to  jxiss 
a  corner  to  the  left,  a  turn  to  the  left  is  executed  in 
marching;  the  troopers  should  act  as  if  there  were  no 
walls;  and  as  the  movement  of  each  one  should  be  inde- 
pendent of  the  trooper  who  has  gone  before,  their  hands 
and  legs  alone  should  determine  the  horse  to  go  to  the 
l-ight  or  to  the  left. 


83  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  AVALK  TO  THE  TROT,  AND 
FROM  THE  TROT  TO  THE  WALK. 

121.— The  troopers  marching  in  column  upon  the  long 
sides,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  commence  the  trot. 

Whenever  the  change  is  made  from  a  slow  gait  to  one 
more  rapid,  as  from  the  walk  to  the  troU  it  is  necessary 
to  coaimeiice  slowly,  and  increase  it  gradually  to  the  de- 
gree prescribed. 

The  troopers  marching  in  column  at  the  trot  upon  the 
'long  sides,  the  instructor  causes  tliem  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

Whenever  the  change  is  made  from  a  lively  gait  to  one 
more  slow,  as  from  the  trot  to  the  walk,  it  is  necessary  to 
commence  the  last  gait  gradually. 

The  squad  passes  frequently  from  the  walk  to  the  trotf 
and  from  th«  trot  to  the  walk,  in  oi'der  to  accustom  th« 
troopers  to  the  changes  of  gait, 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION  IN  THE  BREADTH  OF 
THE  RIDING-HOUSE. 

122. — ^The  instructor  causes  the  change  of  direction  in 
the  breadth  of  the  riding-house,  as  prescribed  for  the 
changes  of  hand,  No.  108,  taking  care  to  give  the  com- 
mand in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  the  columns  from 
meeting  at  the  end  of  the  change  of  direction. 

The  change  of  direxstion  ought  to  be  executed  so  as 
neither  to  stop  nor  ch^ck  the  rear  of  the  column;  the 
troopers,  and  particularly  the  conductors,  ought  to  turn 
without  slackening  the  pace,  aiding  th-emselves  not  only 
with  their  hands,  but  also  with  thejir  legs. 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION  OBLIQUELY  BY 
TROOPER. 

123. — ^The  squad  changes  direction  in  the  length  of 
the  riding-house ;  and  as  soon  as  all  the  troopera  have 
turned,  and  are  in  -the  same  direction,  the  instructor 
commands ; 


JNS. 


12  -i2j«ia  <ia  <ia  <2i 


c^ 

a 


1 

<a 


B5>  ea^  ffl--  s>  ea>  H> 


^ 


%r  S'S 


jr^  76 

Jhfe 

c§ 

1 

/C 

4 

,.■      e 

■  ■.-■■■.■  J 

/V.J 

V    , 

%/; 

.•■/■;■  5 
//■^ 

■ 

»/'■• 

/■v-/|c        /■,■ 

.'fi 

%■■ 

30/''  /  .' 

■■.■'•'a 

%/; 

mi 

/■/■■   W/^- 

■■/9 

%.  / 

y     ^/// 

■■■-fi 

?•,■■■ 

»■/■■/■. 

,.s 

i/ 

&■■'/■ 

•^a 

• 

i 

0-  />- . 

/rfi 

—   » 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  8» 

1,  Column, 

2.  Halt. 

The  troopers  stop  at  the  same  time,  keeping  their 
horses  i^raight  and  at  their  distances. 

The  instructor  causes  tlie  troopers  to  make  an  oblique 
turn  to  the  right  or  to  the  left  from  a  halt,  as  prescribed, 
No.  96.    , 

This  movement  being  executed,  the  instructor  assures 
himself  of  the  exactness  of  the  dircctioBs  and  the  inter- 
vals, and  then  commands: 

1.  Squad, 

2.  March. 

The  troopers  march  at  the  same  gait,  each  in  the  di- 
rection he  has  taken. 

"When  they  arrive  at  1  foot  from  the  track,  the  in- 
structor commands: 

.  Forward. 

At  this  command,  make  an  oblique  turn  to  the  left  ia 
advancing,  in  order  to  follow  the  track. 

The  iustruotor  causes  these  movements  to  be  repeated  * 
without  hailing;  for  this  purpose,  after  having  commen- 
ced the  change  of  direction  in  the  length  of  the  riding- 
house,  as  soon  as  the  two  ranks  are  in  column,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

1.    FORWABT). 

At  the  command  right  oblique,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  execute  an  oblique  turn  to  the* 
right ;  having  taken  this  direction,  keep  the  legs  equal- 
ly near,  and  march  straight  forward  at  the  same  gait. 

At  the  command  forward,  turn  to  the  original  direc- 
tion on  the  track. 


90  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

TO  MARCH  IN  A  CIRCLE. 

124. — "When  the  conductors  have  passed  about  a  third 
of  the  long  sides,  the  instructor  commands; 

1.  In'clrcle  to  the  right,  (or  left.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  conductors  turn  to  ride 
on  circles,  touching  the  two  tracks  of  the  long  sides;  the 
troopers  exactly  following  them. 

Every  horse  should  bend  to  the  curve  he  is  to  pass 
over;  the  trooper  keeps  him  in  its  direction  by  the  inner 
rein,  supporting  him,  at  tlie  same  time,  with  the  outer 
leg- 
To  resume  the  direct  march,  when  the  conductors  are 
at  the  track,  the  instructor  commands: 

Forward. 

125. — To  reunite  the  troopers  in  order  to  conduct 
them  to  the  quarters,  the  instructor  causes  thera  to  close 
to  the  distance  of  2  feet. 

The  column  having  arrived  in  the  yard  of  the  quar- 
ters, the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Left  into  line, 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  marce,  the  first  trooper  turns 
to  the  left  and  moves  straight  forward. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  stops. 

All  the  other  troopers  execute  a  turn  to  the  left  suc- 
cessively, when  they  are  nearly  opposite  the  place  they 
are  to  occupy  in  the  rank,  and  halt  abreast  of  it. 

To  terminate  the  exercise,  the  instructor  gives  the  com- 
mand to  dismount,  and  to  file  off,  as  prescribed,  No.  98, 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  91 

FOURTH  LESSON. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  TO  THE  LEFT,  BY 
TROOPER,  IN  MARCHING. 

126. — The  instructor  canseB  this  movement  to  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed,  No.  110,  at  the  commands:  1.  To 
the  right ;  2.  March;  observing  that  the  troopers  march- 
ing in  two  columns,  the  preparatory  command  ought  to 
be  given  so  as  to  command  march  at  the  moment  the 
conductors  arrive  opposite  to  the  last  trooper  but  one  of 
the  other  column. 

The  troopers  move  straight  forward,  preserving  their 
gait  and  their  direction,  so  that  each  one  may  find  be- 
fore him  the  interval  and  the  place  he  is  to  occupy  in  the 
column  on  the  opposite  track. 

In  passing  into  the  intervals,  the  legs  should  be  kept 
near,  to  prevent  the  horse  slackening  his  gait. 

The  instructor  attaches  much  less  importance  to  t¥e 
uniformity  of  these  movements  than  to  the  manner  in 
which  each  trooper  conducts  his  horse. 

This  is  executed  also  at  the  trot. 

TO  TURN  ABOUT  TO  THE  RIGHT,  OR  TO  THE 
LEFT,  THE  TROOPERS  MARCHING  ON  THE 
SAME  LINE,  (OR  ABREAST.) 

127. — The  instructor  causes  these  movements  to  be  ex- 
ecuted as  prescribed.  No.  Ill,  the  troopers  of  the  two  di- 
visions passing  by  the  intervals  at  the  middle  of  the  ri- 
ding-house. 

TO  TURN  ABOUT  TO   THE  RIGHT,  OR  TO  THE 
LEFT,  THE  TROOPERS  MARCHING  IN  COLUMN. 

128. — ^The  instructor  causes  these  movements  to  be  ex- 
ecuted as  prescribed.  No.  112. 
In  each  column,  the  last  trooper,  who  becomes  the 


92  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

head  of  the  column,  should  pay  attention  not  to  slacken 
the  gait  in  making  bis  movement,  in  order  not  to  retard 
the  others. 

This  principle  is  equally  applicable  to  the  troopers 
who  take  the  head  of  the  columns  in  re-entering  upon  the 
tracks. 

TO  PASS  SUCCESSIVELY   FROM   THE  HEAD  TO 
THE  REAR  OF  THE  COLUMN. 

129. — ^To  make  the  troopers  masters  of  their  horses,  to 
force  them  to  use  both  the  reins  and  the  legs ;  also,  to 
accustom  the  horses  to  leaving  each  other,  the  instructor 
requires  tbe  troopers  to  pass  from  the  head  to  the  rear  of 
the  column  ;  each  one,  becoming  in  his  turn  conductor, 
regulates  himself  accordingly. 

This  movement  is  executed  successively  in  the  two  col- 
umns, at  a  simple  warning  from  the  instructor,  by  two 
right  about  (or  left  about)  turns. 

The  trooper  designated  to  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  col- 
umn gathers  his  horse  and  executes  the  movement  in  ad- 
vancing so  as  not  to  retard  those  who  are  behind  him. 
He  holds  the  outer  leg  near,  in  order  not  to  describe  a 
semicircle  of  more  than  6  paces  ;  he  marches  then  paral- 
lel to  tlie  column,  and  when  he  has  re-entered  upon  the 
track  by  a  second  turn,  he  closes  to  the  distance  of  4  feet 
from  the  last  trooper. 

The  trooper  who  follows  and  who  becomes  conductor 
should  gather  his  horse  and  direct  him  with  the  outer 
rein  and  the  inner  leg,  to  prevent  his  following  the  horse 
which  has  left  the  column. 

The  instructor  also  requires  the  troopers  to  leave  the 
column,  without  commencing  at  the  head.  In  this  case, 
he  directs  the  troopers  who  follow  the  one  designated  to 
close  to  the  prescribed  distance  ;  or  if  he  thinks  proper, 
in  order  to  habituate  the  troopers  to  holding  in  their 
horses,  he  causes  the  place  of  the  absent  trooper  to  con- 
tinue vacant. 

When  the  troopers  have  been  thus  misplaced,  tbe  jn- 


TROOPBR,  MOUNTED.  93 

Htrnctor  halts  the  aquad,.  and  directs  each  tpoop€r  to  rc- 
fnrn  to  his  place  before  passing  to  another  movcraent 

nW^Vr  HALTED,  TO  COMMENCE  THE  MOVE  AT 
A  TROT. 

130 —The  troopers  being  in  column   upon  the  lonff 
^ido?,  the  instructor  commands:  ^        I'l^iong 

1.  Fonaard,  frof, 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  hors^ 
At  the  command  mahch,  lower  (he  wrist.^  and  close  the 
-i,'s  progressively :  as  soon  as  the  horse  obey^    rordaee 
1  he  wriets  and  the  legs  by  degrees.  "  ^ 

MARGHTNC  AT  A  TROT.  TO  HALT. 

ini.--Thc  troopen  mnrching  at  a  trot,  and  in  colnmr 
vipmi  the  long  sides,  the  instructor  commands :     '  '""'^' 

1.  Column. 

2,  Halt. 

At  the  command  column,  gather  ilio  lior^-^ 
-At  the  command  halt,  eloValc  the  wrists  by  degree^ 
until  the  horse  s  ops  ;  and  hold  the  legs  alvva^-s  ne?  fo 
keep  him  straight  and  to  prevent  his  stepping  back 
Uv  degrees  '""^  '^''''^^'  replacethe  wrists7nd!he?^; 
^Ijie'instructor  requires  all  the  trooper.,  to  .setoff  frcelv 
WM-: /ro  at  the  command  MAucir,  and  to  ston  n  tf 
gether  ^T,thout  jostling,  at  the  command  haiS  ^  "" 

T(»  PASS  FROM  THE  TROT  TO  THE  TROT-OUT 
>,,AND  FROM  THE  TROT-OUT  TO  THE  TROT  ' 

132.— The  troopers  marching  at  tlu:.  trot,  and  in  eol 
«mn  npon  the  long  sides,  the  instructor  commands! 


H  SCHOOL  OP  THB 


TROT- OUT. 


At  this  command,  lower  a  little  the  wrists  and  cloee 
the  legs  progressively ;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  re- 
place the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

The  gait  being  lengthened  to  a  suitable  degree,  the  in- 
structor sees  that  the  troopers  keep  their  horses  up  to  it. 

He  pays  particular  attention  to  the  position  of  the 
troopers.  He  reminds  them  that  it  is  in  holding  the 
body  erect,  having  a  light  hand,  the  loins  supple,  and  in 
allowing  the  thighs  nnd  legs  to  fall  nnturally,  they  can 
diminish  the  effect  of  the  reactions  o!"  the  horse,  and  con- 
form more  readily  to  all  his  motions. 

To  prevent  the  horses  from  over-reaching,  it  is  neeet* 
sary  to  raise  the  wrists  and  close  more  or  less  the  lege. 

The  lengthened  gait  is  executed  only  during  one  or  twe 
turns  towards  each  hand ;  in  continuing  it  longer,  the 
horses  lose  their  steadiness,  and  the  equality  of  their 
gaitfl  is  destroyed. 

To  pass  from  the  irot-oztt  to  the  trot,  the  instructor 
»;ommands: 

£L0W  TROT. 

At  this  command,  elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees  and 
ilone  the  legs,  to  prevent  the  horse  from  taking  the  walk; 
as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  tb« 
legs  by  degrees. 

TO  PASS  FROM  THE  TROT  TO  THE  GALLOP. 

133. — When  the  troopers  have  acquired  some  supple- 
ness and  confidence,  and  preserve  at  the  trot  an  easy  and 
regular  position,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  make  a 
few  turiiB  at  the  gallop.  He  does  not  explain  to  them  at 
first  the  mechanism  of  this  gait,  neither  the  means  of  as- 
Buring  its  regularity ;  he  only  requires  that  each  trooper 
accommodates  himself  to  the  motions  of  his  horse  without 
losing  his  seat. 

Before  commencing  this  exercise,  nnd  when  the  2d  di- 


..W/; 


I  ; 


'^A 


<E3 


3 
C 


c 

3 


:-J 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  §6 

vision  arrives  upon  one  of  the  Bhort  Bides  of  the  riding- 
house,  it  is  formed,  by  causing  the  troopers  to  front  and 
HALT,  as  prescribed,  No.  125,  paying  attontion  to  make 
them  move  forward  6  paces  from  the  track. 

Tlie  troopers  of  the  1st  division  continue  to  march 
talce  betvrecn  thorn  the  distance  of  4  paces,  pas^  to  th' 
{rot,  and  commence  successively  the  gallop,  at  the  indi- 
cation of  the  instructor,  as  follows : 

Riding  to  the  right,  on  approaching  the  corner,  lengtli- 
<*n  the  trot,  and  gather  the  horse  ;  then  feel  both  reins  to 
the  left,  and  close  the  right  leg;  throwing  the  weight  to 
the  leti,  and  leaving  the  right  shoulder  entirely  free. 

The  horse  having  taken  the  gallop,  hold  a  light  hand 
and  the  legs  near,  to  keep  him  at  this  gait. 

After  one  or  two  turns  at  the- most,  the  troopers  paw 
from  the  f/allop  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk. 
The  instructor  makes  them  change  hand  in  the  breadth 
of  the  riding-liousc,  and  recommence  the  same  exercist' 
to  the  left  hand.  The  troopers  of  the  tirst  division  are 
then  formed  as  those  of  the  second,  upon  the  other  short 
Bide. 

The  troopers  of  the  2d  division  go  through  with  th*> 
same  exercise. 

TO  PABSAGE  TO  THE  RIGHT  OR  TO  THE  LEFT, 
THE  HEAD  TO  THE  WALL. 

134.— The  two  columns  marching  at  the  walk  upon  tbe 
long  sides,  the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed  the  move- 
ment  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  as  prescribed,  No.  1 2i\ ; 
but  he  causes  the  troopers  to  halt  when  the  horses  reach 
the  opposite  track,  their  heads  to  the  wall,  and  he  com- 
n^ands: 

1.  Right  {qv  left)  pass. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  right  pass,  bear  the  shouldei-s  of  th«= 
fiorse  to  tbe  right,  in  opening  a  little  the  right  reins. 


n  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

This  mavenuiit  is  only  preparatory;  it  iudictitos  to  the 
trooper  that  the  shoulders  of  Iiis  horse  slioulJ  always 
commence  the  march,  and  precede  the  movement  of  tlie 
haunches. 

At  the  command  xlvrcq,.  open  the  right  rein  to  ijielinp- 
liie  horse  to  the  rights  closing  at  the  same  time  the  left, 
leg  that  the  haunches  may  follow,  without  leaning  the 
body  to  the  left;  make  use  of  the  left  rein  and  the  right 
ug  to  support  the  horse  and  moderate  his  movement. 

■  After  bome  steps  upon  the  si<le,  the  instructor  halts  the 
s«]uad. 

At  the  conimaud  halt,  cause  to  cease  insensibly  the  ef- 
fect of  the  right  rein  and  the  left  leg,  en:ploying\he  op- 
ijosite  rein  and  leg  ;  straighten  the  hoicc  and  replace  th« 
.vvri:?t8  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  passage  to  the  left,  and  to  halt,  employ  the  pam.e 
{■dnciplcs  and  iii verse  means. 

J 35, — ^The  vnstrnetor  tauses  this  movement  to  be  exe- 
cuted in  the  commencement  by  each  man  separately,  and 
lli*.:i  by  all  at  the  same  time.  He  explains  to  each  on^e 
\he  means  to  be  employed. 

The  trooper  f^houUl  hold  his  horse  obliquely  to  the 
tra.'k.  to  render  his  movement  more  easy.  He  ought  to  • 
conjirience  this  movement  moderately,  and  look  to  the 
side  towards  which  he  passes,  without  inclining  the  body 
to  the  oppoaile  side,  which  would  derange  his  seat  and 
,;cns'train  the  movement  of  the  horse. 

The  ItorsQ  having  obeyed  the  aids,  th-2  trooper  should 
keep  up  the  efteet  by  gentle  means. 

If  the  liorsc  steps  Too  quickly  to  the  side  towards  which 
the  trooper  .pf?«^«es,  diminish  the  effect  of  the  right  u^'ia 

and  kft  \cg.  .         ,  ,i   ..  • 

If  the  horse  moves  forward  ajjainst  t!ie  wall,  it  is  ne- 
/•eesary  to  diminish  the  effect  of  the  legs,  and  incrense 
•',.,t  of  the  hands,  in  yielding  and  checking  the  horse  al- 
U:raalely,  . 

If,  on  the  contrary,  he  steps  back,  it  i^  necessary  to  in 
creaae  the  effect  of  the  legs  and  diminish  that  of  the  hands, 


TROOPER,  JI0UNT1:D.  9T 

inclining  nhva}  s  the  sboiili^lers  of  the  horse  to  the  side 
towardu  wliich  he  passes;  for  it  is  gonernlly  the  con- 
fitraint  that  he  experiences  when  the  movement  of  th»' 
ehouldora  does  not  precede  that  of  the  haiiuchca,  ^vhi^■h 
causes  him  to  back. 

TO  TASSAGE  TO  THE  RIGHT,  OR  TO  THE  LEFT, 
BEING   IN  COLUMN. 

136. — After  having  executed  the  passages,  the  head  io 
the  wall,  tlic  troopcr.-s  having  rcfuruod  to  iho.  track,  and 
mnrching  to  the  right  hand  ov  to  the  left  hand,  the  in- 
^?tructol•  orders  a  change  of  direction  iu  the  longtli  of  {ham 
riding  house;  and  when  the  two  eojumns  are  "by  the-side  * 
of  each  other,  he  hal(,s  l!iem  and  causes  them  to  execut" 
passage  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.)  ^ 

Whou  the  trooper.5  have  nearl}'  arrived  at  the  track, 
the  instructor  halts  them  again. 

The  horses  being  quioteti,  he  orders  the  pn&sage  to  th«^ 
left,  and  each  trooper  returns' to  the  place  he  occupiej 
before  halting  in  the  middle  of  the  riding-house. 

When  the  trooper.-i  have  reached  the  track,  tJic  in- 
structor may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  cause  them  to  march 
iu  column  upon  this  same  track,  in  order  not  toJicep  thi" 
horses  too  long  at  the  movement  of  passing. 

137. — When  the  troopers  "haYC  passed,  the  head  to  the 
toall,  the  instructor  cau'^os  them  sometimes  to  rein  bacl\ 
and  to  cease  reining  back,  as  prescribed,  No.  97. 

1S8.— During  the  last  days  of  this  lesson,  (he  instruc- 
tor requires,  from  time  to  time,  the  reins  to  be  held  iu 
tlie  left  hand,  so  that  tlie  troopers,  conducting  their  lior- 
ces  with  this  hand  alone,  may  be  somewhat  prepared  for 
the  exercises  in  llie  cmb  bridle.  He  observes  that  each 
troops*  keeps  himself  square  upon  the  horse. 

139.— To  terminate  the  lesson,  and  return  to  quarters, 
tlie  instrij^tor  conforms  tawhat  is  prescribed,  No.  125. 

110. — The  troopers  being  proficient  in  the  third  and  ' 


&8  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

tbui'th  lessons,  tliey  are  repeated  wiihout  stirrups ;  these 
being  crossed,  nfttr  mouutiug,  iu  front  of  the  saddle. 


riFTII  LESSON. 

141. — The  same  number  of  troopers  are  united  as  for 
t!;e  third  lesson. 

The  horses  arc  saddled  and  in  both  curb  and  suafiie. 
tn  all  other  respects  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  Ifo. 
I  ]  5,  and  following. 

.   The  troopers  are  conducted  to  the  riding-house  as  pre- 
jScribed,  ^o.  118. 

In  entering  the  riding-house  the  instructor  conforms 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  119;  and  when  the  two  col- 
umns are  upon  the  long  sides,  and  exactly  opposite,  he 
commands : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  Makch. 

3.  Halt. 

lie  explains  then  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand  as 
prescribed,  No.  82. 

TO  TAKE  THE  SNAFFLE  IN  THE  RIGHT  HAND. 

142. — The  inbtructor  commands: 

Snaffle — In  right  hand. 

I  Cifne. 

Xi  the  last  part  of  the  command  grasp  the  snafllo  at 
Ihe  middle  of  the  rcijis  with  all  the  lingers  of  the  right 
hand,  the  nails  downward,  without  lowering  the  bodj; 
hold  the  reins  of  the  snafHc  over  those  of  the  curb,  and 
lower  the  left  hand  bo  as  not  to  bear  upon  the  hiU 

143. — In  using  alternately  the  curb  and  snaffle,  the 
trooper  relieves  T,he  bars  of  th(*-hor3e'8  mouth  ;  lie  shouW 
never  use  both  ut  the  same  time. 


TROOPEK,  MOUNTED..  -» 

The  troopers  are  required  to  take  the  Bi.nffle  in  tbo 
rit'-bt  hand  during  tbie  commencement  of  the  exercise  in 
[he  curb  bridle,  in  order  to  make  the  change  of  position 
of  the  rider  less  abrupt,  and  to  bring  up  his  right  side, 
which  is  apt  to  remain  in  rear. 

TO  DROP  THE  SNAFFLK 

144. — The  instructor  commands: 

Drop — Snaffle. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  snaffle,  re- 
place the  left  hand,  and  4et  fall  the  reins  of  the  snaffle  at- 
that  tliey  will  be  under  those  of  the  curb,  the  right  band 
to  the  aide. 

TOE  PRINCIPAL  MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  BRIDLE 
HAND. 

*     145. — lu  raising  slightly  the  hand   and   drawing  it  iit 
lo-wards  the  body,  the  trooper  gathers  his  horse ;  in  draw- 
ing it  in  still  more,  the  gait  is  made  slower.     By  increa 
»iug  the  effect  of  the  hand,  the  horse  is  stopped  ;  if  in- 
ereased  still  more,  the  horse  is  reigned  back. 

In  lowering  slightly  the  hand,  the  horse  is  at  liberie 
i4,^  move  forward. 

tn  carrying  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right,  tUe 
liorse  is  turned  to  the  right. 

In  carrying  the  band  forward  and  to  the  left,  the  hore^ 
id  turned  to  the  left. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  the  bridle  hand  resumes- 
it-s  original  position. 

lu  all  the  movements  of  the  hand,  the  arm  should  act 
freely,  without  comtnunicating  conslraiat  to  the  shoulder 
or  body;  the  effect  of  the  curb  being  more  powerful  than 
that  of  the  snaffle,  it  should  be  used  progressively,  par- 
ticularly in  stopping  and  reining  back. 

The  instructor  causes  the  following  movements  to  be 
executed  by  the  con^mands  prescribed  in  the  first  lesson, 


100  SCHOOL  OF  THB 

V  ♦»r. -TO  GATHER  THE  JIORSE. 

14C. — Elevate  elightly  the  hauil,  drawing  it  at  lli«» 
SiiiiQe  time  towards  tlie  body,  ftod  close  the  lega. 

TO  MARCH. 

14V. — Lower  sliglitly  tbo  Land,  the  wrist  always  op 
posite  the  middle  of  the  body,  aud  close  the  legs  pvogrei-- 
!-ively.     As  soon  aa  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  hand 
and  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  HALT. 

.  148. — Th<j  trooper  braces  himself  in  the  saddle;  olevatt 
the  hand  by  degrees  in  drawing  it  in  towards  the  bodX: 
and  close  the  lega  to  keep  the  horse  straight  and  j>revenl 
him  from  stepping  back.  As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  re- 
place the  hand  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT  IN  MARCHING. 

1-49. — Carry  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right,  ac-"" 
cording  to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse;  dose  the  legs,  t)i* 
left  leg  the  most.  The  mo.veuient  being  nearly  liniished, 
replace  the  hand  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  TURN  TO  THE  LEI-T  IN  MARCHING. 

■"  150. — Carry  iho. hand  forward  and  to  the  left,  acootd- 
ing  to  the  sensibility  of  the  horso;  doge  the  leg'^,  the  right 
leg  the  most.  The  movement  being  nearly  linished,  r<'- 
place  the  hand  and  legs  by  degrees. 

TO  TURN-ABOUT  TO  THE   RIGHT  AND  TO  TH  K 
LEFT  MARCHING. 

151. — The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  h 
lurn  to  the  riglit,  or  to  the  left^  observing  (n  pass  over  u 
scmicii-cle. 


TKOOPER,  MOUKtED.  U'l 

TO  MAKE  AN  OBLIQUE  TURN  TO  THE  RIGHT 
AND  TO  THE  LEFT  MARCUING. 

162. — ^The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  t* 
turn  to  the  riglil,  or  to  tlie  left,  observing  thftt  tlie  nioVe- 
ment  of  the  h.uul  does  not  require  the  horse  to  do  raoF< 
than  make  a  third  of  a  turn  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left. 

TO  REIN  BACK",  AND  TO  CEASE  REINING  BACK. 

lofi. — The  same  priuijiples  as  prescribed  for  the  hal:, 
observing,  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  to  lower  audrais*r 
the  hand  alternately  that  the  movement  may  bo  regular. 

To  cease  reining  back,  relax  the  effect  of  the  hand  nn'l 
close  tlie  legs  ;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  .replace  tb'. 
hand  and  the  legs  by  degrees.. 

15L — The  instructor  does  not  require  these  different, 
movements  to  be  executed  simult-nneoualy,  but  obBcrves 
particularly  the  manner  in  which  each  trooper  cmi)loys 
his  bridle  hand.  He  always  rectifies  it-s  position  beforv 
pa&sing  from  one  movement  to  another. 

EXERCISE  OF  THE  FOURTH  LESSON  WITH  THE 
^  CURB  BRIDLE. 

165. — When  tlic  troopers  begin  to  understand  th* 
movements  of  the  bridle  hand,  the  instructor  caiises  them 
to  march  upon  the  track,  first  ac  lite  walk,  and  then  at 
the  trot.  lie  requires  the  squad  frequently  to  lialt.to 
move  off,  to  change  direction,  and  to  execute  suceessivei 
ly  the  different  movements  of  tlie  fourth  lesson,  observim'; 
that  each  trooper  makes  an  exact  application  of  the  prii.- 
cifdcB  prescribed  when  at  a  hnlt. 

The  habitual  fault  with  the  troopers  being  to  carry 
the  left  hand  forward,  and  to  throw  back  the  riglit  slioul- 
der,  tUo  instructor  is  particular  in  requiring. thj^m  to  keep 
Mie  hand  above  the  pommel  of  the  sai]d]e  withp^it  jlc- 
ranging  the  position  o(  ihe  body.  -  •  • 


102  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

TO  PASSAGE  TO  THE  RIGHT,  AND  TO  THE  LEFT. 

156. — The  instructor  causes  the  squad  to  passage  to 
VUe  right,  and  to  the  left,  the  head  to  the  wall  and  in 
column.  • 

To  passage  to  the  right,  bear  the  slioulders  of  tlw 
liorso  to  the  right,  by  inclining  the  hand  to  the  right,  at 
the  same  time  bear  sufficiently  on  the  bit  to  prevent  the 
liorse  from  njoving  forward ;  close  th«  left  leg  that  the 
haunches  may  follow,  keep  the  right  leg  near,  to  sustain 
I  he  horse. 

In  order  to  cease  passaging,  stvaighten  the  horse,  hold 
tJ\e  right  leg  near,  and  replace  theliand  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

To  passage  to  the  loft,  and  to  cease  passaging,  employ 
the  same  principles,  but  inverse  means. 

"SIXTH  LESSON. 

PIllNCIPLES  OF  THE  GALLOP. 

157. — A  horse  gallop*  on  the  right  foot,  when  the  right 
fore  and  bind  leg  move  in  advance  of  the  left  fore  and 
iiiud  leg.  This  gait  is  generally  divided  into  three  dis- 
tinct times  or  treads.  The  It^t  time  is  marked  by  the  loft 
hind  foot,  which  reaches  the  ground  first;  the  2d  by  th« 
lert  fore  and  wght  hind  foot,  which  touch  at  the  same  in- 
,i*tant ;  and  the  3d  by  the  riglit  fore  foot. 

A  horse  gallops  ou  the  left  foot  when  the  loft  fore  and 
hind  big  move  in  advance  of  the  right  fore  and  hind  leg. 
In  this  case,  the  right  hind  foot  first  reaches  the  ground, 
then  the  right  fore  and  left  hind  foot,  and  lastly  the  left 
fore  foot. 

A  horse  gallops  (rue  when  he  gallops  on  the  right  foot, 
in  exercising  or  turning  to  the  right  hand,  and  on  the  left 
foot,  in  exercising  or  luriJing  to  the  left  hand. 

A  horse  gallops  false  when  he  gallops  on  the  left  foot, 
in  exercising  or  turning  to  the  right  hand,  and  on  the 
r'ght  foot,  in  exercising  or  turning  to  the  left  hand. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  104 

A  horse  is  "disunited"  when  he  gallops  with  the  near 
lore  leg  followed  by  the  off  hind  leg,  or  with  the  off  fore 
lea;  followed  by  the  near  hind  leg. 

When  the  horse  is  disunitcil,  the  trooper  experiences 
in  his  position  irregular  movements;  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  the  horse  is  deranged,  and  hig  strength  impaired. 

EXERCISE  AT  THE  GALLOP  UPON  RPGHT  tiNES. 

158. — When  the  troopers  preserve  in  the  Ith  lesson 
their  proper  position  nt  the  gallop,  they  are  taught  to 
move  off  on  a  straight  line  to  either  hand. 

After  the  troopers  of  the  2d  division  are  formed,  as 
proscribed,  No.  133,  the  instructor  causes  the  men  of  the 
front  rank  to  take  the  distance  of  4  paces  from  each  oth- 
er; these  troopers  marching  to  the  right  hand  upon  one  of 
Hie  long  sides,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Gallop. 

2.  March.  .  - 

At  the  command  gallop,  gather  the  liorsc,  increasing 
the  pressure  of  the  legs,  and  restraining  him  witli  tli« 
reins. 

At  the  command  march,  carry  the  hand  slightly  to  thd 
left,  feeling  both  reins  equally,  to  enable  the  right  shoul- 
der to  move  in  advance  of  the  left,  and  close  the  right; 
leg.  "The  horse  having  obeyed,  hold  a  light  hand  and 
the  legs  i^ear,  to  keep  him  at  his  gait.  To  make  him  gal- 
lop on  the  left  foot  inverse  means  are  used. 

159. — The  instructor  requires  the  troopers  to  be  calm, 
to  conduct' their  horses  with  mildness,  auH  particularly 
to  preserve  a  light  hand  that  the  gallop  may  be  free  and 
regular. 

During  the  first  days  of  the  exercise  at  the  gallop,  the 
t  roopers  are  required  to  take  the  reins  of  the  suafde  ih. 
the  right  hand,  in  order  to  calm  their  horses;. this  is  dis- 
eontinned  wlien  they  have  acquired  th6  habit  of  mana- 
ging thti\i  with  the  curb  bridle  alone, 


.01  SCHOOL  OF  TifE 

To  prctioi've  llic  movenicnl  ot'  tlie  horsfvtrue,  it  is  ne- 
CL?-iivy  for  the  trooper  to  accoinmo<late  himself  to  all  hh 
niolluus,  j>articularly  in  passing  the  corners,  where  the 
slightest  dera-ngcment  in  the  scat  would  render  the  action 
»>f  the  horse  irregular. 

When  a  horse  gallops  false,  if  to  ttie  right,  the  troop<:i' 
will  feel  both  reins  to  the  left,  in  order  to  bring  hi^ 
weight  to  that  side,  the  horse's  h<>ad  reinaioing  bent  t<^ 
ihe  right,  and  close  firmly  his  left  leg,  to  bring  his  haun- 
elies  in  again,  and  then  as  iu  Ko.  luH. 

IC)0. — The  troopers  are  pcrniittol  to  make  only  a  tiU'B 
Mi-  two  at  iho  gallop  to  each  h;and,  and  always  required 
\<>  pa-s  to  the  Irot  or  walk  iu  order  to  change  hand. 

When  the  horses  have  become  quiet,  and  the  troopers' 
begin  to  mannge  them  well,  the  distance  between  tl>ern 
is  gradually  diminished  to  4  feet.- 

The  '2d  tli vision  is  carried  through  the  same  exeroise-, 
*and  tht^n  both  at  the  same  time. 

EXERCISE  AT  THE  GALLOP  ON  THE  CIRCLE. 

1»11. — AVhon  the  troopers  have  been  siifRciently  exor- 
cised at  the  ff all 02)  upon  straight  lines,  theinsJructor  cau- 
res  them  to  make  a  few  turus  on  the  circle,  following  "the 
prineipicr,  pr.escribed,  IS'o,  X24. 

Till"? -exercise  i.=;  c-omnienced  on  very  larga  circles;  tl>f 
diameter  is  dimiiiished  as  the  troopers  become  mor* 
stilful. 

,   To  tcrtriiuate  the  lesson,   and  return  to  the  quarter*. 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No,  129. 

SEVENTH  LESSON. 

1G2. — ^The  same  number  of  troopers  compose  tiic  squad 
a=^  for  the  6tli  lesson;  they  have  their  arms. 

The  in-truclor  is  mounted.  He  has  an  assistant  iiv 
etructor. 

The  assL^^tant  iustructor,  also  nioviutcd,   is  armed  lik«» 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  105 

the  troop«i*t>,  in  orJcr  to  execute  tlie  maviual  of  nrms,  a* 
jivcQ  in  detail  by  tho  iustructor. 

HXERCISE  OF  THE  SIXTH  LESSON,  WITH  THE 
SABRE  ONLY. 

163. — ^Tl)e  flist  days  of  the  Vth  lesson  ure  employed  m 
»'t^>cating  all  the  niovcmcnts  of  llie  Cth,  the  troopers  be- 
ing nrmed  with  the  ?abre  only.  The  troopers  arc  then 
tnniished  with  nil  the  arms.  Before  commencini^  the 
manual  of  nrius,  a  few  movements  atVie  v;alJc  ai\^  i!<9 
trot  are  executed,  in  order  to  calm  the  horses;  during  the 
remainder  of  the  lesion,  the  exercise  at  a  hall  js  inter- 
rupted by  movements  at  the  different  gaits.  The  ili- 
*tructor  requires  them  to  be  executed  with  the  greatest 
'regularity,  so  that  tlie  troopers,  in  learning  to  manage 
their  arms,  perfect  them-.elvei?  at  tho  same  tiiftein  con- 
d noting  their  horses.  ••«■*# -•-^■;*  v 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS  AT  A  1L\LT. 

!  04.— The  troopers  are  formed  by  the  commanda  paoxi 
imd  HALT,  as  prescribed,  Xo.  125,  and  are  4  inches  from 
knee  to  knee. 

The  instructor  commands: 

T>rav} — Babrev 
2  tw)e!9. 

U)o. — 1.  At  the  command  draw,  incline  oli^ditly  the 
head  to  the  left,  carry  the  right  hand  above  tlie  rein?. 
f  ngagc  the  wri?t  in  the  .sword-knot,  seize  the  gripe,  dis- 
«agage  the  blade  6  inches  from  the  scabbard,  and  trrn 
the  head  to  the  froiil. 

2.  At  the  commaud  .sabric^  draw  quickly  the  sabre, 
raising  the  arm  to  its  full  length  at  an  angle  of  45  de- 
grees, the  sabre  in  a  straight  line  with  the  arm;  hold  the 
<abre  in  this  position  an  instant,  then  carry  it  to  the  right 
'boulder,  the  back  of  the  blade  supported  agalns^  tlie- 


IOC  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

hollow  of  Ihe  shoulder,  the  wriet  upon  the  t^p  of  thp 
thigh,  the  little  linger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 

Present — Sabrb. 

1  time. 

1C3. — At  the  command  SAimE,  carry  the  sabre  up  ami 
to  the  front,  the  thumb  opposite  to  and  6  inches  from 
the  nect;  the  blade  perpendicular,  the  edge  to  th«  left., 
the  thumb  along  the  right  side  of  the  gripe,  the  littlo 
finger  joined  to^the  other  three. 

Carry — Sabrk. 

1  time, 

167. — At  the  command  sabre,  replace  the  gabre,  tJie 
back  of  the  blade  supported  against  the  hollow  of  th« 
m^houlder,  the  wrist  upon  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh,  the 
little  finger  outside  of  the  gripe. 

Charge — Sabre. 

1'  time,  2  motions. 

168. — 1.  At  the  command  babre,  raise  the  hand  in 
tierce  as  high  as  the  right  ear  and  1  inchea  fi'om  it,  tba 
right  shoulder  and  elbow  well  back,  the  thumb  on  the 
back  of  the  gripe,  the  point  of  the  sabre  to  the  front  and 
slightly  below  the  horizontal,  the  edge  up. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front,  the  edge  up,  the  arm  at  its  full 
extent 

Carry — Sabre, 
1  time, 

169. — At  the  command  babre,  draw  back  the  arm  and 
replace  the  sabre  as  in  No.  165. 

Return — vSabre. 

2  times, 

170.— 1.  At  the  command  rf/itrn,  execute  th«  more- 
ment  of  preser^t  »abre.  '     '   , 


2f'JS. 


/k^  /i?0 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  10-? 

2.  At  the  command  SAr.r.K,  carry  the  wrist  opposite  t<> 
and  6  inches  from  the  left  shoulder,  lower  the  blade  in 
passing  it  near  the  left  arm,  the  point  to  the  rear,  raising 
at  the  same  time  the  right  liand;  incline  the  hefld  sliglil- 
ly  to  the  left,  and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the  mouth  of  th** 
scabbard;  return  the  blade,  disengage  the  wri.-t  frotn 
the  sword-knot,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  commands; 

Draw — PiBTOT., 
17 1. — This  is  executed  as  prescribed,  K"o.  62. 

TO  FIRE  THE  PISTOL. 
The  instructor  commands : 

Rkady. 
172. — This  is  executed  as  in  No.  03. 

Aim. 

1  time. 

178. — This  is  executed  as  in  No.  64. 

Fire, 

1  time. 

174. — At  this  command,  fire,  and  raise  pistol. 

175. — At  the  position  of  aim,  the  instructor  may  com- 
mand, raise — pistol  ;  the  men  will  rafie  the  pistol  tt>  t^e- 
position.  No,  62.  If  the  pistol  is  not  fired,  at  the  com- 
mand return — pistol,  first  let  down  the  hammer. 

.  • 

176. — ^To  cock  the  pistol  rapidly,   without  the  use  ol' 

the  left  hand,  whilst  pressing  back  the  hammer  with  th« 
right  thumb,  to  assist  its  action  throw  forward  the  muz- 
zle with  a  quick  motion, 

TO  LOAD  THE  PISTOL. 

177. — ^The  horses  must  be  quiet ;  at  the  position  of 
raise  pistol,  the  instructor  command^* 


Va  SCHOOL  OP  THB 

Zoau  at — "Wjij« 

'  At  tlji9  command,  let  the  roins  rest  on  the.  portYnel, 
::h]f  code  the  pietol,  take  it  by  the  stock  'svith  the  left 
hnnJ,  the  gr.r:r  1  ti>  the  right,  nncl  lower  it  until  the  hand 
•.''?ts  upon  tho  inner  side  of  the  left  thigh,  the  butt  of  th* 
£  Istol  toucliin:^  the  ."addle,  tho  hand  and  cylinder  restinj^ 
Hgainet  the  s*;de  of  the  pommel,  the  pistol  being  inclined 
to  clie  front  and  right;  with  the  right  hand  take  a  cnr- 
trlde  and  place  it  in  a  chamber,  tnrn  the  cylinder  and 
force  in  the  ball ;  repeat  this  until  all  the  chambers  are 
Ipaded.  Then  hold  the  pistol  against  the  right  side  of 
the  pommel,  pointing  downward,  to  the  right  and  front, 
and  put  on  tlie  caps.     Take  the  i)0!^\iior\'oi'  raii^e  pi fitoL 

Rehirn- — Pistoi  . 

,1'?8. — At  the  coinmandprsTOL,  place  it  in  the  hokler^ 
and  button  the  flap. 

The  manr.al  of  a  -ecoud  pistol  carried  in  a  saddle  hol- 
ster is  th-c  same ;  whore  it  is  furnished,  the  manual  nxnin 
tod  applies  to  it;  and  it  will  be  the  fiwt  used. 

IN.SPF.CTrOX  OF  ARMS. 

179.— The  inbtrnctor  comiv.ands: 

Inspection — Pistot.. 
»  1  I'mu^  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  PISTOT,,  draw  the  pistol  and' iak? 
the  position,  raise — pistol. 

2. . Lower  the  pistol  into  the  left  hand,  to  half  cock  it 
then  hold  it  by  the  right  hand  vertical,  guard  to  tho 
-left,  about  three  inches  above  the  bridle  hand,  in  front 
of  the  micMle  of  tlie  body  ;  the  right  fore-arm  touehioij 
the  side. 

3.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  bridle  hand,  to  let  down  th> 
hammer,  return  it  to  the  holster  or  belt,  button  the  iJap, 
and  bring  the  right  hand  to  the  side. 

The  instmctor  commanda: 


TROOPER,  MOUNTIT.  10^ 

Inspection — Sabrb. 

1  time,  T  motions, 

180, — 1.  At  the  command  sabre,  execute  the  first  time 
of  drato  sabre. 
2.  Execute  the  eeoond  time  of  draw  sabre. 
8.  Present  sabre. 

4.  Move  the  thumb  to  the  back  of  the  gripe,  turn  it  in 
the  hand,  the  edge  turning  by  the  front  to  the  right.   - 

5.  Carry  sabre. 

6.  Execute  the  first  time  of  return  sabre. 

7.  Ileturn  the  sabre. 

181. — "When  troopers  execute  correctly  the  inspection 
of  arms,  they  are  exercised  at  it  without  detail,  at  the 
command : 

Inspection — Arms. 

At  this  command  tlie  troopers  execute  the  first  and  se- 
cond motions  of  ijiapection  of  pistol. 

As  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  the  man  on  Lis 
left,  each  trooper  execiites  the  third  motion  of  inspe€tio?i 
of  pistol,  and  the  first  and  second  motions  of  inspection 
of  sabre. 

Each  trooper,  as  the  inspector  reaches  him  the  second 
time,  executes  the  third  and  fourth  motions  of  inspection 
of  sabre. 

As  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  the  n§xt  man  od 
his  left,  he  executes  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh  motions 
of  inspection  of  sabre;  the  inspector  governs  himself  as  in 
No.  73. 

SABRE  EXERCISE,  AT  A  HALT. 

182. — ^The  troopers  marching  at  a  walk  in  two  columns, 
the  instructor  causes  them  to  take  the  distance  of  two 
paces  one  from  another,  and  when  the  two  columns  are 
OB  the  long  side,  he  commands:  1.  yh  the  right,  (or  left.) 
2.  Makch,  3.  Halt.  He  causes  them  to  exercise  the 
sabre  exercise,  as  taught  on  foot. 


110  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

EIGHTH  LESSON. 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS,  IN  MARCHING. 

183. — Tlie  troopers  are  requTred  to  draw  sabre,  ntid  to 
return  sabre,  "while  marclung  in  column  at  a  wplk. 

The  instructor  obseiTes  that  neither  tlie  seat  nor  the 
position  of  the  bridle-hand  is  deranged.  He  also  re- 
quires the  troopers  to  keep  the  legs  near,  in  order  to 
prevent  the  horses  from  slackening  the  gait.  When  the 
troopers  have  the  sabre  down,  the  instructor  observes 
that  they  do  not  throw  back  the  right  shoulder. 

As  the  troopers  become  more  skilful,  they  are  required 
to  draw  sabre,  in  marching  first  at  the  trot,  and  then  at 
the  gallop.  They  also  take  the  position  of  chanje  sabre, 
in  marching  at  the  different  gaits. 

The  sabres  arc  returned  in  marching  at  a  lealk;  for 
this  purpose  the  troopers  are  directed  to  support  the 
1  ack  of  the  blade  against  the  left  arm,  until  the  point 
Las  entered  the  scabbard. 

The  troopers  are  exercised,  sabres  draioji,  in  turning  to 
the  right  and  to  the  left  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop,  and 
to  the  right-about  and  left-about  at  the  trot  only. 

SABRE  EXERCISE  AT  ALL  GAITS. 

184. — The  troopers  execute  progressively,  at  the  dif- 
ferent gaits,  the  exercise  of  the  sabre,  taking  care  to  pre- 
serve between  each  other  a  distance  of  2  paces. 

LEAPING. 

185. — For  this  exercise  the  width  of  the  ditch  should 
Toe  from  3  to  6  feet,  and  the  height  of  the  bar  or  fence 
frona  1  to  3  feet.  The  width  and  height  of  each  are  in- 
creased as  the  troopers  and  horses  become  more  habitua- 
ted to  leaping. 

The  instructor  forma  the  squad  80  paces  in  rear  of  the 
obstacle. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  Ill 

At  the  warning  of  the"  instructor,  each  trooper  moves 
off  at  a  loalk,  directs  liis  march  towards  the  obstacle,  and 
at  a  third  of  tlie  way  commences  the  trot. 

TO  LEAP  THE  DITCH. 

186. — On  arriving  near  the  ditch,  give  the  hand  and 
close  the  legs,  to  force  the  horse  to  make  the  leap.  The 
moment  he  reaches  the  ground,  raise  slightly  the  Jiand 
in  order  to  sustain  him. 

TO  LEAP  THE  FENCE. 

18*7. — On  arriving  near  the  obstacle,  rein  up  the  horse 
slightly  and  close  the  legs, '  At  thfc  moment  of  making 
the  leap,  give  the  hand,  and  elevate  it  slightly  as  soon 
as  he  reaches  the  ground  on  the  other  side. 

The  trooper,  in  leaping,  should  cling  to  thehorseVilh 
the  thighs  and  calves  of  the  legs,  taking  care  to  lean  a 
little  forward  as  the  horse  is  in  the.act  erf  springinn;,  and 
to  seat  liimself  well  by  leaning  to  the  rear  at  the  mo- 
ment the  horse  reaches  the  ground. 

188. — Each  trooper,  after  having  made  the  leap,  con- 
tinues to  move  at  the  trot,  and  tjflces  his  place  in  the  rank 
which  is  formed  SO  paces  beyond  tlie  obstacle,  taking 
care  to  pass  to  the  walk  just  before  halting. 

During  the  first  days  of  this  exercise  the  troopers  leap 
without  arms;  the  horses  i>idden  on  the  snixffle. 

"When  the  troopers  have  leaped  without  arms,  they 
repeat  the  same  exercise  with  arms,  and  finally  with  the 
sabre  drawn. 

The  horses  employed  in  the  scliool  of  the  trooper  should 
be  trained  and  accustomed  to  leaping.  If,  however,  a 
horse-refuses  to  leap,  the  instructor  aids  the  trooper  with 
the  whip. 

INDIVIDUAL  CHARGE. 

189. — ^To  exercise  the  troopera  at  the  charge,  they  are 
conducted  to  the  extremity  of  a  ground  which  presents 


112  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

a  course  of  surticieut  extent  without  obstacle.  There 
they  are  formed  in  line  and  required  to  draw  the  sabre. 

The  instructor  fdaces  himself  150  paces  in  front  of  the 
right  of  the  troopers;  a  corporal,  60  paces  further;  and 
a  corporal  or  trooper,  20  paces  bej'ond  him ;  he  serves 
as  the  point  of  direction  for  the  trooper  on  the  right. 

The  assistant  instructor  remains  at  the  point  of  depar- 
ture, to  see  that  the  troopers  move  bff  one  after  another, 
and  ^peat  to  them  what  they  are  required  to  do. 

To  execute  well  the  charge,  the  troopers  should  be 
careful  to  march  strnight  forward,  not  to  change  the  gait 
before  arriving  at  the  points  indicated,  and  to  increase 
or  diminish  the  gait  calmly. 

Each  trooper  marches  15  paces,  and  takes  the  trot. 

Having  trotted  50  paces,  the  assistant  instructor  com- 
jnands  the  gallop. 

"When  h&  reaches  the  instructor,  the  latter  commands: 

CUAUGE. 

At  this  command,  quicken  the  gallop  to  nearly  full 
speed,  keeping  the  horse  at  the  same  time  under  control; 
bear  upon  the  stirrup,  and  take  the  position  of  charge 

SABKE.  ♦ 

Abreast  of  the  corporal  the  trooper  retakes  the  trot 
and  carries  the  sabre. 

At  10  paces  from  the  second  corporal  he  takes  the  ivalk, 
and  halts  abreast  of  him. 

All  the  other  troopers  execute  successively  the  same 
movement,  the  assistant  instructor  causing  each  one  to 
set,  off  when  the  trooper  who  precedes  him  has  halted. 
Each  trooper  takes  for  his  point  of  directjon  the  place  he 
is  to  occupy  in  the  rank,  and  places  himself  on  the  left  of 
tke  troopers  already  formed. 

190. — The  first  charge  being  completed,  the  instructor 
breaks  the  squad  by  file  to  the  right,  and  reforms  in/a- 
cing  to  the  rear,  by  the  commands  front  and  halt. 

The  troopers  thoc  charge  in  the  opposite  direction  on 
the  same  principles. 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED.  118 

'191. — The  charge  should  bo  executed  only  twice  the 
same  day.  It  usually  terminates  the  exercise  ;  after  exe- 
cuting it  the  squad  marches  at  a  ival/c  a  sufficient  time 
to  enable  the  horses  to  becomCcalin  before  entering  the 
stables. 

CIRCLING  OX  THE  FOREHAND  AND  HAUNCHES, 
AND  DEMI-PIROUETTE. 

192. — The  troopers  are  now  taught  on  instructed  hor- 
ses to  circle  on  the  forehand  and  haunches,  and  the  de- 
ini-pirouctte,  conforming  to  Article  7,  Title  1st,  all  el 
which  article  they  are  mode  to  understand  and  practice. 

The  practice  of  new  horses  at  the  paces  for  manoeuvre 
is  made  useful  for  the  instruction  of  the  recruits,  as  well 
as  for  their  practice  in  riding. 

TARGET  PRACTICE. 

193. — For  the  target  practice  on  horseback,  the  target 
should  be  8  feet  high  and  8  feet  broad  ;  at  6  feet  of  its 
height  it  is  marked  with  a  black  band  3  inches  wide, 
with  a  square  at  its  centre — white. 

The  troopers  are  first  practiced  at  10  paces,  firing  at  a 
halt,  to  the  front,  right,  left,  and  rear. 

In  tiring  to  the  front,  aim  directly  over  the  horse's 
head,  as  in  that  position  a  smaller  mark  is  presented  to 
an  enemy,  and  the  trooper's  person  is  partly  covered  by 
the  horse. 

The  distance  is  increased  to  20,  80,  40,  and  to  50 
paces. 

Afterwards  the  ti-oopers  are  exercised,  at  the  same 
distances,  at  the  toalk. 

In  firing  the  troopers  must  not  halt,  or  at  all  change 
gait  or  direction. 

They  are  then  practiced  ab  the  same  kind  of  target, 
and  on  the  same  principles  at  the  trot. 

For  the  most  advanced  practice,  a  cylindrical  post,  12 
inches  in  diameter,  and  8  feet  higli,  will  be  use^  i^a  a 


114  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

target,  a  barrier  will  extend  out  12  feet,  so  as  toroqufi*e 
tke  trooper  in  passing  to  ride  rather  more  than  that  dis- 
tahce  off;  In  a  line  with  the  target,  and  parallel  with 
the  track,  a  small  post  will  be  set  up,  10  paces  on  each 
side. 

The  troopers  will  first  be  exercised  a  little  at  a  ^oalk, 
and  at  a  trot.  The  trooper  will  be  instructed  first  to 
inarch  past  with  the  target  to  his  right,  and  wilhoiit 
disturbing  the  motions  of  his  horse,  to  fire  to  the  right 
front,  choosing  his  point  anywhere  from  the  small  post 
to  the  barrier. 

Next  he  will  pass  with  the  target  on  his  left,  firing  to 
the  left  front,  at  any  point  in  his  course  between  the 
small  post  and  the  barrier. 

Next  he  will  pass,  with  his.  right  to  the  target,  and 
iire  between  the  barriers  and  the  small  post,  to  his  right 
rear. 

Finally,  with  his  left  to  the  target,  he  will  fire  to  his 
left  rear,  within  the  prescribed  limits  of  his  course. 

This  practice  at  a  gallop  is  the  final  and  principttl  ex- 
ercise of  the  target  firing. 

.EECORD  AND  REPORTS  OF  TARGET  FIRING. 

194. — Beside  the  foregoing  progressive  instruction  for 
recruits,  there  will  be  target  firing  in  eveiy  three  months 
in  every  squadron ;  on  each  occasion,  the  best  practiced 
troopers  firing  at  least  12  shots  mounted;  every  member 
of  the  squadron,  not  a  capital  prisoner,  will  join  in  the 
exercise. 

There  will  be  a  record  of  target  firing  in  each  squad- 
ron kept  in  a  book,  giving  the  name  and  performance  of 
each  member.  In  the  s^rnu/Jweaswrc,  each  miss  at  dis- 
mounted practice  counts  24  inches,  at  mounted  practice, 
30  inches. 

The  book  will  be  in  printed  blanks  of  the  folio wiiig 
form,  and  ruled  for  the  number  of  members  of  the  squad- 
rons, (companies,)  viz: 


TROOPER,  MOUNTED. 


115 


C5 


* 


s 


5-a 


C  3 


J2;  <n 


e« 


a> 


:3*:;    o 


116  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

195. — On  the  1st  of  May  and  1st  of  November,  annu? 
ally,  the  captains  will  report  to  the  regimental  com- 
mander an  abstract  giving  the  totals  from  this  record. 
At  the  same  time  he  will  make  report  of  the  names  of 
the  first  and  second  best  performers  of  the  squadrou,  at 
the  gallop  practice  at  the  round  target. 

On  receipt  of  these  reports  the  commander  of  the  regi- 
ment shall  publish,  in  regimental  ordere,  the  first  and 
second  best  squadrons,  and  the  names  of  the  two  best 
3ihot8  in  each  squadron  of  the  regiment. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  >  IIT 


SCHOOL  or  THE  PLATOON,  MOUNTED. 


1%. — ^The  troopei-8  being  sufficiently  instructed  to 
manage  their  horses  and  use  their  arras,  are  passed,  to 
the  school  of  the  platoon,  the  object  of  which  is  to  teacti 
thein  to  exercise  properly  together,  and  execute  all  the 
movements  of  the  platoon  in  the  squadron,  whether  in 
eolumn  or  in  line. 

Each  movement,  after  having  been  correctly  executed 
by  the  right,  is  repeated  by  the  left. 

When  the  movements  are  all  executed  at  the  walk,  the 
instructor  causes  them  to  be  repeated  at  the  trot,  requir- 
ing always  the  same  simultaneous  action  and  the  same 
precision.  This  gradation  is  also  followed  for  the  exer- 
eise  at  the  gallop;  but  the  horses  are  not  kept  a  long  lime 
at  this  gait. 

The  platoon  is  composed  of  frt)m  1"2  to  24  men,  inclu- 
ding 2  corporals;  the  instructor  moves  wherever  his  pre- 
sence is  most  required;  the  platoon  is  under  arms. 

197.^— The  platoon  formed  in  line,  the  troopers  at  the 
head  of  their  hordes,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Attentiok. 

2.  Right — Dress. 

3.  Front. 

He  then  commands^: 

Count  fours. 

At  this  command,  the  men,  in  a  firm  voice,  commen- 
cing on  the  right,  count,  one,  two,  three,  four,  from  righA 
to  left.  «  - 


lis  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

The  troopers  tbcu  mount  by  the  thnes,  and  without 
explanation.    • 

ARTICLE  FIRST, 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  ALIGNMENT. 

198. — The  troopers,  to  align  themselves,  should  regu- 
late their  shoulders  upon  those  of  the  men  on  the  side  of 
the  alignment,  and  for  this  purpose  they  should  turn  the 
head,  remaining  square  upon  their  liorses,  and  so'corroct 
their  positions  as  just  to  perceive  the  breast  of  the  se- 
cond trooper,  from  them,  and  keep  the  horses  straight  in 
the  ranks,  that  all  may.  have  a  parallel  direction. 

SUCCESSIVE  ALIGNMENT  OF  FILES  IN  THE 
PLATOON. 

199. — The  two  files  ^  the  right  or  of  the  left  are 
moved  forward  10  paces,  and  aligned  parallel  to  the  pla- 
toon by  the  commands:  1.  Two  files  from  right  (or  left) 
forward;  2.  Marcb;  3,  Halt;  4.  Right  {ov  left)  T>b.vs»\ 
5.  ^RO^T. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  By  file — right  (or  left)  Dress. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  files  move  forward  succes- 
sively and  steadily,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  lo  the 
right,  and  taking  the  last  st^ps  slowly,  in  order  to  arrive 
abreast  of  the  files  already  formed  without  passing  be- 
yond the  alignment,  observing  then  to  halt,  give  the 
hand,  relax  the  legs,  and  keep  the  head  to  the  right  un- 
til the  command  front. 

Each  file  executes  the  same  movement  when  the  pre- 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  119' 

ceding  one  has  carrived  on  the  base  of  aligumont,  so  that 
only  one  file  may  align  itself  at  the  same  time. 
At  the  command  fr<>nt,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

200. — When  the  ti-oopers  execute  correctly  these  align- 
ments, this  instruction  is  repeated  in  giving  the  two  files 
of  the  right  an  oblique  direction.  For  this  purpose,  the 
two  files  having  marched  forward  4  paces,  as  has  been 
prescribed,  execute  a  half  turn  to  the  rigltt^  or  to  the  Uft, 
and  march  C  paces  in  this  new  direction. 

The  platoon  being  unmasked,  the  remainder  of  the 
movement  is  executed  by  the  commands  aud  following 
the  principles  prescribed,  No.  199,  each  file,  as  it  arrives 
nearly  opposite  the  place  it  is  to  occupy,  executes  a  lialf 
turn  to  the  right,  or  to'iJtc  left,  so  that  having  left  tlie 
platoon  by  one  straight  line,  it  arrives  upon  the  new 
alignment  by  another. 

201. — The  two  files  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  are 
made  to  rein  back  4  paces,  and  align  themselves  parallel 
to  the  platoon  and  opposite  the  place  they  occupied  in 
it,  by  th«  commands:  1.  Two  files  from  right  {ov  left) 
backwards;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right  {ov  left)  DRme; 
5.  Front. 

The  instructor  commands : 

1.  By  file — right  (or  left)  backward — Dress, 

2.  Front. 

At  the  command  tjress,  each  file  reins  back  successive- 
ly, keeping  perfectly  straight,  the  troopers  turning  the 
head  to  the  right,  and  passing  q,  little  to  the.  rear  of  the 
files  already  formed,  in  order  to  come  up  abreast- of  them 
by  a  movement  to  the  front,  which  renders  the  align- 
ment more  eas}-. 

At  the  conunand  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  alignment  of  the  rear  gives  the  means  of  repairing 
a  fault  by  returning  to  the  alignpient  when,  it  has  been 
passed  over;  but  it  should  be  avoided  as  much  as  possi- 
ble. .        ^ 


120  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

202. — The  alignment  is  then  executed  by  twos  (or  by 
fours.)  For  this  purpose,  the  two  or  four  files  of  the  right 
move  forward  as  has  beeu  prescribed,  and  the  instructor 
conomande  : 

1.  By  twos  (or  bi/ fours) — rigJU  (or  le/i) — Dcess. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  files  align  themselves  suc- 
cessively by  twos  (or  by  fours)  following  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  alignment  by  file,  being  particular  to 
set  out  and  arrive  upon  the  alignment  together. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

203. — The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  align 
themselves  on  the  breast  of  the  second  man  towards  the 
side  of  the  alignment,  and  not  upon  the  extremity  of  the 
rank,  (which  would  prevent  their  remaining  square  in 
their  seats;)  that  they  are  neither  too  much  opened  nor 
closed.  The  troopers  are  also  required  to  align  them- 
selves promptly,  that  the  horses  may  not  be  kept  a  long 
time  gathered. 

204. — When  a  platoon  is  not  aligned,  it  arises  from 
the  fact,  generally,  that  the  horses  are  not  straight  in 
the  ranks. 

When  a  platoon  dresses  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing 
is  in  rear,  it  is  presumed  that  most  of  the  horses  are 
turned  to  the  left ;  it  is  necessary  to  observe  if  this  is 
the  case,  and  to  command  the  troopers  to  carry  the  hand 
slightly  to  the  ri^ht,  at  the  same  time  closing  the  right 
leg,  which  brings  the  horse  upon  the  alignment. 

When  a  platoon  dresses  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing  is 
in  advance,  it  is  presumed  that  the  horses  are  turned  to 
therigUt;  the  troopers  are  then  req,ui rod  to,  carry  the 
iiand  to  the  left,  closing  at  the  same  time  the  left  log, 
•which  causes  the  horse  to  step  back  to  his  proper  place* 

In  dressing  to  the  left  the  same  faults  are  corrected  by 
inverse  means. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  121 

205. — During  the  alignment,  the  instructor  places liim- 
self  in  front  of  the  troopers,  to  be  assured  that  they  exe- 
cute the  movement  steadily,  and  do  not  turn  tiie  head 
more  than  is  prescribed;  that  they  preserve  their  inter- 
vals of  4  inches  between  the  knees;  that  thoy  take  the 
last  steps  slowly;  that  they  align  themselves  without 
losing  time  as  they  arrive;  an4  that  the^-  give  the  hand 
and  replace  the  logs  immediately  after  being  aligned. 

206. — The  instructor  insists  upon  all  these  principles; 
but  the  alignments  will  be  occasionally  interrupted  by 
marches  in  eolumn,  in  order  to  calm  the  horses. 

ALIGNMENT  OF  THE  PLATOON. 

207. — The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  places 
the  corporal  of  the  flank  on  which  he  wishes  to  align  it 
in  such  a  position  that  no  trooper  will  be  forced  torein. 
back,  and  commands; 

1.  Right  (or  /^T?)— Dkess. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dress,   all  the  troopers  align  them- 
selves promptly,  but  with  steadiness. 
At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

208. — In  all  the  alignments,  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cer on  the  flanks  of  platoons  align  on  each  other,  with- 
out respect  to  the  individual  alignment  of  the  troopei*8. 

TO  BREAK  THE  PLATOON  BY  FILE,   BY  TWOS, 
AND  BY  FOURS. 

209. — The  platoon  being  in  line  the  instructor  com^ 
mands: 

1.  By  file,  by  ttoot,  (or  by  fours.) 

2.  Mabcs. 


122  SCnOOL  OF  THE 

At  the  first  commnnd,  the  first  file,  or  files,  gather  their 
horso^. 

At  the  command  MARcn,  the  right  file,  or  set  of  twos 
or  fours,  motes  straight  to  the  front ;  the  next  moves  for- 
v,-aY<},  when  the  croups  of  tlie  horses  of  tlie  first  are  even 
■vs'it  h  the  heads  of  their  horses,  or — which  is  liie  same — 
when  the  first  file  or  set  has  marched  o  paces ;  they  march 
;;  paces  straight  to  the  front,  then  make* an  individual 
oblique  turn  to  the  right,  (SO  degrees,)  march  in  that  di- 
rection until  they  are  in  column ;  then  they  make  an  ob- 
lique turn  to  the  left  to  follow  the  first;  the  other  files  or 
sets  do  the  same,  in  succession. 

.  A  second  set  of  fours,  commencing  the  oblique  move- 
ment one  length  behind  the  first,  marches  2-1  feet,  and 
gains  20.78  feet  to  the  front,  to  enter  the  column;  losing 
the  fraction  in  the  two  turns,  there  will  be  4  open  feet 
between  them ;  the  same  difference  in  the  distances  to  bo 
marched  exists  with  other  sets.  This  is  the  distance  to 
be  preserved,  in  each  of  the  three  columns. 

If  the  platoon  be  marching,  at  tlie  command  march, 
the  right  four,  or  two, .move  on:  and  all  the  others  halt, 
and  then  proceed  as  described. 

DIRECT  MARCH  IN  COLUMN  BY  FILE,  TWOS. 
AND  BY  FOURS. 

210. The  troopers  sbould  keep  their  horses  straight, 

and  their  eyes  to  the  front;  marching  exactly  behind 
each  other  in  the  column,  preserving  the  distance  of  4 
feet  from  croup  to  head.  The  greater  the  depth  of  the 
column  the  more  attention  is  necessary  to  the  equality 
of  the  gait,  and  the  preservation  of  distances. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  set,  right  in  front, 
or  on  its  right,  left  in  front,  is  guide  of  the  colunm ;  he 
moves  straight  forward,  and — ^when  the  platoon  is  led — 
preserves  a  gait  which  keeps  the  set  one  pace  behind  the 
chief  of  the  platoon.  The  troopers  behind  him  are  the 
guides  of  their  sets ;  they  preserve  the  distance ;  and  the 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  128 

others  align  themselves  on  him,  preserving  from  tlmt  side 
their  intervals. 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION. 

211. — The  column  marching  by  file,  twos,  or  four?,  the 
instructor  commands : 

ie/if— Turn;  or,  Tti^Af— Turn. 

At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  the  leading  trooper, 
or  set,  gathers  the  horses. 

At  the  command  turn,  the  leading  set  turns,  the  pivot 
taTjing  care  not  to  slacken  his  gait,  and  to  march  over  a 
quarter  circle  of  five  paces  extent,  thus  gaining  both  to 
Uie  front,  and  to  the  new  direction,  a  distance  of  10  feet. 
The  trooper  on  the  opposite  side  trots — increasing  his  gait 
so  that.tlic  set  shall  be  squarely  aligned duiiiig the  turn ; 
the  dressing  is  to  this  side ;  intervals  are  preserved  from 
the  pivot.  Having  made  a  full  turn,  the  troopers  who 
have  increased  their  gait  resume  the  same  gait  they  had 
been  marching,  and  which  is  preserved  by  the  pivot?. 

Each  fraction  marches  steadily  to  the  point  where  the 
first  commenced  the  turn ;  and  it  should  be  explained  to 
them  that  the  distance  on  the  outer  flank  must/  properly 
be  much  increased  during  the  turn.  The  pivots  are  apt 
to  lessen  their  speed,  which,  with  the  error  of  attempt- 
ing to  preserve  distance  unchanged,  causes  those  in  rear 
gradually  to  oblique. 

TO  HALT,  AND  TO  COMMENCE  THE  MARCH  IN 
COLUMN. 

212. — The  column  marching,  the  instructor  commands : 

Column — Halt. 
To  move  off,  the  instructor  commands : 
jFbrwart?— March. 


TW  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

INDiyiDUAL  OBLIQUE  MARCH. 

213. — The  column  marcliing  by  file,  by  twos,  or  by 
fours,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  Marcu. 

At  the  command  march,  eacli  trooper  executes  indi' 
vidually  a  third  of  a  turn,  or  face,  to  the  left,  without 
checking  his  motion. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  set,  who  is  guide  of 
the  column,  moves  straight  forward  in  the  new  direc- 
tion ;  the  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  of  the  other  sets, 
who  is  its  guide,  moves  forward  also  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, keeping  in  a  perpendicular  line  to  the  proper  front, 
passing  through  the  guide  of  the  column,  and  moving 
in  a  parallel  direction  with  him. 

The  other  troopers  having  turned,  ancj  marching  in  a 
parallel  direction  with  their  guide,  align  by  him  and 
keep  .their  persons  in  a  line  parallel  with  that  of  their 
front  before  commencing  to  oblique ;  thus  the  horse's 
head  of  each  will  be  opposite  the  shoulder  of  the  next 
horse  towards  the  guide,  who,  during  the  movement,  is 
always  on  the  flank  towards  whicli  the  oblique  march 
is  made. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction  the  instructor 
commands : 

Forward. 

At  this  command  the  troopers  return  to  the  original 
direction  by  an  oblique  turn  while  advancing,  and  move 
forward. 

THE  PLATOON  MARCHING  IN  COLUMN  BY  FILE, 
BY  TWOS,  AND  BY  FOURS,  TO  FORM  LINE 
FACED  TO  THE  FRONT,  TO  THE  LEFT,  AND 
TO  THE  RIGHT. 

214. — ^The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  in  front, 
to  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  the  inttruotor  coramandi : 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  125 

,1.  Front  into  line. 
^  2,  March. 
'8.  Halt. 

4.  Drkss, 

5.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  file  or  set  contin- 
ues to  march  forward,  the  othei-s  oblique  to  the  left, 
march  in  tliat  direction,  and  when  opposite  their  places 
in  line  make  an  oblique  turn  to  the  right. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  twenty  paces,  the 
instructor  commands:  1.  Halt.  2.  Drkss.  The  other 
flies  come  up  successively  on  their  left,  halt,  and  dres3  to 
the  right  until  the  command  front. 

215. — A  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement 
is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  meaD8> 
at  the  same  commands. 

216, — The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  liiTe 
faced  to  the  left,  upon  tlie  prolongation  and  in  advance 
of  its  left  flank,  the  instructor  commands. 

1.  On  left  into  line. 

2.  March.  ,  ^ 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Dress. 

6.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  or  set  turns  to 
the  left  and  moves  straight  forward,  the  others  march 
straight  on,  and  each  turns  successively,  one,  two,  or  four 
paces  beyond  the  point  where  the  preceding  one  bas 
turned. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  twenty  paces,  the 
instructor  commands:  1.  Halt.  2.  Drkss.  The  other 
files  successively  halt  and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  com- 
mand front. 

217. — ^The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line 
faced  to  the  right,  upon  the  prolongation'and  in  advance 

8 


126  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

of  its  right  flank,  the  movement  is  executed  on  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse   means,  at  the  commands:  1. 
On  right  into  line.     2.   March.     3.    Halt.     4.    Dress, 
•   P.  Front. 

'218. — A  column  marching  by  file,  or  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  left,  the  instructor  com- 
tij^anuB: 

1.  Left  into  line. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Dres3. 

5.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  or  set  of  twos 
turns  to  the  left  and  moves  str.iight  forward,  the  others^ 
continue  to  march  on,  and  turn  successively  to  the  loft 
three  paces  before  arriving  opposite  the  places  they  arc 
to  occupy  in  the  lino,  which  is  each  on  the  left  of  the 
Yreoeding  one. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  twenty  paces,  the 
instructor  commands:    1.  Halt.     2.  Dress.     The  other 
l^files  come  up,  halt  in  succession,  and  dress  until  the  com- 
mand FRONT. 

219. — The  column,  bj^'file  or  by  tw^os,  marching  left 
in  front,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  right,  the  movement 
is  executed  on  the  sauie  principles,  but  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  command:  1.  Right  into  line.  2.  March.  3.  Halt. 
4;^  Dress.    6.  Front. 

220, — A  column  of  fours  right  iu  front,  marching  cr 
halted,  to  form  line,  faced  to  the  loft,  on  its  left  flanlc, 
the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Left  into  line  wheel. 

2.  March. 

8.  Right — Dre63. 
*4.  Front. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  ,  127 

-At  the  (iominand  march,  each  set  of  fours  executes  its 
wheel  to  the  loft,  ftccording  to  the  ]>rinciplcs  of  the  wheel, 
on  a  fixed  pivot,  No.  283 ;  Nos.  4,  <fec.,  turn  upon  the 
fore  feet  of  their  horses ;  the  o<  her  troopers,  preserving 
their  intervals  from  the  pivot  Hank,  regulate  Iheir  align- 
ment by  the  marching  flank.  At  the  command  right— 
PRESS,  the  troopers  halt,  'straighten  their  horses,  and 
align  themselves  until  thr  command  front. 

221. — A  column  of  fours  left  h\  front  is  formed  in  Jine, 
faced  to  the  right,  on  its  right  flank,  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, by  inverse  menus,  at  the  commands  ;  1.  Bight  into 
line  wheel;  2.  Map  On ;  3.  X</^— Drkss;  4.  Front. 

222. — Line  iwg  also  be  formed  to  either  side,  without 
regard  to  right  or  left  being 'in  front.  Wheij  the  move- 
ments are  executed  with  regularity  at  the  loalk,  they  are 
repeated  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

MANUAL  OF  ARSIS.   ■ 

22". — The  troopers  being  in  line,  execute  at  a  halt  the 
manual  of  arms,  as   prescribed.   No.  165,  and  following. 

224. — The  exercise  being  finished,  the  troopers  are 
commanded  to  dismount  and  file  off.  The  instructor 
remains  mounted  until  the  last  horse  in  the  platoon  has 
filed  off. 


ARTICLE  SECONP. 
TO  FORM  TWOS  AND  FOURS  AT  THE  SAME  GAIT. 

225. — The  platoon    marching  in  column  by  file,  right 
in  front,  to  form  twos  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  twos. 

2.  March. 


12S  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  trooper  contiuues  to 
march  oo,  and  halts  when  he  has  marched  12  paces^  th« 
second  obliques  to  the  left,  and  comes  up  abreast  of  the 
first;  on  arriving  there,  he  halts  and  dressea  to  the  right. 
All  the  others  continue  to  march  straighl  forward,  Noe. 
2  and  4  executing  their  movement  in  the  samcf  manner, 
but  successively,  and  when  Jfos.  1  and  3,  upon  wliich 
they  should  form,  have  nearly  arrived  at  their  proper 
distance,  and  are  about  to  halt. 

226. — The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right 
in  front,  to  form  fours  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  fours. 

2.  March, 

-  At  Ihc  command  marcu,  the  first  two  troopers  con- 
tinue to  march  on,  and  halt  when  they  have  marched  12 
paces ;  the  two  following  oblique  to  the  left,  and  come 
up  abreast  of  the  first  two;  on  arriving  there,  they  halt 
and  dress  to  the  right.  All  the  others  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  Nos.  8  and  4  executing  their  move- 
ment in  the  same  manner,  but  successively,  and  when 
Nos.  1  and  2,  upon  which  they  should  form,  have  nearly 
arrived  at  their  proper  distance,  and  arc  about  to  halt. 

227. — When  the  column  is  at  a  trot  the  formation  ol 
twos  and  fours  at  the  same  gait  is  -  executed,  following 
the  same  principles.  The  first  two  troopers  pass  to  the 
walk,  at  the  command  march:  the  others  continue  to 
march  at  the  trot,  until  they  have  arrived  abreast  of 
those  on  which  they  should  form ;  then  they  pass  to 
the  walk. 

"When  the  column  is  at  a  gallop  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted, following  the  same  principles.  The  first,  or  first 
two  troopers,  pass  to  the  trot  at  the  command  march  ; 
the  others  continue  to  march  at  the  gallop,  until  they 
have  executed  their  formation ;  then  they  pass  to  the  trot. 

When  twos  or  foui-s  are  formed  at  the  trot  or  at  the 
gallop,  the  guide  is  announced  as  soon  as  the  first  files 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  129 

have  doublecl.  In  executing  the  same  moYements  at  a 
loalk,  as  the  liead  of  the  column  halts,  the  guide  is  not 
announced. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  these  movements 
are  executed,  following  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means,  nt  the  same  command. 

TO  BREAK  BY  TWOS  AND   BY  FILE   AT   THE 
SAME  GAIT. 

.228. — The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  twos,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  By  twos. 

2.  March.* 

At  the  command  by  twos,  all  the  troopers  prepare  to 
halt,  except  the  firet  numbers,  1  and  2. 

At  the  command  jtarcu,  these  continue  to  march  at 
the  same  gait ;  all  the  others  Imlt.  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the 
leading  rank  oblique  to  the  right  the  moment  they  are 
passed  by  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  and 
place  themselves  in  column  behind  them. 

Each  set  of  fours  executes  successively  the  same  move- 
ment, Nos.  1  and  2  breaking  as  soon  as  files  3  and  4  of 
the  rank  which  precedes  them  have  commenced 
obliquing,  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

229.— The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right 
lu  front,  to  break  by  file,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Byjile. 

2,  March. 

This  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  the  pre- 
ceding. 

280. — When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  by 
twos  or  by  file  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  ;  the 
right  files  of  the  leading  rank  eontinue  at  the  trot;  all 


130  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

ihe  others  take  the  walk  at  the  commaud  march,  and  re- 
sume the  trot,  in  order  to  enter  the  column ;  when  the 
column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  files  which  arc  to  break 
take  the  trot  at  the  command  march,  and  afterwards  re- 
sume the  gallop  on  entering  the  column. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  files  which  break, 
halt,  change  gait,  and  put  themselves  again  in  motion, 
with  steadiness;  that  they  keep  their  horses  sti*aight,  so 
as  not  to  retard  the  movements  of  those  which  only 
march  forward,  and  that  they  retake  successively  their 
distances,  their  directions,  and  their  original  gait. 

231.— The  eohtmn  marching  left  in  front,  the  move- 
ment is  executed,  following  the  same  principles  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By  ihe  left,  by 
twos  (or  by  file)  ;  2.  March. 

TO  FORM  TWOS  AND  FOURS'  IN  DOUBLING  THE 
';  GAIT. 

232. — ^The  platoon  marching  in  column  bj'  file,  right 
in  front,  to  form  twos,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  twos — trot. 
%  March. 

At  the  first  command  all  the  even  numbers  prepare  to 
take  the  trot. 

At  the  command  march,  numbers  two  and  four 
throughout  take  the  trot,  oblique  to  the  left,  and  conie 
up  abreast  of  Nos.  1  and  8 ;  then  al!  trot  except  the  first 
twos,  who  continue  the  walk  ;  the  others  trot,  until  th.ey 
arrive  at  their  proper  distance,  when  they  pass  to -the 
xoalk. 

233. — The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right 
in  front,  to  form  fours  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Form  Jours — trot, 
2i.  ]Marcil 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  I8l 

At  the  first  command  all  the  nnmbei's  three  and  four 
prepare  to  take  the  irot.  ,      .,         i 

At  the  command  >f  arch,  nimiLora  3  and  4  thvouga- 
out  take  the  trot,  oblique  to  th«  left,  and  come  up 
abreast  of  numbers  1  and  2;  the  first  set  of  fours  con- 
tinue the  walk  ;  all  the  others  trot,  until  they  arrive  at 
their  proper  distance,  when  they  pass  to  the  wallc. 

234._Wh^n  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  the  movemei^t 
is  executed  on  the  same  principles.  At  the  command 
M\RCH,  numbers  3  and  4  throughout  take  the  gMlop, 
d'c.;  and  all  resume  ^Ae  trot  when  their  formation  J s 
executed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop  the  movement  to 
form  twos  or  fours  is  always  executed  at  the  same  ga>t, 
as  prescribed,  No.  227. 

285. — ^The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  tfiove- 
ment  is  executed,  following  the  same  principles  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  same  conamands. 

TO  BREAK  BY  TWOS  AND  BY  FILE,  IN  DOtFB- 
LINO  THE  GAIT. 

236. — The  platoon  marching  in  eolurim  by  fours,  the 
instructor  commanSs-: 

1,  By  twos — trot. 

2.  MAaon. 

At  the  command  march,  numbers  1  and  2  of  the  leal- 
ino"  set  of  fours  commence  the  trot ;  all  the  others  coe- 
tinue  to  march  at  the  walk  ;  numbers  8  and  4,  the  mo- 
ment the  croups  of  the  horses  of  numbers  1  and  2  pass 
their  horses'  head^,  oblique  to  the  right  at  the  trot,  to 
place  themselves  in  column  behind  them ;  then  the  next 
numbers  1  and  2  take  the  trot;  then  the  next  numbers 
8  and  4  trot  and  oblique  as  soon  as  they  are  passed,  and 
eo  on. 


132  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

23'?.— The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  to 
break  by  file  the  instructoi-  commands : 

1.  By  jlle^-trot. 

2.  March. 

This  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  No.  2SG. 

238. — When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  in 
doubling  the  gait  the  instructor  commands:  L  By  twos 
(oi*  hyjUe) — gallop;  2.  March  ;  which  is  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop  the  movement  to 
break  by  twos  or  by  file  is  executed  at  the  same  gait  iis 
prescribed,  No.  230. 

In  these  movements,  the  instructor  observes  that  the 
head  of  the  column  changes  gait  with  moderation,  and 
that  the  troopers  who  follow  do  not  p6rroit  their  horses 
to  move  off  before  the  moment  prescribed. 

289. — The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By  the  left — hy  ttvos  (or  by 
file;)  2.  March. 

SABRE  EXERCISE. 

240. — The  instructor  causes  the  sabre  exercise  to  be 
executed  at  a  halt;  for  this  purpose  he  orders  the  odd 
niumbers  to  march  forward  6  paces  ;  he  then  commands : 

1.  By  the  left  (or  by  the  right)—ropen  files. 

2.  March. 

.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  trooper  of  each  rank 
moves  forward  6  paces  ;  the  second  and  third  oblique  to 
the  left,  and  come  up  abreast  of  the  right  file^,  with  in- 
tervals of  4  paces ;  the  others  first  turn  to  the  left,  march 
forward,  and  turn  to  the  right  so  as  to  come  into  each 
line  with  the  same  intervals. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  133 

241. — When  the  instructor  wishes  to  foiTO  the^pktoon, 
he  commands: 

1.  Second  rank  into  line. 

2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  troopeis  ride  into  the 
middle  of  their  intervals  ;  the  instructor  then  commands : 

1.  Close  Jiles  to  the  right  (or  left.) 

2,  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  file  moves  forward 
6  paces ;  the  second  and  third  oblique  to  their  places; 
the  others  turn  to  the  right,  march  forward,  and  turn  to 
the  left,  into  their  places. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 
DIRECT  MARCH  OF  THE  PLATOON  IN"  LIXE. 

243. — The  most  important  point,  in  the  direct  march 
being  to  keep  the  horses  straight  in  the  ranks,  it  is  in- 
dispensable that  the  troopers  shoiild  preserve  the  head 
direct.  ^  ^ 

The  troopers  should  yield  to  all  pressure  coming  from 
the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming  from  the 
opposite  side. 

The  guide  should  always  march  afa  free  and  steady 
gait,  and  change  it  with  steadiness,  in  order  to  avoid 
irregularity  in  the  ranks. 

If  the  troopers  are  too  near  or  too  far  from  the  man 
on  the  side  of  the  guide,  they  move  from  or  approach 
him  very  gradually,  and  in  gaining  ground  to  the  front, 
but  not  immediately  ;  the  irregularity  generally  results 
from  errors  which  will  correct  themselves,  and  which 
precipitancy  will  only  aggravate. 


184  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

When  the  guide  feels  himself  thrown  out  of  his  direc- 
tion, he  extends  his  arm  to  the  front  to. indicate  that 
there  is  too  much  pressure  towards  hini.  Then  the 
troopers  carry .  the  bridle  hand  towards  the  opposite 
side,  give  a  glance  to  the  guide,  and  straighten  their 
horses  as  soon  as  the  guide  is  relieved  ;  but  the  troopers 
must  be  taught  to  correct  the  intervals  of  files  more  by 
the  leg  than  by  the  hand, 

244. — The  corporal  of  the  flank  opposite  to  the  guide 
is  not  required  to  preserve  the  head  direct.  He  aligns 
himself  upon  the  guide  and  the  general  front  of  the 
platoon. 

The  guide  is  commanded  alternately  to  the  right  and 
to  the  left,  that  the  troopers  may  have  the  habit  of 
dressing  equally  towards  eitlier  direction. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  exercise  the  platoon  at 
the  direct  march,  it  is  conducted  to  the  extremity  of  a 
ground  of  sufficient  extent  to  admit  of  its  marching  some 
time  without  changing  the  direction. 

245. — The  platoon  being  in  line,  tlje  instructor  com* 

mands  : 

1.  Open  files  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right.) 

2.  March.  ^ 

3.  Right  (or  left) — Press.  ^ 

4.  Front. 

At  the  comnaand  march,  all  the  troopers,  except  the 
right  file,  passage  to  the  left,  as  prescribed,  No.  134 ;  the 
second  trooper  straightens  his  horse  and  halts  as  soon  as 
he  has  gained  an  interv^al  of  one  pace  between  himself 
and  the  trooper  of  the  right. 

Each  of  the  other  troopers  executes  the  «ame  move- 
ment, regulating  the  interval,  by  the  trooper  on  his  right. 

The  troopers  being  aligue^,  the  instructor  indicates  to 
the  guide  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  a  fixed  point  in  a 
direction  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  platoon,-  he 
mstructs  him  to  take  an  intermediate  point,   never  t» 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  1$5 

lose  sight  of  these  two  points,  in  order  to  keep  himself 
always  in  the  proper  direction,  and  to  select  a  more  dis- 
tcint  point  as  he  approaches  the  one  nearest  to  him. 

To  give  a  point  of  direction,  the  instructor  places 
himself^xactly  behind  the  right  file,  or  the  left  file,  and 
indicates  to  the  trooper  of  the  front  rank  an  object  on 
the  ground  which  is  immovable  and  can  be  distinctly 
seen,  such  as  a  tree  or  a  rock. 

2-1  <7. — To  march  the  platoon  forward,  the  instructor 
commands: 

v. ' Forward.  ~ 

2.   Guide  riff  hi  (or  left.) 

3»  March, 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  mpve  straight 
forward  at  the  same  gait  with  the  men  on  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

The  troopers  should  give  a  glance  from  time  to  time 
towards  the  guide. 

During  the  march  the  instructor  is  sometimes  at  the 
eide  of  the  guide,  to  assure  himself  that  the  troopei"9 
march  on  the  same  line ;  and  sometimes  behind  the  guide, 
to  observe  that  he  follows  the  direction  indicated. 

24*7. — ^Tq  halt  the  platoon,  the  instructor  commands  : 

L  Platoon. 

2.  Halt. 

'S.  Biff  hi  (or  left) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  cofumand  riffht — dress,  they  align  themselves. 

At  the  command  front,  turn^the  head  to  the  front. 

248. — The  troopers  having  been  sufficiently  exorcised 
in  marching  with  open  iiles,  the  instructor  halts  the  pla- 
toon, and  commands : 


186  SCUOOL  OF  THE 

1.  Close  files  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  Marou. 

8.  Right  (or  /e/0— Dress. 
4.  Front. 

_  At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  except  the 
right  "file  passage  to  the  right,  and  resume  their  places. 

249. — When  the  troopers  begin  to  manage  their  hor- 
ses properly  at  the  loalk,  they  are  required  to  open  and 
close  files,  marching  at  the  same  gait,  taking  care  not  to 
repeat  these  movements  too  often,  but  to  make  them 
march  some  tioie  after  having  opened  the  files,  before 
closing  them,  and  after  having  closed  the  files,  before 
opening  them  ;  for  this  purpose  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Open  files  to  the  left  ipv  to  the  right.) 

2.  Marcu. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers*  except  the 
right  file  vciuVe  &.u  oblique  turn  to  the  left,  ai  the  same 
time  advancing  and  preserving  their  alignment.  When 
they  are  at  one  pace  from  the  man  on  the  right,  they 
straighten  their  horses  and  move  forward. 

250. — To  close  files,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Close  files  to  the  right  {ov  to  the  left.') 

2.  March, 

This  movement«is  executed  following  the  same  princi- 
ples, but  by  inverse  means.  Each  trooper  should  close 
the  leg  in  sufficient  time  to  preserve  his  interval  from 
the  file  to  which  he  closes. 

251.— These  movements  having  been  executed  to  the 
right  and  to  the  left  yi  marching  at  the  walk,  they  are 
repeated  at  the  trot. 

Tlie  platoon  is  then  exercised  in  commencing  the  trot 
from  a  haltj  and  in  halting  while  marching  at  this  gait. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  187 

252. — After  the  troopers  have  been  exercised  Buffi- 
ciently  in  the  direct  march  to  confirm  them  in  the  prin- 
ciples, the  instructor  makes  use  of  the  following  means, 
which  consist  in  causing  fiiults  to  be  connnitted  that  the 
troopers  may  learn  how  to  correct  them. 

The  platoon  being  on  the  march,  the  instructor  directs 
the  guide  to  augment  or  slacken  his  gait  by  degrees,  and 
from  time  to  time,  without  command.  He  irives  notice 
to  the  troopers  that  they  must  employ  the  means  pre- 
scribed to  replace  themselves  upon  the  alignment. 

The  iusfcji'uctor  next  instructs  the  guide  to  take  a  di- 
rection which  carries  him  a  little  out,  repeating  to  the 
troopers  that  they  should  gain  ground  to  the  side  only 
in  advancing. 

When  the  troopers  learn  to  reclose  with  steadiness, 
the  instructor  directs  the  guide  to  take  a  direction  that 
will  cause  crowding  in  tlie  ranks ;  then  the  troopers 
yield  to  the  pressure,  and  gain  insensibly  ground  towards 
the  opposite  direction. 

The  instructor  reminds  them  that  to  repair  irregular- 
ities too  rapidly  would  ci'cate  new  ones. 

When  the  troops  have  acquired,  in  the  execution  of 
these  movements  at  the  walk,  the  necessary  skill  to  avoid 
confusion,  they  are  repeated  at  the  trot. 

25B.— As  one  of  the  most  necessary  instructions  for 
preparing  the  soldier  to  act  in  squadron,  is  the  method 
of  marching  perfectly  straight,  by  keeping  in  line  two 
objects,  for  this  purpose  each  man  will  be  successively 
placed  on  the  directing  flank. 

264. — To  exercise  the  troopers  in  the  direct  march  at 
t?ie  gallop,  the  progression  established  for  the  exercise  at 
the  walk  and  at  the  trot  is  followed,  except  that  the 
ranks  are  neither  opened  nor  closed,  nor  are  faults  com- 
mitted to  be  again  repaired. 

When  marching  at  a  gallop,  the  platoon  should  habitu- 
ally pass  to  the  trot  and  the  walk  before  being  halted ; 
but  when  the  troopers  are  masters  of  thej^  horses,  it 
may  be  halted  Bometimea  without  changing  tho  gaiU 


138  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

COUNTERMARCH. 

255. — The  platoon  having  arrived  at  the  extremity  of 
the  grouiul,  in  order  to  change  its  direction  to  face  to  the 
rear,  the  instructor  conamands  ; 

1.  Countermarch — bu  the  right  fiank. 

2.  March. 
8.  FPvOiiT. 

At  the  command  march,,  tlie  non-commissioned  officer 
on  the  right  turns  to  the  right-about,  No.  93,  moyes  to 
the  rear,  and  turns  to  the  right,  and  moves  forward,  so 
as  to  pass  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  croups  of  the  horses  of 
the  platoon  ;  arriving  near  the  flank  he  turns  to  the  left, 
and  halts  behind  the^  left  file,  with  two  paces  between 
the  croups  of  their  horses.  The  other  troopei's  move, 
each  when  the  one  on  his  right  has  gone  five  paces, 
(nearly  completed  his  about  turn,)  performs  his  right- 
about and  right  turn  from  his  own  ground  independent- 
ly', and  will  thus  find  himself  one  pace  behind  the  troop- 
er who  had  been  on  his  right;  and  each  turns  to  the  left 
so  as  to  come  into  his  place  in  line  as  before,  halts,  and 
dresses  to  the  right.  But  the  troopers  who  are  at  the 
left  of  the  centre  of  the  platoon,  make  at  first  a  right  turn, 
moving  so  as  to  fiollow  each  other  with  distances  of  one 
pace,  and  turn  again  to  the  right  opposite  their  places, 
and  move  up  into  line,  dressing  by  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  all  turn  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

•256. — The  countermarch  is  executed  by  the  left  flank 
on  the  Bame  principles. 

The  countermarch  should  generally  be  executed  at 
the  trot;  the  instructor  adding  that  word  to  the  first 
ccwnmand. 

WHEELINGS. 

257. — ^Th^re  arc  two  kinds  of  wheels :  the  wheel  on  a 
f  zed  pivot,  and  the  wheel  07i  a  movable  pivot. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  189 

The  wlieel  is  always  on  a,  fixed  jnvot,  except  when  the 
command  is  right  (or  left) — turn. 

The  troopers  should  execute  this  movement  without 
disuniting,  and  without  ceasing  to  observe  the  align- 
ment. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  conductor  of  the  march- 
ing flank  should  measure  with  his'eye  the  arc  of  the 
circle  he  is  to  pass  over,  so  that  it  may  not  be  necessary 
for  the  tiles  either  to  open  or  close.  He  turns  his  heail 
occasionally  towards  the  pivot ;  if  he  perceives  that  the 
troopers  are  too  much  crowded,  or  too  open,  he  increases 
or  diminishes  gradual!}'  the  extent  of  his  circle  in  gain- 
ing more  or  less  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side. 

Each  trooper  should  describe  his  circle  in  tlie  ratio  of 
the  distance  at  which  he  may  be  from  the  pivot.  As 
these  different  arcs  are  all  passed  over  in  the  same  time, 
it  is  necessary  that  each  trooper  should  slacken  his  pace 
in  proportion  to  the  distance   from  the  marching  flank. 

During  the  wheel,  the  troopers  should  turn  the  head 
slightly  towards  the  marching  flank,  to  regulate  the 
rapidity  of  their  march,  and  to  keep  themselves  aligned  ; 
they  inust  also  preserve  the  intervals  of  files  on  the  side 
of  the  pivot,  in  order  to  remain  closed  to  that  side.  They 
should  nevertheless  yield  to  pressure  coming  from  the 
pivot,  and  resist  that  from  the  opposite  direction.  The 
horses  are  slightly  turned  towards  the  pivot,  in  order  to 
keep  them  upon  the  circular  line  they  have  to  pass  over. 

When  the  -troopers  have  opened,  they  should  approach 
the  pivot  insensibly,  diminishing  their  circle  by  degrees, 
in  gaining  more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side.  In 
this  case,  they  give  alternately  a  glance  to  the  pivot 
and  to  the  marching  flank,  taking  care  not  to  force  the 
pivot 

When  the  troopers,  have  closed  too  much,  they  should 
endeavor  to  correct  the  fault  gradually  in  increasing 
their  circle  by  degrees,  in  gaining  more  ground  to  the 
front  than  to  the  side.  For  this  purpose,  they  give  al- 
ternately a  glance  to  the  marching  flank  and  to  the  pivot. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel;  the  troopei-s  should  cease 


140  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

wheeling  and  retake  the  direct  march  at  the  command 
FORWARD,  at  whatever  point  of  the  wheel  they  may  be. 
It  is  necessary  to  observe,  also,  that  the  flanks  which  be- 
come pivots,  or  marching  flanks,  do  not  slacken  or  aug- 
ment the  pace  before  the  command  of  execution,  a  very 
common  fault,  arising  chiefly  from  want  of  care  in  giv- 
ing the  coiiimands  with  exactness  as  to  time. 

TO  WHEEL  ON  A  FIXED  PIVOT. 

258. — The  use  of  a  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  is,  when 
the  platoon  forms  a  part  of  the  squadron,  to  pass  from 
the  order  of  battle  to  the  order  of  column,  and  from  the 
order  of  coltimn  to  the  order  of  battle. 

The  trooper  who  forms  the  pivot  of  the  wheel  turns 
his  horse  upon  his  fore  feet,  keej^s  his  ground,  and  comes 
gradually  round  with  the  rank. 

When  the  platoon  is  marching,  the  pivot  halts,  and 
the  marching  flank  executes  its  movement  at  the  same 
gait  as  before  the  wheel. 

If  the* instructor  indicates  a  new  gait,  in  order  to 
wheel,  the  marching  flank  wheels  at  this  gait ;  all  the 
other  troopei*8  regulate  the  rapidity  of  their  march  in 
accordance  with  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank, 
and  take  freely  the  new  gait  at  the  command  forward. 

When  the  platoon  is  halted  after  a  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  the  alignment  is  always  ordered  towards  thd  side 
of  the  marching  flank. 

269. — ^The  platoon  being  formed  in  line,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  In  circle  rigid  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  Mabco, 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  put  themselves 
in  motion ;  the  non-x;ommissioned  officer  who  conducts 
the  moving  flank  marches  at  a  walk,  measuring  with  the 
eye  the  extent  of  the  circle  he  is  to  p^sa  over,  that  nei- 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED,  l4l 

tlier  opening  nor  closing  may  be  caused  in  the  rank, 
and  that  the  troopers  may  keep  aligned.  The  pivot 
man  turns  upon  his  own  ground,  regulating  himself 
up6n  the  marching  flank. 

260. — "When.tlie  platoon  has  executed  several  wheels, 
to  halt  it,  the  instructor  commands: 
. » 

1.  Platoon. 

2.  Halt. 

3.  Ze/e  (or  right) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  HALT,  the  troopers  straighten  their 
horses  and  halt  with  steadiness. 

At  the  command  left  (or  right) — dress,  they  align 
themselves  towards  the  side  indicated. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

201. — The  platoon  is  then  marched  forward,  and 
made  to  recommence  the  wheiel.  When  the  instructor 
wishes  the  platoon  to  take  the  direct  march,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

At  the  command  forward,  the  pivot  resumes  the  gait 
at  which  it  was  previously  marching. 

All  tlie  other  troopers  straighten  their  horses,  and  the 
two  flanks  move  forward  at  the  same  gait,  conforming 
to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right'^  the  troops  regu- 
late their  movement  towards  the  side  indicated. 

262. — When  the  troopers  have  executed  several 
wheels  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  interrupted  occasion- 
ally by  direct  marches,  and  when  the  horses  become 
calm,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  pass  to  the  trot ; 
after  several  wheels  at  tlie  trot,  thoy  resume  the  walk. 


U2  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

263. — If  the  platoon  is  ^vheeliDg  to  the  right,  and 
the  instructor  wishes  it  to  change  the  "wheel  to  the  left 
without  halting,  he  commands: 

1.  In  circle  left  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  flank  halts,  and  be- 
comes the  pivot.  The  right  flank,  assuming  the  gait  ftt 
which  the  left  flank  was  marching,  describes  a  circle 
proportionate  to  the  extent  of  the  front.  All  the  other 
troopers,  first  straightening  their  horses,  guide  them  so 
as  to  pass  over  the  new  circles, 

264. — ^Tlie  platoon  being  halted,  to  place  it  in  a  direc- 
tion perpendicular  to  the  original  front,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Itig?U  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Ze/t  (or  right) — ^Dress. 
6.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  of  the  wheel 
0Z1  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  terminated  its  wheel. 

265. — ^The  platoon  being  halted,  to  wheel  it  about,  or 
to  place  in  an  oblique  direction  to  the  right  or  left,  the 
instructor  gives  the  command  : 

1.  Right  about  (or  left  about)  wheel ;  or,  right  half  {ov 
left  half )  wheel ;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Ze/t  (ov  right) 
— T)rk8s;  5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  No,  258. 

Before  dressing  the  platoon,  the  trooper  on  the  march- 
ing flank  is  made  to  come  up,  if  necessary,  abreast  of  the 
pivot  man,  so  that  the  other  troopers  will  not  have  to 
rein  back  in  order  to  align  themselves. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  I43 

266.— The  plnloon  being  on  the  mnrch,'  the  same 
movements  are  executed  at  the  communde:  ],  Iii(jht  (or 
left)  2vh€el;  right  about  (or  left  about)  wheel  ;  right  half 
{ov  left  half)  tohecl ;    2.  March;  3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  wheeling  flank  wheels  at 
the  gait  at  which  the  i)latoon  was  marching;  the  pivot 
flaiik  halts.  ^ 

At  the  command  forward,  the  pivot  resumes  itsonVi- 
nal  pace,  and  the  two  flanks  move  forward  at  the  same 
gait,  with  the  guide  as  before. 

Those  movements  being  properly  executed  from  a  halt 
and  at  the  walk,  are  repeated  at  the  trot. 

TO  WHEEL  ON  A   MOVABLE  PIYOT. 

26'7.— The  wlioel  on  a  movable  pivot  is  employed  in 
the  successive  changes  of  direction  in  column. 

lathis  wlieel,  the  object  of  the  movable  "pivot  is  to 
leave  by  degrees  the  ground  on  Avluch  the  movement 
commences;  it  allows  each  platoon  to  wh«cl  on  the-^ame 
ground,  without  nltoring  distances  or  retarding  the 
column.  /^   ; 

The  conductor  of  the  marching  flank  should  increase 
hi3  gait  and  describe  his  arc  of  circle  so  as  to  cause  the 
files   neither  to  open  nor  close.     The  pivot  describes  an 
arc  of  a  circle,  the  radius  being  about  10  feet-   and  con- 
sequently,   ma  right  ov. left  ^wrn,   the   trooper   on    the 
flank  gams  about  10  feet  to  the  front,  and  as  much  to  a 
flank,  his   quarter   circle    being  5  paces.     The  troopers 
from  the  centre  to  the  marching  flank   increase  the  kiit 
progressively;    the    centre  man  preserves  the  gait  at 
which  the  platoon  was  marching..    The   troopers'  from 
the  centre  to.the  pivot  slacken  the  ^ait   progressively  • 
the  pivot  trooper  slackens  his  gait,  8o\n8  to  pass  over  his 
5  paces  in  the  same  time   that   the  centre  man  takes  to 
pass  round  his  arc  without  clianging  his  gait      At  the 
end  of  the  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot,  the  portion  of  the 
rank  which  had  augmented  its  gait  should  slacken  it 


144  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

and  that  wliich  liaJ  sluckened  its  gait  should  augment 
it.  All  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses;  the  march- 
ing flank  and  the  ^^ivot  resume  the  gait  at  which  they 
originally  marched. 


268. — The  platoon  being  on  the  marcli,  to  cause  if  to 
change  direction,  the  instructor  commands  : 


1.  Left  (or  riyhl) — Turn. 

2.  Forward. 


At  the  lirst  command,  the  platoon  turn?  to  the  left  or 
to  the  right,  tiie  pivot  slackening  its  gait,  in  describing 
<oi  arc  of  Jive  paces ;    t!ie  marching  tlaiik    augments  its' 
gait,  and  regulates  itself  by  the  pivot  dviriug  the  whole 
of  the  wheel. 

.  At  the  command  forward,  all  the  troopers  straighten 
their  horses,  the  [livot  and  marching  flank  moving  for- 
wai'd  in  the  gait  at  which  the  platoon  was  originalljr. 
marching.. 

The  troopers  not  having  been  exercised  to  wheel  at 
the  gallop  on  a  lixed  pivot,  they  are  made  to  wheel  on  a 
movable  pivot  only  in  marching  at  the  icaik,  that  the 
marching  flank,  which  should  increase  its  gait,  will 
have  to  take  only  the  trot. 


2.69. — To  exercise  the  troopers  in  wheeling  at  the  (gal- 
lop on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  progression  established  for  the 
exercise  at  the  walk  and  at  tfte  trot  is  followed  ;  but  the 
platoon  is  always  halted  before  changing  the  direction 
of  the  wheel. 

The  instructor  thanges  the  gait  frequently,  and  avoid* 
galloping  too  long  to  the  same  hand. 

The  platoon  is  exercised  also  to  wheel  at  the  trot  ond 
at  the  gallop,  in  setting  out  from  a  halt,  and  to  baft 
while  wheeling  at  these  gaita. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  14S 


INDIVIDUAL  OBLIQUE  MARCH. 

270. — The  platoon  marching  in  Hue,  to  cause  itiogaiu 
ground  towards  one  of  its  flanks,  without  changing  the 
front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Rlfjht  (or  left)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  mat^cii,  the  troopers  execute,  all  at* 
tJve  same  time,  a  turn  of  30  degrees  to  the  r'u/ht,  so 
tliattlie  head  ofieach  horse  may  be  opposite  the  shoul- 
der of  the  horse  on  his  right,  and  that  the  right' knoc  of 
each  trooper  may  be  in  roar  of  the  left  knee  of  <hc 
troopor  on  his  right.  This  first  movement  being  execu- 
ted, the  troopers  move  forward  in  the  new  direction, 
regulating  themselves  upon  the  guide. 

When  the  platoon  has  obliqued  sufficiently,  the  in- 
structor commands  : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses 
and  move  forward,  regulating  themselves  upon  the  guide. 

la  the  oblique  march,  the  g^dc  Is  always  on  the  ob- 
liquing side,  without  being  indicated;  and  after  the 
command  forward,  the  guide  returns,  without  indica- 
tion, to  the  side  on  which  it  was  originally. 

When  the  troopers  are  not  closed,  they  should  m- 
erease  progressively  the  ^gait,  in  order  to  approach  the 
side  towards  which  they  march  ;  they  should  insensibly 
slacken  the  gait  if  they  are  too  much  closed,  or  more 
advanced  than  the  flank  towards  which  they  oblique. 

2*71. — The  platoon  marching  at. //*e  wa?^-,  to  execute 
the  oblique  at  the  trot  the  instructor  commands:  \'.  Right 
(or  left)  ohliqxie — trot ;  2.  March. 

AVhen'the  platoon  has  obliqued  siifliciently,  the  in- 
structor commands  :  Forward. 


146  SCHOOL  OF  THE. 

The  guide  observes  particularly  to  commence  tJie  trot 
without  precipitatiou. 

The  same  course  is  observed  if  the  platoon  is  mnrchiDg 
at  the  txot,  and  the  object  is  to  oblique  at  the  gaUop. 


THE  PLATOON  MARCHING  IN  LINE,  TO  BREAK 
IT  BY  FOURS  OR  BY  TWOS  AT  THE  SAME 
GAIT. 

272.-^The  instructor  commands: 

*  »  ■ 

1.  By  fours  (or  hy  tivos.) 

2.  March. 

^  At  the  command  march,  the  first  foiir  (or  two)  files  tQ 
the  right  continue  to  march  forwra'd  at  the'  same  gftit; 
the  other  files  halt  and  breat  successively  by  fours  (or 
by  twos)  as  prescribed,  No.  209. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  by  file  the 
njovemcnt  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  the  first 
file  only  continuing  to  march  forward. 

273. — The  platoon  majjchiug  at  the  trot,  it  is  broken 
en  the  same  principles,  the  first  files  continuing  to  march 
at  the  same  gait,  all  the  other  files  assume  the  ivalk  at 
the  command  march,  and  resume  the  trot  as  they  break 
fi'om  tlie  platoon. 

The  same  course  is  observed' when  the  platoon. marches 
at  the  gallop  ;  the  first  files  continue  to  march  at  that 
gait;  the  others  assume  the  trot  at  the  command  makcii, 
and  resume  the  gallop  as  they  commence  to  oblique. 

274. — To  break  the  platoon  by  "the  left,  tlie  move- 
ment is  executed  following  the  same  principles,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands;  1,  By  tlie  left — hy 
fours  (or  by  twos.)    2.  March. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  14t 

THE  PLATOON  M ARCHIIf G  IN  COLUMN  BY  TWOS 
OR  BY  FOURS,  TO  FORM  IT  AT  THE  SAME 
OAIT. 

275.— The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  instructor  commands  ; 

1.  Form  platoon, 

2.  March. 
8.  Halt. 

The. movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for /ron*  wfo 
line,  No.  214. 

.     216. — ^The  platoon  marching  in  column  at   the   trot, 
j-ight  or  left  in  front,  the  instructor  commands;  ^  ;- 

1.  Form  jjlatoon. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  rigjit  (or  left.) 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  (or  four)  files 
pass  to  theivalh;  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at 
the  same  gait,  oblique  immediately  to  the  left,  march 
straight  in  this  direction,  make  an  oblique  turn  to  the 
right  on  coming  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy 
in  the  platoon,  and  pass  to  the  xcalk  on  arriving  upon 
the  alignment  of  the  first. 

At  the  command  guide  right,  they  correct  their  align- 
ment towards  the  right. 

2*77. — -When  the  command  is  at  the  gallop,  the  platoon 
is  formed  on  the  same  principles.  Tlie  first  two  (or  four) 
tiles  take  the  trot  at  the  command  march  ;  the  other  files 
eontinue  to  march  at  tlie  gallop,  and  take  the  trot  on 
ai'riving  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 

"When  the  column  is  marching  by  file,  the  platooB^is 
formed  on  the  same  principles.  ♦ 


14S  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

THE  PLATOON  MARCHIKG  IN  LINE,  TO  BREAK 
IT  BY  FOT^RS  OR  BY  TWOS  IN  DOUBLING 
THE  GAIT. 

2*78. — The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  fours  {or  by  twos) — trot. 

2.  March, 

At  the  command  makcu,  the  first  four  (or  two)  files  of 
'the  right  take  the  trot ;  the  others  continue  to  inarch- at 
the  walk,  and  take  successively  the  trot  when  they  ob- 
lique to  the  right;  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

279. — The  platoon  marching  at  the  trot,  the  instructor 
Gommands  : 

1.  By  fours  (or  by  twos) — gallop. 

2,  MARcn. 

Whicli  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  2'78. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  L^-  file,  the 
movement  is  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

When  the  platoon  marches  at  the  gallop,  it  is  always 
broken  -without  doubling  the  gait. 

280, — To  break  the^platoon  by  the  left,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  on  the' same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By  the  left,  by  fours  [ov  by 
twos) — trot  {ov  gallop.)  2.  March. 

THE  PLATOON  MARCHING  IN  COLUMN  BY  TWOS 
OR  BY  FOURS,  TO  FORM  IT  IN  DOUBLIN(^ 
THE  GAIT, 

281. — The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  op  left 
in  front,  the  instructor  commanrja: 


PLATOON,  5I0UNTED.  149 

1.  Form  platoon — irot. 

2.  March. 

3.  Onide  right  (or  hft.) 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  (or  fuiir)  file;? 
"continue  to  march  forward  at  the  same  gait ;  the  other 
files  take  the  trot,  oblique  immediately  to  the  left,  march 
in  this  du'Cction,  make  an  oblique  turn  to  the  right  ou 
coming  opposite  to  the  place  th<^  arc  to  occupy  in  the 
platoon^  and  pass  to  the  ivalk  on  arriving  upon 'the 
alignment  of  tlie  first. 

282. — The  platoon  marching  in  columii  at  the  trot, 
right  or  left  in  front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1 .  Form  2'>laioon — gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  Giiide  right  (or  left.) 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  281. 

AVhen  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  platooii  is  al- 
ways formed  at  the  same  gait. 

When  the  column  is  marching  by  iile,  the  platoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles. 


MOVEMENTS  BY  #OURS,  THE  PLATOON  BEING 
IN  COLUMN  OR  1^"  LINE. 

283. — The.  platoon  being  in  line,*  to  form  it  in  a  col- 
umn of  fours  the  instructor  commando :, 

1.  Fours,  right,  (or  left.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  each  set  of  fours  executes  its 
wheel  of  a  quarter  of  a  circle,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  wheel  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  No3.  1  or  Nos. 
4. turn  upon  the  fore  feetof  their  horses  gradually,  keep- 


150  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

ing  E(]^uai'e  witl)  the  otheV  flauk;  the  others  preserve 
their  mtorvals  from  the  pivot,  and  alec  regulate  their 
aligtinient  by  the  marching  flank.  At  the  command 
HALT,  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses  and  ha,lt.  If 
the  command  halt  is  omitted,  they  move  off  straight  in 
the  new  direction -at.the  gait  of  the  marching  flank. 

284. — The  platoon  marching  in  column  of  fours,  to 
march  it  in  line  to  a  ffank,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Fours — Right,  (or  Fours — Left.) 

2.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

At  the  first  command  the  piN'^ots  halt,  and  the  -wheels 
are  executed  on  the  same  principles  (No.  283),  and  at 
the   moment  of  their  completion  all  move  forward  in 

]inc. 

285. — ThQ  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to 
march  to  either  flank,  the  instructor  commands: 

Fours— v^iGHT,  (or  Fours — Left.) 

"This  command  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as 
in  the  preceding.  No.  284. 

-  28.6.— The  platoon  being  inline,  or  columnpf  fours, to 
face  it  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Fours  left,  (or  right)  about, 

2.  Makcu,  '       - 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  each  set  of  fours  wheels  to 
the  left  ahont,  on  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel 
to  the  right  or  left,  No.  283. 

At  thocommand  halt,  the  troopers  straighten  their 
horses  and  halt  in  line  or  column,  faced  to  the  rear. 

.If  the  command  halt  be  omitted,  they  move  straight 
off  in  the  new   directiot,   at  the  gait  of  the  wheeling 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED..  IM 

flank  of  the  fours.     If  ihey-iii'e  in  line,  the   instructor 
then  adds,  gtiide  right. 

287. — The  platoon  marching  m  line,  or  column  oi 
fours, 'to  cause  it  to  face  aud  march  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection, the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Fours — Left  ABOUT  (or  right  about.) 
And  if  in  line  : 

2.  Guide  right  (or  Iffi.) 

At  the  command  left  about,  or  iiicnx  abouiv  each  set 
of  fours,  its  pivots  halting,  executes  the  -wheel  of  a  half 
circle,  oil  the  principles  prescribed,  JSTo.  283,  and  having 
completed  it,  moves  off  in  the  new  direction.  The 
wheel  being  nearly  completed,  the  instructor  may  com- 
mand :     2.  II alt. 

288.'^The  wheels  by  fours  must  be  executed  with 
care  and  steadiness,  regulating,  in  wheels  from  line,  by 
the  left  when  wheeling  to  the  left,  by  the  right  when 
wheeling  to  the  right;,  in  the  about  wheels  from  column, 
the  tirst  half  of  the  wheel  by  the  fours  in  front,  and  tlie 
last  half  by  those  that  are  becoming  the  front.  Thus  all 
the  wheels,  commenced  gently,  must  be- completed  by 
the  fours  at  the  same  moment.  It  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary that  th«  pivots  should  not  move,  except  to  turn 
their  horses  on  the  fore  feet.  When  previously  in  mo- 
tion, it  is  the  more  important  that  the  instructor  should 
observe  and  insist  upon  this  jioint. 

,   289. — These  movements  being  correctly   executed  jvt 
the  u-alk,  they  arc  taught  at  the  trot.     Not  at  the  gallop. 


152  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

AnnOLE  FOURTH. 

*      RUNNING    AT   tllE   HEADS,  AND  PISTOL 
pilACTICE. 

290, — To  perfect  the  troopers  in  the  use  of  their  arms 
and  in  managing  tlieir  horses,  they  arc  exercised  at  run- 
ning at  heads  aiul  ring?,  connected  with  target  firing. 

For  tliis  purpose  a  quadi-angular  track  will  be  laid 
out,  yo  yards  long  and  30  wide,  or  larger;  movable  posts 
will  be  prepared — two,  9  feet  high,,  will  have  a  hori- 
zontal bar  fiom  the  top,  about  3  feet  long,  from  the  end 
of  which  an  iron  ring  about  three  inches  in  diameter 
is  suspended — for  the  practice  of  the  points ;  one  post  0 
feet  liig'h,  with  a  vertical  pin  in  the  top,  on  which  will 
revolve  a  block  of  wood  about  18  inches  long,  balancing 
a  light  }iole  about  5  feet  long,  inserted  in  one  end,  to 
represent  a  lance  or  sabre,  and  which  will  be  easily 
turned  by  a  parry,. but  will  have  tlie  end  blunted;  one 
post  4  feet  high,  made  otherwise  the  same,  the  pole  to 
T-epresent  a  bayonet;  there  will  also  be  three  posts  7  feet 
high  and  throe  4^  feet  Idgh,  to  represent  horsemen  and 
infantry;  these  six  to  be  surmounted  by  rawhide  or 
canvas  heads  (balls)  stuffed  with  hay. 

Heads  will  also  be  used,  resting  on  the  ground,  for 
tlio  practice  of  the  points  against  infantry;  (they,  and 
more  commonly  Indians  or  other  irregulars,  often 
throM'ing  themselves  flat  to  escape  the  blows,  <fec,,  of 
cavalry.) 

For  blank  cartridge  firing  smaller  balls  may  be  used, 
placed  ui)on  the  posts. 

At  3  paces  diagonally  outside  an  angle  of  the  track, 
a  round  post,  12  inches  in  diameter,  8  feet  high,  will 
stand  fur  a  pistol  target. 

The  posts  will  be  placed  about  3  feet  fi-om  the  track, 
on' either  side  .or  end  ;  the  polo,  representing  a  bayonet, 
will  be   placed  perpendicular  to   the   track,    reaching 


'       PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  153 

aboiit  one  foot  from  it ;  that  representing  a  sabro,  point- 
ing towards  the  rider,  but  noarly  parallel  with  Ihc 
track  ;  rext  to  each  will  be  placed  a  post  witli  n  head, 
for  the  delivery  of  a  thrust  or  cut;  these  will  be  the 
closer  as  the  troopere  improve  in  skill,  \mtil  they  are  .13 
near  as  6  feet 

The  track  should  turn  the  angles  in  a  quarter  circle  of 
15  feet;  the  disposition  of  posts,  at  or  very  near  thp 
turn,  will  be  suitable  to  advanced  practice;  the  target 
post  being  placed  as  directed,  the  balls  will  range  within 
one  quarter  of  the  surrounding  grounds. 

The  platoon  will  be  formed  in  two  lines  near  the 
ends,  facing  the  centre.  At  first  not  more  than  two 
troopers  exercise  at  once;  moving,  at  the  same  time,  at 
the  signal  of  the  instructor,  from  the  left  of  eacli  line — : 
if  to  ride  to  the  right  hand" — and  returning  to  their 
right  flank.  They  will,  in  general,  at  the  uniuter' 
rupted  canter,  first  draw  pistol  and  fire  a  blank  car- 
tridge at  a  head,  return  pistol,  draw  sabre,  and  com- 
mence its  use  as  soon  as  possible — the  decreasing  dis- 
tance from  the  firing  point  marking  the  improvement 
and  skill  of  the  trooper,  as  also  his  promptnc-ss  in  firing 
after  using  the  sabre. 

In  every  squadron,  at  a  period  of  exercises,  there  will 
be  exercises  in  this  article  for  one  hour  and  a  half  one 
day  in  every  week. 

The  captains  will,  on  the  1st  of  June  and  1st  of  De- 
cember, each  year,  report  to  the  commander  of  tlie  regi- 
ment, in  writing,  the  names  of  the  two  best  troopers  at 
these  exercises.  Tliey  will  be  announced  in  regimental 
orders. 

On  application  the  colonel  may  grant  trials  of  skill 
between  squadrons,  and  also  between  members  of  dif- 
ferent squadrons.  He  will  preside  and  judge,  or  ap- 
point judges,  who  will  make  report  to  him. 

TO  LEAP  THE  DITCH  AND  THE  FENCE. 
291. — The  instructor    causes    the  troopers  to  leap 


l^i  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

Jitcllos  an(I  low  fences,  by  twos  and  by  foiiis,  and  then 
by  platoon;  observing  the  principles prescribecl,  No.  185 
and  following. 

TO  charctE  by  platoon. 

292. — The  charge  will  be  practiced  by  twos,  four.-t, 
and  half  platoons,  before  the  charge  by  platoon. 

To  charge  by  platoon,  the  instructor  orders  the  sabres 
to  be  drawn  ;  he  commands  : 

1.  Forxoard. 

2.  Guide  riff  hi  (or  feft.) 
3._March. 

When  the  platoon  has  marched  20  paces,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  Trot 

2.  March, 

At  60  paces  further,  he  commands  : 

1.  Gallop. 

2.  March. 

At  80  paces  further,  he  commands: 
Charge. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  take  the  position  of 
charge— bkh^-b.  They  give  hand  and  lengthen  the  gal- 
lop without  losing  control  of  their  horses  or  disuniting. 

When  the  platoon  has  charged  GO  paces,  the  instructoi 
CommandB: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoon, 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Might  (or  lefty-DRES^. 

5.  Front. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  165 

At   the  command  afte7ition,    the   troopers  carry  the 
sabre  to  the  shoulder. 
At  the  command  platoon,  they  take  the  trot. 
At  the  command  halt,  they  stop. 

'  293. — Tlie  troopers-  should  be  exercised  at  tho^ change 
with  the  greatest  care,  without  being  required  to  repeat 
it  too  often. 

The  instructor  requires  the  gallop  to  be  kept  up ;  he 
sees  that  the  troopers  preserve  ease  in  the  ranks;  tlxat 
they  hold  a  light  hand,  so  that  the  horses  not  being  con- 
strained in  their  movements,  may  not  become  too  rcsf 
tive;and,  on  the  other  hand,  tliat  tbe  intervals  between 
files  is  not  increased ;  the  guide  must  at  first  have  an 
object  pointed  out,  towards  which  to  direct  his  whole 
course. 

RALLYING. 

294.— To  "exercise  the  troopers  in  rallying,  the  platoon 
is  formed  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground,  the  sabres  are 
drawn,  and  the  signal  charge  as  foragers  is  sounded  ;  at 
this  signal,  the  troopers  gallop  forward  in  couples  and 
charge  as  foragers ;  the  instructor  and  the  flank  files 
remain  in  place,  to  mark  out  the  rallying  point.  When 
the  troopers  have  marched  150  or  200  paces,  the  in- 
structor orders  the  raUy  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal, 
the  troopers  wheel  to  the  left  ahoiit,  and,  as  rapidly  as 
possible  to  be  well  in  hand,  pass  to  the  rear  outside  of 
the  flanks,  to  return  again  and  resume  their  places  in 
rank.  As  soon  as  two-thirds  of  the  troopers  have  joined, 
the  instructor  commands  the  platoon  to  move  forward. 
At  first  Ihe  platoon  is  rallied  at  the' trot,  and  then  at  the 
gallop.  This  movement  is  repeated  without  retaining 
the  flank  files;  in  this  case  the  troopers  rally  behind 
the  instructor. 

SKIRMISHINa. 

296. — The  objects  of  employing  skirmishers  are  to 
cover  movements  and  evolutions,  to  gain  time,  to  watch 


1S«-  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

the  movements  of  the  enemy,  to  keep  him  in  check,  to 
prevent  his  approaching  so  close  to  the  main  body  as  to 
annoy  the  line  of  march,  and  to  weaken  and  harass  him 
%y  their  lire  ;  to  prepare  the  \r&y  for  the  charge  on  in- 
fantr}^  by  rendering  them  unsteady,  or  drawing  their 
fire.    - 

In  flank  movements  they  cover  the  fr6nt  and  flank  of 
the  column  nearest  to  the  enemy.  The  ti'ooper  skir- 
mishing is  much  thrown  upon  his  own  intelligence  and 
resources ;  as  much  coolness  as  watchfulness  is  required 
of  him;  and  he  should  especially  guard  against  exciting 
his  horse. 

On  service,  regularity  in  skirmishing  and  correctness 
of  distance  cannot  always  be  maintained,  on  account  of 
the  movements  of  the  enemy,  and  the  nature  of  the 
ground  ;  but  the  general  rules  and  practice  will  be  easily 
conformed  to,  and  applied  according  to  circumstances. 

Skirmishers  should  be  much  practiced  in  conforming 
to  changes  of  front- or  position  and  movements  in  col- 
umn, without  requiring  orders  and  commands  for  the 
purpose.  Above  all,  they  must  be  instructed  to  look  to 
the  nature  of  the  ground,  and  the  supposed  opposite 
movements  of  the  enemy.  Skirmishers  must  be  very 
exact  and  alert  in  noticing  and  instantly  obeying  the 
signals  made  for  their  guidance,  whether  proceeding 
from  their  immediate  commander — as  by  a  wave  of  the 
arm  and  sabre — or  from  the  trumpet.  It  should  be  im» 
pressed  upon  the  troopers  on  all  occasions  to  level  low, 
and  never  to  fire  without  deliberate  aim,  having  first 
come  steadily  to  a  halt.  The  fire-arms  will  never  be 
cocked  until  the  time  comes  for  firing ;  and  on  aotual 
service,  ofiicei's  and  non-comraissioned  officers,  when  the 
signal  to  commence  firing  is  beard,  must  watch  that 
only  those  men  fire  who  see  the  enemy  within  suitable 
range. 

296.— The  platoon  being  supposed  to  form  a  part  of 
the  squadron,  it  is  dispersed  as  ekirmishei's,  in  order  to. 
cover  the  front  and  flanks  of  the  squadron. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  ifeT 

T[]0  platoon  being  in  line  at  the  extremity  of  the 
ground,  arms  loaded  and  sabres  drawn,  the  instructor 
marches  the  platoon  forward,  and  when.he  wishes  to 
disperse  the  troopers  as  skirmishei's,  he  commands: 

1.  Eight  files  from  right,  as  skirmishers. 

2.  Maucu. 

At  tlje  command  march,  the  left  guide  commands  the 
four  or  more  files,"  of  the  left,  to  halt ;  they  constitute 
the  reserve.  At  the  same  command,  the  eight  files  ol 
the  right  continue  to  march  fon-ward;  after  going  ten 
paces,  they  disperse  as  skirmishers,  extending  themselves 
so  as  .to  cover  the  supposed  front  of  a  squadron,  and  some 
paces  beyond  each  of  its  flanks.  The  right  trooper? 
oblique  to  the  right,  the  left  troopers  to  the  left.  As 
soon  as  they  arc  in  line  they  return  sabre,  and  take  the 
position  of  raise — pistol.  They  continue  to  marcH  until 
the  signal  half,  No.  2.  The  instructor  causes  the  halt  to 
be  sounded,  when  the  skirmishers  are  100  or  150  paces 
from  the  reserve.  The  troopers  keep  10  paces  interval, 
regulating  themselves  towards  the  guide  during  the  whole 
timo  they  act  as  skirmisher?. 

If  a  less  or  greater  interval  is  desired,  the  command 
would  be  given: 

1.  Eiglit  files  from   right  as   skirmishers,    at  (so, 

many)  jjaces. 

2.  March. 

The  guide  for  lines  of  skiriuishers  will  habitually  be 
at  the  centre,  and  so  need  not  bo  designated  in  the  com- 
mand; the  instructor  names  the  man.  But  if  it  be  de- 
sired that  the  guide  should  be  right  or  left,  it  will  be 
expressed  after  the  command  march. 

297. — ^The  chief  of  the  platoon,  followed  by  his  trum- 
peter, places  himself  habitually  half-way  between  the 
skirmishers  and  the  reserve  ;  he  moves  along  the  line 
wherever  he  thinks  his  presence  most  necessary.    'The 

10 


158  SCHOOL  OP  TUE 

reserve  unci  the  skirmisherB  execute  their  movements  at 
irhe'signals  of  the  trumpeter,  who  follows  the  oflicer,  or 
at  his  commands. 

If  the  chief  of  the  platoon  wishes  the  skirmishers  to 
mo¥e  forward,  he  causes  ihc  forward,  No  1,  to  be  sound- 
ed ;  each  skirmisher  moves  forward,  regulating  his  move- 
ments by  those  of  the  guide,  and  preserving  his  interval ; 
the  reserve  follows  them,  keeping  at  its  proper  distance. 
To  move  the  skirmishers  who  are  at  a  halt,  or  moving 
forward,  by  their  right  flank,  to  the  right,  l^o.  4  is 
sounded;  each  trooper  turns  to  the  right  and  marches 
in  the  direction  of  throse  who  precede  him,  preserving  his 
distance  ;  the  reserve  also  turns  to  the  right. 

To  face  the  skirmishers  again  to  the  front  and  to  move 
forward,  to  the  left,  No.  3  is  sounded ;  the  skirmishers 
and  the  reserve  turn  to  the  left. 

To  move  the  skirmishers  who  are  at  a  halt,^  or  moving 
forward  by  their  left  flank,  to  the  left,  No.  3  is  sounded ; 
each  skirmisher  turns  to  the  left  and  marches  in  the 
direction  of  those  who  precede  him,  preserving  his  dis- 
tance ;  the  reserve  also  turns  to  the  U-ft. 

To  move  the  skirmishers  again  to  the  front,  to  the  right, 
No.  4  is  sounded;  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  turn 
to  the  right. 

The  direction  of  the  flank  march  of  the  skirmishei-B 
will  be  clianged  at  the  order  of  their  commander. 

To  change  the  front  of  the  line,  change  direction  to  the 
right,  No  6,  or  change  direction  to  the  left,  No.  7  is 
sounded  ;  the  first  flank  will  half,  and  the  wheeling  flank 
continue  its  previous  gait. 

At  the  sigual  ?talt,  under  all  circumstances  the  skir- 
mishers face  to  the  front,  (to  the  enemy.) 

If.  the  skirmishers  are  to  retire  without  firing,  the  about 
No  6  is  sounded. 

During  the  flank  movements,  if  the  troopei's  are  to  fire, 
they  leave  the  column  a  few  paces  and  face  the-  enemy 
for  that  purpose;  as  soon  as  they  have  fired,  they  re- 
sume their  places  in  the  column  in  doubling  the  gait. 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  150 

298. — When  it  is  desired  Ibat  a  line  of  skirmishers 
engaged  should  retire  firing,  the  commander  of  the  pla- 
toon orders  the  retreat  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal  all 
the  troopers  who  are  numbers  1  and  S,  fire,  if  loaded, 
together,  then  turn  to  the  left  about  and  move  to  the 
rear.  They  turn  by  trooper  to- the  rightabout  on  the 
most  favorable  ground  from  40  to  60  yards  in  rear,  to 
cover  the  retreat  of  the  line  of  twos  and  fours;  which 
then  immediately  fires,  (an  enen5y  being  within  fire,) 
and  turns  by  trooper  to  the  left  about  and  retires 
through  the  intervals  of,  and  turns  when  it  is  40  to  CO 
yards  iu  rear  of,  the  line  of  ones  and  threes  ;  who  then 
fire  and  retire,  and  so  on.  The  troopers  of  the  line  next 
to  the  enemy  keep  up  the  fire  if  opportunities  offer  ;  and 
it  is  only  the  fi^les  which  have  opportunity  of  effective 
fire,  who  fire  at  the  moment  before  the  line  turns  about, 
which  it  does  all  together. 

The  reserve  retires  and  faces  to  the  front,  regulating 
its  movement  by  that  of  the  skirmishers,  so  as  to  be  abor.t 
60  paces  from  the  2d  line. 

At  a  ^gnal, /onrar J  No.  ],  or  haWNo  2,  the  liae  of 
ekirmisJiere  in  rear  move  up. 

If  the  line  be  retreating  without  firing,  at  the  signal, 
coinmence  firing,  Nos.  1  and  8  would  move  on,  whilst  N"o. 
2  and  4  would  halt  and  face  the  enemy,  and  all  would 
act  as  prescribed  for  firing  in  retreat.  If  the  line  be 
firing  in  retreat,  at  the  signal  to  ceasefire  the  line  most 
retired  would  await  the  other,  and  the  retreat  would  be 
continued  In  one  line. 

299. — Tiie  rallying  of  skirmishers  is  alwayB  made  on 
the  point  occupied  by  the  officer. 

To  rally  the  skirmishers,  the  officer  places  himself 
habitually  in  front  of  the  reserve,  and  causes  the  rally 
to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal  the  skirmishers  turn  left 
about,  rally  on  the  reserve  by  the  shortest  route,  and 
draw  sabre^ 

If  the  officer  is  not  with  the  reserve  when  the  rally  ie 
sounded,  the  Bkirmishers  rally  upon  him,  and  the  reserve 


160  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

comes -lip  and  joins  them.     The  trocj^ers  are  thus  exer- 
cised toji'ally  upon  any  point  whaleYor  of  the  .line. 

IJOO. — If  a  defile  is-  prcsented-in  ailvance  of  Ihe  front 
of  tiie  line,  and  orders  arc  given  to  pass  it,  the  troopers 
■\^io  are  opposite  first  cuter  it;  they  are  followed  by  tlie 
other*  troopers,  who  ,tur7i,  by  trooper,  to  the  left  and  ^o 
the  right  for  that  pm*pose. 

As  soon  as  the  first  have  passed  the  defile,  tliey  move 
50  or  GO  paces  to  the  front  and  halt;  the  others  come  up 
abreast  of  therfl*by  obliquing,  those  of  the  right  to  the 
right,  and  those  of  the  l^ft  to  the 'left.  The  reserve  fol- 
lowt. 

If  the  skirmishers  are  to  pass  a  defile  in  their  rear,  the 
reserve  passes  it  rapidl}^  and  postf?  itself  50  or  GO  paces- 
on  the  side  of  its  outlet,  facing  it.  "When  the  liiic  is 
vs'ithin  50  or  CO  paces,  the  tvs'o  troopei's,  \v\io  {\vq  on  the 
flanks,  turn  about  and  move  toward  the  entrance  of  the 
defile,  and  entering  together  immediately'  pass  it.'  They 
are  followed  closely  by  the  other  troopers,  who  execitte, 
in  succession,  the  same  iuovements;  the  centre  troopers, 
who  cover  the  passage  o"f  the  defile  being  last. 

On  emerging  from  the .  defile,  the  trooj^ers  oblique'to 
the  right  and  left,  refovining  the  line  with  the  same  in- 
tervals. 

301. — These  movements  are  first  executed  at  the  wall-, 
then  at  the  trot,  and  finally  at  the  gallop.  When  the 
troopers  have  learned  to  perform  these  movements  well, 
they  are  exercised  at  them  in  firing.  When  the  troop- 
ers are  at  the  tvaik  or  gallop,  and  the  instructor  wishes 
them  to  pass  to  the  trot,  the  trot  No.  8  is  sounded  ;  when 
at  the  trot  or  gallop,  and  he  wishes  them. to  wa/Ar,  he 
Orders  the  halt  No,  2,  and  iha  fonmrdl^o.l  to  be  sounded. 

302.-^To  cominencc,   or   cease  firing,   the    signal  is 

sounded.     AH  the  troopers  do  not  fire  at  once,  but  OnQ 

after  another,  commencing  at  the  guide.     They  after- 

'  ward  continue  firing  without  waiting  for  each  other, 

except  by  couples  Nos.  1  and  2,  and  Nos.  3  and  4 ;  thege 


PLATOON,  MOUNTED.  161 

have  an  imdei'stHncling  tliat  tliey  fire  al^rrrtitely,  giving 
each  other  a  mutual  support.  •  • 

303,-^When  the  platoon  skirmishes  without  gaining 
ground  to  the  front,  the  skirmishers  sho\ild  nevcrlhelcsp, 
■when  under  fire,  if  not  behind  a  cover,  keep  in  motion, 
each  about  his  own  ground. 

304.— If  the  commander  of  the'platoon  wishes  the  skir- 
mishers to  charge,  he  orders  the  charge  as  foragers,  jSTo. 
12,  ^to  bo  soimded;  the  troopers  return  pistol,  draw 
eabrc,  and  charge. 

In  the  charge  as  foragcrs,*the  even  numbers  approach 
within  2  or '3  paces  of  their  companions,  Nos.  1  and  3,  to 
bo  able  to  siipport  and  protect  each  other.  ^ 

As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  charge,  tlie  reserve  moYes 
forward  to  support  tUem.  '      -    '■" 

The  skirmishers  retire  hj  turning  aboul^ t'o  the  left,  and 
face  again  to  tlie  front  by  turning  about  to  the  right. 
When  they  have  reformed  in  platoon,  they  retui;n  the 
pistol  to  the  holster  and  draw  the  sabre. 

S05. — To  relieve  skirmishers,  the  instr\ictor  commands 
to  the  reserve,: 

1.  As  slirmishers. 
2. '  March. 

At  the  command  marcti,  the  reserve  disperses  and 
moves  with  regular  intervals  five  paces  beyond  the  line 
of  old  skirmishers.  Tlie  old  skirmishers  turn  left  about 
and  rally  at  a  trot  on  the  officer,  who  during  the  move- 
ment is  placed  at  the  point  where  the  8  files  now  become 
the  reserve  should  reform. 

The  platoon  right  guide  then  takes  command  of  them. 

306. — The  troopers  having  been  sufficientl}'  exercised 
in  all  the  movements  of  skirmishing,  will  be  taught  to 
dismount  and  form  with  celerity  to  fight  on  foot.     ' 


183  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

At  the  commencement  all  the  movcmenta  of  thi3  in- 
struction will  be  decomposed,  in  order  to  make  them 
better  understood. 

The  platoon  bfeing  inline,  the  instructor  command;? : 

Prepare  tofght — On  Foot. 
1  time^  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  command,  all  prepare  to  dismount,  except 

?f09.  4.  ■  . 

2.  I)ismount,«-except  Noe.  4,  «ind  form  rank. 

3.  Nos.  ],  2,  and  3  pas^  the  reins  with  the'right  hand 
over  the  horses'  heads ;  IS^os.  3  hand  their  reins  to  Nos. 
4  to  hold,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  tie  their  reins  to  the  clicek 
piece  and  nose  band  of  the  halters  and  bridles  of  the 
liorses  of  Nos.  2  and  3  by  a  tight  slip  knot,  and  with 
only  about  one  foot  play  ;  then  all  face  to  the  front,  and 
hook  up  their  sabres. 

T4ie  instructor  then  commands: 

I7lt0 Ll.NE, 

1  time. 

A"t  thia  command,  move  twelve  papes  to  the  front,  ^nd 
close  in  on  the  centre. 

Nos.  4,  who  remain  on  horseback,  have  charge  of  tlie 
dismounted  horses  ;  they  take  the  end  of  the  reins  of  the 
first  dismoiinted  horse  in  the  left  hand,  holding  them 
near  the  bit  with  the  right  hand,  the  nails  downward; 
a  non-commissioned  officer  remains  with  the  dismounted 
horses  to  direct  them. 

The  troopers  having  been  sufficiently  exercised  at  the 
different  movements  of  this  instruction,  will  be  required 
to  execute  them  rapidly  without  stopping  at  the  several 
motions,  and  at  the  single  command  prepare  tojiffht — o-n 
Fooi^  given  by  the  instructor. 


PLAlTOON,  MOUNTED.  163 

Tlie  platoon  being  formed,  it  -will  be  conducted  where 
it  is  to  fight  on  foot.  •     a    • 

The    dismounted   horses   Vvill    also   be   exercised   m  - 
changing  po:?ition,  by  marching  by  rank  and  by  fours. 

Wlien  the  instructor  wishes  the  troopers  to  remount, 
lie  will  r.ally  them  if  they  are  dispersed  as  skirmishers. 

The  platoon  being  rallied  and  formed,  the  instructor 
commands: 

About — Face. 

He  conducts  the  platoon  to  within  twelve  paces  of  the 
horses,  and  commands : 

Mount. 

At  this  command  the  troopers  return  to  their  horses 
rapidiy,  without  alarming  them;  return  pistol,  mount, 
and  draw  sabre. 

The  command  mou>t,  at  the  commencement,  will  be 
executed  in  4  motions,  and  from  a  halt,  that  the  troopers 
may  better  understand  it.  For  this  purj>ose,  the  platoon 
being  rallied  and  marching  to  the -rear,  is  halted  twelve 
paces  from  the  horses;  the  instructor  then  commands: 

Mount. 
1  tiinc,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  Mount, 
return  pistol. 

2.  Rejoin  the  horses,  untie  the  horse,  pass  the  reins 
ov-er  the  neck,  unhook  the  sabre  and  take  the  position 
of  the  trooper  before  mounting,  prescribed,  No,  1'J. 

0.  Execute  the  two  times  of  prcjyar^  to  mount,  as  pre- 
scribed. No.  80. 

1.  Mount,  as  prescribed,  No.  80;  adjust  the  reins,  and 
draw  the  sabre. 


lU  SCHOOL.  OF  THE 

When  bi'i41e3  arc  fiirnislied  with  liaks,  instead  of  tying 
the  reins  to  the  nose  bands  of  the  halters,  Nos.  1  and  2 
should  Hnk  to  the  horses  of  Nos.  2  and,  3,  as  follows: — 
After  dismounting, -the  man  stands  to  horse,  faces  about 
to  the  rear,  takes  the  link  ■which  hrfngsfrom  the  halter- 
ring  of  the  horse  of  his  left  file  in  his  right  htind,  seizes 
his  own  horse, by  the  bit  near  the  mouth  and  drav.s  the 
liorsc  of  his  left  tile  towards  his  own  until  lie  can  liook 
the  snap  into  the  curb  ring;  in  hooking,  the  nails  of  hie 
right  hand  are  down. 

When  he  dismounts,  ho  leayes  the  reins  over  the 
pommel  of  the  saddle.  To  facilitate  the  linking,  the 
horse-holder  should  bear  his  horse  well  towards  Xo.  3. 


SQUA'DRON,  MOUNTED.  1G5 

SCHOOL    OF    THE  SQUADRON, 
MOXJNTED.    . 


SOY.— ^Tlie  object  of  the  school  of  th'e  squac^ro'H  is  to* in- 
struct the  platoons  to  execute  together  what  they  have 
been  taught  separately  ;  and  so,  to  prepare  the  squad- 
ron to  act  independently,  or  perform  what  it  will  be  re- 
quired-to  do  wlien  a  part  of  the  regiment. 

The  squadron,  is  composed' as  prescribed,  titlp  1st,  ar- 
ticle 1st.  .- 

The  school,  of  the  sqxiach'on  being  the  base  of  the  evolu- 
tions of  the  rrgivitnt,  the  Captain  observes  thnt  the  cliiefs 
of  platoons  execute  with  regulaiity  what  is  require'dof 
them,  and  that  they  give  the  eommaiuls  at  the  propjcr 
time  and  in  the  proper  tone.  lie  requires  the  guides  to 
act  witli  calmness  and  without  hesitation  in  the  different 
movements. 

The  Captain  causes  the  officers  to  alternate  in  the 
command  of  the  platoons,  that  they  may  become  familiar 
with  all  the' positions  in  the  squadron.  He  observe?  the 
same  course  with  the  non-commissioned  officers  who 
command  platoons.- 

To  make  the  formations  in  line  better  understood,  they 
are  executed  at  first  from  a  halt.  In  this  case  eao^ 
platoon  performs  its  movements  separately  and^ucces- 
sively,  at  the  coramfind  of  its  chief,  on  receiving  notice 
from  the  Captain. 

Each  movement,  after  having  been  corruptly  execiit$d 
by  the  right,  is  repeated  by  the  left..  Habitual  fornia- 
tions.and  dressing  by  the  right,  cause  the  horses  to  oari^-' 
a  habit  to  a.  vicious  extreme,  aud  crowd  and  press  that 
flank,  -  •  ... 

-When  the  squadron  has  acquired  calmness  and  eOnfi- 
dence,  and  one  article  is  well  understood,  this  article  is 


166  SCHOOL  or  THE 

repeated  with  sabres  drawn,  and  alternately  at  all  the 
gaits,  except  the  ivheels  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  to  the  right 
abput,  and  to  the  left  about  by  fours,  the  co^mier  march, 
the  wheels  on  a  movable  pivot  by  squadron,  the  individual 
oblique  marehcs  when  marehing  by  squadron,  which  are 
executed  only  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot. 

The  troopers  rnount  and  dis?nount  by  the  times,  but 
without  explanation. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  at  the  manual  of  arms  and 
sabre  exercise  once  a  week. 

The  Captain  requires  the  distance  between  the  pin- 
toons  to  be  observed  exactly  in  all  the  movements ;  he 
sees  that  the  troopers  preserve  the  required  intervals 
between  the  knees;  the  distances  in  column  of  fours ; 
and  especially  the  pivots  of  platoons,  who  must  under- 
stand the  necessity  of,  aud  practice,  exactitude. 

The  Captain  moves  wherever  his  presence  is  most  re- 
quired ;  .the  troopers  are  required  to  observe  absolute 
silence,  and  all  rectifications  are  done  by  signs,  or  in  a 
low  voice.  After  the  command  halt,  every  individual 
must  remain  motionless. 

All  columns  right  in  front  having  the  guide  left,  and 
when  left  in  front  having  the  guide  riglit',  as  a  general 
rule,  the  troopers  will  understand  it ;  aud  the  guide  is 
not  commanded  unless  in  exceptional  cases,  "VVhen  a 
commander  sees  it  necessary,  he  will  direct  attention  to 
the  alignment  by  commanding:  Guide  left,  or  guide  right, 

A  platoon  being  an  integral  force,  it  can  march  or 
fight,  equally,  whether  at  the  right  or  the  left  of  any 
other  platoon. 

The  squadron  will  be  accustomed  to  feel  equally  con- 
fident in  sudden  formations  in  every  direction. 

Coluraus  arc  right  in  front  when  the  subdivisions  orig- 
inally on  the  "right  in  line  are  in  front ;  and  left  infrant 
when  those  of  the  original  left  are  in  front. 

308. — The  squadron  being  formed  in   line,  the  non- 
commissioned officers  and  troopers  at  the  head  of  their 
'horses,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  mounted,  at  8  paces  from, 


SQUADRON,  MPUNTED.  Wl 

andfaciug  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  the  Captain  com- 
mauds : 

1.  Attctition. 

2.  Jiight — Dress. 

3.  Front. 

He  then  commands; 

In  each  platoon — count — Fours. 

At  this  command  the  troopers  count  off  in  the  four 
platoons  at  once,  commencing  on  the  right. 

The  Captain  then  gives  the  command  to  mount. 

At  the  command  form — rank,  the  cbiefs  of  platoon 
move  forward,  face  to  the  front  by  turning  to  the  right 
about,  and  place  themselves  before  the  centre  of  their 
platoons,  the  croup  of  their  horses  one  pace  from  the 
heads  of  .the  horses  of  the  platoon. 


SUCCESSIVE  ALIGNMENT  OF  BLATOONS  IN  THE 
SQUAI>RON. 


309. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  Captain  places 
the  two  non-commissioned  officers,  guides  of  the  right 
and  left,  upon  a  line  parallel  to,  and  SO  paces  in  front  of, 
the  squadron,  facing  each  other,  and  3  platoon  fronts 
apart. 

On  receiving  notice  from  the  Captain,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  commands;  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  right ;  2 . 
March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  platoon  moves  forward ; 
at  one  pace  from  the  guide,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  com- 
mands:    1.  Halt;  2.  Iiight—X>R^sa. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  moves 
on  and  halts  with  the  head  of  his  horse  against  tlic  boot 
of'  the  guide  of  the  right.     The  platoon  is  aligned  so  that 


1-«S  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

the  heads  of  tbcir  horses  nrc  ia  a  line  on«  pace  behind 
the  croup  of  the  horse  of  the  chief  of  plajtoon. 

The  first  phvtoon  being  correctly  aligned  the  Captain 
commands: 

1.  'By  platoon — Dress. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiyf  of  the  second  platoon"" 
commands:  1.  Fonmrd ;  ,2.  Guide  right i  3.  March. 
The  heads  of  the  platoon  horses  having  reached  the  line 
of  the  croups  of  the  horses  of  the  platoon  on  the  right, 
he  command:'  1.  Halt;  2.  Dkess;  and,  at  the  6am« 
time,  moves  forward  on  ^he  line  of  the  chief  of  that 
platoon. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  platoon  stops.  At  the  com- 
mandj)ni:ss,  all  tfie  troopers  move  forward  togetker  upon 
the  alignment. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  executes  suecessiveTy  the  same 
raoveaient,  commanding  makcii  wl^en  the  one  who  pre- 
cedes hiin  lias  commanded  halt. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  platoon  brings  the  head  of  his 
horse  to  the  boot  of  the  left  guide.       *   '  ■       ' 

The  squadron  being. aligned,  the  Captain  commands: 

Front., 

31:0. — The  Captain  observes  that  the  officers  align 
themselves  promptly  on  the  base  of  the  alignment;  that 
they  do  not  suffer  too  much  time  to  elapse  between 
the  commands  halt  and  dress,  so  as  not  to  retard  th-e 
successive  alignments;  he  also  observes  that  the  non- 
commissioned officers  pay  attention  to  the  general  and 
not  individual  alignment, 

ALIGJTMENT  OF  THE  SQUADRON. 

311. — The  Captain,  after  iiaving, placed  the  right  guide 
so  that  no  trooper  will  be  conLiji,clied'  to  rein-back,  cou> 
mands :  •** 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  160 

.    1.  Rigid — Dkes3. 
2.  Front. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  all  J;be  troopers  correct 
their  distance  from  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  align  ^hem- 
selves  steadily  but  promptly  to  the  right,      *  *    " 

THE  SQUADRON  BEING   IN  LINE,  TO.  FORM  A 
COLUMN   OF  FOURS.     ' 

312. — The  squadron  heing  in  lino,  the  cnptain  com- 
mands :  .  • 

1.  Fours  right  {pv  left.) 

2.  March. 

-;^      3.     Halt.  ■ 

At  the  command  march,  each  set  of  fours  \sheels  to 
to  the  right  as  presftribed,  No,  283;  the  chief  of  the 
fii'st  platoon  places  himself  in  front  of  tlie  column,  the 
right  guide  oil  his  right.  The  chiefs  of  the  otli^r  pla- 
toons one  pace  from  the  flank  of  the  heads  of  their 
platoons.  ■  ' 

If  the  captain  omit  the  command  halt,  the  column 
moves  forward. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  the  captain  comman<j^^ : 

Fours — Right  (or  Left.) 

The  squadron  conforms  throughout  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  2So. 

TO  BREAK  THE  SQUADRON  BY  FOURS  TO 
THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT  TO  MARCH  TO  THE 
'  FRONT. 

813. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  cotiT- 
mands:  ■  * 


lift  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

1.  Right  (or  left)  forward— fours  right  (or  lefi.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  iirst  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  and 
guide  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  four  on  the  right 
(or -left)  of  the  squadron. 

At  the  command  march,  they  move  straight  forward  ; 
every  other  set  of  fours  in  tlie  line  wheels  to  the  right 
(or  left)  and  moves  forward;  but  that  next  to  the  flank 
set  tnrus  when  it  has  made  two-thirds  of  its  wheel  (four 
yards),  following  the  flank  set;  and  all  the  others,  in 
succession,  tarn  on  the  same  ground. 

314. — The  squadron  marching  in  line,  the  captain 
commands : 

Right  (or  left)  fonoard — Fours  Kioht  (or  Left.) 

Which  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 


TO  BREAK  THE  SQUADROJS'  BY  FOURS  FROM 
THE  RIGHT  TO  MARCH  TO  THE  LEFT. 


315. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Fours  from  the  right — to  march  to  the  left, 
'  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  on  the  right  move 
forward,  and  having  marched  six  paces,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  commands :  Left — Turn.  When  the  turn 
is  half  completed  the  next  set  of  fours  moves  forward, 
and  so  each,  in  succession,  marching  6  paces  forward 
and  turning  to  the  left  without  command. 

The  squadron  will  break  from  the  left  to  march  to  the 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  171 

right,  on  the  same  principles,  at  the  commancl :  1.  Fours 
from  the  left — to  march  to  the  right.    2.  Makch. 

This  is  a  movement  of  mere  occasional  oonvenience. 

DIRECT  MARCH  IN  COLUMN  OF  FOURS. 


816. — When  the  column  \a  halted,  the  captain  assures 
himself  that  tlie  officers  and  men  are  -placed  as  pre- 
scribed ;  he  commands :  ' 

1.  Fortoard. 

2.  ilARCH. 

317. — The  object  of  this  march  in  column  being  to 
calm  tho  horses  and  make  them  uniform  and  steady  in 
the  different  gait?,  the  troopers  "will  endeavor  to  keep 
their  horses  as  qiiiet  as  possible ;  but  the  captain  re- 
quire? them  to  conform  to  all  the  principles  of  the  direct 
marcn ;  ho  observes  that  the  ranks  of  fours  are  exactly 
aligned  f'tliat  the  files  march  in  the  same  diivction  ;  that 
the  troopers  preserve  intervals  and  distances;  conduct 
their  horsv.-*  wihfcout  employing  more  force  than  neces- 
sary, and  preserve  the  proper  position  of  the  body  and 
bi'idle-hand. 

318. — The  column  having  marched  a  quarter  of  an 
hour  at  least,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Trot. 

2.  March. 

At  the  commaml  march,  the  troopers  take  the  trot,  al- 
ways taking  care  not  to  fret  their  horses. 

When  the  column  has  marched  about  1*)00  paces  at 
the  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Walk. 

2.  March. 


1T2  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

Hftving  marcbod  some   time  at  ilte  7i:all\  tliey  resume 
the  trot,  and    after  marcliiug ,  agn.in   about  1000  paces, ' 
t!ie3f,pass  to  the  walk. 

To  change  the  gait,  tlio  captain  selects  a  moment 
when  tlie  horses  are  cahii  and  march  uniformly;  all  the 
troopers  assmne,  at  the  same  time  and  with  steadinea?, 
the  gait  indicated. 

319. — To  halt  the  cohim'ii the  captain  commands: 

1,  Column. 

2.  Halt. 

.   .  CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION,     v" 

820. — The  squadron  marchingnu  .column  of  fours,  or 
twos,. or  file,  to  change  the  diU^^t-the  captain  aom- 
mands-:  '.-^feb^t' 

Qplupin   left  {ov  right.) 
J  .  ■ '  ''  ■^' 

•Which  is  executed  as  proscribed,  No.  211,  the  chief. of 
the  leading  platoon  giving  the  command  : 

INDIVIDUAL  OBLIQUE  MARCH. 

321. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  of  foura  or 
twos, -to  cause  it  to  execute  the  individual  oblique 
march,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

,  Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  213. 

THE    SQUADRON    MARCHING    IN    COLUMN  OF 
FOURS,  TO  MARCH  TO  THE  RIJ^AR. 

322.— ^The  squadron  marching  in  column  of  fours,  the 
captain  commands: 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  17» 

J^(??o'5— Left  About  (or  Rigut  About.) 

The  foui-3  wheeling  about  •and  moving  forward  ;  the 
column  being  changed  from  right  to  left  in  front,  or  the 
reverse. 

TO  BREAK  6y  FOURS  TO  THE  RIGHT,  COLUMN 
HALF  LEFT,  RIGHT,  OR  HALF  RIGHT. 

323. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  com- 
aiands  : 

L  Fours   right — column  half  left  {right,  or  half 
right.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  set  of  fours  wheels  to 
the  right,  and  the  chief  of  the  lirat  platoon  instantly 
commands :  L  J^eft — Turn.  2,  Forward.  (Omittin<^ 
the  2d  command  if  it  be  a  full  turn — to  the  "right.") 

The  squadron  is  broken  to  the  left,  and  the  direction,, 
changed  to  the  half -right,  left,  or  half-Uff,  on  the  same" 
principles. 

THE  SQUADRON  MARCHING  IN  COLUMN  BY 
FOURS,  BY  TWOS,  AND  BY  FILE,  TO  FORM 
LINE  FACED  TO  THE  FRONT,  TO  THE  LEFT, 
Tp,  THE  RIGHT,  AND  TO  THE  REAR. 

324. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours, 
right  in  front,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Left— front  into  line. 

2.  March. 
8.  Drkss. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  fo«r  files  continue-to 
11 


lU  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

march  straight  forward ;  when  they  have  marched  30- 
paces,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  :  halt. 

At  this  command  the  first  four  l>alt  square  to  the 
front;  the  right  guide  returns  to  the  right  of  the  squad- 
ron* All  the  other  files  oblique  and  come  up  success- 
ively, and  without  the  commands  of  the  chief  of  platoon, 
form  to  the  left  and  upon  the  alignment  of-  the  firsts  as 
prescrfbed,  N"o.  214. 

The  captain,  ^vho  moves  to  the  right  flank  after  the 
command  makch,  commands  the  alignment  when  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  halt. 

As  soon  as  the  chiefs  of  platoon  arrive  upon  the  line, 
they  place  themselves  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons, 
and  align  themselves. 

The  left  guide  takes  hia  post  on  the  left  of  the  squad- 
ron, when  the  four  last  files  arrive  upon  the  line. ' 

The  columns  of  twos,  and  by  file,  are  formed  into  line 
by  the  same  principles  and  at  the  same  commands. 

325. — The  column  of  fours  marching  right  in  front,  or 
at  a  halt,  to  form  if  in  line,  faced  the  left,  on  its  left 
flank,  the  captain  commands :  '    - 

1.  Left  into  line  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Might — Dress. 

4.  Fkont. 

It  is  executed  throughout  as  prescribed,  Ko.  220- 
The  chiefs  of  platoons  not  repeating  the  commands. 

they  align  themselves,  and  the  guides  take  their  places 

on  the  right  and  left. 

S2(>.^-The  column  of  fours  marching  right  in  fro^nt, 
to  form  line  faced  to  the  right,  upon  the  prolongation 
and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the  captain  commands; 

1.  On  right  into  line. 

2.  March. 

3.  Dress. 

4.  Front, 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED,  175 

.At  the  command  march,  the  leading  four  turn  to  the" 
right,  and  march  -straight  forward;  when  they  have 
marclied  20  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  com- 
mands    HALT. 

At  this  command  they  halt,  and  the  right  guide  takes 
his  place  on  the  right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other 
foui'8  continue  to  march  forward,  and  turn  and  come  up 
successively,  without  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, forming  to  the  left  and  upon  the  alignment  of  the 
first,  as  prescribed.  No.  217,  observing  to  keep  them- 
selves square  in  the  same  direction  before  turning  to  the 
right,  60  as  not  to  approach  the  new  line-  before  the 
proper  time. 

The  captain,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  left  guide, 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  left— front  into  line, 
No.  324.  The  column  tiy  file,  or  twos,  forms  line  on  the 
same  principles,  and  at  the  same  commands. 

327. — The  column  of  fours,  inarching,  night  in  front, 
to  ftn^m  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear  of  the  column, 
fho  captain  first  commands:  Fours — Left  About;  which 
is  executed  as  in  No.  277;  and  then:  1.  Right— front 
■into  line  ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Dress  ;  4.  Front  ;  which  is  ex- 
ecuted as  prescribed,  No.  324.  To  form  the  line  on  tlic 
head  of  the  column,  the  captain  fii-st  commands:  1. 
Right— front  into  line ;  2.  March;  3.  Dress;  4.  Front; 
and  then:  1.  Fours  left  about;  2.  March;  8.  Halt;  4. 
Right — Dress  ;  5.  Frojit.  ,     * 

328. — The  columns  marching  left  in  front,  to  form 
line  faced  to  the  front,  left,  right  and  rear,  Nos.  324, 
325,  326  and  327,  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  by 
inverse  commands  and  means. 

329, — A  squadron  in  column  of  fours,  right  in  front, 
having  occasion  to  make  instant  face  to  the  right,  the 
captain  commands:  1.  Right  into  line  wheel ;  2.  March; 
3.  Right — Dress  ;  4.  Front  ;  {\nd  there  being  a  necessity 
to  form  front  into  line,  with  an  obstacle  to  the  left-front, 


176  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

the  captain  commands:  1.  Right— front  into  line-,  2. 
March;  3.  Dress;  4.  Fuont;  which  would  be  executed 
as  has  been  prescribed ;  the  proper  left  would  be  consid- 
ei;ed  the  "  right;"  the  left,  the  "right  guide,"  Ac,  as 
long  as  that -formation  continued. 

The  column  being  left  in  fronts  xinder  inverse  circum- 
stances, .  lines  would  be  formed  on  thie  same  principles 
as  above,  and  by  inverse  commands  and  means. 

The  same  principle  applies  to  the  formation  of  line 
faced  to  the  rear,  but  generally  with  an  obstacle  to  the 
left — right  in  front — line  might  be  formed  on  the.  head 
of  the  column;  or,  with  obstacle  to  the  right,  on  the 
rear  of  the  column ;  and  left  in  front,  the  reverse. 

330. — ^The  squadron  marching  in  column  bj  twos,  or 
by  file,  right  in  front,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  left  the 


aptain  commands : 

1.  Left  into  line. 

2.  Makch. 

3.  Dress. 

4.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  by  the  leading  platoon,  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  218,  the  chief  giving  the  command  halt, 
only  ;  the  other  platoons  form  also  the  same,  but  with- 
out any  further  commands;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  align 
themselves,  and  the  guides  take  their  posts  on  the  right 
and  left. 

331. — The-column  bj^  twos,  or  by  file,  left  in  front,  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  right  the  captain  commands:  ]. 
Right  into  line;  2.  March;  3.  Dress;  4.  Front;  which  is 
executed  on  the  same  principle  by  inverse  means. 

332. — In  all  these  formations  greater  regularity  is  re- 
quired in  the  execution,  as  the  troopers  become  more 
habituated  to  them,  and  the  horses  become  more  calm. 

The  first  instruction  is  repeated  several  successive 
days:  and  when  the  prindples  of  the  direct  march  in 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  1T7 

column  by  fours,  the  changes  of  direction,  the  obliques, 
^and  the  different  formations  in  line,  are  firmly  impressed, 
oil  til  esc  movements  are  executed  at  the  trot,  and  tken 
&t'i/ie  gallojy. 


TO  REGULiiTE  THE   RAPIDITY  OF  THE  GAITS'. 

333. — "Whea  the  marches  and  formations,  prescribed 
above,  have  given  sufficient  uniformity  and  precision  to 
the  gait,  the  captain  will  regulate  their  rapidity.  For 
this  purpose  he  measures  off  a  mile,  if  practicable,  and 
marches  over  it  at  all  tlie  gaits  ;  the  mile  at  a  walkyjm 
sixteen  minutes;  at  a  trot,  in  eight  minutes;  and  at  the 
gallop,  in  six  minutes. 

SABRE  EXERCISE. 

834. — To  practice  the  sabre  exercise  at  a  halt,  the 
squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  commands: 

For  sabre  exercise — Call  off. 

At  this  command,  the  trooper  on  the  right  calls  out. 
"20;"  the  next  man  calls  out,  "15;"  the  third  mani 
"10;"  the  fourth,  "6;"  the  fifth  man,  "stand  fast;"  the 
sixth,  "20;"  the  seventh,  "15;"  the  eighth,  "10;"  the 
ninth  "5;"  the  tenth,  "stand  fast;"  and  in  the  same 
manner  through  to  the  left. 

The  captain  then  commands  : 

Sabre  exercise — March. 

At  this  command,  those  troopers  who  have  called  out? 
*'20,"  march  forward  20  paces  and  halt;  those  who 
have  called  "  15,"  march  forward  15  paces  apd  halt,.aii.d 
so  on,  the  fifth  man  standing  fast. 

During  the  exercise,  the  commander  of  tlie  2d  platoon 
is  placed  10  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  it ;  of  the  third 


ITS  SOHOOli.OF  THE 

platooD,  10  paces  in  front  of  its  left;  thfty  face  their  pla- 
toons. The  commanders  of  the  1st  nnd  4th  platoons 
superintend  their  platoons  from  the  ri;;^ht  and  left  Hank; 

335. — The  exercise  being  concluded,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Into  Zin<?— tMarch. 

2.  Jiigkt—D&Eaa, 
8.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers -who  advance^ 
20  paces  standing  fast,  the  others  move  forward  ■and  halt 
al^reast  of  them. 

336. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  "com- 
mands it  to  dismount,  and  to  tile  off.  The  captain  and 
chiefs  of  platoons  remain  mounted  in  order  to  superin- 
tend the  movement;  the  latter  until  the  last  trooper  of 
their  platoons  has  filed  off. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

XHE  SQUADRON  BEING  IN  LINE,  TO.  FORM  IT  JN 
OPEN  COLUMN. 

337. — The  captain  coipmands  : 

1.  Platoons  right  wheel. 

2,  March. 

8.  Halt  (or  8.  Foewar©.) 

At  the  command  march,  each  plat^oon  executes  it^ 
wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  principles  of  the  wheel 
oh  a  fixed  pivot,  the  marching  flanks  taking  care  to  step 
-»>ff  promptly  together;  the  three  loft  plMoons  earcfullj 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  IW 

regulating  bj  the  right,  so  that  they  all  complete  the 
quarter  circle  at  tlve  samo  moment. 

At  the  command  italt,  the  marching  flanks  and  all  the 
troopers  halt  at  the  Siime  instant,  and  remain  raotionles?. 

The  captain  commands  halt,  so  that^  when  executecl, 
the  wheels  will  be  completed.  *:' 

The  chiefs  of  platoon,  without  leaving  the  centre  of 
their  platoons,  observe  that  the  movement  is  correctly 
executed ;  after  the  wheels,  if  any  guide  finds  himself 
not  in  the  direction  of  the  one  preceding  him,  he  should 
not  endeavor  to  correct  his  position  until  after  .the 
march  is  commenced. 

During  the  movement,  the  guide  passes  to  the  rear  of 
the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  fourth  platoon. 

The  captain  assures  himself  that  each  officer  and  non- 
commissioned officer  preserves  the  place  assigned  to  him 
in  this  order  of  column.     (Title  let,  article  2d.) 

If  the  captain  inste.id  of  halt,  gives  the  command,  3. 
Forward,  the  platoons  move  straight  forward  ;  the  com- 
mand FORWARD  being  given  the  moment  before  the 
wlieels  are  completed.  The  captain  then  gives  a  point 
of  direction  to  the  guide  of  the  column. 

338. — The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  form  it  in 
open  column,  it  is  done  on  the  same  principles,  at  the 
«ame  commands,  the  pivots  halting  at  the  command, 

MARCH. 

To  form  the  open  column  left  in  front  is  executed  on 
the  same  principle,  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands^ 
1 .  Platoons  left  wheel ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Halt. 


TO  MARCH  IN  OPEX  COLUMN. 

339. — In  this  order  of  column,  the  guides  should  pre- 
serve between  them  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  their 
platoons,  and  regulalc  their  gait  upon  that  of  the  prece- 
ding guide;  his  gait  is  regulated  by  the  chief  of  the 
leading  platoon.. 


ISO  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

The  presoi'vatioii  of  the  distances  Leii^  the  most  es- 
sential point  of  the  march  in  coluiuu,  everything  else 
should  yield  to  it ;  but  the  guides  must  endeavor  to 
'dvojd  changing  the  gait  as  much  ns  possible,  without 
the  command;  and  if  it  happens  that  their  distance  i- 
increased  or  diminished,  the  fault  is  repaired  gradually 
and  "vvith  steadiness. 

The  chiefs  of  p]atoo;i  are  answerable  for  the  preserva- 
tion of  the  distance,  which,  measured  from  the  croup  of 
the  horses  of  one  platoon  to  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the 
next  platoon,  is  §•  paces  or  yards  less  than  the  number  of 
troopers  in  the  platoon. 

The  unevenness  of  the  ground  may  make  it  sometimes 
impossible  to  preserve  the  direction  of  the  guides;  it  i.- 
then  sufficient  to  require  the  guide  of  each  platoon  to 
pass  by  the  same  points  as  the  guide  of  the  preceding 
platoon. 

The  leading  platoon  of  a  column  should  always  com- 
mence the  march  moderately,  in  order  to  give  the  column 
time,  from  head  to  foot,  to  take  a  uniform  and  regular 
•movement. 


S-iO.— The  squadron  being  in  open  coluiun,  the  captain 
commands:  '  - 

1.  Forward. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  platoons  put  them- 
selves in  motion  at  the  same  time. 

Before  the  column  commences  the  march,  the  captain 
gi\^eB  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  a. point  of  direction  ; 
this  non-commissioned  officer  selects  intermediate  points, 
so  as  to  be  sure  of  marching  straight.  The  fixed  object 
given  to  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  is  also  pointed  out 
to  the  guide  of  the  second.  These  two  non-commissioned 
officers  preserve,  during  the  march,  the  direction  which 
•has  been  given  to  them. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  181 

The  guides  of  the  third  nud  fourth  platoons  keep  ex- 
actly in  the  same  direction. 


CHANGES  OF  DIRECTION   BY   SUCCESSIVE 
WHEELS. 

341. — In  the  open  column  the  changes  of  direction  are 
executed  by  successive  wheels  on  a  movable  pivot,  so  that 
Uie  march  of  the  column  may  not  be  retarded.  The  arc 
of  circle  described  by  the  i^i'^pts  should  be  of  Jive  paces 
torn. 

The  column  being  in  march,  to  change  tlie  direction, 
the  captain  commands ; 

Column  left,  or  half  left,  (or  riffht  or  half  right.) 

» 

At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading,  platoon 
commands:  1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward;  which  is  ex- 
ecuted on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  upon  a  movable 
pivot.  %  , 

Each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the  same  command  succes- 
sively, so  that  his  platoon  may  turn  upon  the  same  ground. 

Immediately  after  having  changed  the  direction  pf  the 
'columb,  the  captain  gives  a  new  point  of  direction  to 
the  guido  of  tlie  first  platoon. 

The  exact  preservation  of  distances,  after  the,  changes 
of  direction,  depends  upon  the  equality  of  thcMn crease- 
given  to  the  gait  by  the  marching  flanks.  It  is  then 
important  that  the  leading  platoon  yhonld  turn  neither 
too  rapidly  nor-too  slowly  ;  and  that  each  platoon  should 
regulate  the  rapidity  of  its  wheel  by  that  of  the  one 
which  precedes  it. 

INDIVIDUAL  OBLIQUE  MARCH.  , 

342. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  cohimn,  right 
iu  front,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  its 


182  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

flanks,  without  changing  the  front  of  the  column,  the 
captain  commands: 


!.  Left  (or  right)  obliqw. 
2.  March. 


Which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each  platoon, 
as  prescribed,  No.  270. 

-"  The  guides  of  the  three  last  platoons  pay  attention  to 
preserve  their  distances,  tin d  to  keep  in  a  direction  ex- 
actly parallel  to  that  of  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon. 

To  resume  the  primitiye  direction,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

Forward. 


which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each  platoon, 
«s  prescribed,  No.  270. 


CHANGE  OF  GAIT  IN  OPEN  COLUMN. 


S43. — The  column  is  made  to  pass  from  the  wa^A:  to 
the  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk ;  and  when  the 
platoons  execute  these  changes  of  gait  with  uniformity 
and  steadiness,  the  column  is  made  to  commence  the 
inarch  at  a  trot;  and  to  "halt  while  marching  at  the  trot. 

The  captain  observes  that  the  platoons  halt,  step  oif, 
and  change  the  gait  at  the  same  instant. 

He  directs  the  head  of  the  column, sometimes  to  increase 
or  diminish  the  gait  slightly,  without  coiiuiMind,  to  judge 
of  the  attention  of  the  guides,  and  to  habituate  them  to 
conforming  to  the  movements  of  the  guides  who  precede 
them. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  166 

TO  BREAK  BY  FOURS,  BY  TWOS.  AND  BY 
FILE,  TO  FORM  TWOS,  F0UR8,  AND  PLA~ 
TOONS,  AT  THE  SAME  GAIT. 

344. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  fours  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  By  fours. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
places  himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  third  file  froili 
the  right;  the  right  guide  places  himself  on  his  right. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  breaks  by  four?, 
as  prescribed,  No.  209. 

346. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fouii?, 
righfin  front,  to  break  by  twos,  at  the  same  gait,  th'^ 
«aptain  commands : 

1.  By  tims. 
■2.  March. 

Tliis  is  executed  throughout  the  squadron,  as  pro- 
scribed for  the  platoon,  No.  228. 

_  346.— -The  squadron  marching  in  column  ,  by  twos, 
right- in  front,  to  break  by  file  at  the  same  gait,  the 
captain  commands: 

1.  Byjile. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  345,  to  break 
by  twos;  the  right  guide  placing  himself  behind  the 
chief  .of  the  firet  platoon. 


134  SCHOOL  OF  TUE 

34?.— The  squadron  marching  in  open  column  at  the 
trot,  right  in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  at  the  same  gait, 
the  captain  commands : 

l!  Byfonrs. 

2;  March. 

■*% 

At.the  command  march,  each  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
as  prescribed,  JSTo.  273. 

The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by 
tjros  and  by  file,  throughout  the  squadron,  as  in  the 
platoon,  No..  230. 

G48. — When  the  open  column  is  at  the  oalloj),  these 
movements  are  executed  on  the  principles  just  pre- 
scribed, each  platoon,  except  its  right  set  of  fours,  pass- 
ing t6  the  trot,  and  resuming  successively  the  gallop,  as 
the  fours  oblique,  in  order  to  enter  the  column ;  and  to 
break  by  twos  or  file,  the  whole  column,  except  the 
leading  tY,'o,  or  one,  passing  to  the  trot,  and  resuming 
the  gallop  as  the  files  break,  in  oVdev  to  enter  the  column. 

349. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  file,  riglil 
in  front,  to  form   twos    at   the  same  gait/  the  caplain 
^cominands : 

1.  Foryn  twos. 

2.  March. 

This  is  exeduted  throughout  the  squadron,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  platoon,  No.  225, 

3'50. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twQS, 
right  iu  front,  to  form  fours,  at  the  same  gait,  the  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.  Form  fours. 

2.  March, 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  165 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  *N.o.  349,  in  order  to 
form  twos.  r   . 

^  351.  The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  four?, 
right  in  front,  to  form  platoon  at  the  same  gait  the  cap- 
tain commands: 

1.  Form  platoons. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  makcii,  each  platoon  is  formed  as 
prescribed,  No.  2*75  ;  after  marching  20  pac^s,  the  cap- 
tain  gives  the  command  ualt,  -when  each  platoon  halts. 

852. — When  the  column  of  fours  is  at  the  frof,  each 
platoon  at  once  conforms  to  No.  276  ;  the  captain  omitB 
the  command  ffuide  left. 

In  the  column  by  file,  or  by  twos,  at  the  (rot,  to  form 
two9  or  fours,  those  leading  the  squadron  pass  to  the 
walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  to  form  twos,  fours 
and  platoons;  t!ie  same  principles  are  obseryed. 

TO  BREAK  BY  FOURS,  BY  TWOS,  AND  BY  FILE ; 
TO  FORM  TWOS,  FOURS,  AND  PLATOONS,  IN 
DOUBLING  THE  GAIT. 

*  353. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the 
captain  eommands : 

1.  By  fours'—trot. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  and 
the  right  guide  place  themselves  as  prescribed,  No.  "44. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
as  prescribed,  No.  21 B. 


136  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

To  break  by  twos  and  hy  file  is  executed  througLoul 
tJie   squadron,   as  prescribed  for  the  platoop,   numbers 

^^'C<    287 

o54. — When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  at  th^j 
f/qllop,  the  same  principles  are  observed  at  the  oom 
jtn'ands  :     1.  By  fours — gallop;  2.  March. 

When  the  column  is  at-  the  gallop,  these  movement* 
are  always  executed  at  the  same  gait,  as  prescribed, 
^'o.  348. 

355.— The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  file,  to 
form  twos,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands  ; 

1.  Form  twos — trol. 

2.  March. 

Tlxis  is  executed  througliout  the  squadron  as  pre- 
'scribed  for  the  platoon,  No.  232. 

356. — The  scjUftdron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  to 
form  fours,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands 

1.  Form  fours—trot . 

2.  Marcu. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  355,  in  order  to 
form   twos. 

367. — The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  foui-a,  to 
form  platoon,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  com 
mands  : 

1.  Fortn  platoons — tro!. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  mauch,  caoh  platoon  is  formed  at 
oace,  as  prescribed.  No.  281. 

358. — ^When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  these  formations 
are  executed  at  the  gallop,  following  the  same  principles. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  187 

When  the  column  is  at  the  ^ra/^op,  these  movements 
are  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  352,  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn, or  the  heads  of  platoon?,  as  the  case  naay  be,  pass- 
ing to  the  trot  at  the  command  march. 

The  open  column  marching  left  in  front,  it  breaks  by 
fours,  by  twos  and  by  file,  at  the  same  gait,  and  in 
doubling  the  gait,  on  the  same  principles  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands :  1.  By  the  left — by  fours  {bi/ 
twos  or  by  file.)  2.  March. 

369. — The  foregoing  movements  are  employed  in  pass- 
ing defiles,  the  captain  placing  hifnaelf  always  at  the 
head  of  his  squadron,  in  order  to  direct  the  movemcnta 
of  it  according  to  the  localities. 


THE  SQUADRON  MARCHING.  IN  OPEN  GOLUMN, 
TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR. 

360. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons  left  about  wheel  {or  right  about  wheel.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  on  the  kft  of  each 
platoon,  who  becomes  the  pivot,  prepares  to  halt,  with- 
out, however,  slackening  his  pace. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt,  and  the 
marching  flanks  wheel  at  the  gait  in  which  the  column 
was  marching,  regulating  themselves  upon  the  outer 
flank  of  the  platoon  at  the  bead  of  the  column,  so  as  to 
complete  the  first  half  of  the  movement  at  the  same 
ia»tant. 

The  marching  flanks  are  then  governed  by  tfco  platoon 
which  becomes  the  head  of  the  column  after  the  move- 
ment is  completed. 


lo8  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

The  movement  being  nearly  finiphed,  the  captaiaoom* 
mauds :     Forwaud. 

During  thia  movement,  the  right  and  left  guides  of 
the  Bquii(h-on  invf-rt  their  positions;  the  one  in  front 
)>eing  al'wa3'3  aligned  with  the  platoon,  the  one  in  rear 
behind  the  last  platoon. 

TO  HALT  THE  COLUMN. 

361. — The  column  being  on  the  racarch,  to  halt  it  the 
captain  commands : 

1 .  Colnmn. 

2.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  all  the  platoons  prepare  to  hall. 

At  the  command  halt,  all  the  platoons  halt  at  the 
same   time. 

After  the  command  halt,  there  should  be  no  move- 
ment in  the  platoons  ;  the  distances  and  dir^tions 
should  be  corrected  only  in  marching. 

The  capt-ain  places  himself  behind  the  guide  of  the 
second  platoon,  to  see  if  the  guides  of  the  first  and  sec- 
ond platoon  have  marched  upon  the  point  indicated; 
he  also  observes  if  the  prescribed  distances  have  been 
preserved.  If  they  have  not  been,  and  if  the  guides 
have  not  marched  upon  the  point  indicated,  the  column 
is  put  again  in  march,  in  order  to  correct  their  distances 
and   direction. 

THE  SQUADRON  MATCHING  IN  OPEN  COLUMN, 
TO  FORM  LINE,  FACED  TO  THE  LEFT,  TO 
THE  RIGHT,  TO  THE  FRONT,  AND  TO  THE 
REAR. 

362. — ^The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  right  in 
front,  to  form  it  in  line  faced  to  the  left,  on  its  left  flank, 
the  captain  commands: 


SqUADRON,  MOUNTED.  189 

1.  I^ft  info  line  uhficl. 

2.  March. 

3.  Jiigfd—T>KKBS. 

4.  Front. 

At  tho  first  command,  the  right  guide  moves  upon  the 
prolongation  of  the  direction  of  the  guides  of  the  col- 
iimti,  at  the  distance  of  the  front  of  a  phitoon,  facing 
the  side  towards  wliich  the  line  will  he  formed. 

At  the  command  M.u'.cn,  the  squadron  wheels  into  lino, 
the  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  serving  as  pivot^ 
iind  turning  upon  hi3  own  ground  and  the  fore  feet  of 
hifl  horses. 

The  captain  comma nrls,  liir/ht — Dress,  the  moment 
the  marching  flanks  have  nearly  completed  their  move- 
ment. 

At  this  cohin-iAPd  all  the  platoons,  align  tlicmsclves. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  captain  command.'*,.. 
Front. 

During  the  wheel  the  left  guide  resujttes  liis  place  in 
line. 

8ij3. — The  captain  bhscrves  that  the  pivots  execute 
their  movements  properly,  and  that  the  officers  and 
troopers  align  themselves  coi'rectly. 

Th^  guide,  who  moves  upon  the  prolongation  of  the 
Cuiiles  of  the  column,  sliould  take  rather  too  much 
ground  than  not  enough.  Tlu-  conductor  of  the  march- 
ing flank  of  the  leading  platoon  should  alitjn  himself 
upon  this  guide,  -without   er.deavoring  to  approach  hira. 

ci)i. — To  fonvi  lino  to  the  left,  on  its  left  flank,  from 
open  column,  left  in  front,  the  commands  are  the  same, 
and  are  executed  in  the  same  manner,  except  tliat  the  left 
guide  tAkos  his  place  where  the  right  of  the  fourth  pla 
toon  J8  to  rest ;  and  the  right  guide  resumes  his  place  in 
line  (on  the  left). 

365. — To  form  the  squadh-on  in  open  colnran,  left  in 
front,  the  captain  commands  :     "l.  platoons   hft    whetl ; 

12 


190  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

'2.  March;    3.  Halt;    Avhich  is   executed    as  prescribeO, 
is'o.  3S7,  but  by  invoree  lucnrtS.^ 

360. — The  squadron  lioitig  in  open  column,  left  in 
fcont,  to  fonn  it  in  line,  faced  to  the  right,  on  il?  right 
flank,  the  captain  connmands :  1.  liiyht  into  line  vheel ; 
2.  Marcii  ;  3.  Left — Dress  ;  4.  Front-  which  is  executed 
as. prescribed,  No.  3G2,  but  by  inverse  means. 

367.--- To  form  line  to  the,  right,  on  its  right  fia-nk, 
from  open  column^  right  in  front,  the  oomuiands  are  thf 
same,  and  are  executed  in  the  same  manner,  -wini  tl)e 
exception  of  No.  304;  the  action?  of  the  riglit  and  k-ff 
guides  being  inverse. 

368. — ^The  column  marching,  the  formTiViotis  of  lino 
fo  the  left  and  riglit  may  be  made  the  sJime,  and  at  tho 
same  commands ;    the   pivots  halting  at   the  command 

MAKCII. 

360. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right, 
or  l^ft  in  front,  to  form  line  to  the  left  or  vight,  witli- 
out  halting,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Platoons  left  {or  right)  V  heel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Qicide  right  {ov  left.) 

The  tuarching  flanks  will  regulate  by  that  of  the  pla- 
toon at  the  head  of  the  column.  The  pivots,  halting  at 
the  word  MARCH,  promptlj- tnove  off  tog^'ther  at  the  eom- 

man^^    FORWARD. 

^his  movement  is  executed  at  all  the  gaits. 

"<j';(j,__The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  to 
form  line,  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  on  the  prolongation 
and  in  advance  of  its  right  ♦r  left  flank,  the  captain 
commands: 


m/si. 


Ih^  /M 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  1(^1 

l^  On  right  info  line  (ov' on- left  into  line.) 

2.  March.  .      . 
•  8,   Guide  right  (or  left.) 

•i.  I^'kont. 

At  the  first  corama«(],  the  chief  of  the  llvst  platoon 
commands :     Rigid. 

At  the  command  march,  he  commands:  Turn;  the 
platoon  turns  to  the  right  and  moves  forward  at  the 
command  forward;  when  it  has  marched  20  paces,  its 
chief  comaiands:  Halt,  and  then:  Right — Drkss. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  forward  with- 
out approaehiiiar  the  line;  as  soon  aa  eaeli  one  arrives 
abreast  of  t!io  fourth  file  fj-om  the  left  of  the  platoon 
which  should  be  on  its  right,  its  chi'Cf  commands:  ''i. 
Right — Turn;  2.  Forward;  this  jdatoon.  then  directs 
itself^  towards  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line,  and  on 
arriving  abreast  of  the  croups  of  the  horses  in  line  its 
chief  commands:  ].  Halt;  2.  Dress.  The  squadron 
being  aligned,  the  capt«\iu  c6mmands :    Front. 

37 1.— The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  halted  or- 
marching,  to  form  it   in   line,   faced  to  the  front,  upon 
the  helid  and  to  the  left,  or  to  the  right,  of  the  column 
the  captain  commands  :  ' 

1.   left  front  into  line  (or  right  front  into  live  ) 
%  March.  •  ' 

3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  in 
front,  commands,  if  at  a  halt,  Forward;  the  chiefs  of  the 
other  platoons  command:  Left  oblique. 

The  command  march,  is  repeated  by  these  officers ; 
(the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  omits  it  if  his  platoon  is 
m  motion;)  when  it  lias  marched  80  paces,  he  com- 
mands:    1.  Halt;  2.  J?t^A^— Dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon,  when  his  platoon 
arrives  opposite  its  place  in  line,  commands,  foewabd  ; 
when  his  platoon  arrives  with   it»  horees'  bends  in  line 


1^  SCnOOl  OF  THE 

of  the  er.oupB  of  \ho  hordes  on  the  right,  he  conaninnJ?  : 
1.  Halt;  2,  Dress. 

The  equacfron  being  aligno.!,  the  cnptnin  cpmmands  : 
Front. 

r,7'2. — The  sqnaJron  being  at  a  halt;  or  in  motion,  in 
open  column,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear 
and  to  the  left,  or  on  the  rear  and  to  the  right,  of  th*.- 
column,  the  captain  first  wheels  the  platoons  about,  No. 
360,  and  then  commands  :  Right— front  into  line;  or 
left— front  into  line ;  which  are  executed  as  prescribed 
in  No.  371. 

In  the  first  ease,  he  should  usually  wheel  the  platoons 
to  the  left  about;  in  the  last,  to  the  rightabout ;  in  cither 
case,  he  may  first  halt,  or  he  may  "give  the  command  to 
be  executed  at  the  moment  the  wlicels  are  completed; 
or  he  may  move  forward  a  space  before  beginuiivgthe 
.second  movement. 

373 — ^The  squadron  being  halted,  or  in  motion,  in 
open  column,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  real",  on  the  head 
and  to  the  right  of  the  column,  the  captain  forms,  right 
— &ont  into  line,  No.  21 1,  and  theu  commands  :   ^ 

1 .  Platoons  left  about  (or  right  abovt)  wh^el. 

2.  Maucu. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Hight — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

To  form  the  line  on  the  head  and  to  the  loft  of  the 
c<:ylumn,  the  captain  i&VTua,  left— front  into  line;  and 
then  wheels  the  platoons  to  the  right  about. 


TO  BREAK  BY  PLATOONS  TO  THE  FRONT. 

974. — ^The  squadron   being  in  line,  the   oaptain  com 
itaando : 


SQOADRON,  MOUNTED.  W8 

1.  By  platoon. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  comnmnJ,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
(•ominauds,  forward;  the  others  command,  right  oblique. 

The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  repeats  the  command, 
march;  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  march,  when 
the  pl-atoon  on  his  right  has  moved  a  distance  equal  to 
three-fourths  of  a  platoon  front. 

When  the  second  platoon  arrives  directly  in  rear  of 
the  first,  its  chief  commands,  forward  ;  and  so  in  suc- 
cession with  the"  third  and  fourth  platoons,  at  the  mo- 
anenta  of  their  arrival  directly  in  rear  of  the  second 
and  third. 

When  the  movement  is  to  be  made  at  the  trot,  that 
word  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 

The  squadron  is  broken  by  the  left  on  the  same  prin- 
ciple, by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By  the 
left — by  platoon  ;    2.  March. 

'  If,  in  line,  the  fourth  platoon  be  on  the  right,  the 
third  next,  and  so  on,  and  the  command  be  by  platoon, 
the  fourth  platoon,  on  the  right,  leads;  if  the  command 
he  by  the  Irfi — by  platoon,  the  fivBt  platoon,  on  the  lefr, 
I'eads. 


TO  BREAK  BY  PLATOONS  TO  THE  REAR  FROM 
THE  RIGHT  TO  MARCH  TO  THE  LEFT. 


'6l5. — The   squadron   being  in  line,  the  captain  cara» 
mands  : 

1 .  Platooiiafrom  right  to  rear — to  march  to  the  lefL 

2.  March. 

At  tlie  first  command,  tho' chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commandp,    tight  abovt  wheel. 


I9i  •    .      SCHOOL  OF  THE 

At  tlie  command  march,  repeated  by  him,  this  platoon 
exeeutea  its  wheel  to  the  right  about;  when  nearly  ter- 
minated, its  chief  commands:  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left. 
After  marching  10  paces  straight  forward,  he  com- 
mandsv    i.  liigkf — ^Turn;  2.  Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively  those 
of  the  third  and  fourth,  commands,  right  about  xvheel, 
when  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on  liis  riglit  commands, 
MARCH,  when  that  platoon  has  passed  over  two-thirds  of 
its  first  wheel ;  each  wheels  about,  marches  10  paces  to 
the  rear,  and  turns  the  same. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  from  the  left 
to  the  rear  to  march  to  the  right,  on  the  same  principle, 
by  inverse  meana,  at  the  eomman-ds :  1.  Platoons  from 
left  to  rear- — to  march  to  the  right ;   2.  March. 


MOVEMENTS-  BY   FOURS,   THE   SQUADROIS" 
BEING  IN  OPEN  COLUMN. 


,  376. --Tha  squadron  being  in  open  column,  to  cause  it 
to  move  to  its  left  flank,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Fours—Left. 

2.  March. 

8.  Guidff  right. 

At  the  corainaud  march,  the  whebls  -are  execute'd  in 
each  platoon  by  foul's,  and  the  column  marches  by  its 
left  flank,  as  prescrihed,  No.  283. 

377. — If  the  column  be  marching,  the  commands  are: 
1.  Fours — Left  ;  2.  Guide  right',  No,  284.  - 

To  resume  the  direct  march,  in  open  column,  the  cap- 
tain commands : 

F&>ir.s — ^RiGHT. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  195 

At  this  command  the  fours  oil  wheel  to  the  right,  and 
ino.ve  forward,  with  the  guide  left  or  rirjht,  as  the  right 
01'  left  may  be  in  front. 

The  open  column  gai-n3  ground  to  its  right  flank  by 
inverse  means  and  commands.  To  resume  its  first  direc- 
tion, without  moving  forward,  the  commands  arc :  ^1. 
Voum — Left  ;  1.  Halt. 


r578. — The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  it  may  gaii: 
ground  to  the  rear  by  a  movement  by  fours";  the  cap 
tain  commands : 


1.  Fours — Left  about. 

2.  Mauch. 

8.   Guide  right. 

If  the  left  is  in  front,  the  command  habitually  would 
be :     1.  Fours — Right  about ;  and  3.  Guide  left.      -    • 

The  column  being  in  motion  to  the  rcai-,  to  resume  the 
inarch  to  the  frout,  the  captain  commands:  Fours — 
Right  about. 

If  he  wishes  it  to  halt,  he  adds:  2.  Halt. 


J^79  --In  these  movements,  to  the  left,  or  to  the  right 
\,y  fours,  tlic  chiefs  of  platoons  move  abreast  of  the  first 
/ours;  the  right  and  left  guides  preserve  their  places, 
facing  in  the  new  direction.  . 

The  fours  being  wheeled  about,  the  chiefsvof  platoons 
march  behind  their  platoons;  the  squadron  guide  with 
the  jilatoou  that  has  become  in  front,  marches  now  on 
its  flank  as  its  guide;  the  other  keeps  his  place  on  the 
flank  of  the  platoon  now  in  rear. 

During  the  march  by  flank,  the  captain  observes  that 
the  fours  preserve  their  distances  of  four  feet,  and  that 
the  chiefs  of  platoons  preserve  the  proper  intervaj,  to- 
ward the  side  of  the  guide .  • 


m  SOHOOL  OJP  THE 

ARTICLE  THIRD. 
DIRECT  MARCH  OF  THE  SQUADRON   IN  LINE. 

380. — The  principles  of  the  direct  march,  prescribed, 
No.  242,  and  following,  are  applicable  to  tlie" squadron. 

When  the  troopers  keep  their  horses'  heads,  and  their 
own,  square  to' the  front,  the  alignment,  as  well  as  the 
steady  march,  will  be  easily  preserved;  -whether  too  far 
advanced  or  retired,  or  -whether  their  interval  be  too 
great,  is  readily  ascertained  by  a  glance  of  the  eye,  with- 
out moving  the  head. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  on  the  flanks  of  pla- 
toons will  endeavor  to  preserve  the  general  alignment, 
by  aligning  themselves  on  each  other  instead  of  the  next 
tiles  towards  the  guide  ;  and  with  the  object  of  keeping 
the  line  of  horncs'  heads  one  yard  behind  the  line  of  the 
croups  of  the  horses  of  the  platoon  commanders. 

The  guide  should  not  put  himself  in  motion  with  pre- 
cipitancy, but  commence  the  gait  rather  slowly  ;  and  the 
same  in  passing  from  a  quick  to  a  slow^er  gait. 

The  direction  taken  by  the  guide  has  the  greatest  in- 
dueucc  on  the  regularity  of  the  march  ;  a  distant  fixed 
point  sRould  be  given  him,  in  a  line  perpendicular  to  the 
front  of  the  squadron;  this  is  done  by  the  captain,  and 
the  object  is  selected  v/ith  the  greatest  accuracy  from  a 
jposition  some  distance  in  rear  of  the  guide  ;  but  the  non- 
commissioned officers  must  learn  by  great  attention  anfl 
practice  to  judge  themselves,  and  select  an  object  direct- 
Jy  to  the  front ;  for  greater  accuracy,  sonic  slight  inter- 
mediate object,  or  »  succession  of  them,  should  be  kept 
in  the  eye,  in  the  line  to  the  distant  object. 
'  The  captain  should  observe  that  the  whole  line  moves 
together  at  the  command  of  execution. 

■During  the  march  if  it  is  seen  that  the  troopers  carry 
the  bridle  hand  to  the  left,  it  is  proof  that  the  point  of 
direction  is  to  the  left  of  a  perpendicular,  and  the  re- 
,verse.  '  '  ' 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  1»7 

38]. — The  platoon  officers  remain  aligned-tdwards  tli« 
jTuide;  the  one  nearest  is  responsible  for  the  gait;  and 
ihe  next,  the  most  responsible  for  the  alignment,  as  he 
regulates  its  base.  The  troopers  in  the  platoons  keep 
abreast  with  the  flauk  file:?. 

When  the  guide  is  centre,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  second  platoon,  who  bears  tlic  guidon,  becomes  tjie 
guide ;  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  regulates  the  gait, 
and  the  chief  of  the  third  platoon  regulates  the  base  of 
the  alignment. 

882. — The  regularity  of  the  march  in  line  depending 
much  upon,  the  officers  and  flank  files  of  platoons,  they, 
with  the  right  and  left  guides,  should  be  exercised  and 
practiced  as  a  "skeleton"  squadron ;  much  attention  must 
be  paid  to  the  preservation  of  intervals;  absent  platoon 
commanders  will  be  replaced  by  sergeants. 

This  exercise  becomes  more  important  when  the  num- 
ber of  privates  in  a  squadron  may  bo  so  reduced  as  to 
preclude  the  exercises  ofMhe  school  .of  the  squadron; 
then  other  squadron  movements  Avill  also  be  practiced. 

383. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  move  forward, 
the  captain  commands: 

1.  Fm'toard.  ^ 

2.  Guide  right,  or  Guide  hft,  or  Guide  centre. 

3.  Marc:h. 

At  the  command  harcii,  the  squad rcn  moves  forward. 

384:. — To  halt  the  squadron,  the  captain  comnwinds: 

1.  Squadrofu 

2.  Halt. 

3.  Hight — Deess,  or  S.  Centre— Dv.fs.s. 

At  the  second  command,  the  squadron  halts. 
At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  aligns  itself  as'- 
prescribed,  No,  3U> 


133  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

^The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands : 
raoNT. 

385. — The  squadron  marching  at  the  loalTc,  before 
passing  to  the  trot,  the  captain  assures  himself  that  the 
.point  of  direction  is  good,  and  that  the  squadron  marphea 
with  uniformity  and  steadiness. 

When  th'e  squadron  marches  steadily  at  the  trot^  it 
[.asses  to  the  gallop. 

The  captain  observes  that  the  troopers  keep  their 
hors.es  quiet,  and  do  not  quicken  the  gait  more  than  ne- 
cessary ;  a  common  fault  in  the  march  at  the  gallop. 
For  this  purpose  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  guide  and  the 
flank  files  pay  attention  to  keep  their  horses  evenly,  at 
the  prescribed  rate  of  gallop. 

In  the  march  at  the  gallop,  it  is  necessary  to  slacken 
the  pace  as  soon  as  disorder  is  discovered. 

To  march  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  cominenees  at 
i]xQ  wall;  then  passes  to  tlio  trot;  the  same  progression 
is  observed  in  order  to  halt  when  marching  at  the  ^a^^ojo; 
the  squadron  is  then  exercised  in  movin";  off  from  a  halt 
at'the  trot  and  at  the  gallop,  and  in  haltmg  when  march* 
ing  at  these  gaits. 


COUNTER-MARCH. 

38G. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  face  it  in  th^  op- 
posite direction,  the  captain  commands:  / 

1.  Qounter-march  by  the  right  JianJc. 

2.  Makch. 

3.  Fkoxt, 

.  At  th'e  first  comman'd,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  turn  to 
the  right  and  place  themselves  in.  front  of  and  near  their 
right  files  ;  the  members  of  the  squadron  behind  the  line 
pass  into  line  on  its  left. 

At  the  command  maech,   tlie  chief  of  the  first  platoon 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  199 

leads  the  movement,  which  is  executed  as  prescribed, 
No.  255 ;  the  right  guide  folIo-A-ri  the  lieutenaiit,  but 
turns  to  place  himself  behind  the  left  guide,  with  two 
paces  between  the  croups  of  their  horses;  the  chief  of 
platoon  taking  place  on  his  right,  and  superintending 
.the  alignment  of  hia  platoon;  the  cliiefa  of  the  other 
platoons  move  with  their  right  files  and  h.dt,  faced  to 
the  right,  near  the  centre  of  their  platoons  in  the  new 
line,  and  close  to  the  heads  of  the  horses. 

Those  who  took  post  on  the  left  of  the  line  follow  the 
morement,  and  take  their  prOper  positions  as  they  ar- 
rive at  them  ;  at  the  command  i'RONT,  the  chiefs  of  the 
platoons  take  their  usual  positions. 

The  counter-march  should  be  executed  generally  at 
•the  trot.  For  this  purpose,  after  the  first  cou^mand,  the 
captain  indicates  the  gait. 

This  movement  is  executed  by  the  left  flank  on  the 
same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
raauds:  \.  Counter-march  by  the  left  fank ;  2.  MAKta^; 
3.  Front. 


WHEELINGS. 


o87. — ^The  principles  prescribed  for  the  platoon,  N.os. 
So7  and  following,  are  applicable  to  the  squadron  wheel- 
ing on  a  fixed  or  a  movable  pivot.  The  execution  of  it 
becomes  more  difficult  as  the  front  is  extended  ;  it, re- 
quires, on  the  part  of  officers  and  troopers,  a  particular 
and  constant  attention. 

During  the  wheel,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  at  the 
centre  of  their  platoons,  and  correctly- aligned  upon 
each  other,  keeping  their  lioa'ses  upon  the  arc  of  circle 
more  or  less  great,  in.  proportion  to  their  distance  from 
the  pivot.  The  chief  of  the  platoon  on  which  the  wheel 
is  niade  regulates  himself  upon  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
on  the  marching  flank,  observing  to  move  progressively,, 
.1H  the  latter  advances  in  the  new  direction. 


m  SCHOOL  OF  TU& 

The  chief  of  the  platoon  on. the  marching  flank  de- 
scribes his  circle  so  as  neither  to  move  from,  nor  ap« 
proach,  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon. 

The  files  on  flanks  of  platoons  dress  upon  each  other, 
all  observing  the  progression  of  the  marching  fiank, 
4iud  keeping  upon  the  arcs  they  should  describe. 

The  guide  placed  on  the  side  of  the  pivot  is  the  actual 
}'ivot,  although  he  is  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  marching  flank  of  a  squad- 
ron should  measure  with  accuracy  its  arc  of  circle;  if  it 
is  too  great,  the  files  are  made  to  open  and  disunite, 
and  the  wheel  becomes  longer;  if  it  is  too  small,  the  file? 
are  crowded,  there  is  confusion,  and  the  pivot  -is  forced, 

TO  WHEEL  ON  A  FIXED  PIVOT. 

388. — The  squadron  is  exercised  in  wheeling  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  first  at  the  walk,  then  at  the  trot;  also  at  the  gal- 
lop, when  the  troopers  are  confirmed  in  all  the  principles. 

The  squadron  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  In  circle  right  xohecl. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed,  Nos. 

257  and  38>.- 

389.— To  halt  the  squadron  during  the  wheel,  tbe» 
captain  commands: 

1.  Squadron. 

2.  Halt. 

3.  Left— ^Dv.E6s, 

4.  Fkont. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  troopers  halt. 

390.'— If,  instead  of  halting,  the  captain  wishes  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  commands: 


3QCADR0N,  MOUNTBD.  80  i 

1.  FoRWAnn. 

2.  Ouide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  whale  squadron  moves  foi-- 
vrard  at  the  gait  in  which  it  was  marching  before  the 
wheel. 

391. — ^The  squadron  is  halted  if  confusion  arises  du- 
ring the  wheel ;  the  captain  explains  the  origin  of  t!ie 
fault,  and  the  means  of  repairing  it. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  understand  these  move- 
ments, the  whole  circle  is  passed  over  several  time  a 
without  halting. 

392. — The  squadron  wheeling  steadily  at  the  wall', 
to  pass  to  the  trot,  the  captain  chooses  a  moment  in  which 
the  horses  are  calm.  After  one  or  two  turns,  the  squad- 
ron is  made  to  resume  the  wflfX;.  The  squadron  whed- 
ing  well  at  the  trot  is  exercised  to  wheel  at  the  gal/op, 
upCm  the  same  principles.  After  one  or  two  turns,  it 
passes  to  the  trot,  then  to  the  xoalk. 

The  squadron  is  afterwards  exercised  to  wh^el  at  tli'.' 
trot  and  at  the  gallop,  in  commencing  from  a  hnlt,  and 
to  halt  while  wheeling  at  those  gaits. 

393. — The  squadron  is  also  exercised  to  connnencc  the 
wheel,  when  marching.     The  captain  commands: 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt  (or  Forward.) 

^  Which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  in  No.  266. 

^Theee  movements  are  executed  at  the  different  gaits; 
but  they  should  not  be  repeated  too  frequently  at  the 
tfallop,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  horses. 

394.— The  squadron  being^on  the  march,  to  canse  it 


202  SCHOOL  OP  THE 

to  wlieel  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  giyes  the 
command  trot  or  gallop  before  that  of  march. 

"At  the  command  march,  the  pivot  stops  short ;  the 
marching  flank  takes  the  gait  indicated. 

/At  the  command  fouwaud,  both  move  forward  at  the 
gait  indicated  for  the  wheel. 


TO  WHEEL  ON  A  MOVABLE  'PIVOT. 


39o.-:-In  Avhecls  on  a  movable  pivot,  the-pivot  moves 
m  an  arc- of  a  circle  of  13  paces  radius,  (gaining  about 
13  paces  to  tlie  front  and  the  same  distance  to  the  right, 
in  a  right — wheel)  at  the  same  time  it  slackens  the 
%ait;  the  marching  flank  increases  its  gait.  The  sixth 
file  of  the  second  platoon  from  the  pivot,  which  is  the 
middle  of  the  radius  of  the  wheel,  preserves  the  gait  at 
which  the  squadron  was  ntarching.  The  troopers  placed 
between  this  file  and  the  pivot  diminish  proportionally 
their  gait ;  those  placed  between  this  file  and  the  march- 
ing flank  augment  proportionally  theirs. 

The  troopers  preserve  their  intervals  from  the  pivot, 
and  their  alignment  by  the  opposite  flank.  After  the 
V7heel,  the  guide  remains  where  it  was  before  the  wheel, 
and  is  given  a  new  point  of  direction. 

396. — The  squadron  marching  in  line,  tp  change  di- 
rection to  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Right — Turn, 

2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  right,  the  pivot  prepares  to  slacken 
and  the  wheeling  flank  to  increase  the  gait.  At  the 
command  turn,  the  latter  trots;  the  pivot  decrease? 
his  gait,  so  that  he  shall  pass  over  a  quarter  circle 
of  dfy  paces  in  the  same  time  that  the  middle  of  the 
second  platoon  passes  its  quarter  circle  (about  47  paces). 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  203 

witbout  change  of  gait.  "Whatever  error  occurs,  the 
pivot  Bhould  not  leave,  or  alter  his  quarter  circle. 

When  this  wheel  is  executed  at  the  trot,  the  march- 
ing flank  gallops. 

To  change  the  direction  to  the  left,  the  movement  i? 
executed  on  the  eainc  principles,  but  by  inverse  meanp, 
at  the  commands:     I.  Left — Turn";  2.  Fok-ward. 


INDIVTDUAU  OBLIQUE  MARCH. 


d97. — The  squadron  marching  iu  Ime,  to  cause  ft  to 
gain  ground  towards  a  flank,  without  changing  the  front 
of  the  squadron,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Right  oblique  (fir  left  oblique.) 

2.  Makch. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

Forward. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  Xo.  270. 

During  the  oblique  march,  the  captain  observes  that 
the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  on  th-e  same  line,  preserve  be- 
tween  them  the  same  interval,  and  follow  parallel  di- 
rections, in  order  to  preserve  the  general  alignment.     ' 

This  movement  is  executed  at  the  walk  or  at  the  trot ; 
not  at  the  gallop. 


OBLIQUE  MARCH  BY  PLATOONS. 


398. — ^The  squadron  being  in  lino,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
gvound  towards  a  flank,  by  the  oblique  maroh  by  pla- 
toons, the  captain  commands : 


204  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

1.  Platoons  right  half-wheel  {ov  left  half-%cheel.) 

2.  March. 

3.  FORWART). 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  its  Aa//" 
■loheel  to  the  right,  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

At  the  third  command  each  platoon  nioYes  forwai*a, 
conforming  tot'ie  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  cause  the  squadron  to  resume  the  primitive  direc- 
tion, the  captain  commands: 

1.  Platoons  left  half-wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward; 

4.  Guide  right  (or  left.) 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prcscribedf  but  by  inyerse 
means.  — 

In  the  oblique  march  by  platoons,  the  pivots  of  the 
platoons  should  all  halt  at  the  same  instant,  at  the  com- 
mand march,,  so  that  all' the  wheels  may  terminate  at 
the  same  time. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  right  guide  on-the  riglit 
of  the  first  platoon,  marches  straight  forward,  or  upon 
the  point  which  ia  indicated  to  him;  the  guides  of 
the  other  platoons  follow  the  fourth  trooper  from  the 
lift  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  and  keep  at 
tive  paces  from  him;  (this  for  a  platoon  of  12  files.) 

The  captain  places  himself  habitually  at  two  paces 
outside  and  abreast  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

The  guides  remain  at  their  j^laces  in  line. 

The  oblique  march  by  platoons  is  executed  at  the 
valk,  at  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  bein^ 
litilted  or  in  motion. 


SaUADRON,  MOUNTED.  206 

THE  SQUADJION  BEING  IN  LINE,  TO  CAUSE- IT 
TO  GAIN  GROUND  TO  THE  REAR,  AND  FACE 
IT  AGAIN  TO  THE  FRONT,  BY  FOURS, 

899. — The  captiin  commands  : 

1.  Fours  left  about  {ov  right  about.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right  (or  left.)  * 

Which  ia  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  286. 

The  chiefs  of  ])latoon3,  guides,  trumpeters,  <tc.,  wheel 
about  individuallj'- ;  the  first  named  marching  in  rear  of 
their  platoons,  the  latter  in  front. 

(The  squadron  marching  thus:  at  the  command /e/if 
forward — fours  left,  it  marches  in  colttmn,  right  in 
front.) 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  march 
to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands:"!,  Fours — Left 
ABOUT,  (or  right  alout  ;)  2.    Guide  right  (or  left.) 

These  movements  by  fours  are  executed  also  at  the  tvot. 

THE  SQUADRON  MARCHING  IN  LINE,  TO  MARCH 
IT  TO  THE  REAR  BY  WHEELING  THE  PLA- 
TOONS ABOUT. 

400. — Tlie  squadron  marching  in  line,  the  captain 
commands: 

1.  Platoons  rightabout  wheel,  (or  left  about  wheel.) 
«  2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left,  {or  right.) 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt  short,  and  tura 
upon  themselves ;  the  marching  flanks  regulate  them- 

1& 


206  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

selves  by  the  right  during  the  first  half  of  the  wheel, 
so'iis  to  arrive  together  in  column,  and  by  the  J  oft  dur- 
ing the  eecond  half,  so  as  to  arrive  together  in  line. 

At  the  command  koew-ard,  the  equadron  resumes  the 
lirect  march. 

If,  after  wheeling  about,  the  captain  wishes  to  halt, 
he  commands:   8.  Halt.     4.  Left — Dress,     5.  Front. 

In- the  wheels  to  the  right  «6o?ii,  the  right  guide  turus 
to  the  right,  moves  straight  forward,  a  platoon  front 
and  turns  again  to  tlie  right,  and  places  himself  on  the 
l^ft  of  the  squadron  ;  the  left  guide  executes  the  same 
movements,  which  place  him  on  the  right  of  the  squad- 
ron. - 

These  movements  are  executed  from  a  halt,  and  at 
4he  trot  and  gallop. 


THE  SQUADRON  MARCHIl^^G  IN  LINE,  TO  BREAK 
.,-     IT  TO   THE  FRONT  BY. PLATOON,  AND  TO 
REFORM  IT.  . 

404. — The  captain  commands: 

1.  By  platoon. 

2.  March, 

The  first  platoon  marches  on,  its  chief  giving  no  words 
of  command.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  command 
halt;  and  each,  in  succession,  connnanids :  I.  Right 
oblique,  and  adds,  2.  March,  when  the  platoon  on  his 
right  has  marched  three-fourths  of  a  platoon  front;  the 
•rest  of  the  movement  is  executed  as  in  No.  374. 

At  the  ^ro^  or  gallop  the  movement  is  executed  on  the 
^ame  principles ;  the  cliiefs  of  the  2d,  Sd  and  4th  pla- 
toons commanding,  instead  of  halt,  iMilk — march,  or 
tfot — marcu  ;  and  when  the  platoon  on  Iho  right  has 
gained  the  prescribed  distance,  indicating  the  original 
gait  in  the  next  command. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  207 

402. — The  squadron  marcliing,  or  at  a  halt,  -in  o\yen 
<xtlumn,  right  or  left  in  front,  to  form  it  at  tlie  saiiie 
gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  jFbrwi  squadron — hft,  (or  right.) 

2.  MARClf. 

TVhidi  is  executed  as  in  No.  S71. 

•103. — The  column  marching  at  the  trot,  this  move- 
ment is  executed  on  the  Fame  principles,  exoept  tbatths 
chief  of  the  iirst  platoon  commands:  1.  Walk;  S. 
jVlAncii;  and  each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon  com- 
mands :  r.  Walk;  2.  MAncn;  on  arriving  in  line.  The 
movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  when  the 
column  is  at  the  gallop,  each  platoon  passing,  successive- 
ly to  the  trot. 

.The  squadron  marchins;  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the 
left,  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverso  means,  at 
the  commands:  1.  By  the  left — hi; platoon.  2.  M.^jpcir, 


THE  SQUADRON  MARCHING  IN  LINE,  TO  BREAK 
IT  TO  THE  FRONT  BY  PLATQON,  IN  DOUB- 
LING THE  GAIT  ;    AND  TO  REFORM  IT. 

.  404. — The  captain  commands : 

1.  By  platoon — trot. 

2.  Marcu. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands:  Tvot ;  and  he  repeats  the  command,  march; 
the  chief  of  each  of  the  otlier  platoons  commands,  in 
snccession,  1.  RigJit  dhUque — trot;  and  adds,  2.  Maeof, 
when  the  platoon  on  his  right  has  marched  a  distance 
equal  to  three-fourths  of  a  platoon  fronj. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line  at  the  trot,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  at  the  gallop,  on  the  eame  principles, 


203  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

405. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  oalitmn,- riglit 
or  left  in  front,  to  form  it  in  doubling  the  gajt,  the  cap- 
tain conunands : 

1.  Form  sqHadro7i. — left  (or  right) — trot. 

2.  Makch. 

At  the  first  command^  the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  pla- 
toons command :  JOeft  oblique — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the 
three  last  platoons,  the  firat  platoon  continues  to  march 
straight  for wai\i  at  the  walk,  and  the  rest  of  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  in  JN"©.  403. 

The  column  being  at  the  trot,  this  movement  is  execu- 
ted on  the  same  principle  at  the  gallop. 

Tiie  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left 
by  platoon,  in  doubling  the  gait,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, No.  404,  but,  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mands: 1.  By  the  left  by  platoon — irot,{oi'  gallop;)  2. 
MAncn. 


PASSAGE  OF  OBSTACLES. 


40Q. — -The  squadron  marching  in  line  and  encounter- 
ing an  obstacle  impassable  hy  either  of  the  platoons  in 
iiue,  its  chief  will  oblique  it  behind  the  next  platoon, 
(if  it  be  a"  central  one,  behind  a  flank  platoon,)  in  the 
manner  and  by  tlie  commands  of  JSTo.  401.  The  obstacle 
being  passed,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  return  it  to 
its  position^  as  in  No.  405.  If  the  obstacle  admit  of  it, 
the  chief  of  platoon  will,  instead,  command,  by  fours,  or 
bythe  left — by  fours. 

407. — The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  pass  broken 
•groimd  by  the  head  of  each  platoon,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 


•SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  209 

1.  In  each  platoon, — by  fours,  (or  by  tu)cs.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right,  {or  left.) 

At  the  command  march,  each- platoon  breaks  by  fours 
as  prescribed,  No.  278  ;  th«  chiefs  of  platoon  march  in 
front  of  the  first  set  of  fours  or  twos;  the  rigbt  and  left 
guides  as  in  column  by  fours  or  twos,  trum;^eter8,  <fec., 
in  rear  of  their  platoons. 

If  the  ground  rcv^uires-a  platoon  to  deviate  from  its 
direction,  it  should  return  to  it  as  soon  as  possible,  and 
vecovTir  its  proper  interval  and  alignment. 

In  marching  thus,  the  captainnuay  cause  the  squad- 
ron to  break  by  twos  and  by  fie,  observing  to  form  twos 
and  fours  as  soon  as  the  ground  will  permit. 

These  movements  arg  executed  in  increasing  the  gait, 
or  when  the  squadron  is  marching  at  the  trot  or  at  the 
gaUop. 

408.-^To  reform  the  squadron,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Foi'm  platoons.  * 

2.  March. 

Or  he  will  add  to  the  first  command  the  indication  of 
the  increased  gait. 

These  movements  are  executed  by  the  left,  or.  the 
same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands: 
1.  In  eachplatoon,  by  the  left — by  fours  (or  by  ticos  ;)  2. 
March;  3.  Guide  ieft  {or  right} 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 
CHARGE. 

40p.— In  the  charge,  as  in  every  other  direct  niarch, 
it  is  important  to  keep  the  horses  straight,  •  As  soon  a« 
any  confusion  is  observed,  it  ie.necessary  to  halt  and  re- 
commence the  movement. 


210  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

.  The  equa<5rt>n  is  exercised  at  the  eliargo:  1.  In  line ; 
2.  Li  column;  3.   As  foragers. 

The  chargs  in  line  is  executed  b}"  the  squnuron  wben 
in  line  ;  it  should  be  as  short  as  possible,  so  ns  to  reach 
an  enemy  in  good  order,  aud  without  fatiguing  the 
horses. 

The  charge  in  column  is  executed  by  the  squadron 
broken  in  open  column. 

To  execute  the  charge  as  foragers,  all  the  troopers  of 
the  squadron  disperse,,  aud  direct  themselves  in  couples 
upx>n  the  point  each  wishes, to  attack,  observing  not  to 
lose  sight  of  their  ofnx^ers,  who  charge  with  them. 

410. — The  squadron  being  in  line,' the  captain  orders 
tlie  sabres  to  be  drawn,  and  the  platoons  to  charge  one 
after  another,  commencing  by  the  right. 

For  this  purpose  the  captain  advances  240  paces  to 
the  front,  taking  the  squadron  guides,  to  make  the  line 
on  which  the  platoons  halt  and  dress  after  charging  ;  aud 
when  he  v»'ish€s  the  movement  to  commence,  lie  gives  a 
sign  al. 

"The  first  platoon  tlien  moves  forward  at  the  com- 
mands of  its  chief,  as  prescribed,  No.  292.  It  pasaes 
successively  from  the  walTi:  to  the  trot,  from  the  irbt  to 
the  gallops  and  fioni  the  cjallop  to  the  charge. 

The  three  other  platoons  break  in  their  turn,  when 
the  preceeding  one  has  halted. 

411. — To  execute  the  charge  by  the  entire  squadron, 
the  captain  places  himself  in  tront  of  the  centre  of  his 
squadron,  and  commands : 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  centre.  . 

3.  Mahch. 

When  the  squadron  has  marched  forward  20  paces, 
he  commands: 

1.  Trot. 

2.  MakcHc 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  211 

At  60  paces  further,  he  commands : 
1.   Gallop. 

At  80  paces  further,  he  couimauda*: 
Chauge. 

At  this  command,  repeated  Lj  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  troopers  take  the  position  oi  charge  sabre. 

■\VJieu  the  sqiftiJron  has  passed  over  60  paces  at  the 
charge,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 
2. ,  Squadron. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Centre — DnESS.  '" 

5.  Front. 

At  the  command  attention,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
plato6n,  the  troopers  slaclieu-the  pace,  and  carry  sabre. 

Ki  the  command  squadron,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  oom- 
mand,  platoon,  and  the  troopers  pass  to  the  trot. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, the  troopers  halt.  * 

At  tlje  command  centre — dress,  they  align  themselves 
to  the  centre. 

The  squadroa  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands: 
Fr.oNT. 

To  assure  himself  that  the  principles  prescribed,  No. 
2^8, -are  exactly  followed,  the  captain  sometimes  places 
himself  in  front  of  the  sqimdron,  facing  it,  and  at  the 
distance  that  will  enable  him  to  remark  better  the  faults. 
In  this  case,  the  next  in  command  gives  the  commands, 

412. — When  the  squadron  executes  the  cliaiije  cow^ 
rectly,    instead  of  halting  when  the  charge  is  tluished, 
the  captain  commands:  ^ 


212*  SCHOOL  OF  THE  — 

1.  Attention. 
J2.  Trot. 
3.  March. 

At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  squadron  passes'1;o  the  trot,  and  at  20  paces  beyond 
he  commands: 

1.  First  {or  fourth)  platoon — as  foragers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  trhe  platoon  com- 
mands, gallop  ;  he  repeats  the  command  maecii,  andliav- 
ing  gained  20  yard^  in  advance  of  the  line,  lie  com- 
mands, CHARGE  AS  FORAGERS.  The  platoon  then  disperses 
and'  charges  as  foragers.  The  trumpeter  follows  the 
chief  of  the  platoon. 

The  squadron  follows  this  platoon  at  the  trot ;  when 
it  has  passed  over  150  paces,  the  captain  causes  the 
rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  repeated  by  the 
truixipeter  of  the  platoon  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  lat- 
ter rallies  upon  the  squadron,  as  prescribed,  No.  294, 
and  when  three-fourths  of  the  platoon  have  rallied,  and 
arc  in  line,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention.       ♦      ■ 

2.  Gallop. 

3.  March. 

4.  Charge. 

The  squadron  executes  again  the  charge  in  line ;  the 
troopers  who  have  not  been  able  to  raljy  charge  upon 
the  flanks  of  the  squadron. 

The  captain  may  order,  two  right  (or  left)  platoons  as 
foragers.  , 

413, — To  exercise  the  troopers  in  rallying  upon  any 
point  whatever,  the  captain,  during  the  march  at  the 
trot,  causes  the  squadron  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of 
ii^  flanks,  by  executing  a  half- wheel  to  the  right  or  to 


SQUADHON,  MOUNTED.  2i8 

the  left,  or  by  breaking  by  platoons  to  the  right  or  to  the 
?e/^,  and  reforming  immediately  in  a  new  direction. 

414. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column  at  the 
trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1-  7b  the  charge, 
2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands,  gallop. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  this  platoon  commences  the  gallop. 

The  other  platoons  follow  at  the  trot,  each  taking  the 
gallop  when  the  platoon  which  precedes  it  is-  at  the  dis- 
tance of  60  paces. 

When  the  first  platoon  has  passed  over  80  paces  at 
the  gallop,  its  chief  commands,  charge. 

At  this  command,  the  platoon  executes  the  charge  : 
and  when  it  has  passed  over  60  paces,  its  chief  causes 
it  to  pass  to  the  <ro<  by  the  commands:  1.  Attention; 
.2.  Trot ;  B.  March.  . 

The.  other  platoons  pay  attention  tor  the-moveitienta  of 
the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  so  as  to  change  the 
gait  in  time,  and  to  resume  their  ordinary  distance  ;  the 
captain  halts  the  column  when  he  thinks  proper. 

These  charges  are  executed,  each  platoon  taking  in 
its  turn  i\\e  head  of  the  column. 

A  platoon  that  has  failed  in  this  charge,  or  is  dis- 
persed, would  rally  in  rear  of  the  column. 

415. — The  squadron  marching  in  open  column  at  the 
trot,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  First  platoon — as  foragers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  com- 


214  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

mands,  gallop;  he  rejpeats  the  command  march,  and  hav- 
ing gained  20  yiii'ds,  he  commands,  charge  as  foragbbs. 
*  The  squadron  continues  to  march  at  the  trot,  and 
Avhen  it  has  passed  over  100  or  150  paces,  the  captain 
causes  the  ralhj  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal  the  i:>latoon  rallies  and  reforms  at  the 
rear  of  the  column,  or  at  its  place  in  line  if  the  squad- 
ron has  been  put  in  line. 

The  charge  as  foragers  is  used  against  artillery,  or  in 
pursuit.  -A  squajdron  skirmishing,  or  from  line,  ordered 
to  charge  a  battery,  might,  when  within  range  of  grape, 
especially  if  hidden  by  smoke,  open  from  the  centre,  and 
make  for  its  flanks.  The  reserve  advances  to  charge,  if 
neoessary,  the  support  of  the  battery. ' 


RALLYING. 


416. — To  give  the  troopers  the  habit  of  rallying 
promptly,  after  having  been  dispersed,  the  captaip 
places  the  squadron  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground; 
and  after  giving  notice  to  the  jBies  on  the  flanks  of  pla- 
toons to  remain  upon  the  line  with  him,  he  causes  the 
chargi  as  foragers  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal  the 
troopers  disperse  and  charge  as  foragers ;  when  they 
are  at  the  distance  of  .150  or  200  paces,  the  captain 
causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded,  which  is  executed  as 
prescribed,  Iso.  29-i. 

The  captain  observes  that  the  troopers  disperse  with- 
out confusion;  that,  in  rallying,'  they  direct  themselves 
to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  outside  of  the  flanks  of  the 
squadron,  in  order  to  unmask  promptly  the  front  of  the 
squadron,  and  to  reform  in  passing  by  the  rear. 

When  the  troopers  rally  without  confusion,  this  move- 
ment is  repeated  without  requiring  the  flank  files  to  re- 
main on  the  line  of  the  squadron. 

At  the  signal  to  charge  as  foragers,  the  squadron  dis- 
perses in  every  direction  to  the  front. 


SQUADR9N,  MOUNTED,  215 

Wlicn  the  squadron  is  dispersed,  the  captain  causes 
the  ndly  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers, and  the  troopers,  rejoin  rapidly  ;  tlie  officers  aligu 
themselves  pi-omptly  upon  the  captaiH,  and  the  non- 
commiBsioncd  officci^  mark  immedisttely  the  flanks  of 
the  platoons. 

As  soon  as  ttie  captain  has  formed  two-thirds  of  the 
squadron,  he  moves  forward,  chai'ges  again  and  halts. 

When  the  squadron  is  dispersed  as  foragers,  tlie  cap- 
tain should  sometimes  establish  himself  <o  t]ie  rir/fit  or  to 
the  left  of  the  direction  followed  by  the  troopers,  and 
then  order  the  rallr/  to  be  sounded,  to  accustom  them  to 
rally  upon  any  point  lie  ii^ay  select. 

These  movements  are  flrst  executed  at  the  trot,  and 
then  at  the  gallop. 

Troopers  being  dispersed  and  closely  pursued,  must 
avoid  the  defenceless  confusion  of  a  crowd.  They  must 
scatter  as  they  go,  and  will  thus  soon  put  themselves 
on  an  equality  with  their  pursuers.  Thc^e  may,  in  their 
turn,  be  the'p'.irsued. 


SKIRMISHIXG. 

417. — When  the  squadron  acts  indcpendejitly,  it  a^  ill 
usually  send  out  one  platoon  to  skirmish;  circumstances 
may  require  two  or  three  jdatoous  to  be  sent. 

When  the  squadron  is  in  sight  of  the  skirmishers,  the 
captain  orders  no  signal  except  the  rally.  The  chief  of 
the  skirmishers  observes  the  movements  of  the  squad- 
ron he  covers,  and  conforms  to  them  as  soon  as  practi- 
cable, requiring  his  trumpeter  to  sound  the  necessary 
signals. 

When  the   squadron   changes  front,  the  chief  of  tlie 
skirmishers   moves  upon  the  new  front,  unless  the   cap-, 
tain  gives  orders  to  the  contraryr 

The  trumpeter  who  follows  the  chief  of  the- skirmish- 
era  should  give  the  signals  only  upon"  the  order  of  that 


2ie  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

officer.  The  skirmishers  should  execute  their  move- 
ments only  by  the  signals  of  the  trumpeter  who  accom- 
panies the  officer- who  commands  them. 

What  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  2)latoo7i, 
mounted,  is  conformed  to  by  the  troopers,  and  by  the 
squadron  line  of  skirmishers. 

When  several  platoons  act  as  skirmishers,  the  firing 
commences  at  the  guide  in  the  centre  of  the  line,  pro- 
gressing to  the  right  and  left. 

When  .a  squadron  is  acting  as  skirmishers,  the  captain 
is  always  followed  by  a  trumpeter ;  the  other  is  placed 
several  steps  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  lifie  of  skir- 
mishers, in  order  to  repeat  as  soon  as  possible  the  sig- 
nals given  by  the  trumpeter  of, the  ca^jtain. 

41.8. — The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  com- 
mands 4 

1.  Mrst  {ov  fourth)  platoon  as  shlrmishers. 

2.  March. 

At  tlie  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  if 
not  already  drawn,  orders  sabres  to  be  drawn,  and  then 
commands:  1.  Forward;  2.  Ti'ot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
platoon,  it  moves  forward.  After  marching  100  paces 
to  the  front,  the  chitf  of  the  platoon' commands:  1. 
Eight  jxles from  right  {ov  from  left) — as  shirmishers  ;  2. 
March  ;  which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  295. 

419, — When  llie  captain  wishes  the  8kirmishGi*s  to  re- 
enter the  squadron,  he  causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

>At  this  signal  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers,  joining  the 
reserve,  or  placing  himself  conveniently  for  resuming 
his  place  in  the  squadron,  repeats  the  signal,  and  the 
platoon  being  rallied,  he  joins  it  at  the  gallop  ov  trot. 

420. — When  the  captain  wishes  to  r.elieve  a  platoon 
which  is  skirmishings  ■  tjie  chief  of  the    new   platoon 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  -21T 

mores  forward  upon  the  reserve  of  the  platoon  which  is 
acting  as  skirmishers.  On  coming  up  abreast  of  it,  ho 
orders  out  8  files  as  skirmishers,  as  has  been  explained. 
As  soon  as  the  new  skirmishers  have  passed  5  paces 
beyond  those  they  are  to  relieve,  the  latter  irtm  about 
and  rally  upon  their  reserve  at  a  trot.  The  platoon 
having  rallied,  is  conducted  back  to  the  squadron  at  ther 
Irot. 

421. — "When  the  eijtire  squadron  is  to  act  as  skirmish- 
ers, the  captain  orders  the  sabres  to  be  drawn.  He  then 
eommunds : 

1.  Fonoard — trot, 

2.  March. 

Having  arrived  at  the  point  where  the  reserV^e  is  to 
be  established,  about  100  paces  from  the  front  of  the 
body  to  be  covered,  and  more  if  it  has  been  command- 
ed, the  captain  commands: 

1.  Three  right  {ov   three  left)  2-)latoon$ — «.s   skir- 
mishers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  MARcn,  the  chief  of  the  platoon, 
which  is  to  support  the  skirmishers,  halts  that  platoon  ; 
the  right  guide  joins  the  skirmisherf,  and  when  they  de- 
ploy, takes  his  place  iq.-  the  centre,  there  to  be  the 
guide  of  the  whole  line;  the  left  guide  accompanies  the 
aaptain.  The  chiefs  of  the  three  right  platoons  continue 
to  march  on,  each  directing  himself  by  the  shortest 
route,  100  paces  to  the  front  towards  the  part  of  the 
line  his  platoon  is  to  occupy,  and  having  reached  it,  ho 
deploys  his  platoon  at  the  commands :  1.  As  skirmish- 
ers; 2.  Harch. 

The  right  platoon  covers  the  right  of  the  regiment, 
and  extends  20  or  30  paces  beyond  it ;  another  platoon 
tovers  the  centre,  and  the  left  platoon  covers  the  left, 
extending  also  20  or  80  paces  beyond  ;  the  extremities 


218  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

of -the  line  are  Ihrown  back.  The  cliiefs  of  these  pla- 
toons remain  25  paces'ln  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers, 
and  pass  over  the  extent  occupied  by  the  troopers  of 
their  platoons. 

The  reserve  takes  position  in  r^^ar  of  the  centre  oi 
the  line  of  skirmishers.  The  captain's  habitual  post  is 
Ijalf-way  from  the  reserve  to  the  skirmishers. 

422. — If  the  extent  of  the'regimentand  circumstances 
i:e,quire  it,  two  squadrons  are  sent  as  skirmishers.  Six 
platoons,  "as  skirmishers  at  4  paces"  will  cover  six 
squadrons  in  line.  Thus  a  squadron  from  each  flank, 
with  a  platoon  in  reserve,  would  cover  each  its  wing  of 
the  regiment.  The  colonel  would  order  the  skirmishers 
to  be  commanded  by  the  senior  captain,  or  by  a  field 
officer  ;  but  they  always  rally  by  squadron,  and  at  the 
flank  from  which  they  come. 

The  proportionate  strength  of  reserves  will  depend 
upon  circumstances,  especially  the  distance  of  strong 
support.  The  chief  objects  of  a  reserve  are  their  moral 
effect — for  rallying  points — for  suppl^'ing  vacancies  and 
re-enforcing,  and  for  relieving  the  skirmishers.  The 
main  body  may  be  so  neiar  that  sometimes  skirmishers 
may  be  deployed  without  a  reserve. 

423. — The  squadron  being  dispersed  ae  skirmishers,  to 
rally  it  the  captain  orders  the  rally  to  be"  sounded ;  at 
this  signal  the  officers,  the  skirmishers,  and  the  reserve 
rally  upon  the  point  occupied  by  the  captain. 

If  the  rally  sounds  from  the  commander  of  the  regi- 
ment, it  will  be  repeated  by  the  commander  of  the  skir- 
mishers, at  a  position  ordered  by  the  colonel,  or  chosep 
by  his  own  judgment  of  the  circumstances.  XTnless 
otherwise  ordered,  the  squadron,  or  squadrons,  having 
rallied,  will  then  be  conducted  at  the  trot  in  the  nearest 
and  quickest  way  to  their  place  in  the  regiment ;  if  the 
regiment  be  advancing,  they  would  not  retire  to  re- 
join it. 


SQUADRON,  MOUNTED.  219 

424. — The  troopers  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if 
the  captain  wishes  them  to  charge  «,<?  foragers,  he. causes 
the  signal  to  be  sounded. 

At  the  signal  the  chiefs  of  platoons  move  forward  in- 
to line,  and  the  skirmishers  draw  sabres  ;  they  charge 
immediately.  The  reserve  follows  at  the  ^ro^  or  at  the 
gallop,  as  may  be  necessary. 

After  the  charge  the  captain  orders  the  rally  to  be 
sounded,  when  the  troopers  rally  in  rear  of  the  reserve, 
if  he  is  with  it;  the  reserve  [may  liave  changed.  The 
captain  may  rally  the  ivoo])QVi  advancing. 

425. — If,  in  a  squadron,  one  or  two  platoons  are  to 
dismount  to  fight  on  foot,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  First  {or  fourth)  platoon y  (or  such  platoons) — 

to  fight  on  foot. 

2.  March. 

At  the  firgrt  command,  the  commander  orders  the  sa- 
bres to  be  returned,  and  gives  the  command /brwar^. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  him.'the  platoon 
moves  forward ;  having  marched  20  paces,  the  chief 
halta  it  and  commands  : 

Prepare  to  fight — on  foot. 

Whicb  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  806.  The  pla- 
toon being  formed  on  foot,  it  is  conducted  to  the  point  it 
is  to  defend. 

The  horses  without  riders  will  be  led  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  squadron. 

"Wlien  the  captain  wishes  the  dismounted  platoon  to 
remount,  he  orders  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
i?ignal,  the  chief  of  this  platoon  places  himself  at  tl>e 
point  on  which  he  wishes  to  rally,  if  dispersed  as  skir- 
mishers, and  the  rally  is  executed  as  prescribed,  'No.  399. 

The  platoon  being  formed,  is  conducted  to  within  12 
paces  of  the  ground  occupied  by  their  hoi'ses,  and  t-fee 


220  SCHOOL  OF  THE 

cbief  of  this  platoon  gives  the  command,  mount,  vfhich. 
is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  306;  it  resumes  its  place 
ia  the  squadron. 

When  two  platoons  dismount,  the  junior  commander 
remains  "with  the  horses. 

If  the  Tvhole  squadron  dismounts  to  fight  on  foot,  the 
captain  commands  : 

Prepare  to  fight — on  foot. 

Which  is  executed  by  the  whole  squadron,  .as  pre- 
scribed for  a  platoon,  No.  306. 

An  officer  remains  with  the  horses ;  the  left  guide,  one 
trumpeter,  and  the  right  and  left  troopers  of  the  squad- 
ron remain  mounted.  The  horses  of  the  officers  who 
dismount  are  held  as  follows :  Those  of  the  captain  and 
chief  of  the  first  platoon,  by  the  trumpeter ;  those  of  the 
other  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  right  guide  and  dismounted 
trumpeter,  by  the  right  and  left  troopers.  - 

The  captain  moves  his  dismounted  squadron  to  per- 
form the  duty  required  of  it,  Ko.  Yo. 

The  squadron  remounts  by  the  commands,  and  on  the 
principles  prescribed  for  a  platoon,  No.  306. 

426, — A*  column  of  twos  or  fours,  passing  a  defile,  if 
suddenly  attacked  or  threatened  on  either  flank,  if  they 
receive  the  command,  prepare  to  fight — ox  foot,  would 
instanlly-dismount,  leaving  their  horses  with  the  num- 
bers 4,  who  remain  mounted,  and  form  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers, with  from  two  to  three  paces  intervals,  faced 
toward  the  enem}'.  ^ 

Generally  the  skirmishers  should  charge  with  the  re- 
volver ;  they  have  the  sabre  for  the  last  resort. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS 


PART  SECOND. 

TITLE  FOURTH. 
EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 


GENERAL  RULES. 


427. — The  colonel  is  in  the  position  in  which  he 
judges  his  presence  most  important,  and  from  whence 
his  command?  can  best  be  heard.  He  is  accompanied 
by  the  adjutant,  the  regimental  quartermaster,  and  a 
chief  trumpeter. 

When  the  colonel  gives  the  command  itai.t,  he  at  the 
tame  instant  raises  his  right  arm  and  sabre  vertically 
i4}  their  full  extent. 
'VThe  commands,  attemion  and  pront,  are  not  repeated. 

The  preparatory  commands  are  immediately  re-peated 
by  the  field  ofiicers. 

The  field  officers  superintend  the  due  execution  of 
the  evolutions,  and  of  commands  generally,  in  their 
wings,  or  under  their  observation  ;  correct  errors,  care- 
lessness, itc.  They  assist  the  colonel  in  giving  tiie  de- 
sired direction  to  lines,  and  to  'guides  the   direction  of 

14 


5  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGLAIENT. 

the  nlarch.  When  the  colouel  does  not,  they  "will  super- 
intend the  dressing  and  alignment  of  the  regiment. 

The  markers  for  evolutions  are  tlie  sergeant  major, 
the  regimental  marker,  and  the  squadron  right  and  left, 
guides. 

In  the  formatfon  of  lines,  the  base  consists  of  the  ser- 
geant major,  a  guide  of  the  base  squadron,  and  the  regi- 
mental marker. 

On  the  preparatory  command,  the  sergeant  major  and 
the  squadron  guide  are  posted  by  the  adjutant  or  the 
nearest  field  officer;  the  former  to  mark  the  position  of 
the  flauk  of  the  base  squadron,  which  will  become  the 
flank  of  the  regiment — or  in  central  formations  its  rigb'' 
flank^-and  facing  toward  the  other  flank  of  that  squad- 
ron ;  the  latter — the  guide  of  that  other  flank — to  mark 
its  position,  and  at  three  platoon  fronts  distance,  facing 
the  sergeant  major. 

At  the  same  time  the  regimental  marker  will  gallop^ 
to  the  most  distant  flank,  and  will  there  take  post  un 
der  the  direction  of  the  colonel,  the  adjutant  or  the  field 
officer,  on  the  prolongation  of  the  base  line,  and  facing 
the  base. 

At  the  approach  of  the  squadrons,  the  squadron  guides 
of  the  flank  which  will  be  most  distant  from  the  point 
of  formation  will  rapidly  take  post  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  base  line,  and  face  toward  the  other  flank  of  their 
squadron,  (or  the  point  of  formation).  "^ 

The  regimental  marker  serves  to  mark  the  general 
direction  of  the  line,  for  the  government  of  the  squadron 
columns  in  their  marck 

All  these  maikers,  on  taking  post,  will  raise  the  hilts 
of  their  sabres  as  high  as  the  cheek,  keeping  the  eabrc 
vertical,  the  edge  to  their  left. 

■  Chiefs  of  platoons  corresponding  to  the  positions  of  the 
markers  will  vary  somewhat  from  their  central  posi- 
tions, if  necessary,  so  as  to  bring  their  horses'  Iwads  to 
the  boot  of  the  marker. 

In  all  formations  of  lines  the  squadron  commaudera 
face  their  squadrons  i»  their  poeitions  opposite  their 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  S 

centres,  until  the  command  front,  from  the  cohjnel  op 
field  officer;  they  then  all  face  about,  turninc^  toward 
the  side  of  formation,  and  all  the  markers  of  the  line 
then  take  their  posts. 

In  all  successive  formations  of  line,  the  dressing  being; 
toward  the  side  of  formation,  the  command  dress  will 
be  90  uu'lerstood.  Marching  in  line,  the  squadrons  al- 
ways regulate  iutervuls  and  alignment  hy  the  squadron 
of  direction. 

The  command  front  will  be  given,  on  the  alignment 
of  the  regiment,  by  the  senior  field  officer;  in  the  ab- 
sence of  field  officers,  bj  the  adjutant.  This  being  in- 
variable, it  will  be  oinittod  in  the  evolutions. 

The  guide  of  a  flank  squadron,  which  forms  on  the 
regimental  marker,  will  not  take  position  to  tnark 
the  line. 

Ih  the  formation. of  a  close  column  on  a  ilank  squad- 
'  ron  without  changing  front,  and  in  the  change  of  di- 
rection of  a  close  column  bj  a  flank,  the  regimental 
marker  is  posted  on  the  new  line  of  direction  of  the 
guides,  a  little  beyond  the  new  position  of  the  most  dis- 
tant squadron  from  the  one  which  determines  tlie  move- 
ment. In  the  flank  niovement  he  always  marks  the 
nearest  flank  of  the  new  position.  The  field  officer  at 
the  rear  of  the  column  superintends  his  j)lacing. 

The  guide  being  on  the  left,  when  tlie  right  is  in  front, 
and  on  the  right,  when  the  left  is  in  front,  it  i-  not  an- 
Qounced;  the  colonel  may,  however,  remind  them  of  it 
when  he  thinks  proper;  but  only  wliile  the  column  is 
mai'ching.  If  for  any  reason  the  qolonel  wishes  the 
guide,  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  established  rule,  he  an- 
nounces it  in  his  command. 

In  each  ease  the  indication  of  the  guide  is  repeated  by 
the  field  officers  and  the  captains. 

When  a  line  or  colnmi^  is  to  move  at  the  same  time 
by  .the  same  movement,  the  captains  immediately  repeat 
the  preparatory  commands. 

In  the  case  of  successive  movomenta,  they  repeat  the 
preparatory  commands  sufficiently  soon  to  give  that  of 


4  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

execution  at  the  moment   when  tlie  movem'cnt   should- 
oommence  in  ll;eir  sqiiadion. 

If  an  evolution  requires  a  particular  movement  of 
some  squadron,  the  captain  commands  this  movement 
instead  of  repeatiug  tire  preparatory  Command  given  by 
the  colonel.  ^ 

The  commands  of  execution  are  repeated  simulta- 
neously by  the  lield  officers.  They  are  repeated  in  the 
tame  manner  by  the  captains  comma ndiug,  except  in 
the  movements  which  require  successive  commands. 

In  successive  alignments,  llie  captains  command, 
tRONT.  These  invariable  rules  j-ender  repetition  unne- 
i:essary  in  the  details  of  the   evghition?. 

If  it  should  happen  that  a^  command  is  cot  heard,  each 
captain  conforms  as  promptly  as  possible  to  the  niove- 
iXicnts  of  the  squadron  which_precedes  him  in  the  diree» 
lion  of  tlie  formation  or  breaking. 

To  change  the  gait- of  the  regiment  marching,  the" 
colonel  commands  it  by  trumpet  signal. 

The  regiment  draws  the  sabre,  retur?is  it,  or  pre&enfs  it, 
at  the  command  of  the  colonel,  which  is  not  repeated. 

In  a  formation  in  line,  or  in  a  deployment,  when  -one 
or  several  fractions  of  the  troop  cannot  find  room  lo  enter 
the  line,  these  fractions  remain,  or  pass  in  rear  of  the 
line.  ■  ._ 

When  the  colonel  wishes  the  regiment  to  march,  cith^' 
fn  lin.e  or  column,  he  gives  the  poini  of  direction  if  he 
thinks  it  necessary.  A  field  officer  points  it  out  to  the 
guide,  or  gives  him  one,  if  the  colonel  does  not  direct  it 
iiimself,  or  Ijy  the  adjutant. 

A  base  line  may  be  marked  at  a  distance  from  the  reg- 
iment by  the  sergeant  major  and  regimental  marker, 
posted  hj  the  colonel,  a  fieid  officer,  or  the  adjutant. 

The  re'gimcntal  marker  is  a  non-commissioned  officei', 
selected  for  the  duty  by  the  colonel  from  one  of  the 
squadrons  present.  * 

Markers  are  not  used  in  correcting  the  alignment  of 
ihe  regiment;  nor  for  the  line  formed  by  the  simulta- 
neous wheel  of  svibdiYieions— that  from   double  column 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMKNT. 

in?iu(3ed.  The  eonimanders  of  the  flnnk  platoons  of  thi- 
squadron  to  which  the  alignment  is  Uirected,  raise  thclv 
sabres  vertically,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  cheek,  the  edgj? 
to  the  front. 

If  the  command  do  not  prescribe  the  gait,  the  simpl.^ 
march  of.  the  regiment,  including  the  movements  in  ech- 
elon, is  at  the  icalk. 

Movements  Avhieh  change  tlie  ordc.r  of  the  regiment 
are  executed  at  the  trot,  unless  specially  excepted,  .or 
unless  the  colonel's  command    designate  a  ditfevent  gait. 

That  gait  is  recommended  for  all,  except  the  forma - 
tions front  into  iwc ;  for  this  the  gallop  maj'  be  used; 
and  perhaps,  in,  some  cases,  for  the  deployment  of  a 
close  column.  "• 

In  all  formations  of  line  to  the  right  of  a  column  right 
in  front,  or  left  of  a  coluiiin  left  in  front,  the  colonel 
will,  before  the  preparatory  command,  or  as  soon  as  con- 
venient, pass  to  that  side  of  the  column  ;  tlie  field  officers 
will  do  so  at  the  preparatory  command.  ' 

While  a  squadron  is  acting  in  line,  with  its  .original 
fourth  platoon  on  the  light,  the  original  left,  guide  will 
be  "  right  guide,"  (and  the  right,  the  left). 

W-iien  a  column  changes  direction,  each  subdivision 
commander  fixes  his  eyes  on  the  spot  which  the  guide 
of  the  division  before  him  was  passing  at  the  instant 
of  the  command  txiryi;  and  is  very  careful  to  give  his 
comma !id  when  his  guide  reaches  it. 

Platoon  commandere  are  answerable  for  the  distances 
in  open  columns. 

Columns  formed  for  changing  front  may  be  by  fo-ur? 
or  platoons,  according  to  circumstances ;  but  never  by 
fours  when  the  column,  right  in  front,  is  to  form  right — 
front  into  line;  or  left  in  front,  left— front  into'  line. 
Columns  of  platoons  are  safer  near  the  enemy,  unless, 
by  possibility,  he  should  appear  towards  the  original 
front,  when  the  columns  of  fours  can  be  instantly  con- 
verted into  echelons,  (the  safest  is  the  movemcrit  by 
squadrons,  in  oblique  eohelou). 

The  order  of  battle,  according  to  the  strength  or  organ- 


6  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

ization.  of  the  regiment,  being  known,  in  all  forraatiohis 
of  line,  the  colonel,  when  he  wishes  it  in  a  line  of  battle, 
gives  or  senda  orders  accordingly,  or  annoimcea  it  in  hig 
eomraand;  for  instance:  Left—front  into  line  of  battle; 
then,  if  it  be  two  lines,  the  second  is  formed  at  the  bead 
of  its  leading  squadron ;  by  the  shortest  route  and  sim- 
plest means  the  flanking  squadrons  move  to  their  posts. 
The  squadrons  which  are  to  form  the  second  line  will 
seldom  move  to  the  rear,  for  distance,  without  orders ; 
for  the  first  line  may  immediately  advance. 

428. — If  commanded,  it  is  always  easy  in  the  squad- 
ron column  to  form  in  two  ranks;  it  is  onJy  necessary  to" 
ordef  the2d,  4th,  6th,  <fec.,  squadrons  from  the  front  to 
clo'ie  to  one  pace  from  the  1st,  3d,  5th,  &c.,  squadrons. 
If  there  be  two  captains  present,  the  junior  takes  place 
in  rear  of  the  centre  ;  the  platoon  commanders  of  the 
even  numbered  squadrons  take  place  upon  the  flanks, 
and  as  file  closers.  • 

At  the  command  CHARGE,  the  guide  of  the  squadron, 
under  all  circumstances,  if  not  so  previously,  instantly 
hecomes  centre  ;  the  troopers  carefully  preserve  their 
intervals  by  that  point. 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

FOilMATION  OF  COLUMNS,  THEIR  MARCH  AND 
.  CHANGES. 

Alignment  of  the  Regiment. 

429. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  as  prescribed,  (Tift 
1,  Art.  1,)  the  colonel  causes  the  platoon  commandei*s  of 
one  oftho.flank  squadrons  to  be  aligned,  nnd  in  a  direc- 
tion by  which  no  portion  of  the  reginaent  will  hnve  to 
rein  back,  and  commands : 


E^'OLUflONS  OP  A  RBOIMENT.  7 

1.  Attention. 
»         2.  Right — Dkess,  oi*  Left — Dr.ESS. 

At  tlie  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  off.cer«, 
(only,)  the  squadron  commanders  turn  to  the  right 
about,  to  sriperintead  tlieir  squadrons;  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons aligu  themselves,  as  also  the  flank  files  and  troop- 
ers one  pace  in  their  rear. 

At  Ihe  command  front,  th«  captains  turn  to  the  left 
about. 

4S0. — For  insti'uction  and  practice  the  colonel  will  es 
tablieh  a  base  line  30  paces  in  front  of  the  regiment, 
marked  by  the  sergeant  major,  the  inner  guide  of  a  flank 
squadron,  and  the  regimental  marker  opposite  the  other 
flank  of  the  regiment,  and  caiTse  a  euccessive  alignment 
of  the  squadrons',  by  similar  commands,  and  on  the  same 
principles  as  in  tho  successive  alignment  of  platoons  in 
the  squadron,  N'o.  309. 


TO  FORM  A  COLUMN  OF  FOURS— ITS   MARCH, 
AND  CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION. 


431. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  coSi- 
mands: 

i.  Attention. 
'  2.  Fours  right,  (or  Uft.) 

3.  March. 

4.  Halt. 

It  is  executed  ia  each  squadron  as  prescribed  for  th« 
f*quadron,  No.  812. 

If  the  colonel  wish  the  regiment  to  move  forward,  h€ 
omits  the  command  halt.  - 

The  colonel  observes  that  all  have  their  preecribe<3 
positions,  (Tit.  I.  Art.  I.) 


§.  ETbLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENt! 

432. — To  put  the  column  in  motion,  the  colonel  com- 
mands': •'  - 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forwafd. 
S.  March. 

To 'change  the  direction  of  the  column,  the  colon ei 
commands; 

(Jolumn  left,  {ov  right.) 

This  command  is  only  repeated  by  the  field  officer 
near  the  head  of  the  column  ;  (the  remark  applies  to  all 
similar  cases.)  The  movement  is  made  as  pi^eseribed. 
No.   320. 


433. — ^The  regiment  marching  in  a  column  of  fours,  to 
face  and  march  the  column  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Fours — Left  about  ;  or  Fours — Right  about. 


^m  FORM  AN  OPEN  COLUMN—ITS   MARCH,  ANfv 
CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION. 


4,34. — The  regiment  at  a  halt,  or  marching  in  line,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.  Attejition. 

2.  Platoons  right  ivheel,  (or  left  wheel.) 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command  the  captains  command,  pla- 
toons rigid  wheel — trot.  The  wheel  being  nearly  com- 
pleted they  command  halt. 


KVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  # 

The  movement  ia  executed  at  the  same  time  ia  eaeli 
squadron  as  prescribed,  No.  837.  •» 

If  the  colonel  wishes  the  column  to  move  forward  im- 
mediately  he   commands,     after    three-fourths  of   the 

dWhecl  :    4.    FORWARD. 

If  the  colonel  commands  platoons  right  wheel — Col- 
umn  right  {or  left,  etc.)  the  wheels  being  nearly  com- 
pleted, tlie  captains  cominand  [eorwato),  thi>  colonel 
omitting  it. 

435% — To  put  th-e  column  in  march,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Attention. 
'2.  Forward. 
3.  March. 

486. — To  change  the  direction  of  the  column,  the  col- 
onel commands : 

Column  left,  (or  right.) 

The  movement  is  made  throughout  as  prescribed,  No. 
341.         - 

437. — To  halt  the  column,  the.eolonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Column. 

3.  Halt. 

4S8. — The  regiment  being  in  line  to  forna  open  ■  col- 
umn by  successive  movements,  and  to  march  by  the 
rear — which  is  done  to  make' the  passage  of  a  defile  in 
rear  of  a  flank — the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Flmtoons,  froryi  right  to  rear — io  march  to  the 

left. 

3.  March. 


n  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REaiME^TT. 

The  movement  is  made  in  each  sqtiadron  as  prescribed, 
Jfo.  376  ;  the  captains  add  to  the  second  command  trot. 
The  captains  not  at  the  flank  give  the  command  marcd, 
when  the  chief  of  the  last  platoon  of  the  next  squad- 
ton,  after  marching  ten  paces  to  the  rear,  comraaflds. 
ri[/ht — TURN. 

The  regiment  is  broken  Iby  the  left  to  the  rear  to 
march  to  the  right,  on  the  sam^  principles,  by"  inverse 
commands  and  means. 

439. — The  movement  may  be  made  from  both  flanks 
at  once  ;  to  cover,  by  the  centi-e  squudrona,  the  passage 
of  a  defile  behind  them,  the  colonel  then  commands:  1 
Attention;  2.  Platoon  from  the  Jianks—^to  the  rear  pasi 
defile;  3.  makch.  At  the  command  march,  the  move> 
ment  is  commenced  from  right  and  left,  as  prescribed 
above ;  the  columns  opposite  the  defile  turn  to  pass  it 
abreast,  and  after  passing  it  turn  to  the  left  and  right,^ 
at  the  point  which  the  colonel  directs ;  they  halt  and 
wheel  into  line  athis  commands. 

440. — The  regiment  at  a  halt  or  marching  in  open 
column,  left,  or  right  in  front,  to  face  it  and  move  in  the 
opposite  direction,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  right  (or  left)  about  loJieel. 
S.  March, 

4,  Forward;  (or  Halt.) 

The  movement  is  executed  in  each  squadron  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  860.  .The  sergeant  major  and  regimental 
marker  change  to  the  head  of  the  column.  (This  is  a 
geaoral  remark.) 

441. — The  regiment  marching  in  open  column,  to  gain 
ground  to  one  of  its  flank?,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  JPours — RiGBT,  or  Left. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  RKCaMENT.  11 

If  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  he    comraands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Fours — right,  or  Left. 

3.  March. 

Th'6se  movcraenta  Arc  exeeutod  as  in.  the  squadron, 
Nos.  876  and  377. 

442. — The  regiment  marching  in  open  column  to  gain 
ground  obliquely  to  the  right  or  left,  without  changing 
front,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.  • 

2.  Jiight  (or  left)  oblique. 
8.  March. 

It  is  executed  as  in  the  squadron,  No.  342. 

To  resume  the  direct  march,    the  colonel  coraraanda  : 

Forward. 


TO  FORM  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADRONS,  AND  A 
CLOSE  COLUMN. 

443. — ^The  regiment  halted,"  or  marching  in  line,  to 
form  a  column  of  squadroiis,  faced  to  the  left,  the  col- 
onel commands; 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  left  U'hcoi. 
8.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captakis  command,  lejc 
wheel — trot;  when  the  wheels  are  completed  they  com- 
mand, HALT. 

Each  squadron  executes  the  wheel  as. prescribed,  Nos. 
388,  393;  bnt'they  regulate  their  wheels  by  the  left 
Bquadron. 


n  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

If  the  colonel  desires  a  more  accurate  alignment,  ho 
eommauds  : 

Dkess. 

The  captains  command:  1.  Right — Drkss;  2.  Front; 
and  take  post,  as  in  line: 

If  the  colonel  desires  the  column  to  move  forward, 
without  halting,  when  the  wheels  are  three-fourths 
completed,  he  commands  : 

-    4.  Forward. 

Which  the  captains  repeat  at  the  completion  of  thf* 
wheels. 

The  column  is  formed  face  to  the  right,  on  the  same 
principles,  by  inverse  commands  and  means. 


<444. — The  colonel  wishing  to  close  a  column  of  squad- 
rons, commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Close  colvmn. 

3.  Makcii. 

The  captain  of  the  leading  squadron  proceeds  to  the 
pivot  flank  of  his  squadron  ;  and,  if  he  deems  it  neces- 
eary,  corrects  its  alignment.      ■ 

At  the  second  command,  the  other  captains  command : 
i.  Forward;  2.  Trot;  they  repeat  the  command  march. 
At  platoon  distance  from  the  preceding  squadron,  eacli 
oonunauds:  1.  Halt;  2.. Dress;  3.  Front. 

The  column  of  squadrons  being  in  march,  the  colonel 
closes  tlie  column  by  the  same  commands. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadi'on  proceeds  to  its  flank.  .     " 

The  other  captains  command:  1.  Trot,  and  repeat  the 
oommHud  MARCH,.    At  platoon  distance  each  commands. 

VjalJc MARCH. 

Ifthecolun»n  is  marching  at  the  trot,  the  captain  of 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REOIMENT.  10 

flie  leading  squadron  command^,  walk — march;  and 
the  other  captains  the  same,  on  reaching  their  proper 
distance. 

diS.— ^The  regiment  marching  or  halted  ia  close  col- 
umn, to  take  squadron  distance  the   colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Take  squadron  distance. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands,  JFht^uard — trot  (omitting /orii'artf  if 
the  column  be  in  motion).  He  repeats  the  command 
MARcii,  and  takes  post  at  the  centre  of  the  squadron. 

Each  captain,  in  succession,  gives  the  same  commands, 
when  the  squadron  which  precedes  him  has  got  the  di?* 
t^nce  of  five  platoon  fronts. 

446.— If  the  close  column  be  trotting,  and  the  colon ol-s 
command^  are  the  same,  at  the  second  command  all  but 
the  leading  captain  command,  walk,  and  repeat  the  com- 
mand MARCH  ;  they  are  then  governed  as  in  the  forego- 
ing paragraph. 

If  the  close  column  "be  trotting,  the  colonel  codi* 
mands :      • 

3.  Attention. 

2.  Take  squadron  distance — Gallop. 

3.  March. 

At  tlie  second  command,  the  leading  captain  com- 
mands, gallop,  and  repeats  the  command  march.  Each, 
in  succession,  commands,  gallop — march,  when  the 
squadron  before  him  has  got  its  distance. 

447. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  fo)'m  it  in  close 
column,  faced  to  the  right,  the  colonel  conamands : 


14  EVOLDnONf  OF  \  RKOIMEST.      - 

1.  Atf<ntion. 

2.  S'/ua'^ronx  .-iifht  fchtfl^-forrn  cfoie  column. 

3.  MAKrii. 

At  Uto  Focond  command,  the-  captains  coinmaud,  rufh' 
*nhe€l — trot. 

At  the  third  commnml,  (ropca*  J,  ofisourao,  under  the 
rule,)  all  tho  pquadrons  wbcel  to  the  right.. 

The  -whoL-ld  bcjng  nearly  completed,  the  captain  of 
thti  let  squadron  commands:  1.  Halt;  and  being  nl 
the  left  of  tlic  squadron,  2.  Dais?;  8.  Front. 

The  caplnlns  of  the  other  squadrons  cojnmand,  rfvR 
ward;  and  nt  platoon  di>»tance  irom  the  sq';  • 

l)recedpe  .nnd  has  halted  :   I.Hai.t;   2.  Dki 

The  forrTiation  of  the  clos<'  column,  to  fuc<'  i<»  ll>e  U-fl, 
IS- executed  on  tho  sr.mc  principle?,  by  invi^r?--  oommnn<lH 
.and  menus. 

The  regiment  marching  in  line,  the  eokniel  gives  th'' 
same  commanda  Aft«r  tht?  first  squadron  lias  com- 
pleted it«  w  licc),  its  captain  commands,  icalk — march. 
The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command,  rvfllk — 
MARCH,  when  thoy  havo  reached  platoon  disln'Tice. 

448. — Tli<  :»t    1'oing   in   line,    clo^o   column  i^ 

formed  witli'  "iging  front,  on  the  right,  left,  or  a 

central  pquiidron. 

The  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  right  squadron — dose  column. 
S.  Maroi. 

At  the  hccond  couiu)and,  the  captain  of  the  righi 
squadron  moyes  to  the  left  of  his  squadron,  ana,  i'. 
accessary,  eorrc^  is  its  dre6«jin}^. 

The  captainH  of  the  other  squadrons  command:  1. 
Fours  right — Column  half  right ;  2.  Trot  At  tho  corn- 
raand  march,  all  their  equadrons  exer\ite  the  mo?e- 
ment  as  in  the  school  of  tljc  squadron.  The  eecond 
i».(uadron  turns  more  ihrtn    half-rinht ;   the  commnndeY 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  15 

of  ita  first  platoon,  at  the  head  of  tlie  columu,  conducts 
it  80  as  to  turn,  witliout  command  from  the  captain, 
behind  and  parallel  to  the  first  squadron,  at  a  point  10 
yards  in  rear  of  its  left  guide;  (or  a  little  outside  of  it.) 
The  captain  halts  at  this  point,  and  when  the  rear  of 
his  column  is  opposite,  he  commands:  1.  Left  into  line 
ioheel ;  2.  March;  3.  Dekss  ;  4.  FnoNx.  The  left  guide 
being  immediately  behind  that  of  the  first  squadroo,  at 
platoon  distance. 

All  the  other  squadrons  are  conducted  over  the  near- 
est lines,  each  to  turn  or  pass  at  the  same  distance  be- 
hind the  left  of  the  preceding  one,  the  captains  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  squadron. 

The  captains  direct  the  columns.  If  one  judges  his 
passing  too  far  to  the  rear,  he  commands :  Oolwnn — 
half-left.  The  column  is  always  formed  in  rear  of  the 
right. 

449. — To  form  close  column  on  the  left  squadron,  the 
colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  left  squadron — chie  coIvpt.k 
8.  March. 

It  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  by  inverse  nieflfi? 
and  commands.  The  column  is  always  formed  in  reav 
of  the  left  squadron. 

450. — ^The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  form  close  coU 
nmn  on  a  central  squadron  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  0:1  fifth  (or  other)  squadron — close  column. 
8.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  fifth 
squadron  takes  post  on  its  left 

The  captains  of  the  right  squadrons  comojftnd :  1 
Fourg  left— Column  halfright—Trof. 


!«•  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT. 

The  captains  of  the  left  squadrons  command :  1. 
Fburs  right — Column  half-right — TVot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  commences  on 
both  flants.  The  chief  of  platoon  at  the  head  of  the 
fourth  squadron  conducts  it  so  as  to  turn  in  front  of  the 
rigbt  of  the  fifth  squadron,  or,  at  a  point  a  little  out- 
side, into  a  direction  parallel  with  it,  and  so  as  to  pass 
about  three  paces  from  the  heads  of  its  officers'  horseg. 
The  captain  marches  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and, 
when  it  reaches  the  flank  of  the  fifth  squadron,  he  com- 
mands :  \.  Right  into  line  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Dress; 
4.  Front  ;  correcting,  if  necessary,  his  left  guide  to  pla,- 
toon  distance  in  front  of  the  one  behind  him. 

"  The  other  squadrons  on  the  riglit  are  conducted  over 
the  nearest  lines,  turn,  and  pass  at  an  equal  distance  in 
front  of  the  preceding  one,  the  captains  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribe'd  for  the  fourth  squadron.  If  neces* 
sary,  they  all  command:  Column  half -lefty  to  enter  the 
column  at  the  right  distance. 

The  left  squadrons  are  conducted  and  placed  in  rear 
of  the  fifth,  by  the  same  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed for  the  left  squadrons,  No,  448. 

The  right  squadrons  always  go  in  front,  no  matter 
the  order  in  which  they  stood. 

-  451. — The  regiment  marching  in  line,  to  form  close 
column  without  changing  front  and  without  halting, 
the  eolonelcommands: 

1.  A'tUntion. 

2.  On  right  (or  hft)  squadron — dose  column. 
'6.  March. 

The  named  squadron  continues  to  walk.  (If  the  line 
33  trotting,  its  captain  commands,  walk — march.) 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command,  at 
the  second  command,  1.  Fours — Might;  2.  TVot;  (omitting 
Uie  second  command  if  the  line  is  trotting)  and  repeat, 
3.  March. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  ll 

Each  captain  halts  directly  in  rear  of  the  leftof  tRc 
first  squadron,  and  commands:  Fours — Left,  when  the- 
pcar  of  his  column  reaches  him. 

The  squadrons  then  marching  to  close  distance,  each 
capitain  commands:  1.  Walk;  2.  Maucu,  when  his 
squadron  aurivcs  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one 
which  precedes  him. 

To  form  the  close  column  on  the  'kft  squadron,  th,e 
principie^is  the  same;  the  commands  and  means  inrerse. 


TO  MARCH  IN  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADRONS  AND 
IN  CLOSE  COLUMN,  AND  TO  CHANGE  THEIR 
DIRECTIONS. 

452. — The  principles  of  the  direct  march  of  the  squad- 
ron in  line,  No.  380,  are  applicable  to  the  regiment  in 
column  of  squadrons  or  close  column,'  If  the  colonel  do 
not  himself,  or  by  the  adjutant — the  field  officer  at  tho 
head  of  the  cokimn  will,  if  necessary,  give  direction  to 
the  leading  guide,  and  observe  the  correct  march  of  the 
next  one. 

463, — To{)ut  either  eolumn  in  march  the  c'^lonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward. 

3.  Marcu. 

If  the  colonel  wishes  the  guide  centre,  he  commands  : 
3.  Guide — centre;  4,    March, 

464. — To  change  the  direction  of  the  march  of  the 
column  of  squadrons,  or  the  close  column,  the  colonel 
commands: 

Column  le/t,  (or  right.) 
16 


13  ETOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

Tlie  'captain  of  the  leadincf-  squadron  immediately 
commands:  Left  (or  righi) — Turn  ;  and  when  the  wheel 
is  nearly  completed,  foiwakd. 

Each  captain,  in  succession,  gives  the  command  to 
turn  on  tlie  same  ground  ;  and  forward,  when  his  turn 
is  nearly  complete. 

In  the  column  of  squadrons,  the  regimental  marker 
Instantly  places  himself  facing,  and  his  horse's  head  o'ne 
pace  from,  the  pivot  flank,  to  mark  the  point'  of  turn- 
i-ag  for  each  squadron. 

Each  squadron  performs  its  wheel  in  the  mamier  pre- 
scribed ibr  the  squadron,  I^o.  89ft» 

45^. — The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  change 
direction  by  a  flank  movement,  the  colonel   commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  direction  by  the  right   (or  left)  flcinl:. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands  :  Fours  right — cohimn  left,  (or  half 
left) — trot.  The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  com- 
mand :  four^  righl-rcolumnhalf  left — trot. 

At  the  command  mauch,  the  movement"*  commences 
throughout. 

The  squadi"on  in  front  turns  parallel  with  the  new 
front,  at  whatever  angle,  which  has  been  established  by 
the  colonel's  direction. 

The  oth(5r  squadrons  conducted  by  their  captjiins, 
move  by  the  shortest  line  to  the  point  at  which  ihey 
should  enter  the  column. 

All  the  captains  halt  at  these  pointe,  where  tlie  left 
flanks  of  their  squadrons  shall  rest — in  a  lino  with  the 
left  guide  leading  squadron,  and  the  regimental  marker 
—and,  in  succession  as  the  rear,  of  the  columns  roftch 
them,  command  :  \.  Left  into  line  wheel ;  2.  March  ;  3. 
Z(7/<— Drbss  ;   4.  Front. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  19 

The  chiefs  of  leading  Matpons  command  a  second  tuin, 
if  necessary. 

The  change  of  direction  by  the  Jeft  flank  is  executed 
bj  the  same  pnuoipl«;s,  by  inverse  nncans.     ' 


45^  — To  change  the  direction  of  a  close  column,  or  a 
O'dutnn  of  squadrons  to  face  to  thf'  rear,  the  colonel  com- 
niand«: 

1,  Attention. 
-     2.   Countermarch  by  the  right  {or  left)  flank. 
3,  Maivch.  "^ 

# 

Tlio  countermarch  13  exeeute'd  at  the  same  time  in 
each  squadron,  as  prescribed,  No.  386;  the  captains  ad- 
dincj  trot,  to  the   second    command. 

The  column  of  squadrons  may  be  wheeled  about,  by 
squadron,  or  by  platoons. 


45*7. — The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  squadrons, 
or  close  column,  to  gain  ground  to  one  of  the  flanks, 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.. 

2.  Fours— 'RiQwr,  (or  Left.) 

If  the  column  is  at- a  halt,  the  eolonel  adds: 

3.  MAiicii. 

These  nioyemenfs  are  executed  throughout  as  in  the 
squadron  ;  "but  the  chiefs  of  the  leading  platoons  march 
by  the  side  of  the  leading  set  of  fours,  and  preserve  di«- 
tances  and  alignment  with  the  squadron  that  was  in 
front. 

458. — The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  squadrons, 
or  close  column,  the  colonel  commands: 


20  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REi^IMENT. 

1. .  Attention. 

2.  Eight  (or  left)  ohli^ite. 

3.  Marph. 

WhicTi  is  executed  throughout,  ts  in  squadron,  No. 
397.  To  resume  the  iirst  direction,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

Forward. 

469. — The  regiment  being  in    close  colu'inn,   to   gain 
%;  ground  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  commands: 

1." Attention. 

2.  Fown — Left  about,  (or  right  about) 

3.  March. 

"W'fiicli  is  executed  throughout  as  prescribed  for  the 
6.q,uadroD,  No.  399. 


TO  FORM  A  DOUBLE  COLUMN— ITS  MARCH,  AND 
"-       -      CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION. 


4gO, — The  regiment  being  in  line,   double  colun:in  is 
formed  on  the  left  platoon  of  the  right,  and  right  pla- 
toon  of  the   left   centre  squadrons ;  if  the  number  of. 
squadrons  be  uneven,  it  is  formed  in  the  same   manner 
^)n  *he  centre,  and  next  squadron  to  its  left. 

To  advance  in  double  column,  the  colonel  commande : 

■1.  Attention.  '       .         ■ 

*        2.  Advance  i7i  double  column. 

3.  March. 

4.  Guide  right,  (or  left.) 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  right  cen- 
tre squadron  commands:  Platoons  left  wheel — left  pla- 
toon formafd. 


...,.,.i 


r 


J^f^i^  M  JhrLU '^ 


EvoiUTieNs  or.  a  REGIMBNT.  21 

Tbc  ;|^ftptain3  to  his,  right  cOBimand  :  Platoons  lefi 
v^eel. 

The  captains  of  the  left  centre  squadron  commands  : 
Platoons  right  wheel — right  platoon  forward. 

Tlie  captaiDB  to  his  left  command :  Platoons — right 
wheel. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  begins  through- 
out ;  the  chief  of  tlie  platoon  next  to  the  lett  of  the  right 
centre  squadron  commands  right — ttikx,  Avhen  the  flank 
of  hig  platoon  ■would  have  three  paces  to 'march  to  com- 
l.kte  its  wheel;  in  turning  it  gains  three  paces,-  which 
brings  its  right  flank  on  the  line  of  march  of  that  of  the 
left  platoon  ;  the  next  to  the  right  platoon  of  the  left 
centre  squadron  is  conducted  on  the  same  i^rinciples,  by 
inverse  means ;  the  other  platoons  of  each  equadrou 
turn  on  the  same  ground  as  these  platoons.  ' 

The  captains  of  the  squadrons  to  the  right  and  iM, 
when  the  wheels  bj  platoon  are  completed,  comnland 
forward;  and  all,  in  succession,  command  the  turn  to 
the  front,  on.  the  same,ground  that  the  rear  platoons  of 
the  ce;itral  squadrons  have  turned  on  ;  and  tiheir  squad- 
rons'follow  them  in  open  column,  with  the  prescribed 
distance. 

The  guide  being  commanded  right,  it  fs  so  iVi  each 
column;  the  right  squadron  guides  of  the  left  column, 
ou  the  right  of  the  leading  platoons,  approach- to  within 
10  paces  of  the  left  squadron  guides  of  the  right  column, 
who  are  on  the  left  of  the  leading  platoons.  This  give? 
an  interval  of  platoon  front  between  the  flanks  of  the 
other  platoons  ;» all  the  guides  of  the  left  column  pre- 
serve the  intervals  from  the  right  column,  and  align 
themselves  on  the  corresponding  platoons.  If  the  guide 
be  Ze/if,  interval  and  alignment  is  regulated  on  the  pla- 
toons of  the  left  column.  The  chief  of  the  leading  pLi- 
too^  on  the  side  of  the  giiide  regulates  the  gait. 

46J. — The  double  column  is  advantageous  for  the  for- 
mation/?-on^  info  Zwfi  more  prompt  than  in  the  single 
open  colQmn;   and  also  to  the  rear,  to  the  rfght'  ov  left. 


2-2  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  liPGIMENT.* 

in  a  single  Ifce^  or  in  two  lines,  or  inecbeltu;  iU^  ihei'c- 
fore  especially  safefor  the  passage  of  defile?  to^ie  front, 
where  the  enemy's  dispositions  are  unknown.  If  the 
defile  is  too  narrow,  tlie  interval  can  be  reduced  to  one 
pace,  and  the  column  reduced  to  fronts  of  Coura  and  kwos, 

4,62.^-The  iiegiment  marching  iu  double  column,  to 
reduce  the  front  to  a  double  column  of  fours,  the  colonel 
conamands : 

1.  Attent(07i. 

2.  By  fours. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captuins  of  the  Left  col- 
iijiin  command:  By  fours— trot ;  the  captains  of  tlie 
right  column  command:  By  the  left—^iiy fours— trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  executed  in 
each  sq^uadron  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  squad- 
ron.        '  ' 

To  reduce  the  front  to  columns  of  twos,  and  to  reform 
them  in  fours  and  platoons,  is  executed  in  each  column, 
as  prescribed/or  tlie  single  column. 

468. — Thejiouble  column. marching,  tp  change  direc- 
tion, the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 
_2.   Column  right  (or  left);  halfric/hj,  {ov  half- left.) 

The  second  command  being  repeated  o;//v/ by  the  seui- 
<rr  captain  of  the  leading  squadrons,  the  senior  chief  of 
front  platoons  commands:  1.  Jiic/ht — turn;  2.  Forward; 
and  so  with  the  subdivisions  \liroughout.  Th^  piyot 
describes  a  quarter  circle  of  12  yards;  the  inner  ilauk  of 
the  outer  platoon  continues  to  march  at  the  same  gait; 
all  preserve  intervals  from  the  pivot,  and  alignment  by 
the  wheeling  flank. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REOIMENT.  2S 

464. — The  regiment  being  in  double  column  li.iiteJ 
or  marching,  il  is  faced  and  marched  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection by  the  same  commands,  and  in  the  sanie  man- 
ner as  llie  open  column,  No.  440.  But  the  colonel  com- 
mands ihe  guide  anew;  and  if  the  columns  are  of  un- 
equal length,  he  commands  ^jt/o^c  left,  (on  the  outer  flank 
of  the  longest  column,)  and  the  column  remains  as  it 
wheeled  about. 

405. — ^Tlie  double  column  roarching  gains'  grouad  t& 
one  of  its  llaaks,  and  gains  ground  to  the  right  or  left, 
without  changing  front-,  by  the  "Samc  commands  and 
means  as  in  the  open  column,  Nos.  441  and  442. 


TO  PASS  FROM  A  COLUMN  OF  TWOS  TO  A  COL- 
UMN OF  FOURS,  TO  AN  OPEN  COLUMN,  AND 
TO  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADRONS,  AN-D  A  CLOSE 
COLUMN. 

466. — The  regiment,  marching  in  a  column  of  twos, 
to  pass  to  a  column  of  fours,  the  colonel  commands:  * 

1.  Attention. 

2.  J^orm  fours. 

3.  Maucii. 

At  Die  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands  :  Form  fours — trot. 

Tlio  other  captains  commands:  Trot. 

At  the  third  command,  the  leading  squadron  executes 
the  formation  as  pr.escribed,  No.  856 ;  that  squadron 
being  formed,  t^ie  captain  of  the  next  squadron  com- 
mands: 1.  Form  fours;  2.  March;  which  is  executed 
as.  prescribed,  No.  362.  And- so  each -captain  in  succcs- 
siofl. 

If  the  column  is  trotting,  and  the"  colonel  wishes  to 
fgrm  fours  by  galloping,  his  second  command  is,  yorm 
fours^gallop ;  and  it  is  done  on  the  same  prinoiples. 


24  EVOLUTIONS  .OF  A  REGIMENT. 

467. — ^The  column  of  twos  trotting,  tli^  colond  gives 
the  same  commands,  No.  406. 

The  second  and  third  commands  are  repeated  inime- 
diatelv  by  t4ie  captain  of  the  leading  squadron,  and  by 
each  of  th6  others,  in  succession,  when  the  squadroi; 
preceding  him  is  formed.  It  is  executed  in  each  squad- 
ron as  prescribed,  No.  852. 

^  46§. — ^The  regiment,  marching  in   a   column  of  foui's, 

to  pass  to  a'  column  of  platoons,  the  colonel  commands  : 

-^ 

1.  Atieivtion.    ' 

2.  Form  platoons. 

3.  March. 

Ail  the  captains,  in  repeating  the  second  command, 
add,-  trot,  ■    -.'  ■ 

At  the  command  march,  it  is  executed  in  each  platoon 
and  squadron  throughout  the  regiment,  as ,  prescribed,. 
No.  357.  ' 

The  intervals  between  the  squadrons  re-tnnin  correct. 
(Tit.  I,  Art.  II.) 

The  column  of  fours  marching  at  the  trot,  unless  the- 
command  indicate  the  gallop,  the  colonel  gives  Uic  same 
commands.  Tliey  are  repeated  and  execxitcd  in  each 
gqnadron  as  prescribed,  No.  362. 

459. — ^The  regiment  being  in  open  "column, -halted  or 
marching  at  a  vmlk,  to  form  an  Opea 'column  of  squad- 
rons the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 
'    2.  Form  stquadrons — left  {or  r>rj hi.) 
3.  Makcu. 

The  captains,  in  repeating  the  second  command, 
add,  trot^ 

At'the  third  command,  each  squadron  is  formed  as  in, 
the  school  of  the  squadron,  No  402. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT,  25- 

If  the  column  is  trotting,  to  make  the  formation  in 
doubling  the  gait,  the  colonel  ad Jp,  <7a/?o/:),  to  the  sec- 
ond command,  and  the  movement  is  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

The  open  column  trotting,  if  the  colonel  give  the  com- 
mands without  indicating  the  gait,  they  are  repeated  by 
the  captains  without  addition ;  the  squadrons  are  formed 
throughout  at  the  same  time,  as  prescribed,  No.  40o. 


470. — The  reginaeut  being  in  open  column,  to  form 
close  column  the  colonel  commands: 

-1.  Aticntion. 

2.  For7n  close  column — left  (or  ripht.) 

3.  March. 

^t  the  second  command,  all  the  captains  commancf. 
for)n,  sqicadron — left — trpt.  ,      ' 

At  the  command  march,  the  gquadrons  are  all  formed 
us  in  the  school  of  the  squadron ;  the; captains  of  all  but 
the  leading  squadi'on  command:  1.  Forward — trot,  ifi 
time  to  add,  2.  March,  so  that  their  rearmost  platoon 
shall  not  halt.  On  reaching,  ii^  succession,  platoon  dis- 
taifce,  they  command:   1.  Halt;  2.  Dress;  3.  Front. 

The  open  column  marching  at  a  Avalk,  the  colonel's 
commands  and  the  captains'  first  commands  are  the 
same  as  above;  the  squadrons  being  formed,  the  cap- 
tains of  all  but  the  one  leading  command,  trot — uh^CH, 
just  "before  their  last  platoons  should  be  commanded  to 
walk;  and  reaching  their  distance,  each,  in  succession, 
loalh — march. 

The  open  column  marching- at  a  lrot,.and  tl«?  colonel 
commands :  2.  Form  close  colum^i — left  (or  right)  ,*  S. 
March.     All  the  captains'  commands  are  the  same. 

At  the  command  march,  Till  the  squadrons  are  formed 
as  prescribed,  No.  352,  and  then  all  but  the  leading 
captain  commands,  trot — march  ;  and  on  reaching  their 
distance,  walk — march,  as  above. 


M  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REOIMENT. 

TO  PASS  FROM  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADRONS  AND 
A  CLO^E  COLUMN,  TO  AN  OPEN  COLUMN, 
AND  A  COLUMN  OF  FOURS  AND  TWOS. 

.  4*71.-^The  regiment  being  in,  column  of  squadrons 
halted  or  marching,  to  diminish  the  front  of  the  column 
the  co'Ionel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Bt/  platoon  (or  63/  the  hft-^'i^  platoon), 
'■i.  March. 

In  repeating  the  second  command,  each  captain  adds 
trot.  "      ' 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  executed 
throughout  as  in  the  squadron,    • 

If  the  colonel  add?,  xoalk,  to  the  second, command,  the 
captains  command  by  platoon. 

if  the  column  be  trotting,  and  the  colonel  f\.<\.^&  gallop, 
to  his  second  command,  it  is  repeated  by  the  captains, 
and  the  movement  is  executed  on  the  same  principle. 

If  the  column  be  trotting  and  the  colonel  gives  the 
same  commands,  they  arc  repeated  by  the  captains,  with- 
out addition,  and  the  movement  is  executed  as  in  No. 
402. 

472, — The  regiment  being  in  a  close  column,  to  march 
by  platoons,  the  colonel  commands: 

L  Attention. 

2,  By  platoon,  [or  By  the  left — by  platoon.) 

3.  March. 

The  second  and  third  commands  are  repeated  by  the 
captain  l)f  the  leading  squadron,  adding  trot  to  the 
Becond." 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  repeat  them  with 
the  same  addition,   in  succession,  giving  the  c(immand 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  2? 

MARcn,  when  the  lust  platoon  of  the  preceding  squadron 
has  obliqued  about  two  platoon  fronts,  so  as  to  take  it8 
place  in  colunih  at  proper  distance.  If  tlie  colonel  addi^ 
««a^^  to  the  second  command,  the  captains  command  t^ 
platoQ;i. 

If  tlie  dolumnbe  marching  at  the  walk,  the  comuiandiP 
of. the  colonel  and  captains  are  the  same,  and  are  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  for  the  squadron,  the  captains  givifig 
the  command  of  execution  when  the  last  platoon  of  the 
preceding  sqijadron  has  increased  its  distance  about  two 
platoon  fronts. 

If  the  column  be  trotting,  the  movement  in  doubling 
the  gait  is  made  on  the  same  principle. 

But  if,  the  column  trotting,  the  colonel  gives  the  sainc 
commands  as  above, ,  the  second  and  third  commands 
are  repeated  by  the  captain  of  the  leading  squadi-oq; 
the  other  captains,  at  the  second  command  of  the  colonel, 
command  walk,  and  repeat  the  command  march.  They 
then,  in  succession,  command :  \.  By  platoons — trot ;  ?. 
March,  as  above. 

4'73. — The  regiment  being  in  open  column,  halted  or 
marching,  to»reduce  the  front  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention, 

2.  By  fours  (or  by  the  left — by  fovrs). 

3.  March.  ■ 

At'the- second  command,  each  captain' comma n^s,^;?,' 
fdurs — trot. 

At  the  third  command,  the  movemei>t  is  executed  in 
each-squadron  at  the  same  time,  as  iij  the  school  of  ^\e 
squadron. 

If  the  colonel  add  aalk  to  his  second  command,  the 
captains  command,  by  fours. 

If  the  command  be  trotting,  the  movemenC  in  doub- 
ling the  gait  is  made  on  the  same  principle  ;  but  if  the 
colonel  give  the  same  commands,  \,hQ  captains  repeat 
them,  and  the  movement  is  executed  throughout  as  in 
squad  rori. 


2S  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIJIENT. 

474. — The  regiment,  marching  in  column  of  fours,  to 
reduce  ita  front  the  colonel  commands: 

1/  Attention. 

2.  By  twos  (or  by  the  left — by  twos). 

3.  Marcu. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands,  by  twos — trot';  and  he  repeats  the 
third  coniiiiaCnd. 

The  other  captains  give  tlie  same  commands  in  suc- 
cession, when  the  rear  of:  the  preceding  squadron  be- 
gins to  trot.  • 

If  the  colonel  adds  walk  to  his  second  command,  the 
leading  captain  commands,  by  twos;  the  others  com- 
mand, Halt,  and  break  in  succession  when  the  rear  of 
the  preceding  squadron  moves. 

If  the  column  be  trotting,  the  movement  in  doubling 
the  gait  is  made  on  the  same  principle ;  but  if  the  gait  is 
not  indicated,  the  captains  do  not  add  trot  to  the 
colonel's  second  command;  and  the  other  captains  com- 
mand walk,  and  they  afterwards  conform  to  the  above. 


4'76. — If  the  necessity  arise,  the  column  is  reduced  to 
ihe//e ;  it  is  done  on  the  same  principles  as  the  foregoing, 
and  the  same  commands,  substituting  Jile  for  "  twos." 
And  it  is  reformed  by  twos,  on  the  same  principles,  of 
Ko»  466,  and  following, 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  25 

ARTICLE  SECOIST). 

FORMATION  OF  LINE  FROM  THE  DIF^ 
FERENT  COLUMNS. 

r        • 

TO  FORM  LINE  FROM  THE  COLUMN  OF  FOURS, 
■AND  OPEN  COLUMN,  FACED  TO  THE  FRONT, 
OBLIQUELY,   TO  THE    LEFT,   RIGHT,    AND 
REAR. 

476. — The  regiment  being  in  colunan  of  fours,  or  open 
column,  halted  or  marching,  to  form  line  to  the  front 
and  left,  or  front  and  right,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  left— front  into  Urn;  or,  right— front  into  Hiie. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands :  Left  (or  right)— front  into  ihie 
— trot. 

The  other  captains  command;  Forward,  (if  halted)-- 
column  half-left  (or  right) — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  squadron  con- 
forms to  the  school  of  the  squadron. 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons,  in  repeating  the 
third  command,  add,  Guide  right  (or  left) ;  and  cacli  di- 
rects the  diagonal  march  of  his  column  so  as  to  pass 
about  30  yards  more  than  the  depth  of  the  column  in 
rear  of  the  point  where  its  right  (or  left)  will  rest  in  line. 

At  these  points  they  command :  Column  half -right 
(or  left) ;  and  then  left  (or  right)— front  into  line,  in 
time  to  command  march,  when  the  head  of  the  column 
is  30  yards  in  rear  of  its  place  in  line. 


CO  EV0LrTI0N3  OF  A  REGIMENT, 

Tf4.1ie  colonel  adcle  walk  to  tlie  second  command,  or  if 
tli£  colnnm  is  tit  the  trot^  the  cftptains  do  nof  ftdd  "trot" 
to  their  commands,  as  in  the  f>)rcgoing  paragraph.  If 
tl^e  colonel  comnmads  gallop,  it  is  repeated  in  their  com- 
mands.   '  . 

When  the  regiment  is  in  column  of  fours,  right  in 
tVQut,  to  form  right — front  into  line,  the  colonel  fir?t 
fon«ms  platoons;  the  same  wfletCleft  is  in  front,  to  ferm 
left — front  into  line. 

If  the  colonel  desire  to  form  a  line  of  squadron  col- 
iHnns,  he  commaiids:  2.  Left  {ov  right) — front  iiUoJine 
of  columns;  the  "loading  squadron  moves  forward  30 
paces  and  halts;  the  other  captains,  proceeding  asabovo. 
direct  the  heads  of  columns  their  depth  in  rear  of  their 
positions  in  line,"  turn  half-right,  and  -halt  on  the  line. 

47*7. — The  line  may  be  formed  obliquely.  "When  to 
the  left  front,  the  lefc  may  fee  back  or  forward  forty- 
f.re  degrees,  or  better,  any  Icp.?  angle.  When  the 
colonel  wishes  the  line  back,  he  himself,  or  by  a  field 
officer,  or  the  adjutant,  commands  to  the  leading  squad- 
ron, in  column  of  .platoons:  \.  Platoons — left  wheel  ;  H. 
Mabcii;  and  when  the  leading  j)latoon  has  the  required 
obliquity,  commands,  halt.  If  in  column  of  fours:  1, 
Fours— left ;  2.  Makch  ;    3.  Halt. 

The  commands  are  then  given  as  in  No.  476;  adding 
to  the  second  command,  if  the  obliquity  be  great,  left 
back;  the  leading  platoon,  or  set  of  foui-s,  marches 
straight  forward,  and  the  squadron  is  formed  at  the 
same  angle;  the  other  sqi>adron3  make  their  first  turn 
greater;  and  if  the  left  he  far  back,  may  form  line  with- 
out a  second  turn. 

478. — If  the  colonel  wish  to  throw  the  left  forward,  a 
large  angle  beyond  the  perpendicular  line  to  the  direc  • 
tion  of  his  column,  he  first  causes  the  leading  squadron 
to  march  and  turn  its  depth  perpendicular  to  the  desired 
line  ;  he  adds  to  the  second  command,  the  obliquity  be- 
ing so  great,  left  foritard.    The  squadrons  in  this  case 


¥!^J/. 


Fa^'3(y.   Jl 


d. 


\ 


:^' 


/     / 
/     / 

// 


.  / 
/ 


L-- 


j'':^i'i' 

N. 

Faye 

M  n  '^' 

1 

/ 

/  A' 

/  X 

/ 
/ 

^   ■ 

» 

% 

• 

1 — I 

S; — ' 

^ 

\ 

X 

<._. 

—^ 

1 
1 

i     i 

m- 

! 
1 

,           1 

EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  31 

make  a  less  turn  than  in  the  square  fcn'raatlon/^and  all 
make  a  second  turn. 

To  form  obliquely  to  the  rigJit- front,  is  done  oxT  the 
same  principles,  and  inverse  means. 

In  these  cases,  if  the  column  be  marching,  (he  colonel 
indicates  to  the  captain  to  take,  while  in  motion,  the  ne- 
cessary obliquity  for  his  position. 

479. — The  regiment  being  iu  column  of  fours,  or  open 
column,  halted  or  marching,  to  form  .line  en  eitlior  flank, 
the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left  {or  right)  into  line  wheel. 
S.  March. 

A.t  the  second  command,  each  captain  commands; 
Left  (or  right)  into  line  wheel— trot,  (omitting  trot'm  the 
column  of  fours.)  The  wheels  being  near  completion, 
they  command  :  Right,  (or  left)'—DvcE9,s.  (In  this  case 
the  captains  do  not  command  front.  )  When  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  or  adjutant  command?  front,  they  turn  about 
to. the  front. 

If  the  column  of  fours  right  in  front,  the  colonel  forms 
line  by  wheeling  fours  to  the  right,  only  in  emergency  ; 
the  same  as  to  forming  the  line  to  the  left,  left  in  front. 
In  either  case  he  accomplishes  his  object  best  by  first 
forming  platoons. 

480.— -The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  fours,  or 
open  column,  to  form  line  to  the  right  or  left,  beyond 
the  head  of  the  column,  the  colonel  commands:    ^    • 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line. 
8.  March. 

The  captain  of  the  leading  squadron  adds  trot,  to  th» 
a«coud  command. 


«a  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMBNX. 

The  ofcher  captains  cominanu  trot. 

At  the  commniiJ  march,  tli^^  leading  squadron  forme 
linonri  in  the  school  of  the  eqnadron. 

The  other  captains,  if  the  guide  is  not  there  already, 
anuounct!  him  on  the  flank  uext  to  the  new  line,  and 
proceed  to  the  heads  of  their  squadrons. 

They  command,  in  succession;  1.  On  right {ov  left)  into 
line  ;  2.  March,  when  the  head  of  the  squadron  arrives 
at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  form  the  line. 

481. — When  the.  regiment  is  in  a  column  of  fours 
right  ill  front,  to  form  on  left  into  line,  the  colonel  first 
forms  platoons ;  the  same  left  in  front,  before  forming  on 
right  into  line. 

482.— -The  colonel  may  v a vj;^ the* direction  of  the  line 
considerably  to  the  riglit  or  left;  the  captains  change 
the  direction  of  their  columns  to  the  necessary  degree  as 
they  pass  the  right,  (or  left)  of  the  line,  without  orders. 

4331- — The  regiment  being  in  open  column,  or  column 
of  fours  to  form  line  faced  to  the  right-rear,  or  left-rear, 
on  the  rear  of  the  column,  the  colonel  first  wheels  by 
platoons  or  fours  about,  Nos.  440  and  433,  and  immedi- 
ately command?  as  in  No.  47ri ;  he  governs  himself  by 
the  numbers  following  it. 

484.-— The  regimeiit  being  in  open  column,  to  form 
line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  heaa  of  the  column,  the 
colonel  first  forms  line  to  the  front;  and  then  wheels  pla- 
toons about. 


T0JORM  LINE  FROM  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADRONS, 
(OR  COLUMN  OF  ATTACK,)  FACED  TO  THE 
FRONT,   LEFT,   RIGHT,   AND  REAR. 

486.— -The  regiment  marching,  or  at  a  halt,  in  column 
of  squadrons  is  to  form  liue  "to  the  front,  the  colonel  com- 
mancLs: 


I'£3 


\. 


., — -v^... 


-i L 


I 


r-i 


■"'•-] 


EYOLtlTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  S$ 

1.  JLttention. 

2.  Left  (or  right)  front  into  line, 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands,  (if  at  a  halt,)  forward,  and  repeats 
the  third  command  ;  he  marches  thirty  paces  and  com- 
mands: 1.  Halt;  2.  Right,  (or  left)  Dress  ;    3.  Front. 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command,  left  {6): 
right)  wheel — trox;  they  repeat  the  third  command;  and 
having  made  a  half  wheel  (46  degrees)  command  for- 
ward ;  and»if  the  guide  is  not'already  on  tlie  side  of  for- 
mation, command  it  there. 

As  each  squadron  arrives  with  its  advanced  flank  op- 
posite its  pjace  in  line,  each  captain  in  succession  com- 
mands: i.  Right,  {ov  left)  Wheel;  2.  March  ;  3.  For- 
ward ;  4,  Halt  ;  5.  Dress  ;  6.  Front.  ^ 

If  the  nature  of  the  ground  prevent  this  evolution, 
the  colonel  would  form  close  column,  and  deploy  it. 

•186. — The  regiment  ])cing  in  column  of  squadrons,  to 
fonnjine  to  tlie  left  or  right,  the  colonel  commands; 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left  (or  right)  iniOt^line  wh^eU 

3.  March. 

The  captains  in  repeating  the  second  command,  ndd 
trot.     ■ 

The  wheels  arc  executed  as  in  the  school  of  the  squad- 
ron ;  being  at  the  point  of  completion  th,e  captains  com« 
mand;    1.  Halt;  2.  Right  (or  hft) — Dress. 

487. — The  regiment  being  in  column  of  squadrons  to 
form  line,  on  the  rear  of  the  column,  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left—rear  into  lint,  (or  Right— -rear  into  line.) 

3.  March. 

16 


34  EV0LUTI0K3  OF  A  REOI5IENT. 

At  the  second  commaud,  the  captain  of  the  rear  squad- 
ron commands,  countermarch  by  the  right  (or  left)  fank 
— irot. 

The  captains  ofthc  other  squadrons  commaud,  platoons 
left  (or  right)  wheel- — trot — eohann  half  left,  (or   right) 

Except  that  the  captain  of  the  squadron  next  to  the 
rear,  omits  column  half  left  (or  right,)  his  squadron 
marches  10  yards  and  makes  a  full  turn. 

At  the  coffimand  march,  the  movement  commences 
throughout;  when  the  wheels  are  near  completion,  the 
captains  command :  1.  Forwaud  ;  2.  Guide  left,  (guide 
next  to  the  side  of  formation;  the  chiefs  of  flie  leading 
platoons  at  the  command  forwakd,  commanding  left-  -■ 
•TURN  ;  and  forward,  when  the  half  wheel  is  complete.) 
Each  of  these  squadrons  then  conforms,  to  what  is  pres- 
cribed for  forming  right  (or  left)  fr wit  i^to  line.,  No.  476 

-*■'  488. — ^The  regiment  being  in  column  of  squadrons  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  head  of  the  column, 
the  colonel  first  forms  line  to  the  left  front  ov  right  frovt. 
No.  484,  and  then  wheels  about  by  squadron,  or  platoon. 
In  all  cases  of  the  formation  of  line  faced  to  the  rear, 
on  the  head^of  the  column,  if  there  be  occasion  for  the 
squadrons  to  face  promptly  to  the  new  front-,  the  col- 
onel directs  the  captain  of  the  leading  equadron,  who 
wheels  about  as  soon  as  tne  first  platoon  of  the  next 
Bquadi'on  is  halted  on  the  -line  ;  it  is  then  the^^duty  of  the 
other  captains  to  do  the' same  in  succession,  without  any 
further  order  or  intimation. 

489.— -In  forming  front  or  rear,  into  line  from  the  col- 
umn of  squadrons,  or  open  column,  in  a  regiment  of  ten 
squadrons,  if  the'colonel  adds,  of  battle,  .to  tlie  second 
command,  the  second  line,  of  squadron  columns,  formed 
on  the  bead  of  the  seventh  squadron  fropi  the  front,  in 
the  sannie  manner  that  the  leading  squadrons  are  formed. 
In  all  similar  cases^in  tlie  eight  squadron  regiment,  the 
two  squadrons  at  the  rear  march  over  the  most  direct 
lines  to  cover  the  flanks;  the  foremost  one,  always  to 
the  flank  first  formed. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  -  35 

TOfFORM  LINE   FROM  CLOSE  COLUMN,  FACED 
'TO  THEHJRONT,  OBLIQUELY,  LEFT,  RIGHT, 
AND  REAR. 

490. — The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  foi-m 
line  faced  to  the  front,  on,  and  to  the  right  of,  the  lead- 
ing squadron,  the  colonel  commands  : 

0 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Deploy  to  the  right. 

3.  Marcu. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands:  1.  Left — Dress;  2.  Front  ;  the 
squadron  is  dressed  on  the  markers. 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command, /o«rs 
riffht — trot.  •      • 

At  the  coiiKuand  makcit,  all  the  rear  squadrons  wheel 
by  fours  to  the  right,  and  march  forward  at  the  trot: 
tlie  captains  halt  personally  in  rear  of  the  point  whorv^ 
thu  left  of  their  squadrons  will  rest  in  line  ;  and  when 
the  rear  of  their  columns  reaches  them,  command,  in 
succession  ;  1.  Foiirs — left;  2.  Guide  left;  and  on  arriv- 
ing, the  horses'  heads  on  a  line  with  the  croups  of  the 
next  squadron,^  1.  Halt;  2.  Drkss  ;  3.  Front.  At  the 
command  halt,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  continue  on,  to 
ali^jn  themselve.'. 

The  close  column  is  deployed  on,  and  to  the  left  of, 
the  leading  squadron  on  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means  at  th«  command;  2.  Deploy  to  the  left. 

491. — The  regiment  marching  in  close  column  to  form 
line  on,  and  to  the  right  of,  the  leading  squadron  with- 
out halting,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Deploy  to  the  right. 


8e  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

At-thc  second  coraniand,  the  captain  of  tlie  kading 
squadron  proceeds  to  the  centre  of  the  squadron,  and  ff 
the  column  is  at  the  trot,  commands,  walk ;  guide  riyht  ; 
(if  he  commands  walk,  he  repents  the  Hd'command.) 

At  the  second  command,  tlie  captains  of  the  other 
squadrons  command, /ours  right — trot ;  (omitting  trot  if 
the  column  be  trotting;  and  they  repeat  tlie  command 
Makoii.) 

When  their  squadrons  are  oj)positc  their  places,  they 
command,  in  succession:  1.  Fo\irs — Left;  2.  Ouideleft] 
and  when  in  line,  icalk — march  ;  when  the  central  squad- 
ron reaches  the  line,  the  colonel  commands:  Regulate  by 
central  squadron. 

The  captains  command  the  guide  accordingly,  (No. 
627.) 

The  regiment  marching  in  cloee  columns,  line  is  form- 
ed on,  and  to  the  left  off  the  leading  squadron  on  the 
same  principle  and  by  inverse  means ;  at  tbe  commaud.e: 
2.  Deploy  to  the  teft,     3.  March. 

492. — The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  deploy 
it  on  one  of  the  central  squadrons,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Deploy  on  fifth  squadron, 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  squadrons  in 
front  command.  Fours  right — trot; 

Those  of  squadrons  in  the  rear  of  the  fifth,  Fout^  left 
—trot; 

The  captain  of  the  fifth  squadron,  Forward,  guide  ceri' 
tre — trot. 

At  the  command  marcd,  the  movement  of  the  front 
and  rear  squadrons  commences ;  the  left  guide  of  the 
fifth  proceeds  to  place  himself  opposite  the  sergeant  ma- 
jor, who  has  been  posted  to  mark  the  line,  12  paces  in 
front  of  the  leading  squadron.  The  captain  of  the  fifth 
commands  marou,  when  hiu  squadron  is  unmasked. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REOIxMENT.  3T 

•  The  captain  of  the  next  squadron  in  front,  and  the 
others  in  his  front,  in  <>ucce3sion,  and  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, at  tlie  moment*the  rear  of  hia  squadron  has  gained 
squadron  interval  from  the  right  flank  of  the  fifth  squad- 
ron, comraands:  1.  Fours  ■LKrr;  2.  Halt;  and  1.  For- 
ward—trot;  2.  March;  3.  Guide  left,  the  moment  his 
squadron  is  unmasked;  and  ou  arriving  at  the  line,  1. 
Halt;  2,  Dress;  3.  Pront,  But  the  squadron  in  front, 
not  being  masked,  marches  immediately  forward,  after 
its  flank  movement. 

The  squadrons  in  rear  of  the  fifth  squadron  conform 
to  No.  490. 

The  squadrons  in  fronfalVays  go  to  the  right. 

493. — The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  fbrm  line 
obliquely  to  its  front,  the  angle  being  45  degrees  or  less, 
by  depTbyiug  on  a  central  squadron,  or  to  the  right  or 
left  of  the  column,  the  colorvel  first  commaude: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  riffht  (or  le/i)  wheel. 
"3.  March. 

4.  Halt. 

The  deployjoaent  is  then  <?oramanded,  and  executed  by 
the  same  commands,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  in  para- 
.  graphs  490  and  492. 

494. — The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  formliafe 
on  the  left  flank,  faced  to  the  left,  or  right  flank,  faoed 
to  the  right,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  071  rear  squadron — left  (or  right)  into  line. 

3.  March, 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  rear  squad- 
ron commands  :  Left  into  line  wheel — trot. 
^  The  other  captains  command,  Forward — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  squadroa  makes  its 
wheel,  and  the  captain  commands:  1.  Halt;;  2;  Left— 


88  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMKNt. 

dress;  3.  Front.  Tjio  markers  aro  so  placfeJ  that  tht 
squadron  sliall  dress  forward  three  poccS! 

The  other  pquadrons  marching  Tdt-ward  are  wheoltd 
into  line  in  the  same  manner,  as  they  8uocc?si.vrty  gain 
their  distance  for  the  proper  interval,  which  will  be 
when  the  next  squadron  in  rejir  has  made  about  two- 
thirds  of  its  wheel.  . 

When  the  close  column,  is  marcliing  the  formation  jp 
•made  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  captains  .9! 
the  squadrons  that  continue  to  march  do  not  command 
forward, 

495. — The  regiment  marcliing  in  close  column,  to  form 
line  to  the  right,  beyond  tlie  head  of  the  colbaro,  the 
colonel  xommande; 


1.  Attention. 

On  rlgh 

March. 


2.  On  right  into  line. 


At  tiie  second  command,  the.  captain  of  the  leading 
!?q^adron  commands  trot. 

Immediately  after  repeating  the  command  m.vrch,  he 
commands:  1.  Eight — tiuk;  2.  Forward;  and  having 
marched  forward  20  i>aces, •!.  Halt;  '1.1-iight — drejs: 
5.  Front. 

At  the  command  MARcn,  all  the  other  captains  com- 
mand the  guide  on  the  side  of  the  "formation,  if  not  al- 
ready there.  When  the  leading  squadron  has  made 
about  oiie-third  of  its  turn,  the  captain  of  the  next  squad- 
I'on  commands;  Trot — march;  and  each  of  the  others, 
in  6tKicos>ion,  c;ive  the  same  command  wiien  the  squad- 
ron in  his  front  has  increased  its  distance  by  six  ptfoee ; 
each  captain,  in  guccesi  ion,  when  the  heads  of  his  squad- 
ron horses  a|^  as  far  advanced  as  the  farthest;  flank  of 
the  squadron  last  for..med  in  line,  commands:  Eighth 
turn;  and  tkeif,  1.  Forward;  2.  Halt;  3.  Dulss. 

If  the  column  be  trotting,  at  the  second  cummand  the 
captain  of  the  leading  f-quadron  commands  right;  the 
othw*  captains,  walk;  at  the  couunand  march,  the  Jead- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  o% 

ing  captain  coramands  turn;  tlie  otbera,  in  repeating 
mARCiT,  add  the  command  for  the  guide,  if  necessary.  All 
then  proceed  as  above  described, 

Wh'cn  the  guide  has  to  be  changed,  tho  captains  pro- 
ceed, in  succession,  to  the  front  of  the  centre. of  their 
squadrons,  to  comma^nd  the  increased  gait,  and  remain 
there. 

The  regiment  marching  in  close  column,  to  form  line 
to  the  left,  beyond  the  head  of  the  column,  is  executed 
on  the  same  principles  by  inverse  means  and  commands. 

The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  squadrons,  line 
is  formed  to  the  right  or  left,  at  the  same  commands  oi 
th«.  colonel;  at  the  second,  the  loading  captain  con:- 
mands  right  (or  left ;)  the  others,  trot ;  at  the  third  com- 
mand, \vhich  they  ix^peat,  the  leading  captain  commands 
TURN ;  then  all  proceed  as  prescribed  above  after  their 
distance  is  increased.  If  the  column  be  trotting,  it  is 
the  samcs  but  with  th(r  omission  of  the  command  trot. 

406. — 'The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  to  form  a 
lino  fiiccd  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  countermarches  the 
column,  and  then  deploys. 

The  countermarch  is  a  dangerous  evolution  if  exposetl 
to  the  possibility  of  being  attacked  by  cavalry  durirfg 
its  progi'^ess.  It  would  be  safer  to  wheel  about  by  pla- 
toons; in  so  doing  the  squadrop  guides  are  governed  by 
No.  400. 

497. —The  regirnent  marching  in  close  column,  to  form 
a  line  of  squadron  columns,  faced  to  either  flank,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  rear  squadron — by  platoon  left,  (or  rigjii) 

into  line  of  columns. 

3.  March.  .        . 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  rear  squad- 
ven  commands :  Platoons  left  telicel — trot;  after  its  eie- 


40  ivOLUTroNS  or  a  regiment. 

cution,  1>€  commnnda :  Fo&waud;  and  haviag  marched 
20  paces,  Halt. 

The  other"  captains,  in  succession  ns  th-^y  gain  squad- 
ron interval,  perform  the  samo  ujovenieut  as  the  captain 
in  roar. 

The  evolution  may  be  executed  by  fours  on  the  sam^ 
principles;  the  colonel  substitutes,  in  his  command,  th-. 
word /o^^r»  for  p/a^oon. 


498. — Cavalry  should  never  surrender.  If  orerpow- 
ered  or  surrounded  it  can  cut  its  way  by  charging  at  full 
speed,  in  close  column. 

A  close  colunan,  which  may  chance  to  be  suddenly  at- 
tacked in  flank,  may  defend  itself  by  instantly  Avheoling 
and  advancing  to  meet  the  enemy,  the  flank  platoon?  of 
alternate  squadrons.  It  will  be  understood  that  the  1st, 
.'i4,  and  other  squadrons  with  od-d  nuDibers  are  indica- 
ted.   The  commands  are  r 

1.  Right  (or  left)  platoons,   alternate  squadrons — 

right  (or  left)  wheel — gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  FOKWAP.D. 

-The  chiefs  of  the  platoons  immediately  charge. 

According  to  circunistances,  the  commander  may  send 
to  support  the  charge  of  these  platoons  the  corresponding 
platoons  of  the  other  squadrons,  by  the  commands  : 

1.  First  {or  fourth)  platoons — right  (or  lef{)  wheel 

gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

They  advance,,  with  60  paces  distance,  and  charge  if 
aecessarv. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REOIMENT.  « 

TO  FORM  LINE  FROM  DOUBLE  COLUMN  FACED 
TO  THE  FRONT,  RIGHT,  LEFT,  AND  REAR. 

499. — Tlie  regiment  being  in  double  column  halted  or 
marching,  to  form  lino,  faced  to  the  front,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Front  into  line. 
'    3.  Makcu. 

At  the  second  command,  the  leading  captain  of  the 
right  column  commands:  Right— front  into  line — trot. 
Of  the  left  column,  left—f)'ont  into  line — trot ;  and  all  in 
each  column  are  governed  bj*  wliat  is  prescribed  in  No. 
476;  but  the  chiefs  of  the  two  leading  platoons  cause 
them  to  oblique  slightly,  to  regain  the  two  paces  of  re-, 
duced  interval ;  the  sergeant  major  is  posted  in  front  of 
the  left  platoon  that  led  the  right  column,  and  faces  to 
the  right. 

500. — The  regiment  halted  or  marching,  in  double  col-" 
umn,  to  form  line  through  the  right  ilank,  faced  to  the 
right,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Right  into  line. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  comnvind,  the  captains  of  the  right  col- 
amns  command:  Right  into  line  wheel — trot.  '• 

Tlie  captains  of  the  left  column  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  480. 

At  the  command  MiVRcn,  the  movements  are  executed 
as  prescribed  in  that  number,  and  in  No.  4*79.  If  the 
colonel  Avish  to  attack  immediately  with  the  line  formed 
by  the  right  column,  he  sends  instructions  to  the  field 
officer  ;  he  may  charge  in  echelon,  as  the  squadrons  foroo^ 
or  by  the  wing  in  line. 


42  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REOIMEN'T.        • 

Line  is  formed,  through  the  left  flank,  faced  to  the 
left,  on  the  same  principles,  by  inverse  means,  at  the 
commands:  2.  Left  into  line  ;  3.  Maroii. 

501. — The  regiment  being  in  doiible  column,  halted  or 
marching,  to  form  line  in  rear"  of  the  column,  faced  to 
the  rear,  the  colonel  first  commands  j^^^^ioons  right  (or 
left)  about  wheel,  march,,  halt,  or  foravard  ;  and  then 
proceeds  as  in  No.  499. 

If  the  left  column  be  short  of  the  other,  tlie  leading 
captain,  after  wheeling  about,  at  the  comiiiandj/Voni  i?i- 
to  line,  commands,  first,  forward,  if  at  a  halt ;  he  form? 
•iin  the  line  of  the  first  squadron.  i| 

If  the  colonel  wish  to  form  but  one  column  faced  to  i 
the  rear,  with  the  support  of  a  second  line,  he  commands, 
right  column — platoons  right  abo-at  wheel,  and  left  front 
■rnto.line  of  battle  ;  or  gives  inverse  commands  to  the  left 
column;  or,  instead  of  adding  the  words  "of  battle,'^  giv- 
Jag  orders  to  a  field  ofiicer.  The  lieutenant  colonel  or 
major,  as  the  case  may  be,  immediately  puts  his  column 
in  motion,  or  continues  it  in  motion,  and  changes  direc-' 
..tion  to  the  right  or  left,  to  march  behind  the  other  wing ; 
.and  there  forms  a  line  of  squadron  columns,  No.  623;  in 
this  ease,  the  fifth  squadron  would  cover  the  left  flank, 
last  formed^of  the  first  line;  and  the  commander  of  the 
second  line  would  order  his  last  squadron,  the  tenth,  to 
cover  its  right  flank,  (getting  position  by  simply  wheel- 
ing platoons  right  about.)  If  the  left  column  be  formed 
into  the  first  line,  the  inverse  would  take  place  ;  and  the 
Bixth  squadron  line  cover  its  right  flan^,  and  the  first  it- 
'left  flank. 


502. — If  the  colonel,  marching  in  double  column, 
forms  line  to  the  right  (sv  left,  tp  attack  immediately,  be 
commands,  right  {ov  left)  into  line  of  battle;  in  which 
case  both  columns  wheel  into  line,  and  the  first  advanc- 
ing, the  field  ofiicer  in  command  of  the  second  retains  it, 
for  distance. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  UKaiMENT.  4S 

603. — The  regiment  in  double  column,  the  colonel  may 
form  line  of  battle  with  either  column  while  advancing; 
the  field  officer  with  the  other  column  halts  it  until  the 
first  passes,  and  then  commands,  left  (or  right)  front 
into  line.  The  colonel  commands,  left  (or  right)  cohnnn, 
form  line — left  (or  right)— -trot ;  {ov  gallop.)  At  this 
command  the  lejiding  captain  commands,  form  squadron 
— trot  (or  gallop ;)  the  others,  column  half— left  (or 
right) — trot  (or  gallop  ;)  and  proceed  at  the  commau^ 
MARCH,  as  to  form  left— front  into  line,  except  that  when 
their  heads  of  squadrons  are  in  line  with  the  leading 
squadron  they  comm&Tid,form  sqtiadron-^lcft,  {ov  right.) 

504. — The  regiment  in  double  column,  marching,  br 
halted,  and  the  colonel  desiring  to  use  it  a^  a  column  of- 
attack,  to  the  front,  he  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  form. squadron 8. 

3.  March.  ... 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  commai^d  form 
squadron — right — trot,  and  form  Isqtcadron — left— trot, 
respectively.  - 

At  the  command  MARcri,  each  equadron  is  formed  as  in 
the  school  of  the  squadron ;  tlie  captains  of  the  right 
squadrons  command  ^rurtZe  left;  those  of  the  left  com- 
mand guide  right,  and  their  right  guides  preserve  inter- 
vals and  align  by  the  right  squadrons. 

The  colonel  may  add  gallop  to  the  second  command^ 

The  colonel  may  send  a  field  officer  to  command  the 
ohai-gc  of  the  leading  squadrons;  the  column  following 
with  interval  of  60  paces  between  the  squadrons  that 
charge  and  the  next. 

TO  FORM  LINE  FROM^  OPEN"  COLUMN  BY  COM 
BINING  TWO  OR  MORIi:  MOVEMENTS. 

505. — The  first  clause  of  the  colonel's  preparator3^ 
commands  always  applies  to  tlic  leading  squadrons. 


44  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  RKOIMENT. 

The  regiment  marching  in  open   column,    a  part   haa 
changed  direction  to  the  right,  and  the  colonel  wishes  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  left  of  the  part  that  has  turned,  he^ 
halts,  or  not/at  will  and   commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left  into  Knc  and  left  front  into  line. 

3.  MARcn.  - 

.  At  the  Eecond  command  the  captains,  in  the  new  di- 
rection, command :  Left  into  line  wheel — trot. 

The  captain  who  commands  the  leading  squadron,  not 
turned,  commands:  Left  front  into  line;  the  others: 
Column  half-left — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  both  movements  are  executed 
'as  prescribed,  Nos.  470  and  476. 

506. — The  open  column  having  turned  to  llie  right, 
and  the  colonel  wishes  to  form  line  on  the  right  flank  of 
the  part  that  has  turned  and  faced  to  the  right,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Right  into  line  and  left  front  into  line. 
8.  Ma^ch. 

Each  part  of  the  column  conforms  itself  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  right  into  line  lohe&l  and  left  front 
into  line ;  but  the  captains  of  the  squadrons  that  per- 
form the  latter  movement  wheel  left  .about  by  platoon, 
as  soon  as  the  leading  platoon  of  the  next  squadron  is 
halted,  without  orders  or  intimation.  The  colonel's  com- 
mand should,  if  possible,  be  given  just  as  the  last  platoon 
of. a  squadron  is  turned  in  the  new  direction. 

If  the  colonel  commanded  right  into  line  qfhatlle,  the 
part  of  the  column  still  marching  to  the  new  rear  vrould 
continue  on  to  form  a  second  line,  or  flank  supports 
only. 

507. — The  open  colutpn  having  turned  to  the  left, 
.part  only  being  in   the  new   direction,  to   form  line 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  45 

through  the  right  flank  of  that  part,  and  faced  to  the 
right,  the  colonel  commands  the  halt,  or  not,  at  will,  and 
then  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Right  into  line  and  right  front  into  line. 
8.  March.  ^.'\ 

\^ich  movements  are  executed  as  has  been  prescrib- 
ed for  right  into  line  wheel  and  right  front  into  line,  by 
the  two  parts  of  the  column.  The  head  of  the  first 
squadron  forming  right  front  into  line  must  oblique  to 
the  right. 

508. — Part  of  the  open  column  having  turned  to  the 
left,  to  form  line  through  the  left  flank  of  that  part,  and 
faced  to  the  left,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left  into  line  and  ri^t  front  into  line. 
*         9.  March. 

Each  part  of  the  column  conforms  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  left  into  line  wheel  and  right  front  into 
/ine  ;  but  the  captains  of  the  squadrons  which  perform 
the  latter  movement  wheel  right  about  by  platoon, 
without  waiting  for  orders,  as  soon  as  the  leading  'pla- 
toon of  the  next  squadron  to  form,  is  halted. 


609. — In  the  four  last  combined  evolutions,  the  Col- 
umn may  have  turned  at  an  angle  much  greater  or  less 
than  a  right  angle.  The  oblique  line  is  formed  on  the 
same  principles  as  in  Nos.  477  and  478,  the  colonel  omit- 
ting ''right  (or  left)  forward ;"  and  the  leading  captain 
of  the  column,  in  the  original  direotion,  himgelf,  firsifc 
wheels  his  platoons  to  the  new  angle. 


46  EVOLUTIONS  0?  A  EEG-IMENT. 

ARTICLE  THIRD. 

THE  LINE— ITS  CHANGES  AND  MARCH. 

613- — The  regiment  being  iir  line,  to  change  front  to 
tiie  right  or  left,  45  degrees  or  less,  the  colonel  com- 

laands :  T 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  front — Left  (or  riffht). forward. 

3.  Marcu. 

f  At  the  second  command  the  captain  of  the  right  squad- 
ron commands:  Jiiqht  wheel — trot. 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command:  For- 
■>:iard — Guide  right — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  commeftces 
throughout.  The  first  squadron  having  wheelcd^Jesa 
tliaa  46  degrees,  its  captain  halts  it  and  dresses  it^'n  the 
markers.-  -   *  ' 

As  the  other  squadrofife  arrive  in  succession,  their 
right  flanks  opposite  the  points  they  should  occupy  in 
line,  their  captains  command:  I.  Right  wheel;  2.  Mahcji; 
G..";FoR\>'AUD ;  aind  near  lhe~line:~l.  Halt;  2.  Dress;  3. 
Fr.oNT. 

To-'change  front  to  the  left  is  er^^ecuted  on  the  same 
-prl^Biples  by  inverse  commands  and  means : 

514. — Th^regiment  being  in  line,  to' change  front  ob: 
liquely  on  ft  central*squadron,  the  coloael  commands: 

^^   1.  Attention. 

%  Change  front — on  fourth   squadro7i — left  (or 

right)  forward. 
3.  March. 

At  the  second,  command,  the  cftptain  of  the  fourth 
aquadron  commands,  Jiight  wheel — trot,  aad  he  and  the 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REOIMENT.  Cf 

captains  to  the  left  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
right  and  other  squadrons  in  the  preceding  No,  513. 

At  the  second  command,  the  cnptnir.s  of .  the  right 
squadrons  command,  Fours — right  about.         •   "  * 

The  fours  having  wheeled  about,  and  JliP  squadrons 
marching  to  the  rear,  these  captains  cotnmand  Oui<jk 
right.  As  the  squadrons,  in  succession,  arrive  with  their 
(present)  right  opposite  the  point  it  should  occupy  in  the 
now  line,  they  command:  1.  Right  wheel.  2.  Marck. 
3.  Forward,  And  having  passed  the  line :  \,  Foiits- — 
Jtight  about.  2.  Halt.  3.  Dress.  4.  Front. 

To  change  front,  right  forward,  is  executed  on  the 
^aoie  principle  by  inverse  commands  and   means. 

The  next  squadron  to  the  central  in  retiring  must  al- 
low for  lessening  its  interval  three  paco-i  by 'wheeling 
fours  about  towai'd  the  central  squadron. 


515. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  change  front  to 
the  left  or  right,  45  degrees  or  less,  by  throwing  back  a 
flank,  the  coh>nel  commands : 

1.  Attention,    , 

2,  Change  front-^lcjt  (or  right)  back. 
3.  Majicu, 

.» 

At  the  second. command,  all  the  captains  command, 
Fours — right  about. 

When  the  fours  have  wheeled  about,  the  captain  of 
the  right  squadron  commands:  1.  Left  wheel.  2.  March. 
i;.  Forward.  4,  Fours — Right  about.  5,  Halt.  6.  Eighi 
— Dress,    7.  Frokt. 

The  other  captains,  when  the  fours  have  wheeled 
about, -command  Guide  left;  and  when,  in  succession, 
their  squadrons  arrive  with  their  (present)  left  opposite 
the  point  it  should  occupy  in  the  novr  line,  they  com- 
mand: 1.  Left  wheel.  2.  M\Vi.ca.  3.  Forward.  And  hav- 
ing passed  the  line :  1.  Fouri  right — About.  2.  Halt.  3. 
Drb9s,  4.  Front. 


48  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

The  markers  for  the  right  squadron  are  posted  when 
it  has  completed  its  wheel  to  the  rear  ;  the  colonel  or 
officer  superintending  their  position,  indicates  to  the 
captain  when  to  cease  wheeling. 

To  change  front,  right  back,  is  executed  on  the  same 
principles  by  iliyeree  means  and  commands.     . 

516. — To  change  the  front  of  the  regiment  in  line,  at 
a  greater  angle  to  the  right,  faced  to  the  right  or  left, 
pr  to  the  left,  and  faced  to  the  left  or  right,  the  colonel 
wheels  the  regiment  by  platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  and 
then  forms  left  or  right  front  into  line;  th^n  if  it  is  to  face  to 
the  opposite  direction,  it  is  wheeled  about  by  platoone ; 
all  of  which  evolutions  have  been  fully   described. 

517. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  advance  in  squad- 
ron columns,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward  by  platoons. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  command^  bi/ 
platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  each  squadron  marches  for- 
ward in  column  of  platoons,  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  squadron,  except  that  the  captains  of  squadrons  to 
the  right  of  the 'squadron  of  direction,  after  command- 
ing MARCH,  add  guide  left,  and  those  to  its  left,  guide 
right.  The  central  or  right  centre  squadron  is  the 
squadron  of  direction  ;  the  chief  of  its  leading  platoon 
regulates  the  gait;  the  cliief  of  the  next  on  the  left  es- 
tablishes, with  him,  the  base  on  which  the  commanders 
of  the  leading  platoons  of  all  the  other  squadrons  regu- 
late their  alignment ;  the  squadron  guide  on  the  flank  of 
the  leading  platoon  of  the  regulating  squadron  is  charg- 
ed with  the  direction  of  the  march  ;  this,  with  the  base 
of  the  alignment,  is  superintended  l3y  the  colonel,  or  by 
the  adjutant  or  a  field  officer,   as  he  may  direct    Tb« 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  TIECHMENT.  49 

^qjaadrou  giilde  with"  tlie  leading  platoon  of  the  other 
3((|}j(idron3  marches  on  the  flank  of  the  leading  platoon 
next  toward  the  regulating  squadron  ;  they  preserve  the 
i&tervals  under  correction  of  the  captains. 

If  anj  cuptain  find  it  necessary  to  reduce  the  front  of 
hils  eolumu,  he  commands  by  fours;  and  when  the  neces- 
sity cfeases,  reforms  platoons. 

518.— If  circumstances  ren<3er  it  ncce33ary,the  coloDel 
commands  : 

•  1.  Attention. 
2.  By  fours. 
.  3.  March, 

^  Which  is  executed  throughout  as  in  the  school  of  the 
fkiuadron,  except  that  each  squadron  guide  with  the 
flank  that  is  leading  marches  on  the  flank;  of  its  leading 
seit  of  fours ;  that  of  the  squadron  of  direction  on  its 
V;i^ht,  the  others  on  the  flank  next  toward  the  squadron 
of.  direction ;  the  march  is  conducted  on  the  satne  prin- 
ciples and  ineans  as  by  platoons.  To  reform  platoons, 
the  colonel  comraatids :  •  .» 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Form  platoons.  *      . 

3.  March, 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  command :  Foryn 
platoons — trot. 

-At  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  executed 
thiKJUghout  as  in  the  squadron. 

51.9 — The  march  by  the  left  of  squadrons  is  executed 
the  same  as  has  been  prescribed,  except  in  the  commands. 
The  colonel  commands  :  2.  By  the  left-^forivard  by  pla>- 
tKtons.  To  reduce  the  front,  the  colonel's  commands  ay,e 
the  same ;  but  the  captains  command ;  2.  By  the  left^ty 
fours. 

It 


JM  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

* 
620. — To  change  direction  while  marching  in  line"  of 

columns,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.    ■> 

2.  Change  direction   to    the   right,   (or    left)   and 

sounds  the  signal,  "to  the  right,"  (or  *Jito  the 
left.") 
g» 

The  pivot  squadron  halts;  as  the  movement  progress 
ses,  its  leading  platoon  will  slowly  wheel  on   a  halted 
pivot ;  the  other  platoons  will   turn  at  the   commaiid 
rorvWARn. 

The  regulating  squadron  steadily  retains  its  previous 
gait,  the  loalk,  directing  its  march  circularly  to  the  right. 

The  squadron  of  the  wheeling  flank  trots,  so  as  to  pre- 
serve alignment  with  the  regulating  and  pivot  squadrons. 
The  leading  platoon  commanders  of  these  throe  squad- 
rons rais'e  their  sabres ;  those  of  the  other  squadrons 
align  themselves  upon  them.  Intervals  are  preserved 
from  the  side  of  the  pivot  by  the  guides  ;  (which,  in-'tbe 
pivot  wing  of  the  regiment,  during  the  wheel,  will  be 
the  non-commissioned  officei's  on  that  flank  of  the  lead- 
ing platoons.) 

To  cease  wheeling,  the  colonel  commands  forward, 
and  sounds  the  signal,  "forward."  The  direct  march^t 
the  walk  is  immediately  resumed  by  all. 

521.— The  regiment  marching  in  line  of  columns,  to 
cause  it  to  march  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  the  colonel  eoca^ 
mands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  rights  (or  left) 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  command  right. 

At  the  command  march,  they  command  turn;  the 
chiefs  of  leading  platoons  repeating  instantly  after  the 
captains.    Each  column  t^rns  as  prescribed  in  the  school 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT,  51 

of  the  squ.iidron;  the  regiment  is  then  marching  rn  open 
column.     '• 

522. — If  after  the  commaivdi  forward  by  platoo7is,  the 
colonel  AclJ  regulate  by  rigJU  (or  left,)  on  the  same  prin- 
ciple of  No.  528,  the  leading  platoon  commamder  of  llie 
next  sqimdron,  and  of  the  one  on  the  flank,  Avill  consti- 
tute the  base  of,  alignment.  The  captains  will  all  com- 
mand the  guide  toward  tlie  flank  indicated,  and  the 
squadron  guides,  at  the  Iieads  of  the  column,  will  march 
on  that  flank  of  the  platoon-. 

523. — The  rcgimenL^iiarching  in  open  column,  or  col- 
umn  of  fours,  to  cause  it   to   march  to  either  flanlc  in -a 
line  of  columns,  the-iicrlonel  cpmmands: 
•      ■♦■ 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  rigJn,  (or  left.) 

3.  March.  • 

At'the  second  command,  the  captains" command  right; 
at  the  command  JiAncn,  they  command  turn  ;  the  chiefs 
of  leading  platoons  repeating  after  the  captains.  It  is 
executed  throughout  as  in  the  school  of  the  squadron  ; 
and  the  lino  then  advances  .as  has  been  prescribed,  Nos 
511  and  518. 

5.24. — To  cause  the  regiment  marching  in  line  of  col- 
umns to  gain  ground  toward  the  right,  (or  left,)  and 
froat,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  half  rights  (or  left.) 
8.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  command  ri^t; 
at  the  command  march,  they  command  turn  ;  (both  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  leading  platoons.)  The  captains 
command  forward,  'when  the  leading  platoons  have 
made  a  half  turn,  (45  degrees.) 


52  EVOHUTIONS  OF'  A  REGIMENT. 

During  the  oblique  march,  tUe  ooniniand^^fl  of  the 
leading  platoons  are  nnBworahle  l.^fh-for  ali^iyiien:  and 
intervals,  which  are  regiHated  toward  the  flank  t. 
whicli  tlioy  ol!)li<i[uc;  thc^uidos  of  the  Iqadiog  philcon- 
;5pvern  t»Uoir  inarch  eo  that  the  centre  of  the  plnteor.- 
mny  be  one  pace  behind  the  couinKnider. 

525.~To  resume  the, direct  march,  4he,cok)nel  com- 
mands :  " 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forti'ard. 

^        3. .  Mauc  H.  ^ 

^  Ati,th«  SHjcend  conimand,  the  Cijutains  oonmiand  !ji; 
vj  the  command  :marcii,  titey  comnia-ud  turn;  and  when 
the  columns  have  turned  to  the  original  (direction,  th'-y 
3omm£fhd  forward.  ■^ 


520.— The  rogiment,  halted  .or  marcliing,  in  line  of 
'^umnSj'Ho  face, -or  march  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Ailention.  •    . 

2.  Platoons  right  about  xClicel. 

3.  Hargii. 

The  .captains  add  to  'the  second  command  trot;  the 
wh'eel.^. being  near  completion,  they  command  halt.  •  If 
the  colonel  wishes  the  regiment  to  move  immediately  to 
-the  rear,  he  commands,  in  time,  4.  Forward. 

Field  and  staff  ofticers,  &c,,  are  posted  on  the  new- 
front,  opposite  their  old  places,  and  the  march  is  govern- 
ed in  all  respects  by  the  rules  that  Iiavo  been  prescribed 
for  the  march  ^o  the  front. 

527. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  march  to  the 
front  the  colonel  commands: 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A. REGIMENT.  CS 

1.  Aitcniion. 

2.  Forward. 

3.  March. 

« 

At  the  second  command,  a  poiiit  of  direction  is  giver, 
to  ^i-e*^uidou  bearer  (left  guido  second  platoon)  of  "the 
sqi^a4von  of  direction,  nnloss  otlierwise  expressed  in  tlie 
words  of  commhnd  ;  this  is  always  the  central,  or  right 
centre  squadron. 

In  repeating  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  tlic 
regulating  squadron  (if  centre)  adds,  guide  centre  ;  \h( 
captain  on  its  right,  a<lds77tfiJe  ^<?/i(;  on  its  left,  guidt 
right.  .        • 

The  commander  of  the  second  platoon  of  the  regula- 
ting squadron  gives  the  gait  for  the  squadron  and-  I'egi- 
ment;  the  commander  of  the  third,  regulating  himself 
on  that  of  the  second,  is  most  responsible  for  the  base  of 
alignment,  corapfesed  of  the  platoon  commanders  of  this 
squadron ;  to  mark  it,  Uiosc  of  the  flaiik  platoons  of 
this  squadron  carry  their  sabres  vertically,  the  hilt  as 
high  as  the  cheek,  edge  to  the  front,  whilst  tlie  line  con- 
tiiriffes  to  advance;  this  base  is  cwefully  superintended 
by  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  adjutant. 

The  squadron  guides  toward  the  squadron  of  direc- 
tion, preserve  the  squadron  intervals;  they  regulate 
tl\eir  gait,  so  that  the  line  of  troopers  shall  be  one  pate 
behind  the  platoon  commau'der^,  who  align,  thoinselvcs 
upon  those  of  the  squadron  of  direction.  ,        * 

528. — If,  after  t]ie  command  forward,  the  colopel-iadd 
regulate  hy  right,  (or  left,)  the  captains  all  co^imand 
guide  right,  (or  left;)  the  principles  of  the  march  are  the 
same;  but  the  outer  guide  of  the  flank  squadron  i< 
charged  with  the  direction,  and  the  nearest  platoon 
commander  with  the  g:at;  the  next  platoon  commander 
is  most  answerable  for  the  correctness  and  a^eadiness  oi 
the  base;  the  flank  platoon  commanders ^'aise  their  sa- 
bres. •  " 


64  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

529.~Tlie  march  in  line,  especially  at  raj. id  gait:?,  be- 
ing difficult,  as  well  as  of  the  first  importance,  the  col- 
onel eiiould  exercise  the  regiment  at  it  frequently  ;  all 
the  principles  for  the  direct  march  of  the  squadron  arc 
applicable. 

If  at  the  gallop  there  should  occur  an  excessive  j;>rcs- 
sure  in  a  squadron,  its  captain  will,  order  a  platooiiHo 
pull  up,  and  remain  in  rear  until  order  be  restored.-  «■ 

530. — If  an  obstacle  occur  before  a  platoon,  its  com- 
mander conforms  to  No.  406^  if  it  obstruct  the  squad- 
ron, the  captain  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  front;  if 
the  whole  ground  be  obstructed,  the  captain  obliqueSj 
or  wheels  by  platoon,  to  the  right  or  left,  to  passini-ear 
«f -one  of  the.  next  squadrons.  He  returns  to  the  line 
Avhenl/he  obstacle   is  passed., 

531. — The  regiment  marching  in  linef^o  halt  it,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention, 

%  Halt.  ■#» 

3.  DnESS. 

At  the  third  command,  the  captains  command  right 
(or  left)  DRESS,  ns  they  may  be  situated,  to  the  .left  oj; 
right  of  the  regulating  squadron;  its  captaini_  if  the 
guide-be  central,  commands  cen/r<'--DnESS.  The  lieuten- 
ant cO'lonel  commands  front. 

532. — The  regimept  marching  in  line,  to  gain  ground 
to.the.#ont  and  towards  a  flank,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  Jeft  {ov  right)  half  .wheel. 

3.  Mahcu. 

4.  FoRV,'ARP. 

This  movement  is  executed  at  the  same  time  in  each 
squadron,  as  prescribed,  No.  398. 


EVOLUTIONS  ©F  A  REGIMENI.  &5 

533.'— To  resuroie  the  direct  march  the  colonel  com- 
maads : 

1.  AtUntion. 

2.  Platoons  right  (or  left)  half  wheel, 

3.  March. 

4.  Forward. 

Which  is  executed  as  in  the^chool  of  the  squadi^bn," 

534. — The  regiment  rtiarching  in  line,  to^ain  ground 
tow";".rd3  a  flank,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Att€nti.on. 

2.  Platoons'  right  (or  left)  lohcel. 

3.  March. 

4.  Forward.  ^ 

To  resume  the  direct  march : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  left  (or  right)  wheel. 

3.  March. 

4.  Forward. 

Which  movements  are  executed  as  in  the  school  of  the 
f^uadron,  • 

535. — The  reginaent  being  in  line,  halted  or  marching, 
to  face  or  march  it  to  the  rear^  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2_  j  Squadrons  right  (or  left)  about  wheel;  or,  Pla- 

{  toons  right  (or  left)   ahmit  wheel. 

3.  March. 

The  captains  add  to  the  second  command  trot.     The 

■whcclftbeinguearlycompleted,  they  command:  I.Halt; 
2.  Left — Df{ess. 

If  the  colonel  wishes  tlie  line  to  move  immi^diately  to 


5^  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT. 

the  rear,  before  the  completion  of  the  wheels,  he  com- 
mands : 

4.  .Forward, 

The  moyement  by  platoon  is  executed  in  all  thesquad- 

rons  as  prescribed,  No.  400  ;  wheeling  by  squadron, 
they  j;egulate  their  march  on  tlie  pirinciple  prescribed 
for  the  platoons  in  that  number.  Tlie  captains  do  not 
command  front.  Field  and  staff  officers,  ike,  are  gov- 
erned by  iS^o;  526. 

• 

536. — ^Tlie  regiment  being  in  line,  to  retife  to  pas.-> 
another  line,  or  change  its  position  oh  broken  ground, 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Retire  hy  fours. 

3.  Makoh. 

At  the  second  command  the  captains  c&mmahd :  Foun 
left;  Column  left.  ^'  ' 

At  the  command  mauch,  it  is  executed  throughout  as 
in  the  squadron,  and  the  march  is  conducted  as  pres- 
cribed, No.  518.  _  :         ■    '     .  . 

To  form  line  of  columns,  or  line,  with  the  original 
front,  the  colonel  conitnands : 

1.  Attention. 
Q:  Fours — Left  about. 
S.  Form  platoons. 
4i.  March. 

Otherwise,  the  colonelmay  command: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Left  front  into',lhi:e. 
S.  Mai^ch. 

And  then  wheel  about  by  foura* 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  57 

3S7. — The  regiment  marching  in  line,  to  change  it  to 
alieo  of  columns,  the  colonel  commands; 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Bi/ platoons. 

3.  March. 

» 

To' reform  the  line  ;  * 

*  -  ft 

•    .■    T.'  Attention.  .  ■* 

2.  Form  squadroHs^-trot. 

3.  March. 

Which  movements  are  executed  as  prescri^beJ  for  the 
squadron.  The  colonel  may  command :  2.  By  the  left 
— by  platoons. 

538. — To  change  direction,  the  regiment  marching  iu 
line,  the. colonel  first  forms  a  line  of  columns. 

639. — ^The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  relieve  and  pas.* 
another  line  in  its  front,  the  colonel  conforms  to  what  is 
prescribed^  No.  ST/,  if  it  be  not  already .  in  line  of  col- 
umns; as  it  passes  the  squadron  intervals  of  .the  .first 
line,  the  squadron  guides  of  both  lines  rstire  behind 
their  adjacent  platoons. 

Thje  colonel  may  reduce  front  to'columns  of  fours;  and 
this  must  be  done  if  confusion  exist  iu  the  first  line. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 
ECHELONS. 

540. — The  regiment  being  iu  line,  to  marcli  it  for- 
ward, keep  back  one  of  its  wings,  and  preserve  the  pow- 
er effacing  iu  every  direction,  the  colonel  commands: 


58  EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT. 

J.  Attentlo7i. 

2;  Squadroiis  by  the  right  (or  left)— forward  in 

echelon.  ,     . 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  right  squad- 
ron commands  foncard — guide  right ;  at  the  corajuand 
MARCH,  it  moves  forward ;  the  captain  of  the  next  squad- 
ron commands:  1.  Forward — guide  right;  2.  march,  hy 
the  time  the  squadron  on  his  right  has  marched  the  dis- 
tance of  squadron  front  and  interval ;  the  other  captains 
do  the  same  in  succession. 

To  march  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  made  on  the 
same  principles,  at  the  commands:  2.  Squadrons  by  the 
left— foncard  in  echelon  ;  3.  march;  the  captains  con> 
mand  guide  left. 

The  regiment  being  in..echelon,  by  the  right,  to  throw 
forward  the  left,  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,"  at 
the  command  squadrons  by  the  left — forward  in  echelon. 
If  marching,  the  change  may  be  made  in  doubling  .the 
gait. 

541. — The  regiment  marching  in  echelon,  to  halt  it^ 
the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons — Halt. 

To  march  forward  again : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward — March. 

542. — The  regiment  being  in  echelon,  by  the  right  (or 
l^t,)  to  make  face  in  echelon  in  either  case,  to  either 
flan]^,  the  colonel  commands:    • 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  left  (or  right)  wheel.    > 

3.  March. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  59 

At  the  eecond  command,  the  captains  coramancl,  left 
xohiel — trot ;  at  the  completion  of  the  wheel,  halt. 

If. the  regimentrbe  marching,  all  the  commands  are  the 
same;  and  if  the  colonel  do  not  wish  the  halt,  when  the 
wheels  are  three-fourtlis  executed,  he  commands  for- 
ward; to  which  the  captains  add,  a  change  of  the  guide. 

643. — The  regiment  being  in  echelon  by  squadrons^  if 
required  to  act  by  the  rear,  is  wheeled  about  by  platoon 
or  by  squadron  at  the  trot  or  gallop.  * 

644. — The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  retire  in  echelon, 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention,- 
,  2.  Squadrons   by    the   right   (or   left) — retire    in 
ecJielon, 
3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  on  the  right  flank 
commands  jt3?aioons  right  about  wheel ;  he  repeats  march, 
and  adds  guide  left. 

The  captain  of  the  next  squadron  gives  the  same  com- 
mands, so  that  his  squadron  retires  with  squadron  front 
and  interval  distance ;  and  so  the  others.  "When  the 
next  to  the  last  squadron  has  retired  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance, its  captain,  and  all  the  others  which  are  retiring, 
command:  1.  Platoons  right — about  wheel;  2,  March  ; 
3.  Halt. 

To  continue  the  retreat,  the  colonel  eommand? :  1.  At- 
tention; 2.  Squadrons  by  the  left — retii'e  in  echelon;  3. 
March  ;  which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  by  iur 
verse  means.  The  colonel  may  cause  the  left  and  other 
squadrons  to  halt  and  face  the  front  when  they  arrive 
on  line  with  the  right  squadron. 

545. — The  regiment  being  in  column  of  squadrons,  to 
form  it  in  echelon,  faced  to  the  front,  by  either  flank,  the 
colonel  commands: 


60  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  S.quddrons  to  t]ie  right  (or  left) — in  eehehn. 

3.  Marcu.. 

4t  the  second  command,  tho  captains  of  all  but 'the 
sq\iadron  in  frorrt  command, /ok rs  right  (or  left)-:— trot. 

Each  captain,  when  his  squadron  has  marched  until 
there  is  platoon  fronx  interval,  frgni.  its  flank  to  a  per- 
pendicular line  through  the  ilank  of  the  next  in  froiit, 
commands.:  1.  Fours — left  (or  right  ;)  2.  Halt;  3.  L^t 
(or  right) — Dress  ;   4.  FR0^•t. 

64G. — The  reginient  bqjn^  in  column  of  squadrons, 
halted  or  marching,  to  form  it  in  echelon,  fronting 
obliquely  to  the  right  or  left,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadro7is  right  {ov  left)  wheel. 
8.  March, 

.4.  Halt  (or  forward — in  echelon.) 

At  the  second-command,  the  captains  command,  right 
icJieel — trot. 

The  colonel  gives  his  fourth  command  when  the  squad- 
rons have  wheeled  about  55  degrees ;  (when  the  flank 
of  each  squadron  has  become  unmasked.) 

The  squadrons  carefully  regulate  their  wheel  by  the 
one  in  front;  on  the  march,  distance  and  interval  are 
gradually  corrected  ;  they  conform  to  No.  540. 

547. — The  regiment  being  in  open  column,  to  form  it 
in  echelon  of  squadi'ons,  faced  to  the  same  front,  by  ei- 
ther flank,  the  colonel  commands ; 

1.  Atte^ition, 

2.  Squadrons  to  the  right  (or  left) — in  echelon, 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
squadron  commands,  left  front  into  line — trot ;  he  halts 


^<^M- 


Ttiqe  OO.  Jj 


"rA 


\-      \ 


If 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REO^IMENT.  61 

i\m  leading  platoon  ab  17  pace^;  iho  obliqnitj;_of  march 
of  the  others  is  increased. 

The  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  "coromand,  for- 
ward— column  riciht — trot;  each-of  tlicse  captains,  When 
the' rq^r  of  his  squadron  has  reached  itsinterval  from 
the  i;ight  of  the  squadron  on  his  left,  commands:  L  Pla- 
toons left  into  Ivic — loheel ;  2.  march;  3.  X^if— Dress; 
4.  Fro  NX, 

If  the  echelons  are  formed  to  the  left,  the  lending 
equadron  is  formed  right  front  into  line,  andjthe  others 
are  conducted  inversely  to  what  is  presoiibe'd  above. 

If  the  open  column  be  marching,  the  leading  captain 
commands,  form  squadron — Icft^  adding  trot,  unless  al- 
ready trotting  ;  the  other  captains,  column  right — trot  ; 
and  each,  having  'marched  the  proper  distance  to  the 
rig^t:  1.  Platoons  left  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Fohward — 
Guide  left ;  and  having  reached  distance  from'  the  next 
leading  squadron,  walk — makch. 

540. — The  regim'e;it  marohing  in  dlose  <5olumn,tofoian 
it  in  echelon,  faced  to  the  same  front,  by  either  flank, 
without  halting,  the  colonel  commands : 

1;  Attention.- 

%  Squadrons  to  the.  left  (or  right) — inecheloji. 

3.  Makch.  ^ 

At  the  second  command,  all  but  the  leading  captain 
command,  fours — left — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  captain  com- 
mands guide  nght ;  the  others  repeat,  march;  and  each, 
when  he  has  gained  the  proper  interval,  commands,  1. 
F*our9 — Right;  2.  'Guide  right ;  and  IFa/yt— March ;  so 
as  to  be  at  his  prescribed  distance  from  the  line  of  the 
squadron  to  his  right.  If  the  close  column  bo  trottiqg, 
the  leading  captain  commands,  wa^A: — march;  (unless 
the  colonel  commanded  gallop)  and  the  others  omit  the 
command  trot. 

The  regiment  being  at  a  halt  in  close  column,  to  de- 


&2  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

ploy  it  instantly  in  edition,  No.  545  is  conformed  to; 
except  tlifvt  atlbe  colonel's  third  command,  tlio  loading 
squadron  marches  forward  a  distance  of  its  front  and  4 
paces.  In  ajilyancing,  (he  third  squadron  from  the  front 
and  other  squadrons  to  its  rear  would  not  niofe  until 
those  in  front  had  gained  the  prescribed  distance.  • 

550. — ^The  regiment  being  in  echelon,  right  or  left 
forward^to  form  line  to  the  front,  the  coloDel command?: 

1.  Attention.- 

2.  Forward  into  line. 

3.  Marcd. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  all  but:  the 
leading 'Squadron  command,  forward — guide  right,  or 
left,  (as  tUe  right  or  left  be  leading)  trot. 
'  At  fhe  command  march,  the  squadrons  move  forward 
to  their  places  in  line,  are  halted,  and  aligned  on  the 
leading  squadron. 

If  the  echelons  he  marching,  the  colonel  gives  the 
same  commands,'  which  /ire  repeated  only  bj'  the  field 
officers;  he  sounds  the  signal  for  doubling  the  gait,  oi 
otherwise  the  leading  squadron  halts. 

551. — The  regiment  being  in  echelon  by  squadrons, 
right  or  left  forward,  to  form  line  to  the  right  or  left  on 
the  modt  advanced  squadron  in  the  new  direction,  the 
colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Right  (or  left)  into  line. 
■*^\        3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  all  the 
squadrons  command  right  (or  left)  wheel-— trot. 

At  the  command  march,  all  wheel ;  and  the  wheel  Be- 
ing completed,  they  all  command  forward;  and  immedi- 
ately after  the  captain  on  the  Hank  of  formation  halta 


EV0LUTI0H6  OF  A  REGIMENl!.  68 

and  aligns  his  squaclron  on  tkc  markers,  the  others  c 6m- 
mand  the  guide — toward  that,  squadron,  and  halt  and 
aligA  their  squadi'ons  in  succession. 

t- 
552. — The  regunent  being  in  echelon,  right  or  left,  for- 
ward, to  form  line  faced  to  the  front-  on  a  centrar^r 
other  squadron,  the  colonel  commands : 
'*  '  «-         ' 

.  .   1.  Attention.  *  ^  :  * 

V         '2.  0;f  (sxich  a)  squadron  into  line. 
3.  Marcu. 

At  the  second  c6mmand,  the  captains  of  squadrons  ih 
advance  of  the  name'd  squadron  comiiSand  fours  right 
'about. 

At  the  command  march,  the  fours  wheel  about,  ,the 
captains  command  guide — toward  'the  squadron  of  for- 
mation ;  they  march  a  horse's  length  beyond  the  line  of 
that  squadron,  wheel  right  about  by  fours  and  dress. 

The  other  squadrons  conform  to  Np.  550. 

554. — The  regiment  in  echelon,  right  forward,  if  sud- 
denly required  to  form  an  oblique  line  towards  the  left, 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Oblique  line  to  tJie   left,  .    - 
8.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  command  l&ft 
wheel — trot. 

When  the  squadrons  have  wheeled  into  line,  which 
passes  through  tbo  squadron  left  guides,  the  captains 
©ommandHALT. 

If  the  colonel  wish  to  advance  without  halting^  he 
sounds  the  signal /orward,  before  the  completion  of  the 
wheels ;  the  regiment  moves  forward  on  the  principle's 
that  have  been  prescribed. 

The  left  being  forward,  oblique  line  to  the  right  i« 
foitned  by  inverse  meana 


U  EVt)LUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

655, — The  regiment  bciag  in  line,  to  advance  ki-e^Ii*- 

lon  by  half  regiment  Ih c-colqn el*  comma nds:   '^ 

•'*','  •         '       *■•• 

1.  Attention, 

2.  Wings  by  the  right  (or  icft)  foyjirirrj  "n  f-helon. 
.'      3.  March. 

♦*  *-       '  , 

At.tlie  second' comraand,  the  captains  of  the  designa- 
ted wing  commaud yb;;i/.'arc? — grade  right  (or  left.)    "^ 

The  movement  being  commenceci,  if  theije  be  two  field 
officers  present,  the  lieutenant  colonel  takes  comrtiand  of 
the  right  wing.  The  right  wing  includes  the  central 
squadron  of  direction. 

■  If  tliere  be  orily  one  ^eld  officer,  he  Sbmmands  «the 
loft  wing.  When  the  right  wing  has  gained  n  distance 
oqiial  to  its  front,  .  he  commands  left  wing  forioard — 
march;  the  guide  in  both  wings  is  to  the  right  when  the 
right  is  advanced,  and  the  inverse.  The  colonel  may 
add  to  tiie  second  aommand,' at- half  distance. 
*        ..,.-■ 

556._-.The  reginient  being  jn  echoJon  by  wing,  and 
the  colonel  wishes  to  form,  or  to  march  by  echelon  of 
equadi'onSjhe  commands  as  in  JSTo.^S-iO.to  which  the  move- 
ment is  conformed,  commencing  by  the  right  or  left  of 
ench  wing  at  the  same  time. 

Tlje  colonel  wishing  to  change  the  order  of  only  one 
wing,  he  sen'ds  orders  to  its  commander,,  who  confoiins 
to  No.  540.  ■  When  the  squadrons  are  in  echelon,  he 
conamands  the  halt.  ^     . 

557. — The  regiment  being  in  echelon, by  gquadroD,'to 
form  one  wing  in  line  the  colonel  sends  orders  to  its 
commander,  who  commands :  1.  (such  a)  wing  forward 
■Into  line;  2.  March.  The  captains  conform  to  No.  550, 
If  it  have  no  separate  commander,  the  colonel  gives  the 
above  command. 

If  he  wish  to  form  both  wings  in  echelon  bywing,  he 
commands :  1.  Attention;  2.  On  t?Le  right  (or  left)  of 
uings— forward  into  line;  8.  March. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  66 

At  thft  second  command,  each  field  officer  gives  to  liJs 
wing  the  command,  (such  a)  wing  forward  into  line. 

558. — The  regiment  nharching  in  echelon  by  squadron, 
to  form  column  of  squadrons  on  the  leading  squadron, 
the  colonel  comnlands: 

1.  Atte7itton. 

2.  Form  column. 

3.  March. 

At  the  secbnd  command,  the  captains  of  all  but  the  **■ 
ioadipg  squadron  commands,   fours  right  (or  l^ft) — trotj 
I  hey  repeat  the  command  march. 

The  squadrons  g«in  the  rear  of  the  leading  squadron 
by  the  flank  movement,  and  are  wheeled  inta  line, 
moved  forward  until  the  proper  distance  is  gained,  then 
tlie  captains  command  the^gait  of  the  leading  squadron. 

At  the  halt,  the  column  is  formed  on  any  squadix^noB 
the  same  principles,  gaining  no  lost  ground  to  the  front, 
at  the  colonel's  command  :-  2.  On  (such  a)  squadron—^ 
form  column. 


559. — Echelons  can  very  readily  attack  (and  thereby 
•defend  themselves)  in  every  direction  ;  are  manoeuvred 
and  changed  to  lines  with  great  simplicity. 

In  echelon,  whilst  you  attack,  or  prepare  -to  "attack, 
the  enemy,  you  secure  your  awn  flank,  or  you  prepare 
to  turn  his  flank. 

Leading  echelons  are  very  effectually  covei'ed  in  flank. 
Echelons  being  contiguous,  and  unmasked,  they  wjth  ad- 
vantage follow  up  a  successful  charge,  or  cover  one 
which  is  repulsed.  If  successful,  whilst  the  rest  of  the 
enemy's  line  is  engaged  with  you,  the  successful  echelon 
attacks  him  in  flank  or  rear. 

They  are  ever  ready  to  improve  an  opening  given  by 
the  enemy  ;  and  you  can  attack  one  of  his  wings,  or  any 
part,  without  engaging  all  your  troops  at  once. 

18 


66  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

Echelons  are  useful  in  pftsaiog  out  of  a  defile  to  sup- 
port troops  already  engaged — successful  or  defeated. 

560, — ^The  regiment  being  inline,^  retire  by  ajtei- 
nate  squadrons  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Retire  by  alternate  squadrons — trot. 

3.  March, 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  second 

and  other  even-numbered  squadrons  command,  fours — 

right  about — trot.     At  the  command  mafsCii,  they  wheel 

♦about  by  fours,  and  the  captains  command  guide  left. — 

The  lieutenant  colonel  commands  thip  retiring  line. 

Having  retired  one  hundred  paces,  or  the  distance  or- 
dered, or  at  the  sound  of  trumpet  signal  halt,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  commaods/owrs — right  about.  The  cap- 
tains repeat  the  command,  and  add  halt. 

The  colonel  then  commands  retire  ^  at  which  the  cap- 
tains of  the  alternate  squadrons  in  front  immediately 
give  the  same  commands  as  prescribed  for  the  others. 
The  colonel  then  commands  march  ;  they  pass  to  an 
equal  distance  in  rear  of  the  other. line,  and  at  the  com- 
mand or  signal  of  the  colonel,  face  about  to  the  front, 
ae  pi'escribx^d  for  the  squadrons  that  first  retired. 

The  direction  of  the  line  may  be  changed  during  the 
retreat.  If  necessary,  columns  of  fours  will  be  formed 
vrhilst  retiring.     [See  No.  399.] 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 


CHARGE. 


5^1. — The  charge  is  th6  decisive  action  of  cavalry. 

Cavalry,  like  each  of  the  three  great  arms,  dependent 
on  the  others,  the  battle  once  begun  awaits  their  action. 
Its  opportunities  pass  in  moments.    Its  succeasful  com- 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIMENT.  OT 

mander  must  have  n  cavalry  eye  aiM  rajiid    decision; 
once  Iftunched,  its  bravery  is. successful. 

Infiintvy  colnmns,  battered  by  artillery,  have  failed  in 
their  attacks  upon  a  position.  The  cavalry  charges  the 
batteries  and  supports;  the  infantry  hastens  to  make 
^ood  the  advantage;  the  cavalry, .disunited  and  attack- 
ed, or  threatened  by  Uie  enemy  s,  rallies  under  cover  of 
the  other  arms. 

At  the  moment  of  the  enemy's  first  success — he  has 
perhaps  broken  the  first  line,  and  makes  a  disorderly 
pursuit^ — the  cavalry  seizes  the  moment  to  overthrow 
his  battalions. 

An  enemy  expecting  a  charge  should  be  deceived,  if 
passible,  by  some'  demonstration.  If  lie  attempt  to 
change  his  order,  then  instantly  begin  the  gallop. 

If  popir^iblc,  at  the  moment  of  a  charge,  assail  your 
enemy  in  flank; — or  charge  him  in  flank,  when  serious- 
1 J  engaged  with  your  infantry  in  front. 

Cavalry  charges  tlie  enemy's  cavalry  .to  drive  him 
from  the  field,  to  return  against  his  battalions  with  more 
liberty. 

Meeting  an  enemy  by  supprise,  the  cavalry  should  in- 
statitly  charge  his.  This  decision  will  give  the  advan- 
tage.  _  -       "      "   .    • 

A  line  of  cavalry  should  meet  the  rapid  and  disorder- 
ed charge  of  another  at  the  trot.  The  enemy's  lino,  al- 
rjcady  broken,  will  recoil — be  thrown  off  from  its  impos- 
ing order. 

The  pursuit  o^  cavalry  broken  by. 'a  charge  depends 
upon  the  relative  oircumstances  of  the  armies,"but  spec- 
ially upon  the  cavalry  reserves.  Every  effort  of  impet- 
uosity should  be  made  to  throw  a  defeated  line  upon  a 
second,  so  as  to  disorder  and  involve  it  in  defeat.  It  is 
well  to  push  the  defeated  until  they  are  thoroughly.dis- 
organized  in  flight;  but  this  may  be  carried  out  by  th« 
flanker  squadrons.  It  is  generally  important  to  rally 
promptly.  This  can  be  done  with  advantage  while  ad- 
vancing.    Then  attack  the  enemy  in  rear  or  flank. 

The  conipaander  of  cavalry  sends  two  well-mounted 


63  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

officers  or  iion-conieoissione  J  ofTiccrs  to  precede  his  ad- 
vaaceand  reconnoitre  ground  ovfci:  which  he  is  likely  to 
charge,  and  of  which  he  is  i^tioj'ant;  if  (he  enemy  id  in 
sightj^they  will  gallop,  strniirh't  toward  l.im,  and  as  near 
as  th<"'y  can  without  risk  of  being  captured  ;  they  may 
discover  fea'uues  of  ground  of  which  advantage  may  be 
taken,  or  which  ma}'  have  been  ruinous  or  destructive  in" 
a  charge. 

Cavalry  never  charges  without  a  reserve. 

The  charge  is  made  with  the  greatest  velocity  a"nd 
reguh'-rity  possible;  in  speed  and  order  there  must  be  a 
mutual  sacrifice;  seek  in  the  charge,  with  a  judicious 
proportion,  to  attain  the  maximum  of  each. 

Circumstances  permitting,  the  line  approaches  within 
200  paces  of  the  enemy  at  the  trot,  then  galloping . with 
increasing  speed,  the  charge  is  commanded  at  50  or*~6p 
y&,rds.    .  .  .      • 

Crowding  and  pressure,  when  the  horse  is  exerting 
his  powers,  inipedes  him,  and  makes  him  uncontrollable; 
every  jostle  or  rub  diminishes  his  strength.  Although 
rapidity  in  the  approach  to  tlse  enemy  is  gonernlly  im* 
portant,  very  ioipprtant  too  it  is  that  the  horses  should 
not  arrive  exhausted,  or  even  distressed  and  blown,    .w 

Tlie  centre  of  the  squadron  exactly  follows  the  cap- 
tain;  the  troopers  do  tlieir  best  to  preserve  their  inter- 
vals and  alignmenVby.  the  centre ;  the  flanks  must  not 
be  in  advance. 


.562. — The  formation  for  attack  depcn^s^upon  the  des- 
cription and  dispositions  of  the  enemy,  uidou  the  nature 
of  the  groun.l,  and  upon  the  composition  of  your  force. 

The  first  line  formed  for  attack  should  seldom  consist 
of  more  than  a  third  of  the  cavalry  ;  the  second,  or  sup- 
port, disposed  in  squadron  columns  oOO  to  400  yards  in 
rear ;  the  reserve  equally  in  their  rear  in  close  column. 
If  the  enemy  be  deficient  in  cavalry,  this  third  body  is 
more  dispensable  ;  (and  it  is.  here  considered  as  a  dis- 
tinct body  from  those  whose  movementa  are  prescribed.) 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  69 

563. — Under  circumstances  wliich  require  and  adroit 
of  a  more  conoeiftrated  attack^  the  regiment  chaigcs  in 
column  of  sqjiadrons,  (or  of  attack.) 

564. — The  charge  as  foragers,  from  close  ordts-r  oi?  vby 
skirmishers,  haa  the  advantage-^  of  great  freedom  of  tna- 
tion  and  will  in  the  troopors  ;of  less  loss  from  fire  ;  it 
prepares  the  way  for  a  decisive  shock  of  the  charge  in 
line;  it  is  the'u.sual  charge  against  batteries,  the  gunners 
being  more  or  less  <;overed  by  tlieir  pieces  and  isolated  ; 
the  pistol  is  used  in  it  at  will;  the  flanking  squadrons 
will  sometimes* second  the  charge  of  the  line  by  thus 
charging  the  enemy  in  flank.  '' 

565. — The  regiment  being  in  order  of  battle,  the  col- 
onel wishing  to  charge,  if -the  sabres  be  not  drawn  com- 
mands then\  to  be  drawn ;  he  then  commands : 

1.  Attention  to  charge-. 

2.  FORWAUU. 

3.  M.vRcn. 

The  regiment  being  in  regular  motion,  he  commands : 

!^ro^— March. 
>  _  ■ 

Min'  passing  oyer  luOopaces  at-  this  gait,  (according 
to  circumstances,)  he  commands  : 

Gallop— Ma^cu. 

After  galloping  about  150  pace.?,  he  directs  the  charge 
to  be  sounded — it  is  repeated  by  all  the  trumpeters — he 
commands: 

Charge.;,  • 

"Wliich  is  repeated  by  all  the  officers. 
The  troopers  conform  to  the  school  of  tlie  squadron.. 
The  second  line  preserves  its  distance;  at  the  .pom - 
raeneement  of  the   charge  it   is  commanded  to  trot ; 


70  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

clo^ng  again  to  ile  distance  from  the  line  of  battle,  it  is 
lialted.  • 

If  there  had  been  a'  line  of  skirmishers,  when  the 
charge  is  aunounced,  or  the  regiment  begins  the  trot, 
they  =are  rallied  at  full  s}>eed  in  advance  of  the  flanks, 
and  if  possible  charge  as  foragers  upon  the  enemy's 
flanks ;  otherwise  they  rally  at,  or  behind  the  flanks  to 
be  ready  to  support — to  charge  in  flank  the  enemy  who 
has  repulsed  the  charge,  or  to  pursue. 

The  flanking  squadrons  retain  their  position  inline  oi 
battle  in  the  charge  until  they  receive  orders,  or  oppor- 
tunity of  action  occurs.  It  is  their  important  duty  to 
protect  the  flanks  of  the  r-cgiment. 

In  charging  infantry,  the  troopers  shout ;  against  cav- 
alry, silence  is  recommended. 

'566. — In  the  exercise  of  the   regiment,    at   the   com- 
mand charge,  the  squadrons. do  no  more  than  increase 
the  speed  of  the  gallop,  and  charge  sabce,,  '•  ' 
The  colonel  then  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Dkess. 

At  the  command  attention,  repeated  by  all  officers, 
the  squadrons  'b'egin  to  lesseji  t^e  *pace,  and  all  carry 
sabre.  •» 

At  the  command  squadrons,  repeated  ^by  the  captains, 
the  chiefs  of  platoon  command  platoon,  and  the  squad- 
rons trot.  r  ^     t 

The  comrnand  halt  is  repeated  by  all.  If  the  Jine  be 
advancing,  the. colonel's  commands  are  :  1.  Attention  to 
charge;  ^.  Trot  {or  f/dlop;)  3.  Uwxn. 

'56*7.— The  enemy  being  routed,  when  the  colonel 
causes  the  ra%  to  be  sounded  the  troopers  halt  and  rally 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  A  REGIifENT.  71 

oa  their  captains  and  officers,  -who  take  their  places  in 
Mne,  if  circumstances  permit. 


668. — Tiic  colonel  and  field  officers  charge,  oj^osite 
their  places,  aligned  with  the  captains ;  but  the  colonel 
does  not  charge  unless  the  whole  regiment  charge  at 
the  eame  time. 

The  standard-bearer  changes  places  with  the  corpo- 
ral in  his  rear,  and  follows  him. 

When  about  to  charge,  the  colonel  may  order  the 
left  flank  trumpeters  of  the  fiquadrons  to  assemble  in  line 
under  a  chief  trumpeter,  25  paces  in  r^ar  of  the  centre 
of  the  lino.  In  action  a  trumpeter  accompanies  each 
field  officer  and  the*  colonel  (in  addition  to  the  chief 
trumpeter.) 


569. — If  a  cliarge  is  repulsed,  the  officers  endeavor  to 
prevent  the  troopers  from  being  thrown  on  the  second 
line  or  the  supports ;  they  are  rallied  in  their  rear.  - 

The  second  line,  then  advancing  in  columns' until 
they  are  clear  of  the  rout,  form  litre  to  repeat  the  charge, 
or  execute  the  orders  they  may  receive. 

The  flanking  squadrons,  if  possible,  charge  -the  pur- 
suing enemy  in  flank. 

670. — The  regiment  of  ten  squadrons  in  order  of-  bat- 
tle, the  colonel  may  cause  the  flanking  squadrons,  one  or 
both,  to  skirmish  in  front  of.  the  line;  previous  to 
charging,  he  may  order  them  to  charge  as  foragers., 

The  colonel,  to  prepare  for  the  charge,  may  order  the 
flank  squadrons  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  with- 
out a  reserve,  at  WO  paces  in  fi^out  of  the  line ;  imme- 
diately  on  passing  the  line  the  captains  command  :  1. 
Squadron  as  skirmishers — at  tioo  paces  ;  2,  March.  The 
outer  flank  of  each  squadron  advancing  straight  to  the 
front,  the  troopers  of  each  squadron  will  form  a  line 
from  the  flaiik  of  the  regira'ejit  to  its  centre. 


72  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

After  firing,  or  not,  the  colonel  conimanda  the  charge 
as  foragers. 

In  the  eight  squadron  regiment  tlie  colonel  sometiojeR 
ord>'M'3  the  flank  squadrons  from  the  line,  to  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  flanking  sqiuadrons. 

Untler  some  circumstances  the  colonel  orders  the  fovi'rth 
j)latoon,  or  even  the  two  left  platoons,  of  all  the  squad- 
rons in  line  ta  charge  as  foragers ;  a  field  ofBeer  •com- 
mands them  ;   the  line  moves  forward  to  support  them. 

571, -^The  charge  in  column'may  be  used  in  any  cir- 
canutances,  but  especially  against  infantry  squares  and 
columns.  '  ^ 

The  column  of  squ.adrons  advancing,  th«  cdlo"nel  or- 
ders the  two  leading  squadrons  to  charge.  Their  cap- 
tains immediately  order  the  gallop.  The  second  squad- 
ron, with  about  60  paces  distance,  is  ordered  to  charge 
at  the  moment  of  the  collision  &f  the  first  squadron;  it 
will  find  the  enemy  devoid  of  fire. 

The  colonel  follows  the  charge  at  a  slower  gait,  retain- 
ing-r-the  power  of  acting  as  events  may  require  *,  he  send& 
two  more  squadrons  when  and  where  eircumstaneea  in- 
dicate. 

If  any  troopers  of  .tlie  first,,  squadron  are  in  the  way 
of  the  second,  they^avoid  the  danger  of  being  run  do\Yn 
by  facing  and  spurring  towards  the  enemy. 

The  cliarge  is.also  made  from  close  column,  in  which 
case  the  captain  of  tli'e  second  takee  the  increased  gnit 
of-thje-first  squadron  when  that  has  gained  60  paces  dis; 
•taQce.  In.  either  case  the  coloners  comraainda  are  *.  1. 
Attention;  2.  First  Jtvo  squadrona — to  the  charge;  S. 
March.  ■  At  the  second  command  the  captains-  ord<3r  the 
increased  gait,  trot  or  gallop;  (the  captain  second  squad- 
ron in  close  column  waiting  till  the  first  hrfs-got  its  dis- 
tance.') 

When  there  is  choice  between  exposure  to  the  right 
or  left  obliq»e  fire.pf  infantry,  choose  the  rigJit;  the  left 
ia  the  most  formidable.  •  • 

It.  charges  from  column  and  echelon,   the  lieutenanti 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT.  12 

colonel  and  major  charge  at  the  head  of  the  squadrons 
which  the  colonel  designates. 

572. — The  colonel  edmetimes  orders  stirmishera,  or 
the  leading  £X[nadron,  to  eliarge  as  foragers  ;  the  two 
next  charge  together,  if  necessary.  The  troopers  ^^i!o 
.  have  charged  -as  foragers  rally  in  rear  of  the  column. 

The  enemy's  infantry  once  struck,  the  cl)arge  is  suc^ 
cessful ;  but  charges  which  fail  utterly  approach  very 
near ;  they  slacken  the  gait — take  time  to  turn  about — 
or  turn  in  frifct  of  other  infantry  in  line — or  pass  by 
other  faces  of  the  square  ;  thus  adding  twofold  to  their 
exposure  to  fire  ;  besides  the  disgrace  of  defeat,  doiibling 
the  individual  chances,  of  being  shot  dovtv?.. 


^4  BPECIAL  SERVICE  OF 

SPECIAL   SERVICE -OF    CAVALRY 
IN    THE    V^EST. 


THE    CAMP, 


573. — The  selection  of  the  cavalry  camp  on  the  march 
18  very  important;  the  more  especially  in  view  of  the 
supjwrt  of  the  horses,  exclusively  or  even  principally, 
by  grazing. 

The  guide,  or  a  staff  officer,  or  both,  should  precedo 
the  column,  sometimes  miles,  accompanied  by  escqrt  if 
necessary,  to  be  assured  of  the  best  body  of  grass,  suf- 
ficiently near  to  water  and  to  the  road. 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  encamp  without  water, 
chiefly  with  a  view  to  grass.  On  such  occasions  all  ani- 
mals must  be  carefully  watered  within  an  hour  of  the 
halt,  and  provision  made  for  the  night  for  the  men  -by 
means  ,of  canteens  m*  kegs^  or  both. 

It  is  vev^  certain  that  bodies  of  cavalry,  performing 
the  same  amount  of  marches  and  duties— one,  under  a 
commander  ignorant,  or  injudicious  and  careless  in  this 
respect,  will  have  broken  down  horses,  whilst  the  other 
may  maintain  them  in  good  condition. 

A  commander  in  the  West  is  subject  commonly  .to  the 
great  difficulty  and  risk  of  necessarily  grazing  his  ani- 
mals at  night,  whilst  they  must  be  protected  from  an 
enemy.  The  C:^mp  should  be  formed  early  ;  sometimes 
it  is  protected  in  rear  by  a  wide  river,  and  the  squad- 
rons disposed  on  three  sides  of  a  parallelogram ;  suffi- 
cient space  is  included  for  night  grazing. 

To  encamp  regmarly,  the  squadrons  are  formed  in 
line  with  squadron  intervals;  they  arc  dismounted.; 
without  forming  rank,  the   troopers  ui^saddle   and  un- 


dD 


r 


LJ 


a 


dD 


oD 


an 


dH 


dQ 


^ 
> 

^ 


© 

0 

( 

o 

o 

( 

....0. 

r  "o"  ■ 

I    o         { 

i 

I  o 


i-R 


^\  ?^ 


I' 


-..ij 


S' 


^ 


^ 


CAVALRY  IN  THE  WEST.  t5 

bridle ;  tliey  deposit  the  saddles  in  Uuo  iu  fi  ont  of  all 
the  horses,  and  place  upon  them  their  sabres;  the  horse, 
blankets  are  retained  surciagled  to  the  horses ;  if  to  be 
picketed,  under  charge  of  an  officer,  they  are  led  out  as 
far  as  is  safe,  in  order  to  preserve  the  nearer  grass  for 
the  night.  The  position  which  has  been  assigned  to  the 
videttes  from  the  advance  guard  indicates  the  liniits.   ' 

The  troopers  then  pitch  the  tents,  on  the  line  which 
has  been  marked,  in  front  of  the  saddles ;  with  intervale,. 
they  cover  the  extent  of  each  squadron  mounted  in  line, 
leaving  the  squadron  interval  clear. 

'  If  the  picket  rope  is  to  be  used,  it  is  ten  yards  in  rear 
of  the  tents;  it  is  usually  suspended  to  posts  a^out  six 
feet  high,  and  the  horses  tied  by  the  head  ;  it  piay  lie 
on  the  ground,  the  ends  secured,  and  the  horses  be  tied 
te  it  by  straps,  by  the  ankle,  with  from  20  to  30  inches 
play;  or  by  the  head.  The  tents  of  company  officers 
are  30  paces  in  rear  of  the  picket  rope ;  the  line  of  cook 
fires  20  paces  in  front  of  the  men's  tents. 

It  is  in  some  parts  of  our  desert  interior:  necessary,  op. 
account  of  deficiency  of  grass,  to  herd  the  horses ;  but 
veri/  rarely  by  night.  This  must  be  commenced  with 
much  caution,  and  is  not  safe  until  the  horses  arc  some- 
what broken  to  the  routine  of  service,  and  hav.e  suffered 
fatigues,  and  are  hungry.  ^  '      ' 

There  is  little  risk  of  their  escaping  or  being  driven 
far  off  if  they  are  hoppled,  which  should  be  done ;  and 
then,  a  very  few  of  the  best  horses,  or  those  known  to 
be  leaders*  among  them,  or  to  be  easily  frightened, 
should  be  picketed.  * 

About  an  hour  after  encamping  the  horses  should  be 
watered  ;    then  the  blank^ets  are  removed.'     .     '^ 

Orders  are  given  what. dispositions  are  to  be  mad%  in 
case  of  a  night  alarm ;  the^^laces^of  assembly  of  differ- 
ent squadrons  or  platoons,  dismounted  ; '  and  who. are  to 
be  charged   exclusively  with  the  security  of  the  horsey. 

In  an  enemy's  country,  the  camp  should  not  be.  within 
gun  shot  o'f  cover  for  an  enemy ;  or  it  should  be  very  near, 
and  the  cover  be  occupied  by  tbe  guard  or  sentinels. 


76  SPECIAL  SERVICE  OP 

^o,<ilwai/s  there  is  dautrer  of  losing  horses  I)}'  prowl- 
ing Indians,  .notwithstanding  the  vigilance  oF  ecntinels, 
if  ihey  are  picketed  at  night  in  proximity  to  cover. 

If  the  night  grazing  has  not  been  good,  and  generally, 
particularly  iii  sumimr,  it  is  necessary  that  the  hoi-ses 
sliould  graze  nnliour  or  two  in  the  morning;  and  they 
should  not  be  allowed  to  be  disturbed  until  the  last  mo- 
ment, and  at  the  signal. 

THE  MARCH. 

574.— iTKe  march  sliould  generally  be  in  column  of 
fouro,  the  squadrons  with  40  or  50  paces  intervals,  in 
order  that  a  check  in  one  column  should  not  extend  its 
disturbing  intluonoe  by  causing  the  next, to  stop;  it  also 
tends  to  the  avoidance  of  dust. 

From  10  minutes  to  an  hour  after  the  march,  a  halt 
of  five  minutes  should  be  made,  the  squadrons  to  be  dis- 
mounted, informally  in  column,  at  the  command  dis- 
mount, from  their  captains.  If  there  be  grass,  the 
squadrons  should  oblique  from  the  road  before  die- 
ftiountiug.  The  horses  should  be  encouraged  to  feed  at 
the  shortest  halts;  at  those  for  ten  minutes  or  more,  as 
when  watering,  the  commander  should  givo  the  com- 
mand, nubit. 

Every  hour,  a  hdt  of  from  two  to  five  minutes  should 
be  made.  ^ 

Troopers  are"  prohibited  to  leave  the  ranks  for  any 
purpose  on  the  march,  unless  on  foot,  leaving  the 
Horse  led.  ^  *  . 

About  noon,  or  about  the  m'iddle  of  the  march,  when 
circimistances  allow  a  choice  of  time,  the  "watering 
call"  should  be  sounded;  the  Jtroopers  should  generally 
dismount  and  unbit.  The  watering  is  superintended  by 
the  offioers;  Often  the  hor^  would  f»ul  to  be  watered, 
from  the  impatience  or  want  of  perseverance  of  the 
tioopcr.  This  halt  is  from  20  to  45  minutes.  Videttes 
or  sentinels  from  tlie  advance  guard  are  posted. 

After  one  of  the  halts  the  troopers  should  load,  ablbut 
45  minutes;  or  twice  for  30  minuteSr 


CALVARY  IN  THE  WEST.  77 

There  are  several  advantages  in  trotting  a  part  of  tlic 
march : 

By  it  the  horses  are  sooner  reUoved  of  the  saddle  and 
burden,  and  have  longer  time  for  feed  and  rest, 

Hoi-se  and  man  are  relieved  from  the  constant  motion 
and  fatigue  of  the  same  muscles  and  parts. 

It  avoids  a  bud  carriage  of  the  person  of  the  trooper, 
sometimes  injurious  to  the  horse;  it  awakes  and  relicvep 
him. 

It  is  found,  from  experience,  to  lessen  the  liability  to 
Boro  backs. 

It  is  seldom,  in  any  great  prairie  plain,  that  a  creek 
bed  or  a  ravine,  or  a  swell,  does  jnot  render  a  small  ad- 
vance guard  a  proper  precaution  ;  it  may  be  very  small; 
the  main  body  of  the  guard  is  with  the  baggage  in  rear; 
flankers  are  occasionally  necessary.   .    • 

Long  marches  or  expeditions  should  be  commenced 
very  moderately.  The  horses,  if  untrained,  must  be 
gradually  inured  to  their  labors;  in  other,  words,  the 
march  must  first  be  a  training.  Fifteen  miles  a  day  at 
first; — afterwards  they  will  be  equal  to  twenty-five. 

ESCORTS.- 

575. — Cavalry  is  costly,  and  very  valimble  for  it.s, 
proper  service;  it  is,  from  its  liability  to  the  deteriora- 
tion of  the  horses  from  many  causes  always  existing,  a 
very  delicate  arm.  Its  officers  must  exercise  great 
judgment,  as  well  as  incessant  vigilance,  to  maintain, 
with  economy,  its  efficiency  under;general,  western,  or 
any  other  service.  The  commanding  officer  of  the 
troops  is  also  responsible  for  their  condition  in  the  na- 
ture of  his  orders. 

The  use  of  the  cavalry  portion  of  the  escort  of  a  train 
being  chiefly  to  ascertain  and  report  the  approach  of  an 
enemy  under  cover  of  woods,  broken  ground,  (fee,  it  is 
the  less  needed  for  that  duty  on  the  prairies  and  on  the 
desert  slopes  of  the  mountains,  where  the  eye  habitual- 
ly commands  many  miles. 


79         SPECIAL  SERVICE  OF  CATALRY  IN  THE  WE3T. 

It  tfr.ill  not  be  Employed  alone  on  such  service  without 
an  absolute  necessity.  By  night,  and  in  long  halts  by 
day,  ■when,  as  n«ual,  without  grain,  the  horses  of  caval- 
ry must  graze  over  much  space,  it  is  exposed  to  risk  of 
los3,  and  is  unequal  to  the  safe  defence  of  it?  oivn  horses. 
d-corts,  too,  are  always  on  the  defensive;  but  cavalry  is 
very  weak  on  the  defensive  ;  it  defends  itself  only  by 
attacking :  thus  infantry  is  by  fnr  the  stronger  arm .  for 
that  duty,  even  by  day.  It  is  also  a  service  of  slow  and 
often  interrupted  marches,  and' thus  the  most  injurious 
to  cavalry  horses. 

Personnges,  mails,  <fec.,  cannot  be  escorted  far,  faster 
than  at  the  rate  oT  25  miles  a  day,  by  cavalry,  (uulessit 
]>e  dismounted  and  disposed  in  light  wagons.) 

It  will  be  avoided, _if  possible,  to  make  cavalry  detach- 
ments less  than  a  platoon,  or  greater  than  half  and  less 
than  ji  whole  squadron  ;  (company.)  These  details  will 
be  furnished  from  the  same  squadron  at  one  time.  This 
saves  time,  and  even  difficulty,  in  the  preparation  of 
equipage  and  rations,  and  adds  to  general  convenience 
and  comfort. 


TITLE   FIFTH. 
EVOLUTIONS    OF  THE   LINE. 

PRELIMINARY  RULES  AND  REMARKS. 

676. — The  evolutions  of  the  line  do  not  caaentiaily  dif- 
fer from  the  evolutions  of  the  regiment.  All  the  move- 
ments described  in  Title  IV  are  applicable,  with  the  mod-* 
ifications  given  under  the  present  title,  which  supposes 
a  brigade  of  two  regiments,  each  of  eight  squadrons. 

•If  two  brigades  be  united  under  the  command  of  a 
major  general,  each  of  the  brigadier  generals  repeats  the 
general  commands  of  the  commander  of  the  division  ; 
they  are  executed  in  each  brigade  as  is  detailed  in  the 
present  title.  When  the  brigades  are  to  execute  an  ev- 
olution which  requires  a  particujar.comraand  for  one  o? 
them,  the  brigadier  gives  that  command,  instead  of  re- 
peating the  general  command ;  conforming  to  the  like 
case  for  the  second  regiment  of  the  brigade. 

The  interval  between  the  regiments  in  line  is  two  pla- 
toon fronts.  In  line  of  close  columns,  with  "  closed  in- 
tervals," it  is  6  platoon  fronts  ;  (always  3  less  than  the 
number  of  squadrons  of  4  platoons ;)  at  '•  full  intervals," 
it  is  half  a  squadron  less  than  full  front.  Full  interval 
is  understood,  unless  the  command  express,  "  closed  in- 
tervals." 

In  the  line  of  battle  there  is  two  platoon  fronts  inter- 
val between  the  flanks  of  the  interior  flanker  squadrons . 

The  distance  between  regiments  in  close  column,  mea- 
sured the  same  as  between  squadrons,  is  two  platoon 
fronts ;  injopen  column,  it  is  throe  platoon  fronts. 


80  EVOLUTIO!?S  OF  THE  LINE. 

In  line  the  lirigaJier  general  is  fOO  paces  in  front  of 
tli£  ccntiit' (►!'  the  brigade ;  iu  the  evolutions  he  goes 
wheperer  ITi?  pre<?ouce  is  neceesMy. 

^'hc  couMuant!  attention,  is  iufnu-illatelj'-  repeated  after 
the  Drigiiilkir  generals. 

Preparulor};  commands  are  repeated  with  exactitude  ; 
those  of  exLCUtion  should  b(i'  repeated  with  a  rapidity  so 
great  as 'to  he  partially  simultaneous  with  the  iitterance 
of  the  general  officer;  so  that  there  may  be  unity  in  their 
execution  by  Llie  troops. 

Iq  all  f^n-mations  the  regimental  markers  place  them- 
selves upon  the  prolongation  of  the  line,  at  the  prepar- 
atory coin  tna  ad  of  their,  colonel ;  the  sergeant  majors 
face  toward  the  regiment  of  formation. 

The  assistant  adjutant  general  traces  the  lines,  when 
m-dercd  by  the  brigadier  general.  He  indicates  to  tlie 
adjutants  the  principal  points  of  direction  for  the  march, 
or  for  formations. 

The  cdimnand  kront,  is  not  given  in  one  rcgimcnit  un- 
til the  markers  of  the  other  regiment  arc  established  on 
the  proloiicfation  of  the  line. 

Trumpet,  signals  apply  only  to  the  first  line — are  tc- 
psated  only  by  the  trumpeters  of  that  line  ;  commands 
for  the  second  or  other  linos  are  given  by  the  voice. 

To  draw  or  return  sabre,  the  brigadier  general  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Dram  sabre,  or  Return  sabre. 

,ThQ  regiments  draw,  or  return,  only  at  the  commands 
of  their  colonelrt,  (given  as  prescribed,  with  the  pause.) 

The  brigade  being  in  column,  the  leading  regiment  jb 
designated  "first;"  the  one  behind,  "second."  In  line, 
the  one  happening  on  the  ri(/ht  is  designated  "  first ; "  on 
the  left,  "  second." 

Always  in  forming  close  column  on  ft  flank  squadron 
of  the  brigade,  all  the  other  squadrons  go  in  rear  of  the 
one   designated. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  IINE.  8f 

Wlion  the  brigadier  general  commanda  halt,  ]u3  ele- 
vates his  i-)ght  arm  and  sabre  to  their  full  extent.  '       ^ 

PIo  does  the  same  nt  the  command  MARcn,  if  all  the 
troop?!  are  to  cxeeutc  the  t?ame  movement;  in  this  ease 
the  captains  repeat  instantly  after  tlie  brigadier  general. 

The  distnnoc  between  two,  lines  of  brigades  is  gener- 
ally equal  to  the  front  of  a  rqgiment  ("half  distance"); 
between  the  regiments  in  a  brigade  in  two  lines  it 
should  seldom  exceed  800  paces. 


5i*7T.— rBoth  as  to  commands  of  all  the  ofllcers  and 
their  c:teculion,-  that  whiob  is  prescribed  in  the  evolu- 
tions of  the  regiment  is  conformed  to  in  the  following 
movements  : 

To  form  an  open  column,  its  march  and  change  of 
direction  (including  the  march  by  botli  flanks  to  the 
rear  to  pass  a, defile.) 

To  form  a  column  of  squadrons  and  a  close  column 
(faced  to  a  flank);  and  an  open  column,  from  line. 

To  close  a  column  of  squadrons. 

To  form  a  close  column  from  an  open  column.  ' 

The  march  and  change  of  direction  of  a  close  column  ; 
its  counter-march  ;  and  to  gain  ground  to  flank  or  rear  : 
and  its  wheel  by  platoons  to  repel  a  sudden  attack  in* 
flank. 

To  advance  in  double  column,  (each  regiment  forms 
its  own  ;  the  brigadier  general  commands,  regulate  by 
right,  or  left,  and  the  guides  will  be  ordered  accord- 
ingly). 

To  reduce  tliem  to  a  doul^e  column  of  fours  ;  to  face, 
or  march, to  the  rear. 

To  pass  flora  a  column  of  squadrons  or  a  close  column 
to  an  open  column;  from  an  open  column  to  a  column 
of  fours  ;  from  a  column  of  fours  to  an  open  column  ; 
and  from  an  open  column  to  a  columfi  of  squadrons ;  and 
a  close  column  ;  (but  the  leading  squadron,  2d  regiment, 
trots  like  the  rest.) 

The  formation  of  line  from  an  open  column,  or  col- 


S3  EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE. 

limn, of  squadrons,  to  the  ■^nght  or  Irft^   and  on  rlrjht  or 
on  l(ft  into  line.  - 

To  form  from  close  column,  oji  right  ov  on   left    into 
line. 

To  form  line  to  the  front  from  double  colunin3;  .^nd 
faced  to  the  rear  on  the  head  or  rear  of  the  columna,^ 

To  form  line  from  an  oj^en  column  where  a  part  has 
changed  direction,  in  the  several  cases,  by  combining 
two  or  more  evolutions;  (each -regimental  commander 
gives,  or  conforms  to,  so  much  of  the  general  command 
as  is  applicable  to  his  regiment.) 

In  some  of  these  movements,  one  of  the  colonels  does 
not  immediately  repeat,  or  give  his  commands;  but  in 
due  and  evident  order  of  succession; — as  in  change  of 
direction  of  a  column  ; — or  on  right  into  line,  d'c. 

In  tw©  lines,  the  second  line  confornis  its  movements 
in  line  of  squadron  columns,  so  as  to  retain  its  distance 
and  parallel  position  in  rear. 

If  the  first  line  retreats  by  alternate  squadrons,  the 
Sd  line  stands  fast  until  the  nncvou  nura,bered  squadrons 
(which  do  not  commence  the  movement)  begin  to  retire, 
and  uioves  at  the  same  time. 

In  the  advance  or  retreat  of  the  6rst  line  in  echelons, 
the  squadron  columns  of  the  second  line  conform  their 
movements  to  those  of  the  corresponding  squadrons  of 
the  first  line. 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

COLUMKS. 

The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  form  a  general  cloM  col- 
umn on  a  central  squadron  without  changing  front-— 

578. ^The  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attentio?i. 

%  On  right  of  2cZ  regiment — close  column. 

8.  Marco. 


1                     'l       !       1      1            1       1      1       1       1       i      .      1 

1 

/ 

/. 

1 

/ 

1 

• 

# 

1 

;  ;////    '  HI  Ij  in 

■ 

'    '      1   •  :       i  i  1  1  I  !     1 

1     1     I     :     i        •    1    !     }     1    1     1    1    f 

1 

1 

1 

/  /  //    '7 //^  /// 

4 

'  /  /  /     !  ;  !  i  '  ■  n 

III       •  •       1  :  :  i  ' 

i  !  !      /  /  /  ;  A  / ;  ; 
II,      '  ■  •  1  1  ,  f  < 

ill'    !  :  :  ^ !  ! !  i 

'    1    1         ,    .     ;    /    ;    /    /  ; 
/    /          /    .'     /    /    /    ;    /  / 

i 

1    !        '    ■     '     '.    '•    !    '   1 
1        11     •'.','    1    1    1  ■ 
1        '    '    i    :    ■    /  .'   >' 
'        '    1     ''!.'!    ' 

1        1    '    !     '    '    1  ' '   • 

• 

1 

• 

! 

'     •     '     1     '     •    1    1 

'    ,'     ,'     '    1     '    !    1 
1     '     '     '.''■',' 

('       *      '       '      '     i 

.'      /    /     'Si 

!   !  I  i  i : 

'     1    :     '    1  *! 
;,'■>! 

1      '    1     1    1    ' 

i       >        !       1       '                                  , 

— ;: — i' ._; — / — \. 

^ 

EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE.  83 

.The  2d  regiment  conforms  ^o'No.  448. 

Tlie  colonel  1st  regiment,  to  the  second  command,  adds 
fours  left — trot ;  the  captains  conform  to  what  is  pres- 
cribed for  those  on  the  right  of  the  squadron  of  foima' 
lion,  No.  450. 

.Tlie  regiment  on  the  right  always  goes  iii  front,  ia 
forming  the  general  close  column  on  a  "central  squadron. 

Regimental  close  columns,  full  interval,  are  formed  on 
the  right  (or  left)  of  each  regiment  at  the  commands  jw 
each  rcf/imcnt — on  right  {ov  left)  squadron — close  columr.. 

To  form  a  liue  of  regimental  close  columns,  closed  in- 
terval, the  brigadier  general  commands:  2.  On  left  df 
Isi  regiment,  and  right  of  2d  regiment — close  columns. 
The  regiments  conform  to  Nos.  449  and  448.  The  inter- 
val may  be  corrected  by  a  flank  movement  of  either  col- 
umn. 

579. — ^The  brigade  being  in  line  to  form  general  cIobc 
column  on  a  flank,  without  changing  front — 
The  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  the  right  of  \st  regiment— 'dose  column. 

3.  March. 

The  Ist  regiment  conforms  to  No.  448. 

The  colonel  2d  regiment  repeats  the  above  commandtA; 
the  captains  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  those  on 
the  left  of  the  squadron  of  formation,  No.  450,  except 
the  captain  of  the  right  squadron,  omits  ''trot;"  the 
other  captains,  except  the  last,  as  they  arrive  abreast  of 
the  right  squadron,  (with  interval  to  give  squadron  dis- 
tance when  wheeled  into  line,)  command  wa/^'-^•MARCl£r, 
and  regulate  by  the  left ;  when  they  are  all  abreast,  on 
a  line  parallel  to  the  flank  of  the  1st  regiment,  the  mass 
Will  be  about  50  paces  from  the  flank  line  of  the  let 
regiment  column,  and  the  squadrons  opposite  their 
places;  the  colonel  then  commands  squadrons  half  left 

When  tlie  squadron  columns,  thus  parallel  with  and 


84  FV'ODUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

at  proper  distance  from  tKe  rear  squadron,  lat  Regiment, 
arrive  in  its.  re ^r,  the  colonel  commands:  1.  Fours — 
Left;  2.  Halt;  pausing  between  the  -words  "fours" and 
"left,"  so  that  the  captains  can  repeat  both  after  him  ; 
they  then  command:  1.  Dress";  2.  Front. 

Close  column  on  the  left  flank  is  formed  on  the  same 
principles  by  inverse  means  at  the  command  :  2.  On  left 
of  2d  regiment — close  cohimn. 


580, — The  brigade  being  deployed  by  regiment  in 
mass  at  full  interval,  to  form  general  close  column  "on 
light  (or  left)  regiment. 

The  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  071 1st  regiment — close  cohimn.  ^ 
Z.  March. 

The  let  regiment  stands  fast. 

The  colonel  of  the  2d  regiment  commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Fottrs — right;  squadrons  half  right — trot. 

3.  March. 

4.  Regulate  by  the  left. 

And  60  paces  from  the  column  of  formation -^s/^««c?- 
rons  half  left; — and  it  is  conducted  on  the  principle  of 
Ko.  569  ;*but  each  captain  gives  the  command  irot\  and 
all  the  squadron  columns  are  abreast  from  the  first,  on  a 
line  perpendicular  to  the  front. 

Close  column  on  the  second  regiment  is  formed  on  the 
same  principles,  by  inverse  commands  and  means.    The 
'moving  regiment  always  goes  in  rear. 

No.  681. — ^The  brigade  marching  in  line,  to  form  a 
general  close  column  without  halting — 


EVOtUTIONS  "<JF  the  line.  S5 

The  brigadier  general  commandB: 

1.  Attention; 

2.  071  left  of  2d  regiment— ^close  colwnn. 

3.  M!uicii. 

The  2tl  regiment  conforms  to"  No.  451. 

The  colonel  of  the  1st  regiment  repeats  the  2d  com- 
mand, and  adds /o?/}-s — left — trot;  all  the  .squadrons  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  for  all  but  the  leading  squad- 
ron, No.  451. 

Close  coluniu  on  the  1st  regiment  is  formed  on  the 
same  prinoijiles  and  inverse  means  at  the  command  o:i 
rigid  of  1st  regiment— close  column. 

582. — The  brigade  marching  in  line  by  regiment  in 
mass  at  full  interval,  to  form  general  close  column  with-, 
out  halting,  the  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Oil  1st  rcgimeni — close  column. 

3.  MAucn. 

The  colonel  2d  regiment  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Fours — right — trot. 

3.  March. 

4.  Regulate  hy  tfic  left. 

And  when  in  rear  of  the  1st  rfgiraenjt^ 
].  Fours — Left, 

And  when  the  regiment  has  arrived  at  ita  distauce—- 

Walk—-}ilA-Rcn. 

piose  column  on  the  2d  rogimdntisformedouthesaDie 
piinciples,  hj  inverse  commands  and  meana. 


86  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LIN2. 

683.--The  brigade  being  in  general  close  column  at  a 
halt,  to  change  direction,  to  the  left  or  right,  by  a  flank 
moYement,  the  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  direction  by  the  right  (or  left) flank. 

3.  March. 

Tlie  1st  regiment. conforms  to  2\^o.  455. 

The  colonel  of  the  2d  regiment  repeats  the  brigadier 
general's  commands;  airits  squadrons  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed  for  the  rear  squadrons,  No.  455----(the  lead- 
ing squadron  preserving  distance  in  the  column.) 

SSi.-'-'The  brigade  being  in  general  close  colnrai?,  to 
form  a  line  of  regimental  close  columns,  closed  interval, 
faced  to  the  left  or  right,  the  brigadier  general  com- 
mands in  each  regiment— -change  direction  by  the  right 
(or  left)flcml\ 

Each  regiment  conforms  to  No.  455. 

A  general  close  column  ia  formed,  faced  to  a  flaijk, 
from  a  line  of  regimental  olose  columns,  on  the  same 
principle,  and  by  the  sami?  commands,  it  being  the  re- 
versal of  the  above,  movements. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

FORMATIONS  OF  LINE. 

585. — 'The  brigade  marching  ia  open  column,  to  form, 
front  into  line. 
The  brigadier. general  commands: 

1.  Attention, 

2.  Left-front  (or  y^ght-front)  into  4ine. 

3.  March.  * 


Wi 


■Jr 


:f^7<^rM  JT 


d 


y 


F^e^ 


1^4 


% 


y 


y 


/^' 


^ 


■  ■  .  \    V 


<-^ 


c>,^ 


yj< 


'A 


^. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE.  87 

.Tlie  leading  regiment  conforms  to  No.  4*76. 

At  the  2d  coramand,  the  colonel  of  the  2d  (next)  rcgi* 
ment  coniuiands :  2.  Cotwnii  half  left — trot,  lie  re- 
peats MAHcii,  and  ad"d,  guid<^  right.  The  head  of  the  2d 
regiment  is  directed  to  a  point  half  its  depth,  and  80 
paces  in  rear  of  the  place  its  right  will  occupy  in  line. 
There  the  colonel  commands,  columoi  half  right.  Half 
the  coluiim  being  in  the  new  dii-eclion,  the  colonel  com- 
mands: 

1.  Left  front  into  line. 

2.  March. 

Tlie  leading  squadrons  conform  to  No.  476.  The  cap- 
tains, who  had  not  changed  direction,  eontiriiie  their 
course,  and  turning  half  right,  opposite  their  [daces  in 
line,  march  forward  and  furm  hftfront  into  line. 

If  the  column  be  at  a  halt  at  the  second  command, 
the  colonel  2d  regiment  commands:  2.  Forward  trot — 
column  half  left. 

To  form  two  lines,  the  brigadier  general  commands: 
2.  In  each  regiment — leftfront  into  line.  Each  regiment 
conforms  to  No.  iVG.—th"  2-1  forming  line  of  columno. 

586. — To  form  the  brigade  column  on  au  c^bliquc  line, 
left  hack  {ov  right  back,)  iha  leading  regiment  conforms 
to  No.  477.  The  2d  regiment  turns  as  m  the  preceding 
paragraph,  directing  its  course  about  50  paces  to  the 
left  of  the  marker  of  the  preceding  rcginicnt;  and  not 
turning  half  right  on  forming  left  front  info  line,  the  col- 
onel adds,  left  forward,  and  conforms  to  No.  478. 

587.— To  form  the  brigade  in  an  oblique  line  left  for- 
ward, the  brigadioi-  general  adds  to  his  commarM  'left 
forimrd.  The  leading  regiment  conforms  to  No.  'iti'^. 
The  colonel  of  the  next,  if  the  obliquity  be  grcitt,  makes 
a  much  less  tnrn  ;  and  directing  the  head  of  his  column 
nearly  to  the  position  of  its  right  in  line,  commands  on 
right  into  line ;  and  conforms  to  Nos.  480  and  482. 


88  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

588. — The  brigade  Being  in  open  column  to  furm  Vine 
^aced  to  the  riglit  rear  or  left  rear  on  tlie  rear  of  tlie 
oolamu,,  the  platoons  are  first  wheeled  about,  and  then 
conform  to  No.  585. 

To  form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear  on  the  head  of  the 
column /roni  irt^o /fw6  is  first  executed,  and  then  wheel 
about  by  squadron,  or  by  platoon.  This  is  executed 
simultaneously,  at  the  commands  of  the  brig-adicr  gener- 
al, or  in  succession.     (See  No,  488.) 

No.  589. — Tlie  brigade  being  in  column  of  squadrons, 
to  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  the  leading  regiment  con- 
forms to  No.  485.  The  colonel  of  the  second  commands 
bij  plutoon  or  hy  the  left — by  platoon  ;  and  then  conforms 
to  No.  585.  -J       " 

590. — The  brigacle  being  in  column  of  sqi^adrons,  to 
form  line  faced  to  the  rear  on  the  rear  of  the  column, 
the  brigadier  general  commands  left  (or  right) — rear 
into  line.  The  regiment  in  rear  conforms  to  No.  487. 
The  colonel  of  the  leading  regiment  wliceLs  by  platoon 
to  the  left,  and  marches  forward  until  his  line  of  col- 
umns is  opposite  the  position  the  left  of  the  regiment 
shall  have  in  line.  He  then  commands  squadrons  left, 
(No.  521 ;)  marches  forward,  and  forms  right  front  intc 
line.     (No.  476.) 

591. — The  brigade  being  in  general  close  column,   to 
foi'm  line  faced  to  the  frotit  on  and  to  the  right   of  the 
luing  squadron,  the  brigadier  general  commands: 


i< 


1.  Attention,. 

2.  Deploy  to  the  r.ight. 

3.  March.  ' 

The  leading  regiment  conforms  to  No.  490. 

At  the  2d  Command,*the  colonel  of  the  2d  recent 
.?fcmmands/(;2«-s  right — trot^  .ind  adds  to  the  conyiiand 
of  execution  regulate  by  the  left. 


'(^2^. 


Foff^^&IT'^ 


h^ 


J  i  \\cjjj:\  /nx]/:xni!/'V 


/"/ 


// 
/  /    / 


/  / 


■'  / 


:    i.l/ 


// 
// 
/  / 


/     / 


'/     / 
/ 


\  \  \  t 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE.  69 

When  the  regiment  is  opposite  the  position  for  its  left 
flank  in  line,  the  colonel  commands  :  2  Fours — left  ; 
when  his  leading  squadron  is  about  20  paces  from  its 
position,  he  conforms  to  No.  491 ;  but  the  leading  squad- 
ron is  lialted  on  the  markers. 

If  the  brigadier  general  ■wishes  to  Seplo}^  in  twolifics, 
he  commands,  in  each  regiment — deploy  to  the  right. 

If  the  brigade  be  in  a  line  of  regimental  close  col- 
umns—closed interval — to  deploy  to  the  right,  the  brig- 
adier general  commands  the  same  dejyloy  to  the  right, 
which  is  repeated  by  the  colonel  of  the  second  regiment,^ 
No.  490 ;  but  the  leading  squadron  is  dressed  forward 
six  paces. 

The  colonel  of  the  first  regiment  commdnds  the  same 
as  the  colonel  in  rear,  above;  and  marching  iu  mass  to 
the  right,  gives  the  commands  :  2.  Fours — Left  ;  3.  Hal'j«, 
when  the  regiment  is  opposite  the  position  for  its  left 
flank  in  line,  (lessening  his  previous  interval  ft'om  the 
flank  of  the  2d  regiment.)  lie  then  conforms  to  No. 
490. 

The  general  close  column,  or  line  of  columns,  is  de- 
ployed to  the  "left  on  the  same  principles  by  inverse 
commands  and  means. 


592. — The  general  close  column,  marching,  is  deploy- 
ed by  regiment  in  mem,  at  the  command :  2.  JBy  regiment 
in  mass,  (or  By  regiment  in  mass — closed  interval) — de- 
ploy to  the  right,  {ov  left.)  The  colonel  of  the  second 
regiment  commands :  2.  Fours  right  (or  left,) — froi — 
JMarcii.  3.  Regulate  by  the  left,  (or  right ;)  and  having 
gained  his  proper  interval,' /ot«-5 — leit,  (or  rigut  ;)  and 
on  the  line,  ivalk — MAucn ;  or,  if  the  movement  be  made 
from  the  halt,  he  commands  column- — halt. 

To  deploy  in  echelon,  the  command  is,  on  (such  a) 
regiment — hy  regiment  inmass — to  the  rigid  (6r  left) — in 
echelon. 

The  regiment  not  named  gains  interval  to  the  flank  as 
above;  is  wheeled  by  fours  to  the  front  and  halted. 


96  EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE. 

593.----TI1C  brigade  Leing  in  general  close  column,  to 
deploy  it  to  the  right  aud  left,  the  brigadier  general  com- 
mauus :  . 

1.  Atientioii. 

2.  Deploy  to  the  right  and  left. 

3.  March. 

The  eoloucl  of  the  first  regiment  conforms  to  Xo.  490. 

At  the  second  command  the  colonel  of  the  second  reg- 
iment commands:  2..  Fours  left— -trot.  3.  Maecu  ;  and 
being -opposite  his  position,  (having  marched  six  platoon 
fronts  to  the  left,)  he  commands:  2.  Fours- — PiIght.  3. 
Gnidc  right.  When  his  leading  squadron  is  about  twen- 
ty paccs'from  its  jjosition,  he  conforms  to  No.  491;  but 
the  captain  of  that  squadron  halts  and  dresses  on  the 
markers. 

594." --To  deploy  the  column,  on  a  line  oblique  to  its  ■ 
front,  the  brigadier  general  first  conimands:  2.  Squad- 
rons  right  {pv  left)  viheel.  3.  Mauoh,  4,  Halt,  N"o.  493; 
he  then  commands  as  in  No.  593  ;  but  the  eocoud  regi- 
ment, if  the  wheel  has  been  laadc  to  the  right,  marches 
further  in  its  flank  movement ;  if  to  the  left,  less  ;  and  in 
its  march  to  the  new  front  its  flanks  do  not  cover;  the 
guides  maintain  their  first  relative  positions. 

595.-— The  brigade  .being  in  line  of  regimental  close 
,  columns,  elogcd  interval,  to  deploy  to  the  right  and  left, 
the  brigadier  general  conjmands : 

1.  Attention,        . 

2.  Deploy  to  the  right  and  left. 

3.  March.     '' 

The  colonel  of  the  let  regiment  conforms  to_  No.  490 ; 
but  the  leading  squadron  is  dressed  forward  six  paces.  _ 

At  the  second  command,  the  colonel  of  the  2d  regi- 
ment commands;  2.  Deploy  to  the  left,  No.  490^  but  the 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE,  91 

markers  are  stationed  to  the  right  of  the  head  of  the 
column,  at  the  proper  interval  fi*om  the  left  of  the  1st 
regiment;  and  at  the  2d  command,  the  captain  of  the 
leading  squadron  commands  foicrs— -right.  At  the  com- 
mand of  execution  he  marches  three  platoons  front,  to 
the  right,  wheels  to  the  left  by  fours,  and  dresses  upon 
tlxe  markers  ;  the  otlier  captains  conform  to  No.  490 ;  but 
that  of  the  squadron  7iext  io  the  front  will  find  himself 
opposite  his  place  when  his  squadron  has  inarched  two 
platoon  fronts. 

The  line  of  regimental  close  columns  at  full  hitervaljis 
deployed  at  the  command  in  each  regiment— -deploy  to 
the  right  (or  left.) 

The  line  of  close  columns  advances  and  halts  at  the 
same  commands,  and  on  the  same  principles  as  the  deploy- 
ed line. 

The  intervals  of  a  line  of  close  columns  is  diminished 
or  increased  by  marching  one,  or  both,  along  the  line. 

590.— -The  brigade  halted,  or  marching  in  general  close 
column,  to  form  line  on  the  loft  flank,  faced  to  the  left — 
or  right  flank,  faced  to  the  right—- the  brigadier  general 
commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  On  rear  squadron-— left  (or  right)  into  line. 

3.  March. 

The  regiment  in  rear  conforms  to  No.  494. 
If  halted,  the  colonel   of  the  regiment  in  front  com- 
mands: 

1.  Attention, 
'2.  Forward. 
8.  MAncii. 

When  the  rear  of  his  regiment  has  marched  so  far  that 
its  rear  will  have  the  prescribed  interval  ip.  lin§,  he  also 
conforms  to  No.  494. 


^^  EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE. 

cohimnrhaU^<i'?.^^'^''T  ^^  ^?'  ?^  regimental  double 
f.  Tf'/t      .  ,^^   marching,   to  form  it,  in  two  lines 

mZdsy    ^"  "'^'''  ''  ^'"'^  '^'  brigadier' geneTalS 

1.  Attention. 
■3'  M^Kc?  reghnent-riffht  (or  left)  into  line,   I 

Each  regirflent  conforms  to  No.  500. 

^  f08.--Thc  brigade  being  in  line  of  regimenta*  double 
columns,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  rear  on  the  heads  of 
the  colunins,  it  is  formed /roni  into  line;  and  then  wheel, 
ed  by  platoon  or  squadron,  left  (or  right  ahotd,)  the  briff. 
ndier  general  giving  the  commands.  .  ** 

If  on  the  rear  of  the  columns,  the  columns  are  first 
wheeled  by  platoons  about,  and  then  formed  front  into 
line,  No.  499.  ^  w 

599.— Thcl->rigade  being  in  open  column,  to  form  iine, 
taced  to  the  front,  on  the  leading  squadron,  2d  regiment 
the  brigadier  general  commands:  2.  On  2d  regiment-- 
left  front  into  line.  ^ 

The  2d  regiment  is  formed  left  front  into  line,  No.  476 

The  colonel,  let  regiment,  commands:  2.  Platoon's 
rigid  wheel-'-rear  sqnadron  forward— -irot;  3.  March  ; 
4.  Forward  ;  and  the  front  squadrons  having  marched 
two  squadron  fronts  to  the  right,  1.  Platoons  right  wheel; 
2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Left  front  into  line  ;  0.  March; 
the  last  commands  applying  only  to  the  seven  leading 
squadrons. 

The  captain  of  the  rdar  squadron  having  marched  30 
paces  forward,  commands:  I.  J^latoo7is  right  wheel;  2. 
Mabcii  ;  3.  Forward  ;  and  marches  3  platoon  fronts,  and 
then  commands:  1.  Platoons— right  wheel ;  2.  March;  3. 
^f^—fi'ont  into  litie  ;  4.  Marcb.    * 

All  thp  captains,  in  succession,  wheel  platoons  right 
about,  (towards  the  other  regiment.) 


J'a^MH'^ 


c 


- J! 


1\ 


y'M. 


.     ^. 


V  / 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE.  95 

600. — The  brigade  being  in  open  column,  to  form  line 
faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear  of  the  let  reeiment,  the 
brigadier  goncrakcommandp :  2.  On  1st  re^imcnt—left 
rear  into  line. 

The  2d  reginoent  is  formed,  rirfhi— front  into  line,  No. 
476;  And  the  captains  -^v'heel  platoons  left  about,  in  sup- 
cession,  after  forming  in  line. 

The  1st  regiment  conforms  to  what  ia  prescribed,  No, 
599,  for  the  let  regiment;  but inverseh ;  and  the  captains 
do  not  wheel  platoons  about,  after  forminor  Ime. 


ARTICLE     THIRD. 
THE  LINE. 

602. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  execute  a  cliange 
of  front  to  the  right  or  left,  of  about  45  degrees  or  less 
^he  brigadier  general  coinmand8\-  -  * 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  front— left  (er  rujht)  forward. 
S.  March. 

The  1st  regiment  conforms  to  No.  5 IB. 

The  commands  of  the  colonel  of  the  2d  regiment  are  : 
1.  Attention)  2.  Change  front  on  \st  regiment—left  for' 
ward;  8.  Fonmrdby  platooyis—trot)  4.  March. 

The  captains,   in  succeseion,  as  the  heads  of  their 
squadrons  are  opposite  their  place  in  the  new  line  com-* 
mand:  Column  half  right  and  form  left  front  into  line. 

At  the  discretion  of  the  colonel  of  the  2d  reo-iment 
when  the  ground  is  favorable  and  the  change  of  direc- 
tion small,  he  omits  his  third  command.  In  which  case 
jU  the  captains  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  all 
but  the  one  of  the  flank  squadron,  in  No.  513. 


94  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

603. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  change  front, 
throwing  back  a  flank,  the  brigadier  general  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  front — right  (or  left)  back. 

3.  March. 

The  2i"!  regiment  conforms  to  No.  515. 

The  colonel  of  the  1st  regiment  commands:  I.  Atten- 
tion ;  2.  Change  front  on  ^d  regiment — right  hack  ;  Z.  Re- 
tire bg  fours ;  4.  March  ;  No.  536. 

The  sergeant  major  being  posted  for  the  new  position 
of  the  left  of  the  regiment,  the  right  guides  of  squadrons 
promptly  take  post ;  the  lieutenants,  at  the  heads  of  the 
columns,  conduct  them  round,  and  five  paces  to  {he  rear 
of  their  guides;  and  as  they  arrive,  the  left  squadron 
behind  t!ie  markers  and  with  reghuental  interval — the 
others,  in  succession,  with  squadron  intervals,  the  cap- 
tains command  :  1.  Right  into  line  wheel ;  2.  Mauch  ;  3. 
DKEf?8;  4.  Frokt. 

004. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  change  front  ob- 
liquely on  a  central  squadron,  the  brigadier  general 
commands  : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Change  front  on  \st  regiment — right  forward. 

3.  March. 

The  Ist  regiment  conforms  to  No.  613. 

The  2d  regiment  conforms  to  No.  515;  except  that  the 
right  equadron,  after  wheeling  fours  about,  like  the 
others,  changes  somewhat  its  position;  moves  forward 
to  the  line  of  the  let  regiment.  The  colonels  respect- 
ively give  the  commands  in  Nos.  613  and  515. 

To  cliange  front  obliquely  to  the  right,  is  executed 
on  the  same  principle  and  by  invei'se  means,  at  the 
command,  change  front  on  right  of  2c?  regiment — left 
forward. 


F^S/ 


Pa. 


fc  ^^  71 '^    j 


.1 


.'s — r 


K- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE,  95 

605. — The  brig.ade  being  in  line,  to  change  front  at  or 
near  a  right  angle,  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  riglit, 
cr  left,  the  brigadier  general  first  wheels  by  platoons  to 
the  right;  then  forms  left — -front  info  line ;  or,  right — 
front  into  line ;  and  then  (as  he  may  do  in  either  case) 
wheels  platoons  about.  To  change  -front  to  the  left, 
and  faced  to  the  left,  or  right,  he  first  wheels  by  pla- 
toons to  the  left;  then  forms  right— front  into  line ;  op, 
left— front  into  line;  and  then  (as  he  may  do  in  either' 
case)  wheels  platoons  about. 

To  change  front  at  or  near  a  right  angl?  on  a  central 
squadron,  he  wheels  by  platoon  to  the  right,  or  loft, 
and  then  commands,  on  2d  regiment — left  front  into 
line;  No.  599. 

606. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  advance  in  line  of 
squadron  columiis,  ttie  brigadier  general  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward  by  platoons. 

3.  Regulate  by  right  (or  left). 

4.  March. 

The  1st  regiment  conforms  to  "No.  517 ;  the  colonel 
omitting  the  third  command  of  the  brigadier  general. 

The  colonel  of  the  2d  regiment  repeats  the  third  com- 
mand, and  that  regiment  conforms  to  N"o.  522. 

607. — To  reduce  the  line  of  open  columns  to  columns 
of  fours,  and  reform  them,  and  to  iJiarch  to  either  flank, 
and  to  resume  the  march  in  line  of  columns,  the  com- 
mands and  mfeana  of  Nos.  618,  621,  and  523,  are  con- 
formed to ;  to  march  to  the  roar,  the  commands  and 
means  of  No.  526  are  conformed  to,  the  brigadier  gen- 
eral adding  to  the  laet  command,  regulate  by  right  or  left. 

608. — The  brigade  marching  in  line  of  column,  to  die- 
po3e  it  in  two  lines,  the  brigadier  general  communicates 
with  the  colohel  of  tho  regiment  that  is  to  form  the  sec- 


%  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

ond  line,  who  commands :  2.  Squadrons  right,  (ov  left) — 
MARCu;  and  when  he  is  in  roar  of  the  first  line,  squad' 

ront  left  (or  right) — MAncn. 

The  brigade  halted  in  lino,  to  form  it  in  two  lines,  the 
regiment  designated  marclies  in  open  columns  square  to 
the  roar — yohole  distance,  or  r,oo  paces,  as  required— 
turns,  and  when  in  rear,  forms  line  of  columns. 

609. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  march  to  the  front, 
the  brigadier  general  commands : 

1.  Attenthn. 

2.  Forward. 

8,  Regnhitc  by  left-(or  rijht.) 
4.  March. 

The  2d  regiment  conforms  to  No.  527.  • 
The  colonel,  1st  regiment,  repeals  the  third — as  he 
floes  the  other  commands;  the  left  guide  of  its  left  flank 
aquadron  preserves  the  regimental  interval,  under  the 
superintendence  oi  the  field  officer  of  that  flank,  or  the 
adjutant. 

610. — The  brigade  in  line,  halted  or  marching,  gains 
ground  to  a  flank  or  the  rear,  by  the  commands  and 
means  of  Nos.  504-,  535, 

To  change  it  to  a  line  of  columns,  and  to  reform  tho 
line,  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  Nos.  61*7, 
537,  are  conformed  to. 

6 11. '—The  brigade  being  in  twoline^,  at  whole  dis- 
tance, or  300  yards  distance,  to  change  frOnt  90  degrees 
to  the  right  or  left,  the  brigadier  general  sends  notice 
to  the  colonel  of  the  2d  regiment  (line)  and  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  right  wheel. 

3.  March, 

1.  Left  front  into  line. 

2.  MARcn, 


4# 


I*.  _^ 


/ 


¥  "/ 


) 


>y 


f     T 


tv 


/■ 


:  / 


i  / 

L...,y 


/ 


«      f 


X 

X 


^/^^ 


izriS; 


q 


r~r 


/ 


I. 


rrn 


Lim 


TB 


:xn 


n] 


ra 


Lizri 


txn 


mi. 


'■  l-i  /   H 


7  n — 7 

!      !     '     / 


rr 


■i  / 


cy 


y--".  •- 


y" 


J&gtMM' 


TTTI 


cnn 


m 


rd 


^■•*j? 


CXEI 


i^ 


H 


— .» — ^.  )*i 


q 


cxn 


!:d^-^ 


rrro 

\\ 

Hiinn 

M 
\\ 

I 

! 

1 1 

i  ; 

'i 

•'|i::a::.TJ 

I 

•'t:-i:x;j 

! 

r:i:n:z:i 


tLXJJ 


Jcu^^z  jf:^ 


^ 


/  / 


,„..^ — J... ,    , 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE.  97 

Or  the  brigadier  general  orders  the  colonel,  Ist  regi- 
ment, to  give  these  commanda. 

The  dolonel  of  the  second  line,  of  squadron  columne, 
commands:  ■  , 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward — sqxttidrons  >  left^trot. 

3.  March. 

4.  Column  right. 

And  as  soon  as  his  line  is  in  the  rear  of  the  first,  in  the 
new  direction : 

1.  Sqxutdrons  right. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

If  the  distance  is  200  pacea,  the  second  line  marches 
forward  the  necessary  distance. 

If  desired,  the  first  line,  at  whole  distance,  is  formed 
right  front  into  line;  the  second  line  has  then  but  a 
distance  equal  to  its  front  to  maroh. 

To  change  front  to  the  left  is  executed  on  the  same 
principles,  by  inverse  means  and  eommands. 

612. — The  brigade  being  in  two  lines  at  whole  dis- 
tance, to  change  front,  the  right  thrown  back  about  90 
degrees,  the  brigader  general  commands,  or,  by  instruc- 
tion, the  colonel  1st  regiment  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  left  ivhcel. 

3.  March. 

1.  Left — front  into  line. 

2.  March. 

3.  Platoons  riff  hi  about  whe»l. 

4.  March.     (See  No.  488.) 

The  colonel  2d  regiment  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Forward — squadrons  left — trot. 

3.  March. 

20 


98  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

And  having  marched  a  distance  equal  to  ij.s  front, 
and  one  squadron  more,  eclumn  right,  and  hoing  in  roar 
of  tho.firet  line  :  2.  Sguadrons  riglii ;  .':.  Makoi  ;  ^t.  Halt 

If  d<^«irc'd,  llic  first  line,  as  above,  ia  formed  right — 
front  into  line ;  the  colonel  of  the  second,  after  ptitting 
his  recrimcnt  in  motion,  commands,  colvtnn  half  rhjht ; 
and  marches  a  diagonal  course  fo  the  ]ioint  where  the 
righl  of  his  regiment  is  t<^  rest. 

To  throw  back  the  I'^ft  of  the  line'',  the  principle  i? 
the  6amc,,commands  ami  means  inverse. 

613. — The  brigade  being  in  two  lines,  300  paces  dis- 
tance, to  change  front  obliquely,  right  forward,  notice 
having  been  sent  to  the  colonel  of  the  second  line,  the 
brigadier  general  orders  the  colonel  1st  regiment,  or 
himself  commands : 

1.  Attariion. 

2,  Change  frord — right  forward. 
P..  Mi*R-  n. 

The  1$L  regiment  changes  front — rinJit  forxcard,  «•  in 
No.   513. 

At  the  third  command,  the  Fcrgoant  major  2d  regi- 
ment takes  post  at  the  proper  distance  directly  in  l-enr 
of  the  right  of  the  left  squadron  of  the  fii»?t  line.iie'w 
position,  and  the  colonel  '2d  regiment  comnvinJs:  2. 
Forvard — .squadrons  right — trot;  :^.  MARrii.  lie  adds: 
4.  Column  half  left,  so  a^  to  give  the  head  of  the -colamn 
a  direction  parallel  witli  the  new  line.  (If  the  change 
of  front  is  very  slight,  thi?"  change  of  direction  may  be 
omitted.)  So  soon  as  the  head  of  the  rear  squadron  it! 
opposite  the  sergeant  major,  the  eolonel  commands :  1. 
Attention;    2.  Regulate  bx/ the   left;    ii  ii,  \inder 

the  direction  of  a  Held  ofticer,  or  the  turns  to 

the  left,  and  conducts^  his  column  into  pu.-ilion,  with  itf 
head  against  the  sergeant  major  ;  tlie  other  squadrons 
turn,  wJlli  proper  intervals,  to  form  the  new  liue  of  col- 
umns parallel  to  the  new  front  (their  right  guidop  pre- 
ceding them  to  mark  their  positions.) 


1^35 


Fag^m.E' 


"r"x;\. 


..-,K 


>•-, 


y 


\::\n: 


r  r:r  e:;;;:;z:::;:::::;: 


[::i;q; 
i:ri:r 

mi; 

[in: 
arc 


Lin;*^ 


_ ^_^ 


.4^ 


// 


/ 


'^. 


7^ 


/ 


98     . 

A 

and 
oftl 

If 
from. 
his  1 . 
and 
righ- 

T( 
thes 

61 
tanc 
havi 
brig! 
hims 


Th 
No. 

At. 
ment 
of  tb 
posit 

4.  Co 
a  dii' 
of  fro 

omitt 
oppot 
Alter. 
the  d 
the  ]( 
bead 
turn, 
uinns 
oedin 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINK.  99 

To  change  front — left  forward^  is  executed  on  the  sam* 
principlCB  by  inverse  meacs. 


.  ♦  ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

ECHELONS. 

614. — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  march  forward  in 
echelon,  the  brigadier  general  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Squadrons  by   the  right  (^'  left)~forward  in 
echelon^ 

3.  March. 

The  colonels  conform  to  No.  540;  that  of  the  2d  regi- 
ment giving  the  command  only  when  the  left  squadron 
of  the  let  has  tak-en  its  distance  (which  is  squadron  front 
and  regimental  interval). 

If  the  brigadier  general  desire  to  keep  in  line  any 
portion  of  the  brigade  not  yet  in  echelon,  he  commands, 
or  sounds,  halt,  at  the  proper  time ;  or  he  advances  the 
brigade. 

The  brigade  being  in  echelon,  to  make  face  to  a  flank  ; 
to  retire  in  echelon  ;  to  form  line  to  the  front — the  brig- 
adier general  gives  the  commands  prescribed  for  the 
colonels,  Kos.  542.  544,  550 ;  and  what  is  there  pre- 
scribed is  conformed  to  in  both  regiments. 

615, — The  brigade  being  in  line,  to  march  in  echelon 
by  wing,  either  flank  advanced,  the  brigadier  general 
commands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Wingti  by  the  left  (or  right)— fqr ward  in  echelon. 

3.  Mabch. 


190  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

These  commandg  are  repeated  in  succession  by  tlic 
colonels,  and  the   movement  is  executed  as  in  No.  555. 

The  brigade  being  in  echelon  by  "sving,  to  form  or  to 
march  in  echelon  by  squadron,  he  commands  as  in  No. 
540,  and  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed, 
Fo.  556. 

The  brigade  being  in  echelon  by  squadron,  if  the  brig- 
adier general  wish  to  form  it  in  echelon  by  \ving,  he 
commands  as  in  No.  557. 

616. — ^In  all  cases,  to  make  partial  changes  in  the 
echelon  order  of  the  brigade,  he  sends  orders  to  the 
colonel,  who  conforms  to  the  school  of  the  regiment, 

617, — ^T'he  brigade  being^  in  line,  to  retire  by  alter- 
nate squadrons,  the  brigadier  general  commands : 

1.  Attention. 

'  S.  Retire  by  alternate  squadrons. 

3.  Regulate  by  the  right  (or  left,) 

4.  March. 

The  brigadier  general  sounds  the  signal  for  the  de« 
sired  gait. 

The  colonels  i*epeat  these  commands;  the  lieutenant 
colonels  and  captains  conform  to  No.  560,  the  lieutenant 
colonels  commanding,  regulate  by  the  left ;  (the  original 
*' right"  of  the  brigadier  general's  command.) 

The  brigadier  general  sounds  the  signal,  halt;  when 
the  retiring  line  faces  to  the  front. 

The  colonels  then  command :  1.  Retire;  2.  March;  3. 
Regulate  hy  the  left ;  the  captains  conform  to  No.  560. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  give  the  same  commands, 
when  the  line  of  even  companies  next  retires. 

This  evolution  is  important  for  a  retreat,  in  good 
order,  before  a  superior  enemy. 


•       ^ 

- 

J'^M 

^-^ 

- 

A^ 

/or  IT  ^ 

! 

« 

' 

• 

\ 

i 

-■ 

! 

1 

im 


Tac^elOlW^ 


:oi 


in 
&}- 

nd 
he 
be 
«d 

nd 
ire 
to 
to 
id. 

to 
an 


oa 

ht 

I. 

ks 

in 

nc 
tk 
on 


7?/^  roi  R 


J^^'^S 


400 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE.  101 

ARTICLE    FIFTH. 

THE  CHARGE. 

616. — The  charge  is  executed  by  eeveml  regiments  in 
Hue  after  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  cobq- 
mand^,  as  those  prescribed  for  the  regiment. 

In  two  lines,  while  it,i6  important  that  the  second 
should  be  near  to  impi*ove»the  effect  produced  by  the 
first,  it  must  not  be  so  cloee  as  to  be  involved  In  the 
confusion  of  a  repulse;  this  danger  is  greatly  diminished 
by  its  advance  in  squadron  columns;  but  it  must  not  be 
nearer  than  800  paces  from  the  first  line. 

To  conceaLa  superiority  of  force,  or  where  the  ground 
does  not  aomit  of  its  full  deployment,  squadrons  are 
placed  behind  one  or  both  wings;  they  rnay  serve  to 
outflank  the  enemy,  seconding  the  charge;  and  also  to 
pursue  him.    They  receive  their  instruction. -j  beforehand. 

When  infantry  is  charged  from  column,  it  is  better  to 
attack  it  from  several  columns,  at  different  points,  than 
from  one  column  of  useless  depth. 

619. — The  order  of  battle  of  a  brigade  depends  upoB. 
the  amount  of  the  cavalry  force  present. 

The  brigade  being  in  one  line,  each  regiment,  of  eight 
squadrons,  is  in  order  of  battle  as  prescribed,  Title  I 
Article  1st,  with  two  platoon  fronts  between  the  fianks 
of  the  flanking  squadrons. 

The  brigade  being  in  two  lines,  the  1st  regiment  is  in 
the  order  there  prescribed;  the  regiment  in  second  line 
is  in  line  of  squadron  columns,  800  paces  distance,  with, 
the  flank  squadrons  retired  a  depth  of  the  squadroa 
column. 

A  brigade  of  ten  squadron  regiments,  in  order  of  bat- 
tle, has  each  regiment  as  prescribed.  Title  I,  Article  Ist; 
the  first  line  of  each  in  the  same  line,  and  with  two  pla- 
toon fronts  interval  between  the  flanking  equadronfl. 


102  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 

APPLICATION  OF  THE  GENERAL  RULES  FOR 
THE  COMMANDS  IN  THE  EVOLUTIONS  OF  A 
DIVISION  OF  TWO  BRIGADES,  EACH  OF  TWO 
REGIMENTS. 

620. — The  division  being  iu  two  lines,  at  half  distance, 
(regimental  front  and  interval)  to  change  front  90  de- 
grees to  the  right  on  the  riglit  of  the  first  line,  and  in 
Wo  lines. 

The  major  general  sends  notice  to  the  commander  o£ 
the  second  line,  and  orders  the  brigadier  general  of  the 
iirst  line,  or  himself  commands: 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoons  right  wheel 

3.  March. 

1.  jiiteniion, 

2.  Left  front  i7ito  Ibxe. 

3.  Makch. 


EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE. 


108 


•« 


~  5  o  »,  S  o 
'^  il  «  S  « 
5S  ^5  -<  ^  §  -1 


.  CI  coi 


n 


-  g  s 

o  *^  «  ^ 


>. 


tl  §  tt  »  g     ^ 

K  g  "i  «  sD  O 


s  2 


S.?S^ 


1*1       -- 


Tic*       cCrH 


T'4  EV0LCTI0X3  OF  THE  LINE. 

OB^J5IiVATIOK:5, 

If  the  2d  line  be  in  line  of  deployed  squadrons,  Mi& 
fi!*8t  movement  would  be  anticipated. 

llio  close  column  may  be  deployed  on  rirjht  into  lint, 
after  which  the  .brigadier  general  •would  command : 
r'orward  by  plaioo7is — march — ualt. 

In  the  aimplei-'evolutions  the  commands  of  the  major 
general  indicate  at  once  the  whole  movement,  and  are 
communicated  througliout,  if  not  heard,  by  the  repeti- 
tiona 

.Example. — The  division  marching  in  open  column,  to 
form  left  front  into  line,  the  major  general  commandei: 

1.  Attention;  2.  Left  front  into  line ;  3.  Makcit. 

The  briixadior  general,  leading  brigade:  1.  Attention; 

2.  Left  front  into  line — trot;  3.  March. 

The  bri^radier  tceueral,  2d  brigade:  1.  Attcniioyi ;  2. 
Trot — column  half  Ufl;  3.  March.  1.  Column  half 
right;  1.  Jjcft  front  . into  line;  2.  March.  The  fii*8t 
turn  being  directed  to  a  point  the  depth  of  hi.s  firat  regi- 
ment in  column,  in  rear  of  tlie  point  its  right  shall  oc- 
cupy in  line,  and  there  commanding  the  second  turn. 

If  the  major  general  command,  2.  In  each  brigade — 
left  front  Into  line,  the  caramander,  2d  brio-uilo,  wo\ild 
civc  the  same  command.'*  above  preacrilicd  for  the  firet 
brigade;  or  left—front  into  line  of  columns. 


PART  THIRD. 


-*^*- 


SKIRMISTH   D*RILL   FOR   MOUN- 
TED   TROOPS. 


ARTICJ.E  FIRST. 


Sec.  1.  A  Coinpany  consists  of  one  Capt.;iii,©nc  Jsi 
Lieuto^ant,  two  2d  Lieutenants,  fivp.  Sergeants,  four 
Corporals,  one  Farrier,  one  BIacksnuth,.t\vo  BuglevF, 
and  from  sixty  to  eighty  privates. 

Sec.  2.  In  all  exercises  the  companies  shall  be  dc- 
j^ignated  as  squadrons,  and  will  be  organised  as  designa- 
ted in  Art.  1st,  Cavuify  Tn*  tiV-;;,  with  the  following  ex- 
ceptions: 

Sec.  3.  When  in  line  of  battle  there  will  b"  an  in- 
terval of  one  yarcTbetwecn  the  left  of»onc  platoon  and 
the  right  of^hc  next.  The  captain  will  be  ten  yards  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron,  anil  platoon  com- 
manders five  yards  in  front  of  the  centres  of  thoit  pla-" 
toons. 

In  column  of  platoons  the  captaii\  will  be  on  the  side 
of  the  guide  and  ten  yards  outfeidc  the  centre  of  the 
column;  the  other  officers  ai7d  non-commissione<l Offi- 
cers V,  ill  occupy  the  same  pdvition  as  when  in  line  oi 


2  .  SKIRMISH  DRILL 

battle.  In  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  captain 
will  be  t-cn  yards  outside  the  centre  of  the  flank  of  the 
coliwnn,  on  the  side  of  the  guide.  ' 

Gommundcrs  of  platoons  will  be  five  yards  outside 
the  centre  of  the  flank  of  tlfeir  platoons  and  on  the  side 
of  the  g.uide. 

Th«  company  being  thus  formed  will  be  designated 
as  a  squadron,  and  will  be  drilled  by  the  means  and  di- 
rections laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics  for  the  squadron. 

Skc.  4.  When  conipanies.becbmc  reduced  two  coiii- 
panies  should  ^])c  combined,  if  practicable,  into  one 
squadron  for  drills  and  manoeuvres.    - 

The  squadron  when  thus  composed  of  two  compa- 
nies will  be  divided  into  four  platoons,  the  squadron 
being  commanded  by, the  senior  captain,  thc^'unior  cap- 
tain commanding  the  first  platoon,  the  senior  1st  lieu- 
tenant wiir  command  the  fourth  platoon,  the  next  lieu- 
tenan-trin  rank  the  second,  and  the  next,  the  third ;  the 
otlier  lieutenants  will  act  as  file  closers,  and  will'takc 
their  positions  oac  pace  behind  the  second  file  from  the 
right  or  left  of  their  platoons.  '  •       . 


TO  LINK. 


To  link  after  dismounting,  the  man  stands  to  horse, 
faces  about  to  the  rear,  takes  the  link  which  hangs  from 
the  halter  jing  of- the  horse  of  his  left  file  in  his  right 
hand,  seizes  his  own  horse  by  the  bit  near-the  mouth, 
and  draws  the  horse  o-f  his  left  file  towards  his  own  un- 
til he  can  hook  the  snap  into  the  curbring;  in  hooking 
the, nails  of  his  .right  hand  are  down. 

When  he  dismounts  he  leaves  the  reins  over  the 
poznmel  of  the  saddle.  ^ 

■    To  facilitate   the  linking,  the   horse   holder  should 
bear  his  horse's  licad  well  towards  number  three. 


FOR  MOUNTED  TR00P3  3 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 
SKIRMISH  D^ILL  FOR  MOUNTED  TROOPS. 

Sec.  5.  Prclirrrtnar'y  rema/ks. 

i^or  this  drill  the  men  should  be  dicseoo,  so^as  to  se- 
cure the  greatest  freedom  of  action,  as  in  the  blouse  or 
sack,  and  in  the'foragc  cap  with,  the  chin»strap  down. 
The  revolver  will  be  w.orn  in  a  bclt-holstir  upon  the 
right  .side  of  the  man.  The  gun  will  be  slung  across 
his  back,  with  the  butt  near  his  right  hip.  In  addition 
to  the  usual  equipment  of  a  cavalry  soldier  each  man 
will  be  provided  with  a  "link,"  for  the  purpose  of  secu- 
ring his  horse  whtnever  he  dismounts.  It  -will  be 
buckled  in  the  halter-ring  of  the  headstall,  and  wHien 
not  wanted  for  immediate  use,  will  be  hooked  up  by 
tlie  snap  in  the  same  ring.  - 

At  the  signal  ''boot  and  saddJe,"  the  horscs'will  be 
saddlcii  and  bridled.  -  .     •     . 

At  the  signal  "to  horse,". the  command  willbefo^-m- 
cd  according  to  the  instructions  already  givien  in  Cav-, 
airy  Tactics.  *        ■  .  . 

Should  the  command  be  less  than  a  complete  com- 
pany, the  officer  in  charge  oT  it  will  make  such  changes 
in  iti  organization  as  are  necessary  "ii>  consequence  of 
the  absence  of  members. 

Some  portion  of  every  command  wilL  be  heU  in  rc- 
aerve,  unless  it  is  so  small  as  to  manifestly  r.  ndcr  it  un- 
wise to  divide  i(.  Any  platoon  may  form  the  reserve  ; 
and  its  commander  will  be  assigned  by  selection,  a\id 
not  according  to  rank. 

.  A  "set  of  four"  means*thc  four  men  who  toll  off  tQ- 
gether. 

A' "chief  of  four"  is  the  right  file  of  the  set^  or  '*num- 
ber  one"  of  the  set,  .and  will  be  habitually  thc-guide  of 
his  set;  when  in  column  of  fours,  he.will  command  the 
set  to  wMiich  lie  belongs. 

He  will  be  responsible  thSt  the  men  of  his  set  never 


4  SKKIMISH  DRILL 

separate  from  each  other>  and  for  the  interval,  distance 
ami  alignment. 

The  f^cnior  ofiiccr  on  drill  is  tcrmcd.the  "chief;-'  hi? 
next  in  rank  is  termed  the  "assistant." 

Before  skiruiishing,  two. or  three  men  will  be  detailed 
to  accompany  and  protect  the  chief.    *. 

Preparatory  to  skirmishing^  a  platoon  will  take  open 
order.  ■'' 

The  interval,  between  men  iii  open  "order,  measured 
from  •'boot  to  boot," -is  twcnty^rsevcn  inches. 

In  a  column  of  fours,.open  order,' the  distance  be- 
tween the  sets  of  four,,  from  croup  to  head,  is  four 
yards. 

In  a  column  of  twos,  open  order,  the  "distance  from 
croup  to  head  is  eighteen  inches. 

In  a  column  "by  file,"  open  order,  the  distance  ^Voni 
croup  tohead  is  eighteen  inche^:. 

These  distances  and  intervals  are  deduced  from  the 
iengtJi  and  breadth  of  the  horse,  and  from  the  agree- 
ment which  must  exist  between  the  depth  of  a  column 
and  the  Jength  of  the  line  into  which  it  will  wheel. 

The  interval  of  twenty-seven  inches  will  be  found  in 
practice  ample  to  enable  the  men  to  mount-  and  dis- 
mount in  tlieir  places  in  line  or  in  column,  without  the 
necessity  of  the  alternate  files  moving  out'to  the'  front 
for  that  purpose-i 

III  an  enemy's  country,  or  when  in  danger  of  sudden 
attack  or  ambuscade,  the  leading  platoon  of  the  com- 
pany or  scouting  party  should  march  in  open  order,  so 
as  to  be  able  to  get  at  once  into  action. 

TO  TAKE  OPEN  ORDER. 

Sec.  6.  Being  in  line,  rig]\t  in  front,  the  commands 
of  the  chief  are  : 

1.  1st  platoon  {or^d  or  3d,  as  the  case  may  be,) 

open  order — Gallop. 

2.  Mauch. 


FOR  MOUNTED  TROqP?.  '  5 

At  the  "first  command,  all  gather  their  horses;  at.th? 
second  comm§!nd,  all  take  the  gallop,  except  the  rontrc 
hie  of  the  pfatoon,  Avhlch  trots  out  directly  to  the  iront. 
Those  on  the  right  of  the  centre  «>blique  to  the  right, 
each  man  continuing  to  oblique  until  he  has  an  inter- 
valof  twenty-seven  inchrs  b<rtween  him  and  the  next 
file  on  his  left;  Uiose  on  the  left  of  the  centre  continue 
to  oblique  to  the  left,  until  each  man  has  twenty-seven 
inches  interval  bet^vecn  l\im  and  the  next  file  on  hi^ 
right.  They  all  then  align  themselves  on  the  centre, 
take  up  its  gait,  and  continue  to  move  to  the  front  un- 
til the  next  command  of  the  chief. 

TO  RETURN  TO  CLOSE  ORDER. 

Being  in  line,  right  in  front,  in  open  order,  the  com- 
mands of  the  chief  are  : 

1.  Close  order — Trot.   ■ 
2;  March. 

At  the  first  command,  all  gather  their  horses  ;  at  the 
second  command,  the  centre  file  moves  to  the  front  at 
the  walk,  the  others  close  in  to-v^rds  him  at  the  trot; 
each  in  succession  taking  up  the  walk,  and  aligning 
on  tlic  centre  as  he  gains  his  position  in  the  line. 

Sec.  7.  The  platoon  being  in  line,  right  in  front, 
open  order,  breaks  "into  columns  of  fours  by  the  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  fours — Trot  (or  Gallop.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  first  set  of  four  gathers  its 
horses,  and  takes  the  trot  together  at  the  second.  Af- 
ter the  first  set  has  cleared  the  front  of  the  line,  or 
marched  three  yards,  the  second  set  moves  out  at  the 


6  jSI^IRMISU  DRILL 

trot  (or  gallop,)  n^archcs  straight  to  t];ic  fi'bnt  until 
clear  of  the  line,  and  then  obliques  to  the  fight  until 
m  position  in  column  exactlj'  behind  the  jirst  iet,  ^nd 
at  four  yar^ls  distance  from  it,  when  it  marches  to  the 
'front  to  take  its  place  in  colurnn.  Tlie  third  set  fol- 
lows the  second,  and  so  on  throughout  the  platoon^ 
according  to  the  foregoing  directions.    ^  ,         •• ' 

Gare  must  be  taken  to  avoid  losing  cjistance  in  this 
movenient.  The  gets  of  four  must  move  out  promptly 
in  turn,  and  oblique  together.  The  chief  ooinmande 
Guide  rjght  when  the  first  set  is  out. 

A  column  of  "twos''  and  "file"  may  be  formed  on 
the  same  principles  and  by  the  .same  means,  except 
that  the  distance  in  these  cases  is  only  eighteen  inc4ies 
from  heaiVto  croup.  ^ 

In'all  formations  of  this  drill,  the  same  principles 
will  be  observed  in  regard  to  increasing  the  gait  as  are 
now  established  in  Cavalry  Tactics. 

When  in  column-  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  various 
methods  of  forming  into  line  (front  right,  or  left)  can 
be  executed  bythe  commands  and  means  laid  down  in 
Cavalry  Tactics  for  the  platoon. 

"When  the  men  arc  not  well  instructed  in  the  drill, 
the  deployments  from  close  order  into  open  order,  and 
frotn  open  order  into  skirmishing  order*,  should  be  made 
at  the  walk  or  trot.  Habitually  they  should  be  execu- 
ted at  the  gallop;  and  in  action,  with  the  greatesjt  pos- 
sible celerity  compatible  with  steadiness." 

In  deploying,  theofiicers  and  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers will  fall  to  the  rear  of  the  line  in  order' to  superin- 
tend the  movement. 

Every  movement  not  fully  described  in  the  following 
page»  will  be  understood  to  be  cxeputed,  as  is  now  or- 
dered, in  the  school  of  platoonj  and  squadron. 

Sec.  8.  To  form  column  of  twos,  open  order,  from 
column  by  file,  marching  at  the  walk,  right  in  front, 
the  commands  are : 


rOR-MOU^XvKlfTROOrs.  7 

1.  Format Lvos\vj}e7itOi'de7' — 'T>'oi. 

2.  March. 

At,  the  second  command,  numbers  t\vo  and  four 
oblique  to  the  left  it  the  trot,  ahd  move  to' the  front 
when  in  rear  of  tlieir  places  in  colmnu  of  twos,  until 
in  line  with,  tlicir  respective  ones  and  threes.  Tlie 
leading  jfct  of  two's  the-n  being  at  the  walk,  all  tht;  o til- 
ers close  up  at  the  trot  to  their  places^  with  distance  oY 
efflrtccn  inches',  and  interval  from :ho5t  to  boot  of  twcyi- 
tv-sevcn  inches. 


Sec.  9.  To  form^column,  of  fours,  open  order,  from 
column  b.y  file,  when  marching  at. the  walk,  right  in 
front,  the  command^  are: 

r.  Form  fours,  open  ordtr — Troi. 
2.  Maroh. 

At  the  first  fommaifd,  niwnber  one  of  Citch  set  con- 
tinues to-m^rch  at-the  \valk  to  the  front ;  twos,  threes, 
and  J^urs  of  every  $et.  oblique,  to  the  left  at  the  trot, 
each  ij:>ovinfg  to  the  froi\t  v/hen  \r\  rear  of  the  place  he 
will  occvipy  in  his  set  of  four;  when  the)'  have  gained 
their  places  in  line  with,  ijumbers  one,  the  leading  set 
being  at  the  walk,  the  othcr.s  take  up  the  trot,  which 
they  ke(*p^  until  each  has  arrived  at  the  distance  of 
four  yards  from  the  one  preceding  it ;  each  in  turn 
then  takes  up  the  walk.  The  chief  commands  Guide 
right  when  the  fir.st  set  is  formed. 

Se<:.  10.  To  form  column  of  fours,  open  order,  from 
column  of  twos,  open  order,  when  marching  at  the 
walk,  with  right  in  front,  the  commands  are: 

1.  Form  fours — Troi. 

2.  March. 


8  '      SKirv^Igir- DRILL 

At  the  scconJcojnmaml,  throns  amVfours  oblique  to 
ihe  loft  at  the  trot'  until  opposito  tljrir  places  in  the  sots 
of  four,  when  thoy  move  to  the  .JVont,  taking  up  the 
walk  when  in  line  with  ones  and  twos.  ,  The  chief  eom- 
mauds  Guide  rigid  whew  the  movcmei\t  is  completed. 
Ones  and  twos  preserve  the  walk  and  dirertion  durinjj 
the  movement;  and  after  the  otlicr  files hjive  moved  out 
must  take  oawc  not  to  diminish  the.  distance  left'by 
theip.  If  the  column  is  trotting  when  the  mov.cm^t 
i^. ordered,  it  will  "he  executed  at  the  gallop.    *       ,i 

iSKC.  .11.  To  break  from  columH  of  fours  intocolunin 
of  twos,  open  or  close  orderj^maYching  at  the  walk, 
*»ith  right  in  front,  the  commands^arrc:    " 

1.  By  twos.  • 

2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  numbers  tlirec  and  four 
ha-lt  Until  numbers  one  and  two  have  cleared  them, 
wheii  they  oblique  to  the  right,  promptly,  into  their 
places  in  column  of  twos.  The  chief  commands  Guide 
rii^ht  Jis  soon  as  ihc  movement  is  completed.. 

Skc.  12.  To  break  a  colump  of  twos,  in  open  or  in 
c^lose  order,  into  column  by  file,  when  marching  at  the 
walk,  right  in  front,  the  commands  are:  ' 

1.  B7/ file— Trot, 

2.  Mapxh. 

At  the  second  commaad,  number  one  of  the  leading 
set  takes  the  trot.  As  soon  as  he  has  cleared  number 
two  of  the  lirst  set,  niimber  two  obliques  to  t"he  right 
at  the  trot,  and  enters  the  column  behind  number  one. 
Number  three  then  moves  in  his  place  in  column  at 
the  trot,  followed  by  number  four  ;  who,  by  obliquing 
at  the  trot,  takes  his  place  in  rear  of  number  three;  and 


.FOR  MOUNTKD  TROOPS.  '    9 

30  on  throughout  ihd  column,  each  cvcn-numbcved  file 
o;bliquing  at  the  trot  as  soon  as  the  odd-numbered  file 
on  his  right  has  cleared  him.  The  files  must  move 
very  promptly  and  exactly  in  their  proper  time,  so  as 
not  to  lose  distance  in  this  movement. 

Being  in  column  of  twos,  wheels  to  the  left  may  l)s 
v^xecuted  when  the  right  is  in  front ;  or  to  the  right  with 
the  left  in  front ;  but  not  the  reverse"  of  these,  for  then 
Uie  twos  would  be  inverted  in  their  respective  fours, 
and  confusion  would  res,uU  on  account  of  the  change 
in  posUion  of  the  horse-hoId^r. 

«/        *:■ 

S^.  13.  To  deploy  forward  as  skirmishers,  from  a 
lino,*right  in  front,  halted,  or  marching  at  any  gait,  the 
commands  are  :  * 

1.  On  (such)  set — Deploy  as  skirm'tshers-r-Gallop . 

2.  Mauch. 

At  the  se.cond  conmand,  all  take  the  gallop  except 
the  designated  set,  which  trots  out  to  the  front.  Those 
on  the  right  and  left  of  it  oblique  at  the  gallop  to  the 
righfe  and  left, .each  set  taking  up  tho«trot  when  on  line 
with  the  directing  set,  and  at  fifteen  yards  froln  the 
nearest/file  of  the  next  set  on  the  side  of  direction. 

In  this  movement  the  chiefs  of  four  will  "be  held  "re- 
sponsible for  the  direction  and  interval  and  alignment 
of  the  men  of  their  respective  sets,  and  will  sec  that  the 
seti  are  at  proper  intervals  ixj&iw  each  other.  The  cfiief 
will  halt  the  line  when  it  has  reached  the  point  where 
it  is  to  act.  ♦ 

The  following  movements  will  enable  cavalry,  when 
on  a  march,  to  get  into  action  with  the  least  possible 
delay,  in  case  of  an  attack  when  passing  a  defile  or  oT 
any  other  ambuscade. 

It  is  understood  that  always,  when  dismounted  to 
fight,  the  horse-holders  remain  mounted,  unless  other- 
wise ordered.  * 

21 


10  BKTRMISH  DRILL 

In  all  the  mancEUvre?  of  this--  article',  the'nrnimanus^ 
numbers; J  "  1"  arc  cautionary. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

Sec.  H.  To  disracui^t  to  light  when  vi  coiiHun  oj 
fours,  open  x>r(]rr,  right  m  frrilht,  huIted*or  niarchingppt 
any  gait,  to  mett  an  enemy  on  iho  left  of  froa|j  the 
<»oinmanclR  are :  *      . 

1.  DlSMOUNS"  TO  FIOHT. 

2.  Action  FRO.<T  AND -LEFT. 

3.  "Commence  fiuikg. 

At  the  first  com  mag  J,  all  halt,  spring  to  the  gi'cund. 
link  hprsc.s,  unjjjiii^-' rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  tiir 
front."  At  the^cco'iid  coJiamand,  the  -first  set  uiovcs 
funvard  four  yards,  mm  at  the  third  connnand,  ccm- 
rnencoe  firing.  The  other  sets  move  at  the  douMo- 
q^ick  oMiqiicl^  to  the  left,  and  take  tlinr  places  on  the 
110  with  the  first  set.  .  Each  set-,  as  sopn.  as  it*ar]-i,vts 
upon  the  line,  commences  firing.  ,      '  '  S\     * 

In  ca.se  it  be  desired  to  form  the  line  towirds  tl.e 
ri-ght  '^<'<^"'  firiiil  (>f  f>ip  rolumn,  the  comiiumds  ar.r : 

, .    l..-M^>:         r.         -nr. 

)l.  .Actio  ■       >  m>  imgiit. 

^.    f  '  :-.   '■'  - 

All  thf  sots  t  xeept  the  ll.st,  will  then  gain  their  pla- 
ces m  the  line  by  obliquing  to  the  right.  The  sets  will 
be  in  line  by  inversion,.  The  men  in  each  set  will  he 
Ml  (JJrcct  order.  ^ 


FOR  MOU^JTKB  TROOP!?.  11 

8e.c.  15.  Being  ;in  column  bffours,  open  ordCT,'rfght 
in  front,  marching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an 
attack  on  left  of  rear,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  Dismount  TO  FIGHT.  ■ 

2.  Action  rbau  and  left. 

3.  Commence  riRiso. 

At  the  first  command,  all  halt,  spring  to  the  ground, 
lint  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  the 
front..  At  the  second  command,  tlie  men  of  the  rear 
set  face  to  Ihc  right,  an4>  led  by  their  chi^f,  file  to  the 
right  around  the  rear  set  of  _  tu)rses  to  a  lin^e  iivetjard;-- 
in  rear  of  their  croups.  .      . 

At  the  second  comniJ^rid,  all  the  other  sets  face  'to 
the  left,'  and  move  at  the  douhU  -quick.  Each  mah  as 
he  clears  the  column  moves  obliquely  to  the  Ipft  ai{d 
rear  to  his  place  on  the  line  with  the  rear  sat. 

If  itb.e  dcfiircd  to  get  at  once  into  action,  tlit?  chi^ 
■commands  Co7nf7ience  Jiring  as  soon  as  the  set  first  on 
the  line  is  established.  This  set  then  commencrs  tiic 
fire;  and  each  of  the  others  takes  it  up  in  succession 
as  it  arrives  upon  the  line;  and  in  all  of  the  follow- 
jjig  movements  the  same  rule  will  be  observed. 

Sec.  16.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  open  order,  rigki 
in  front,  marching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  en 
attack  from  the  right  of  the  cohim)i,  thr  commands  arc: 

I .  Dismount  to  fkjht. 
H.  Action  right.     ''^■ 

At  the  first  command,  all  halt,  spring  to  the  ground, 
link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  the 
front.  At  the  second  commnnd,  all  move  briskly  upon 
a  line  five  yards  outside  the  riglit  flank  of  the  coluntn, 
where  they  take  their  places,  in  line  of  battle,  fiicdi 
to  the  right.     The  sets  \v;l]  be  in  order  by  inversion  : 


12  SKIRMISH  DRILL 

Btit  th.Q  men  in  each  set  wHl  be  in  direct  order,  tlie 
chief  being  on  the  right.  From  this  position  they 
may  be  deployed  forward  as  skirmishers,  if  it  be  de- 
sired. , 


Sec  17.  *When  in  column  of  fours,  open  order,  right 
in  front,  halted  or  marching,  to  meet  an  attack  froin 
the  left,  the  commands  arc  : 

1.    DiSJJOUNT  ,T0    FIGHT. 

3.  Action  left. 

At  the  first  command,  all  halt,  spring  to  the  ground, 
link  horpcs,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard,  to  the 
front.  At  the  second  command,  all  move  briskly  to 
the  left,  and  place  themselves  on  a  line  five  yards  out- 
side the  left  flank  of  the  column,  faciiig  to  the  left  of 
it,  and  in  their  proper  places  in  line  of  battle.  From 
.  tliif;  position  they  may  be  deployed  forward  as  skir- 
mishers, if  desired. 

Sec.  18.  Reing  in  column  of  twos,  witli  right  in 
front,  marcliing  at  any  gait, -or  halted,  to  n\t?et  an  ene- 
my on  the  l^ft  of  front,  the  commands  are : 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel— Ma^ch. 

2.  DismouS't  to  fight. 

3.  Action  front  and  left. 

At  the  first  command,  twos  wheel  to  the  left  and 
halt.  At  the  second  command,  all  dismount,  link  hor- 
ses, unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  the  front.  At 
the  third  command,  the  leading  set  moves  to  a  line  five 
jards  to  the  right  of  the  right  flank,  as  now  formed, 
and  facing  in  that  direction.  The  others  move  obliquo- 
Jyto  their  right  and  front,  at  the  double-quick,  and 
take  their  places  on  line  with  the  first. 


POR  MOUNTED  TIIOOPS.  13 

If  it  be  desired  to' form  the  line  towards  the  right  of 
the  head  of  the  column,  the  comtnands  are: 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — March. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight.  " 

3.  Action  front  and  right. 

Each  of  the  sets  in  rear  of  the  leading  set  v/ill  tken 
gain  its  place  in  the  line  by  passing  through  the  inter- 
val on  the  right  of  its  set  of  horses,  and  moving  oblique-^ 
ly'to  the  right  and  front,  to  its  place  in  line  with  the 
legiding  set.     The  sets  will  be  in  line  by  inversion. 

Sec.  19.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front, 
marching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  enemy  in 
rearj'^he  commands  are: 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel, 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

3.  Action  rear  and  left. 

At  the  first  command,  all  wheel  by  twos  into  line  to 
the  left,  and  halt.  At  the  second  command,  all  dis- 
niount,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  one  yard  to  the 
front,  an.d'-Uwait  the  next  command.  At  the  third  corn- 
maud,  the  rear  set  faces  to  the  left,  and  moves  at  the 
double-quick  to  its  place  on  a  line  five  yards  to  the 
left  of  the  left  flank,  as  now  formed,  and  facing  in  that 
di^rection.  The  other  sets  face  obliquely  to  the  left, 
and  move  off  at  the  double-quick  to  their  places  in  the 
line  with  the  rear  set. 

If  it  b*e  desired  to  form  the  line  to  the  right  instead 
of  the  left,  the  fust  two  commands  are  the  same  as  in 
the  other  case ;  the  third  command  is :  "  Action  res^R 
and  right;"  at  which  the  rear  set  takes  its  place  on 
the  line  as  before,  and  others  pass  through  tbe  inter- 
vals to  the  left  of  their  sets  of  horses,  respcctivoly,  and 
take  their  places  iji  succession  on  the  left  of  the    set 


U  ^  ,j3KH?MIi>H4>RILL 

ta-st;establit(hed.     The  sets.iivul  thfn  be  iu  line  by  in- 
vcisicii. 

Si'.c.  20.  Bcin<?  iu  coiumn  of  twos,  marchiii^r  at  an.y 
g^it,  or  haltexl,  wilh  right  in  front,  to  disenouut  to  fight, 
in  Older  to  meet  an- enemy  on  "he  right  flank,  thl*  com- 
mands are*: 

"1.  By  ttvos,  left  ivheel—MA.Jicii. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight — Action  right. 

At  the  tirst  command,  the  twos  wliecl. into  line  to  tlie 
It'll  and  halt.  At  tlie  second  command,  all  dismount 
:aid  link.  In  linking,  the -men  remain  faced  to  the 
iVont,  and  take  the  link  in  the  left-hand  and  the  bit  in 
Tht 'right.  After  linking,  thoy  face  about,  unsliijg  ri- 
fles, and  take  their  places  in  a  line  five  yxirds  outside 
ti^c  croups  of  the  horses.  The  cautionary  words,  .4c- 
tifOk  7 ighf,  shoxi](i  be  uttered  immediately  after  "Dis- 

MOl'N'T  TO  FIGHT." 

The  method  of  linking  is- changed  in  this  instance 
'0  avoid  the  inconvenience  which  might  result  from 
tllg  men  having  to  stoop  under.thc  links,  after  linking, 
in  order  to  pass  to,  their  position  in  rear  of  the  horses. 

Seo."  21.  fi'cing  in  column  of,.' twos,  rfght  in  front, 
inarching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  dismount  to  fight, 

to  meet  an  enemy  on  the  left,  the  commands  ares 

*■-  '  ^ 

1.  Bi/  twos,  left  U'/iffZ-j^MARCU... 

2.  Dismount  TO  FiGflto* 

At  the  fir^  cojnmand,  wheel-by  twos  intp  line  to  the 
left,  and  halt;  and  at  the  second  command,  all  dismount, 
link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  .-.tep  five  yards  to  the  front 
and  stagid  fast.  •  ' 

•  In  ca^e  it  should  be  desired  in  any  of  the  preceding 
laanccdvres  tp^form  the  Ijnc  la  an  oblique  direction,  the 


EORMO»:>rei>  TROOPS-  ir. 

J,  . .  ,.  -^(^i**  %   .  ■ " 

c.ujra!iaiv,l.s  would  be  tlic  naine, ;  but  the  ijot  fust  in  t\\v 

line  would  Hr'placcd  in  the  desired  dirc(?fion,  and  tlie 

others  would  conform  to  it.     The, chief  will  judg^c  fi'om 

Mijw^ircum.stanccs  which  of  themiuncevkvrcs  to  adopt — 

vv'Ipthev  the  Hank,  the  flPbnt,  or  the  rear.  •• 

In  jail  the  cases  of  this  article  the  command    "Gom- 

Mi^NCi:  Einiso"  will-  ])e  the  signal  for  the  set  fusst  on  the 

Uno  to  open  fire.  *  The  > other  sets,  if  not  on  tlie  line 

\vhen  it  is  given,  wfll  commoner  firing  as  soon  as  prag- 

^icuMc  after  they  ai^^c  oji  tlic  line. 


ARTICLB  FOURTH. 

•  »- 

Sec.  22.  'I^, deploy  as  skirmishers,  wher.  dismoun- 
ted, the  command  is: 

1.   On  {suck)  scl — Deploy — -Forward. 

At  this  co.mmand,  the  platoon  springs  forward  at  the 
double-quick.     The  s-ets  on  the  right   of  the  directing- 
■jet   move   obliquely    towards   the   right  until  opposite 
their  places  in  line  of  buttle,  when  they  move  to  the 
tVont,  aligning  by  the  left. 

The  sets  on  the  left  of  the  directing  set  move  oblique- 
l)fatowurds  the 4cft.  until  opposite  their  places  in  line  of 
battle,  whqn  they. move  tfl^  the  front,  aligning  by  the 
rii^ht.     AU  move  forwiird*  until  halted  by  the  chief. 

^Vhcn  in  proper  position  in  line  of  battle,  thus  de- 
ployed, there  will  be  fifteen  yards  between  sets- and 
three  feet  between  files  in  each  set. 

The  firing  will  commence  at  the  co'^imajid  of  the 
•hief. 

If  it.bc  desired  to  deploy  on  the  line  already  occu- 
pied, the  command  will  be,  On  (such)  set — Dkplot.  » 

Thr  directing  set  stand's  fa.st;  the  sets  to  the  right 
uid  left  of  it   face  to  the  right  and  Ieft,*'rc.«?pectivel.v, 


16  SKIiirvilSH  DRILL 

and  move  at  the  double-quick  to-  take  their  iiitervak  ; 
then  face  to  the  front,  and  align  thcmselyes  on  the  di- 
recting set. 

Sec.  23.  To  deploy  as  skirrtMshers,  mounted  fro;^a 
column  of  fours,  right  in  front,  the  commands  arc: 

,1.   On  {sucK)  set — Deploy — Gallop.  * 

2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  directing  get  trots  out 
to  the  front;  tho^e  in  front  of  it  oblique  to  the  right  at 
the  gallop  ;  those  in  rear  to  the  left  at  the  gallop ;  and 
all  take  the'trot  when  they  have  gained  their  intervals 
of  fifteen  yards,  aligning  themselves  by  the  directing 
set.  The  chief  will  halt  the  li«c  when  it  has  arrived 
where  it  is  to  act.  ^ 

To  assemble  the  skirmishers^  into  Hiie  or  column 
again,  the  chief  will  place  himself  at,  or  otherwise  in- 
dicate, the  point  at  which  the  directing  act  is  to  rest, 
^and  have  the  rally  sounded.  At  this  signal  the  sets 
will  close  in  at  the  gallop  upon  the  indicated  point  and 
take  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

"When  the  line  is  formed,  it  will  be  broken  into  col- 
umn, in  order  to  advance  or  retire  as  may  be  necessary. 

Sec.  24.  Having  been  thus  deployed  into  line  for 
skirmishing,  to  commence  iJ,ction,  the  commwnjs  ar?! 

1.  Dismount  to  fight. 

2.  FORV/ARD.  '^ 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command,  all,  save  the  horse-holders, 
dismount,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  one  pace  frs 
the  front,  and  await  the  next  order.  At  the  second 
command,  tlie  line  moves    forward  at  the  double-quick 


FOR  MOUNTED  TROOPg.  17 

until  haltcil.  At  the  fourth  command  the  right  file  ol 
each  sot  delivers  his  lire,  and  he  is  followed  in  succes- 
sion by  the  other  two. 

The  chief  of  four  will  take  care  that  Ihcrc  is  alwavs 
one  gun  loaded  in  his  set;  this  will  never  be  neglected, 
whether  in  advancing  or  retreating.  ThcTites  of  each 
set  must  depend  upon  each  other  for  support  and  as- 
sistance; they  must  never  separate;  every  kind  of  cov^r 
must  be  seized  and  occupied  by  the  skirmishers  ;  e.aeh 
chief  of  four  must  be  alert  to  perceive  such  advanta- 
ges for  his  set,  taking  care,  however,  that  in  .attempt*- 
ing  to  secure  them  he  does  not  separate  too  far  from 
the  other  sets  of  the  line  to  receive  or  give  support 
when  necessary. 

The  horses  will  be  habitually  kept  at  about  one  hun- 
dred yards  in  rear  of  their  riders, 'though  they  should 
be  nearer,  when  they  can  find  shelter  from  fire  which 
will  admit  of  it.  Fifty  yards  will  be  ifar  enough  when 
the  enemy  does  not  use  fire-arms. 

They  will  be  under  charge  of  a  non-commissioned 
officer;  and  when  it  is  desired  to  remount  rapidly, 
should  be  advanced  to  meet  their  riders.  The  reserve 
will  be  kept  niountc>d  and  where  it  can  -best  protect  the 
horses  of  the  dismounted  men  and  get  into  action  best.. 

The  deployed  line  will.be  manoeuvred  "by  the  com- 
mands, signals,  and 'means  provided  in  the  Caval/y 
T?actics. 

If  it  be  desired  to  fight  mounted,  the  cliief  tVill  com- 
mand the  charge.  The  men  will  then  draw  sabre  or 
pistols  and  charge. 

:-  ■■•¥> 

Sec.  25.  The  platoon  being  in  column  of  fours,  open 
order,  right  in  front,  an«l  at  the  walk,  to  take  close  or- 
der, the  commands  are  T 

1.   Close  order — Tuot. 
•^-2.  March. 


I^  S^KTP.MISH  DRILL 

At  thiT^i  connnanc!,  aiimber  one  of  the  leading  set 
V.  areh^g  to  the' front  at  the  walk.  The  other  men  of 
ji"-;  set  close  upon  him  at  the  trot  until  each  has  gained 
his  place  in  thc\t>et  of  four  in  close  oTder.  The  set 
then,  v/alks.  The  s'thci-  sets  close  at  the  trot  in  the 
same  mai«tt?r,  each  walking  when  it  has  closed  to 
eighteen  inches -frxjnrthat  in  iUi  front. 


Sec.  26,.  The  platoon  tcing  in  column  of  twos,  right 
Mn  frontj'^op^n  order,  to  take  close  or  lor,  tlic  commands 
aSe": 

i.   Close  order. 
2..  March.  ♦ 


At  this  command,  numbers  two  and  four"  incline  to 
the  right,  slightly  quickening  the  gait,  and  place  them- 
selves Iroot  to  boot  with  numbers  one  and  three. 


f5EC.  27.  To  form  column   of  fours,  in  close  order,, 
when  marcliin'g  in  column   of  file   at   the''  w5lk,  wjjth 

i'fjht  in  front,  the  commcindfj  arc  ;  .    «   •  .       *    -^ 


t.  TuoT- — K/.nciu 


At  Hkc  second  couirri^id,  riurnbcr  one  of  tlio,  leadin<(|l 
set  Continues  to  marcfl'So.  the  front  at  tlie  walk.  All 
*4ie  others  oWique  to  tho  left  at  the  trot ;  each  man 
raftd-ching  to  tho  front  when  iil^^^rear  of  his  place  in*  his 
sei  of  fours  in  close  m-ftofj  and  aligning  by  number  one 
rf  his  set.  i*Pll  of^he  sets  (except  the  leading  set)  con-i 
. -r.ue  to  trot-until  they  have  closed  up  to  within  eigh- 
tC5w.i  inclxfa  of  cach-cthc-;,  .and  then  take  the  walk. 


FOR  MOUNTKD  TKOOPS.  19 

ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

Skc.  2."^.  To  sling  rifle?,  from  carry  arms,  tlire  com- 
maud  is : 

1.    SlinO   KlPLEy. 

At  thld  conisnaiid,  raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
.t  little  higher  than  the  hip,  inclining  the  liarrcl  over 
the  right  shoulder,  and  in  rear  of  the  head  ;  at  the  same 
time,  with  the  left  liand  near  the  right  shoulder,  move 
tjic  sJing-  out  fronv  the  barrel,  thrust  the  head,  right 
.shoXilder,  and'rij^it  ann  tlirough  the  opening,  let  the 
piece  fall  into  its  position,  steadying  it  witii  the  right 
ha-nd,  and  drop  the  liaud.s  by  the  side.     • 

To  unsling  rifles,  the  Command  is  : 

Ik 

1.    Uns'lIKC,    UIFI/BS.  ^ 

At  this  command,  pass  the  right  hand  through  the 
-opening  between  the  sling  and  piece  near  the  rif  ht  hip, 
bear  the  piece  towards  the  front  with-  the  right  arm, 
seize  it  with  the  right  hand  as  in  carry  arms,  and'raiac 
it  a  little  above  the  right  hip;  at  thcr  sarno  time,  with 
the  left  hand,  free  the  sling  from  the  head  and  lower 
'he  piece  to  the  position  of  carry  arms. 

Sec.  29. .  AU.  of,  tlie  m-ovenicnts  described  herein  are 
■supposed  to -be* executed  whcii  the  right  i.sjn  front..-  It 
will  Se  understood  that  tliey  can  all  bo  executed  when, 
the  left^is  in  f'"oirt  upon  the  same  priiiciples  by  inrcrso 
iWaos. 

The  nicn  should   ahvays,   after  dismounting,  leave 
jttieir  reins  over  the  pommel  of  the  saddle.' 

When  inor&  than  tvro  fail  companies  aje  serving  to- 
gether,.and  their  front- iii  single  rank  would  ^c  untluly 
extended,  all  lines  should  bo  formed  of  companies  in 
^Mumn  of  platoons  at  \vh«oling  distanc<H 


20  SKIRMISH  DRILL 

As  far  as  possible,  the  composition  of  the  different 
sets  will  remain  unchanged  ;  and  everything  should 
be  done  wliich  will  promote  the  mutual  dependence  of 
the  men  of  each  set  on  each  other. 

They  should  act  together  as  much  as  possible  on  all 
kiiids  of  duty,  as  well  in  the  fatigue  duties  of  the  camp 
or  garrison  as  when  on  drill  or  in  action. 

All  details  should  be  made  as  much  as  praeticabte  of 
sets  of  four  rather  than  of  individuals  from  different 
sets ;  and  the  chief  of  four  should  be  always  in  com- 
mand of  his  set,  and  invested  with  the  authority  of  a 
non-commissioned  officer  over  it.  He  must  see  that 
his  men  stand  l»y  each, other  in  action,  and  whether  in 
the  charge,  in  pursuit,  or  in  .retreat,  that  they  never 
separate.  After  the  men  and  horses  are  familiar  with 
the  drill,  all  t)f  its  movements  should  be  executed  at 
the  gallop. 

.  JXhe.  men  should  be  made  to  saddle  up  vyith  the  great- 
qi^ possible  dispatch  whenever*the  "boot  and  saddle" 

BOtMlds. 

Always  bcfore^iising  their  guns  the  men  must  dis- 
mount? 

In  order  to  avoid  fretting  the  horses,  the  men  should 
be  at  least  live  yards  from  them  before  they  commence 
firing- 

When  the  men  are  in  action  on  foot,  they  should 
be  mancBUvrcd  with  due  reference  to  the  safety  of  their 
horses. 

While  the  horses  should  be  so  far  in  rear  of  the  men 
as  to  be  out  of  the  range  of  the  enemy's  fire,  they 
should  not  be  so  far  that  their  riders  cannot  reach  them 
before  the  enemy,  if  an  attempt  should  be  made  to  cap- 
ture or  stampede  them.  Generally,  in"  open  grourta, 
one  hundred. yards  will  be  about  the  maximum  dis- 
tance. They  should  be  nearer,  if  they  can  be  safe  from 
fire. 

One  of  the  non-commissioned  officcrsof  each  platoon 
should  be  left  in  charge  of  its  horses  when  the  men  dis- 
prjount  to-fightj  and  he  will  be  held  responsible  for  their 


FOR  MOUNTED  TRO0P3.'  21 

security  and  proper  management.  The  other  will  di.s- 
mount  with  his  platoon,  linking  his  horse  to  that  of  the 
nearest  number  one. 

In  this  drill,  inversions  of  platoons,  and  of.  sets  of 
four,  should  be  frequently  practiced,  hut  tliOs individual 
men  of  the  sets  should  never,  either  when  mounted  or 
on  foot,  be  inverted  in  their  sets. 

When  the  company  is  about  to  be  formed,  two  or 
three  men  will  be  detailed  to  accompany  the  chief  (Ju- 
ring  the  drill  or  skirmish. 

Whenever  the  men  are  dismounted,  at  the  command 
"  mount"  they  will  run  to  their  horses  without  unne- 
cessary noise,  unlink,  and  mount. 

When  the  "  rally  "  is  sounded,  the  skirmishers  will 
close  upon  the  indicated  point  at  the  gallop,  and  by  the 
quickest  means. 

When  charging  in  line  with  pistols  or  sabres,  the 
officers  mui5t  ride  in  the  rank ;  the  captain  on  the  right 
©f  the  squadron,  the  first  lieutenant  on  the  left  of  it, 
the  senior  second  lieutenant  on  the  right  of  the  second 
platoon,  and  the  junior  second  lieutenant  on  its  left. 
In  case  of  the  absence  of  any  one  of  them,  his  place 
must  not  be  supplied  by  the  next  in  »ank,  except  on  tlie 
flank  of  the  company. 

All  the  commands  should  be  habitually  given  with 
the  trumpet;  and,  on  drill,  the  trumpeters  should  al- 
ways accompany  the  chief.  .  It  is  very  important  that, 
in  this  drill,  the  men  should  I^rn  perfectly  what  the 
signals  mean. 


TvEMARKS  UPON  CAVALRY 


REMARKS   UPON    CAVALRY  TACTIO- 
y^D  MANCEUVREvS. 


The  success  of  cavalry  manoeuvres  depends  on  the. 
rapidjty,  steadiness,  and  boldness  with  which  they  aro 
executed..  Cavalry  cannot,  like  infantry,  rely  upon 
fire-arrns  as  a  potent  support ;  neither  can  it  stand  tirm- 
ly  and  defend  a  position,  against  an  aggressor.  On  the 
oontrary,  a  charge  of  the  enemy's  cavahy  must  inevi- 
tably overtarov/  it,  and  infantiy,  drawn  up  in  line 
would  oppose  nearly  treble  the  number  of  men.  Cav- 
alry has  therefore  but  one  system  of  attack  and  defence . 
wliicli  consists  in  throwing  itself  rapidly  upon  the  ene-: 
my,  and  in  anticipating  his  hostile  designs.  These  re- 
mqirks  ha.ve  but  a  partial  application  to  mounted  rifle- 
men, an  arm  of  the  service  daily  increasing  in  impor- 
tance. ,  The  nature  of  its  organization  clearly  demon- 
strates, that  it  is  only  in  time  of  peace,  and  with  infi- 
nite rare,  that  cavalry  can  be  solidly  organized,  so  as  to 
obtain  success  proportionate  to  its  importance  and  ex- 
pense  ;  for  though  war  inures  it  to  fatigue  and  skirmish- 
ing, yet,  unless,  before  entering  on  a  campaign,  it  is 
peii'cctly  instructed  in  the  care  necessary  for  the  pre- 
servation of  horses,  and  furnished  with  that  self-pof- 
scssion  which  is  only  obtained  by  a  constant  ,Jiabit  oi 
being  on  horseback,  it  will  soon  encumber  the  hospi- 
tals and  depots  of  the  army. 

Cavalry  is  divided  into  four  classes  :  Mounted  Ei!?c- 
mcn,  Heavy  Cavalry,  Dragoons,  and  Light  Cavalry' 

in  mounted  rifle  regiments  the  horses  are  principal- 
ly used  for  the  purpose  of  promptly  reaching  the  point 
of  attack,.and  such  troops  are  almost  invariably  fought 
on.  foot,  and  are  ueed   in  many  respects  in  a  manner 


TACTICS  AND  MANCEUVftES.  23 

similar  to  light  infantry.  It  becomes  of  great  value  in 
coveriug  the  retreat  of  an  army,  or  in  olistructing  the 
advance  of  the  enemy  ;  and  in  broken  and  wooded 
countries,  where  light  cavalry  becomes  almost  iiscleeff-, 
tlie  mounted  rifleman  bccomctj  indis])cnsab!c' to  an  ar- 
my. By  having  this  arm  asoociatod  with"  lipfht  caval- 
ry and  horse  artillery,  the  organization  beconie8.com- 
plete  for  any  enterprise.  It  in  true  these  troops  when 
dismounted  are  inferior  in  compactness  to  infantrji. 
but  th<?ir  rapid  movements  cnible  them  freqnonlly -to 
take  the  enemy  by  surprise  and  thus. defeat  liim  bcfcK" 
he  has  time  to  perfect  his  dispositions  for  delence. 

It  is  of  the  lirst  importance  that  mounted  riiiemon 
should  be  taught  to  mount  and  dismount  with  rapidi^ 
ty  and  without  c6nfu.-ion,  and  that  the  liorse-holders' 
shoutd  understand  thoroughly  the  manngement  of 
horses,  so  as  to  prevent  their  Itecoming  frightened 
when  their  riders  arc  lighting  upon  foot. 

In  European  armies  it  hiv^  been  found  expedient  to 
have,  in  an  army,  a  corps  compo.sed  of  men  of  largo 
stature,  proterted  by  armor,  and  moxnited  upon  strong 
horses;  for,  in  a  charge,  weiglit  and  steadiness  are  -M' 
ten  of  move  importance  than  »pt?ed.  This  principle*, 
forgotten  during  the  eighteenth  century,  camcinto'no- 
lice  again  as  soon  as  it  was  perceived  what  advantage 
Napoleon  had  derived  by  giving  cuirasses  to  twelve  regi- 
ments of  cavalry. 

Heavy  cavalry,  from  the  weight  of  tlnir  armor  and 
size  of  their  horses,  are  unable  to  act  as  skirmishers  or 
escorts;  besides,  it  is  a  corps  too  expensive  to  be  use- 
lessly exposed  ;  but.  appears  with  cpnlidcnce  on  the 
field  of  battle,  where"  the  most  perilous  attacks  arc'  re- 
served for  it.  Its  duty  is  to  cliarge  squares  and  masses 
of  infantry,  and  from  its'  weight,  break  through  the  en- 
emy's cavalry ;  on  which  account  some  experienced 
generals  have  considered  that  it  would  bo  of  great  ad*- 
vantage  to  arm  heavy  cavalry  with  lances,  as  being  the 
weapon  best  fitted  for  a  charge.* 

Dragoons  wore  originally    intended  to   act  both  as 


24  REMARKS  UPON  CAVALRY 

horse  and  foot  soldiers,  to  charge  in  line  with  the 
steadiness  of  cuirassiers,  to  skirmish  with  the  activity 
of  hussnrs,  and,  when  dismounted,  to  be  equal  to  any 
infantry.  After  much  loss  of  time  and  great  expense, 
it  was  found  that  only  an  inferior  body  of  troops  had 
been  obtained;  and  the  dragoons  of  the  present  day 
are  only  a  mixed  cavalry,  sufficiently  strongly  mount- 
ed to  charge  with  advantage,  and  which,  being  unen- 
cumbered with  any  sort  of  armor,  can  be  employed  as 
skirmishers. 

Light  cavalry  was,  for  a  length  of  time,  in  many 
countries,  an  irregular  force  ;  but  when  the  inconven- 
ience of  having  undisciplined  troops  with  an  army  be- 
gan to  be  felt,  and  that  petty  engagements  became  less 
frequent,  they  were  gradually  embodied  into  regi- 
ments, and  disciplined* 

Whatever  system  may  be  adopted  with  .respect  to 
the  formation  of  cavalry,  it  is  certain  that  a  nunierous 
cavalry,  whatever  may  be  its  nature,  must  exercise  .a 
powerful  intluence  over  the  operations  of  a  war,  by 
spreading  terror  over  a  large  tract  of  country,  carrying 
off  convoys,  rendering  the  enemy's  communication 
difficult,  if  not  impossible,  and  thus  destroying  all  the 
harmony  which  might  exist  in  hisenterprises  and  move- 
ments. In  short  almost  all  the  same  advantages  may 
be  procured,  by  a  proper  use  of  cavalry,  as  would  be 
obtained  by  a  general  rising  of  the  population  ;  that  Is," 
constantly  harrassing  the  flanks  and  rear  of  the  enemy, 
and  preventing  their  general  from  calculating  anything 
with  certainty. 

In  this  respect,  Russia  has  great  advantages  over  her 
neighbors,  as  well  by  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the 
horses  of  the  Don,  as  by  the  nature  of  the  irregular 
militia  which  she  can  levy  at  any  moment.  These 
advantages  are  incalculable  ;  for  though  the  Cossacks 
are  of  little  use  in  the  shock  of  a  great  battle  (except, 
perhaps,  for  skirmishing  on  the  flanks,)  yet  they  are 
terrible  in  a  pursuit,  and  in  a.  war  of  out-posts.  As 
long  as^the  Russians  had  only  a  few  regiments  ofirreg- 


'     TACTICS  AN'D  >f  ANvSUVRES.  2a 

ukrs,  tlmiv  utility  was.unklio%vn,  hut  when  their  nurrj- 
bVr  bccifmc  increas'cd  to  fiftieeu  or  tweiit}'  thousaiw, 
their  importiujcc  bcgaJi  to  be  sensibly  felt,  cspo^^i^iily 
in'  countries  where  the  popululion  was  not  hOestile  to 
khC'tn,  for'a  genivral  opposed  to  tliem  is  never  cu^rtain'of 
ihp".  &afc  arrival  cvr  execution  of  Lis  orders:  his  convoys 
are»alwaj;s  in  danger,  and  his  opnations  uncdrtaiir. 

Volunteer  corps  ot'hussarsor  lancers,  levied  and^or* 
trauizcd  ill  ihe  breaking  out  of  a  war,  ably  led  "by  hardy 
chiefs,  su<-h  as  Tettcnboni,  in  theCTemian  war  of  1813, 
would  fulfil  nearly  the  same  purposes. 

Austria  Jias  also,  in_thc  Hungarians,  Transylra*- 
nims,  and  Croatians,  a  resource  which  other  States 
have  nat  got ;  however,  the  services  performed  by  the 
mounted  L-^ndwehr  prove  that  a  great  deal  can  \fc  ob- 
tained from  this  species  of  cavalry,  were  it  only  to  re- 
lieve the  regular  cavalry  from  its  accessory  duties,  such 
as.  escorts,  detachments  for  convoys,  flankers,  order- 
lies, &,c.  England  possesses  a  fine  nucleus  for  such  u 
corps  in  her  yeomanry. 

All  that  may  be  said-  with  respect  to  the  formation 
(^f  infantry,  may  appl_y;  to  cavalry,  with  the  exception 
of  the  following  modification^  : 

1.  Lines  deployed  in'cchij|uier  or  in  echelon,  are 
much  more  suitable  for  cavalry  th^n  a  line  without  in- 
tervals; whilst  for  inf;intry,  a  line  deployed  in  cchi-* 
quier  would  be  too  disseminated,  and  even  dangerous, 
if  cavalry,  were  to  penetrate  and  take  its  battalions  in 
'lank,  so  that, the  formation  of  infantry  in  echiquier 
is  only  safe  as  a  preparatory  movement  before  approach- 
ing the  enemy,  or  else  for  lines  in  column  of  attack, 
able  {o  defend  themselves  in  every  direction  against 
cavalry.  However,  whether  the  formation  in  echi- 
quier  be  preferred,  or  that  of  lines  without  intervals, 
the  distance  of  the  several  lines  from  one  another 
should  be  sufficient  to  prevent  confusion,  arising  from 
the  rapidity  with  which  cavalry  is  driven  back  in  case 

22 


26  REMARKS  IfPON  CAVALR-y 

.  -•  ,  .  . 

f  a  "Chai-gc not  succeeding-.  lb  should,  hov^jcveo-,  |k.* 
:  bscvvcd,  t-hat  in  t)ic  forniatiidn  by  cchiquicr,'the  dte- 
.  iHceVinay-be  less  than  ia  lilies  without'  intervals-;  and 
rhat  in  no  case  should  the  second  line  be  ,without#n- 
t'ervals/but'shduld^bc  formed  in'eolujnns,  or  at  Ica.sl, 
leave  tw^  squadrons,  which  may  be  fqrmetl  in  columns 
upon  thfc  flanks  of-  each  rcgiuicitt,  to  facilitatq  the  Yai- 
iyi^g- of  the  first  line,  if  driven  back. 

2.  ,  A  column  of  attack,  composed  of  cavalry  ,^hotrId 
never  be  formed  hi  c\6se  coluinns  ;  but,  at  full  and  half 
-liis-tance  of  squadronsj  so  as  to  have  plenty  of  space  to 
wheel  and  charge.  This,  of  course,  is  only  applicable 
to  troops  ordered  {o  engage;  for  when  they  are  at  rest 
behind  the  line',  they  may  be  forn}Gd  in  close  column, 
so  as'to  take  up  less  spa.ce  of  ground  and  diminish  the 
.spaco  they  wouldjhave  to  go  over  io^Qngage;  but  it  must 
be  clearly AinderBtood,  that'  these'-  .masses  should  be 
sheltered  from  artillery.,    *   .»  -     • 

3.  In  consequence  of  a  flank  attack  being  more  to 
be  feared  with  respect  to  cavalry,  than  an  engagement 
of  infantry  against  infantry,  it  is  necessary  to  estab- 
lish, upon  the  extremities  of  a  line  of  cavalry,  a  few. 
squadrons  echeloned. by  plato2his,  so'^as  to  be  able  to 
fornix  by  facing  to  the  right  o'r  left,  against  the  enemy, 
who  flight  endeavor  io  disturb  the  flank. 

4.  *Fqj  the  same'  reason,,  it  is  necessary  to  know 
vvhep  to'or^er  a  few  squ.^drons  to.  charge  the  flank  of  a 

*  line  of  cavalry  which  is  being  attacked:  if  there  is  a 
corps  of  irregular  cavalry,  it  should  be  especially  Re- 
served for  this  UH<j  in  a  battle  ;  as,  for  such  a  purpose, 
it  is  worth  as  much  as,  and  perliaps  more,  than  regu- 
lar troops.  ..  '■  .     "        . 

An  important  ob.^crvatien  is  that  especially  with  res- 
pect to  cavalry,  the  command  should  extend  in  depth 
rattfer  than  in  length  ;  that  is  to  say,  supposing  a  divis- 
ion  of  t.vo  brigades  to  be  deployed,  it  would  not  rr 
correct  for  them  to  form  line  one  in  rear  of  the  other, 
but  each  brigade  should  have  two  regiments  in  the 
^rst  line,  and  two  in  the  second  ;  thus  each  unity  of 


TACtlt^' AND  MA^CEUVrxEf.  .'" 

th^'liiic  would  h&vc  it?:  proper  rcKeA-c  in  tear  ot it-aii  ad- 
vantagc^which  caiMiot  hvu  be  apprrt  iated,  for  the  evenjt-- 
of  a  charge  are  so  various,  thnt  it  is  impossible  for  a 
rfcn.exaS  orticor  to  "Ho  master  of  lour  (*avaliy  reginicnts 
^o^loy'cd  in  a  single  line. 

If  it  be  deemed  advisable  to  ibim  the  division  int-- 
foi^r  lines,  each  brigadc^ishould  bo  formed  in  a  column 
of  regiments,  in  order  ths^tthe  ,s£U)ic.pr4nciplc'pi'uii'itv 
eould  be  better  preserved.  In  a  , wooded  or  ^broken 
country,  where  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  cnvarry",  it 
will  frequently  t>t5  necessary  to  form  regiments  in  col- 
umns of  squadrons  for  the  chftrgc,  in  order  that  jcof- 
»iiels  may  the  m.ofc.  easily  m-astcr  their  command:. 
"CircuuVstahces  will  ^Tso  arise  where  the  fprmation  c' 
squadron'-'"  ■■^I'mins  of  platoons  will  .becoine  necc-- 
f5ar^,  but  ioo^  arc  well  drilled,  and   the  cottr>- 

try  iR  Ru.ii:  iciuiy  oi^'en,  a  rcluom  of  regiments,  ha-' 
many  advantagcg  ia  a-  gxaiid  "qhargc^  The^distarijj.- 
between  the  lines  should  be  regulated  b}'  flie  ixatnre  o 
the  ground.  If  possible,, each  line  sho.uld  be  reserve  1 
Tromthe  enemy's  fire  until  the  charge  commences,  bvr, 
the  nK)ral  effect  will  be  increased  if  the  enemy  sees  aH 
the  line.s  advancing  hefore  th^  first  Ti«e  comes  in  ac- 
tual coniart.  Tn  case  cavalry  is  fighthigin  conjunction 
with  infantry,  all  the  lines  may  char  g-e  if  it  isthough'' 
advisable;  but  if  fighting  alone,  one  line  should.br 
held  in  jreserve  as  ei  basis  on  which  t\\e  others  c^r- 
rally-  *         •"       "      «     -   "  "    "  -  J* 

The. nature  of  conflict  shouKl  also  regulate  theimm- 
bcj  of  lines, fol-  ini^trance,if  fighting  in  conjunction  with 
infantry,  two  or  three  lines  will  sufliee,  and  frequently 
one  line  will  attain  ,a  great  object,  but  if  cavalry-  is 
fighting  alone,  it  must  depend  upon- its  own  resourceis, 
and  must  have  three  or  four  lines  in-  arder  to  reduc-o" 
the  chahc'cs  of  disaster.  '  .•       '-    - 

In  the  preceding  paragraphs   the  variou^  formation^ 

-mentioned  are  only  suggested,  and.  ofiiceis  of  expeYr- 

'ience  will   readily  perceive  whether  these. or  other  for- 

mationa  are  adapted  to  his^purposes,  and  if  these  are 


S^  rvEMARKS  U?ON  GA-VAliRY 

suitable  he  x5aii  easily  judge  which  are  most  favorable 
for  the  particular  action  in  which  he  is  to  ■  eiigagc. 
Most  of  the  actions  referred  to  in  this  book,  were  on 
European  soil,  where  but  few  fences  obstruct  move- 
ments of  troops,  but  in  this  country  03^  always  having 
active  men  to  precede  the  head  of  each  column  to  re- 
move such  obstructions,  troops  can  be  movedwith  con- 
siderabl-e  celerity. .  For  instance  :  suppose  a  regirhent 
to  advance  in  line  "through' a  field  having  a  fence  on 
the  side  it  is  approaching — by  sending  a  few  good  m.eh 
a  sufficient  number  of  gaps  can  be  made  to  pass 
through  by  the  right  or  loft  of  squadrons,  bearing  to 
the  front,  and  the  line  coUld  be  promptly  reformed  on 
the  other  side,  of  course  such  obstructions  are  ombar- 
assing,  but  are  by  no  means  insurmountable. 

The  formation  heretofore  mentioned  supposes  the 
brigade  to  consist  of  four  regiments.  If  it  consists  of 
five  regiments  we  might  place  the  fifth  regiment  in  a 
third  line,  or  we  might  have  three  regiments  in  the  first 
line  and  two  in  the  second. 

Two  essential  maxims  are  generally  allowed  respect- 
ing engagements  of  cavalry  against  cavalry.  The 
first  is,  that,  sooner  or  later,  the  first  line  must  be 
brought  tack  ;  for  even'werc  it  to  succeed  most  brilli- 
antly in  a  charge,  it  is  probable  that  the  enemy,  by  op- 
posing new  squadrons,  would  force  it  to  rally  in  rear 
of  the  second' lino.  The  second  maxim  is,  that,  tlie 
troops  and  commanders  being  equal  in  merit,  the  vie- 
lOry- will  remain  to  him  who,  having  the  last  squad- 
rons in  reserve,  will  know  the- decisive  moment  when 
to  make  them  charge  the  flanks  of  the  enemy's  line  al- 
ready engaged   with  his. 

At  the  battle  of  Wachau,  near  Leipzig,  on  the  16th 
October/  1R13,.  two  Russian  regiments  of  light  cavalry 
were  posted  in  two  lines  in  front  of  a  small  brook  or 
drain  which  ran  from  Gossa  towards  Pleiss.  The  banks 
happened  to  be  swampy,  and  could  only  be  passed 
with  difficulty,  and  by  a  leap  across  awide  drain  with 
the  exception  of   causeways   made   in  two   or   three 


TACTICS  AND  MANOEUVRES'.  C^J 

places  by  the  farmer*!  for  agricultural  purpo'-e.-*.  This 
rtbgtaclc  was  only  partial,  and,  at  a  few  lumdrcl  yards 
to  tlic  right,  nearer  Gossa,  it  ceased  to  he  ai>  impedi- 
ment^ On  a  hill  facing  it,  was  formed  thcwhoie  corps 
of  Latoijr  Maiibourg,  amountinn;  to  5,000  horse.  Mu- 
r^had  taken  the  command,  and  began  to  descend  the 
hiTl,  directing  his  iUtack  upon  the  two  Ru?siai\  rcgi- 
mcnl.s  at  its  foot..  The  French  advanced  in  line  of 
regiment*;  cortainly  in  one  body  only,  that  is,  with.n<5 
isccond  line  or  reserve.  No  doubt  they  expected  to 
dispose  oftheir  first  opponents  easily.  '  The  narrow- 
iiess  of  the  front  to  be  attacked,  as  well  as  the  nature 
of  the.  ground,  caused  this  powerful  force  to  crowd 
iwto  one  dense  mass  before  they  came  in  contact  with 
the  Russian  dragoons  ;  these  were  overwhelmed  and 
driven  ticross  the  swamps,  or  oyer  the  causeways. — 
Many  of  the  rearmost  werc^  killed,  biU  the  rest  rallied 
as  soon  as  they  crossed  the  brook.  The  laneers,  who 
were  in  thcfjccond  line,  retired  by  their  left  to  another 
causeway,  Iiut  did  not  cross  it,  and  formed  again. 

But  the  enemy  were  unexpectedly  checked  by  thig 
unforeseen  obstacle  ;  their  crowding  and  confusion  in- 
creased, and,  at  that  moment,  a  Russiaif  regiment 
5f  hu.sears  appeared  in  their  rt^u  This  caused  a 
panic.  The  unwieldy  mass  became  noisy  and,  at- 
tempted to  retire  ;  the  Russian  light  cavalry  in*<taiUly» 
followed  .thcni.  The  Emperor  Alexander,  who  stood 
on  the  hill  above,  seized  this  opportunity  to  sefid  of?' 
his  own  escort  of  Gossacks  of  the  Guard,  amounting 
to  several -squadrons,  who  passed  the  stream  at  a  fa- 
vorable spot  near  Gossa,  and  took  the  retiring  mas.o  in 
flank.  This  completed  the  panic,  which  then  became 
a  flight,  and  the  fugitives  did  not  draw  their .  bridles 
till  they  had  regained  the  protection  of  their  own  in- 
fantry^.- 

La.tour  Maubourg  received  a  severe  wound,  which, 
disabled  him  for  life ;  Murat  was  in  great  danger  of 
being  taken,  and  six  guns  fell  into  the  hands  of 
the  Cossacks. 


S(»  REMARKS  UPOK  pAVALRY 

Thus  5000  of  tlie  French  caralr.y,  led  by  Murat  in, 
person,;  were  foiled  by  an  insignificant  obstacle.  They,, 
were  seized  with  apanic,  and,  fo-r  want  of -a  second  Hnfe 
on_^ which  to  rally,  and  from  which  to  take  a  fresh  de- 
parture— a  precaution  without  wliich  no  cavalry  at- 
tack sh-ould  be  made — thgy  were  obliged  to  abandpn 
tlicir  enterprise,  and  fly  before  a  fprce  of  light  cavalry, 
v/hich,  altogieriier,  could  not  have"  amounted  to.  2,0U0 
men.  *,  ' 

It  is  upoxx  these   two  truths,  that  a'propcj  idea  uTay 

'3  based  of  the  system  of  formation  the  mo&f  suitable 

for  leading  a  large  corp^  of  cavalry  to  the  charge.       ". 

Whatever  systefn  may  be  adopted,  care^inu^t  Fc  ta* 
ken  not  to  deploy  large  coyps  of  cavalry  i-n  lines  with,- 
out  intervals,  for  they  are  diflicult  ma§ses  tO- manag?  ;■ 
and  if  the  fk'st  line'  failed  in  its  charge,- the- sc"cond 
would  be  drivjeniack'  without  being  ahle  io  draw  th^ 
sword.  '        •        . 

At  Oiiat^au-Thierry,  in.  1814,  the  Prussian'gencral, 
Horn,  with  twenty -four  squadrons,  was  ordered, to 
keep  the  French  in  check^untif  the  Russian  general, 
Sacken, could  cross  th?  Marne,  after  his  defeat  at  Mont- 
merail,  30*h  January,  1814.  He  fornijcd  these  troops 
in  two  lines  of  t\\^e  squadrons  each,  without  intci*» 
vals.  The  whole  first  line  advanced.to  the  altacli.. 
'J'he  French  waited  till  it  came  to  a  proper  distSjieie, 
ancl  routed  it.  .  ,Th€se  sq'uadrons  threw  the  second 
line  into  disorder,  and  carried  it  away, ^je// t??^//,  yi 
every  direction  over  the  plain.      "      ,  ,  *    - 

If  an  attack  of  cavalry  should  be  spirited,  it^  pursuit 
should  not  be  less  so  ;  but  no  -line  of  cavalry  should 
follow  up  a  pursuit,  unless  it  has  a  re-sca-vc.  If-  it  has-. 
no  reserve,  it  should  promptly  rally ,*and  follow  up  tlie 
pursuit  wit^- only  part  of  its  forces.  '• 

The  excessive  negligence,  on  the  part  ofl^ngli^h 
jjavaJry  officers,  in  not  supporting  their  attacks' by -a 
resci've,'  frequently,  during  the  Peninsular  war,'  pro- 
duced the  most  pernicious  consequences.  The  follow- 
ing case  was  so  glaring,  that  Lord  WcUiiigton  ordered 


TACTICS  AND  MANOEUVRES.  31 

a  court  of  inquirj'-  upoii  it  :  In  the  montk  of  June. 
1812i'  Majt)V  General  felaJc  was  ordered  to  advance 
frdm'LIera  in  the  direction  of  La  Grrtnga,  to  cover  ^ 
reconnoi,ss;;::cc»  F-jr  thi*i  purpose  he  took  with  hinV 
two  reginlcnts  of  .cavalry.    * 

General  LMllcmandc,  having  a  like  object,  came  for- 
ward also  with  tw<f*rGgi)ncntE  of  French  dragoons,  on 
thcieidc"  of  ♦Valence  do  las'Torrcns.  Slade,  hearing 
'.hat  the  French  cavalry  wa.s  "so  near,  attacked  it  anP. 
drove  it  back  bfeyond  the  defile  of-Maquill-a,  a  dislanco 
of  cjght  inilcsjliis  troo'pcri?,  in  the  heat  of  the  pursuit, 
brcalvh^^  irrtp  a  confused  mass.  But  Lallcinande  had 
here  his  r<^tfcrvc  in  hand,«Bnd  attacking  ilic  disorderly 
English  horse,  totally  routed  it. 

Oif  ,thc  other  hand,"  kistances  can  be  given  where 
*ivalry  .in  .small  force  rcsisrted  the  ativancc  of  largr 
Ijodies  of  froop.s  of  all  arms  ;  as  the  case  of  General 
Bfhg^in  JCcntucky,  in  the  autumn  of  1862,  when  le.'^.s 
than  ona  tho'Usand"ca\arry  prevented  General  BuelTf^ 
vast  army  from  inovinn'  fasiter  than  an  average  of  fou)- 
or  five  miII59  a'da}'.  .Again,  when  General  liosccrans 
advanced  from  Nstshvilk,  to  Murfrccsboro,.  in  the  lat- 
tci"*paTt  of  the  r^amf'  year,  cavalry  so  retarded  his'ad- 
vancc  a.s  to  coMipoi  Itim  to  iii6vc  equally  slow,  fighting 
his  way  stb]^  by  step'os  he  advanced.' 

When,  after  a  victory,  infantry  should  continue  to 
resist,  the  cavalry  should  not  cliarge  them,  but  endea- 
vor to  reach  the  head  of  the  disordered  masses,  and  cu' 
off  their  retreat,. "for  the  great  art  of  pursuit  is  not  to 
cause  the  enemy  to  fly  with  rapidity,  but  to  induc*e  him 
to  hold  together  for  some  timf",  whibs^t  his  escape  is  ren- 
dered impossible  ;*or  else,  by  dividing  the'eneiny's  col- 
umn, to  get  between  them  and  beat  them  in  detail. 

,«rhe  mo^t  .sinking  example,  perhapsj'df  the  results 
produced  by  Ji  vigorous;  pursuit,  is  that  produced  by 
tliC  French  army  after  the  double  battle  of  Aucrstadt 
and  Jdna,  18th  of  October, -ISOG.  The  Prussian  army 
separated#into  several  corps,  was  pursued,  without 
ces>iing,  -in    every    dg-ection ;■  could    rally    nowhere, 


88  REMARKS  UPON  CAVALHY 

and  capitulated  at  Erfuil,  Madgeburg,  Lubeck,  P|-cng- 
lovv,  and  in  Westphalia.  -Tlie  French  cavalry,  f^l- 
lowed  close  by  an  indefatigable  infantry,  whiph 
marched  from  ten  to  Iweive  leagues  a  day,  hadcrossc.d 
the  Saale,  the  Elbe,  and  .the  Oder,  and  in  spite  of, so 
many  divergent  marches,  found  itself  one  month  af- 
ter the  battle,  upon  the  borders  of  the  Vistula.  The 
two-thirJs  of  the  Prussian  Monarchy  were  conqu(?te(5, 
and   its  army  nearly  annihilated. 

Of  all  the  branches  of  the  service,  cavalry  ap^p^aTS 
to'  be  the  one  most  difficult  to  manage.  * 

Incapable  of  defending  a  position  by  itself,  unable 
e,ven  to  engage  on  many  Itflids  of  ground,  casijy  dis- 
united, almost  totally  dependent  on  their  horses,  no 
corps  so  much  requires  discrimination  and  zeal"  in  its- 
leaders.  This  art  requires,  in  fact,  a  thorough  knowl- 
edge of  this  branch  of  the  service,  and  a  quicknjc.ss 
of  eye  whicli  can  seize  rapidly  the  whole  of  a  move- 
ment, and    understand  all  its  consequences. 

^Looking  back  upon  the  European  wars  from  1792  to 
1815,  it  is  remarkable  what  little  advantage  those 
nations,  who  were  most  celebrated  for  their  cavahy. 
derived  from  it,  although  their  efforts  were  dircctct; 
against  one  which  was  supposed  to- possess  bad  horses 
and  worse  horsemen. 

The  Austrian  cavalry,  so  numerous  and  well 
mounted,  were  almost  always  decimated  ;  and,  even  in 
countries  best  suited  to  its  manoeuvres,  could  boast  of 
but  few  brilliant  engagements.  Their  generals  seemed 
to  have  forgotten  how  to  make  use  of  them  in  masses. 

The  Prussian  cavalry,  so  famous  in  the  days  of  the 
great  Frederick,  performed  no  one'  remarkably  'great 
feat  during  the  first  three  campaigns  of  the  French 
Revolution;  and  when,  after  two  years  of  peace,  it  ap- 
peared at  Jena  and  Auerstadt,  it  was  nearly  annihi- 
If^tcd. 

The  campaign  of  1814  began  under  the  worst  au- 
slices  for  the  French.  Invaded  by  all  the  European 
powers',  France  was  overrun  by  their  numberless   cav* 


TACTICS  AND  MAN'<EUVRES.  83 

airy  ;  but  what  ailvaiitagc  did  they  carry  ofl'  in  con- 
nection with  their  numerical  1  )rce  and  organization  1 
How  can  wc  explain  the  bold  manouvrcs  of  Napo- 
leon) and  his  success,  \yith  men  overcome  by  fatigue  I 
How  was  It  that,  his  army  was  not  destroyed  before 
Lavro  1  Why  did  the  allLci;,  with  their  numerotis 
cavalry,  suffer  the  rcverscit  of-  Montmerail,  Chateau- 
Thierry,  Craonnc,  Nangis  and  Montereau? 

The  reason  of  the  feeble  PUCcesH  of  their  cavalry  is 
easily  explained.  A  service,  whose  very  existence 
consistsiii  activity  and  boldncBs,  will  lose  all  its  vigor 
as  soon  as  the  operations  of  an  army  become  undeci- 
ded ;  and,  if  cavalry  played  so  great  a  port  under 
Frederic  and  Napoleon,  it  was  because  those  great 
men  never  allowed  that  body  to  engage  except  in 
strong  divisions,  and  never  waited  for  the"  enemy's 
attack,  but  always  anticipated  it  ;  .for  the  moral 
strength  of  cavalry  is  much  more  easily  alTcctcd  thai) 
that  of  infantry. 

We  have  stated  above,  that  the-  strength  of  cavalry 
consists  in  th(5  rapidity  and  steadiness  of  its  move- 
ments. It  should,  therefore,  take  up  a  position  which 
would  enable  it  to  see  everything  going  on,  and  allo%v 
it  to  be  perfectly  free  in  its  actions.  Besides,  no  boidj^ 
of  troops  should  be  able  to  approach  without-bein^ 
exposed  to  be  charged  ;  it  would  therefore  co)nmit  * 
serious  error,  were  it  to  support  its  wings  vi-ith  a  wood', 
vineyard,  a  yillage  accessible  to  the  enemy's  infantry. 
or  not  occupied  by  its  own.  If,  however,  unavoidable 
circumstances  forced  a  body  of  cavalry  to  do  so-,  it 
should  send  out  patrols,  so  as  to  be  warned  of  anv 
rnovemcnts  which  might  be  directed  against  it;  hut- 
should  the  enemy  appear  on  its  flanks,  the  position 
will  be  no  longer  tenable. 

At  the  battle  of  Kollin,  in  1756,  fifty-five  Prussian 
squadrons,  wishing  to  outflank  the  enemy's  lyght 
wing  and  take  it  in  rear,  overthrew  the  Austfian  cav- 
alry, and  continued  their  movement  between  the  wood 
of  Radovesnitz   and  a  ravine.     I'his  wood  was   lined 


U-^  REMARKS  UPON  CAVALRY 

with  Austrian  infantry,  who  took  the  -  Prussians  >in 
dank,  and  made  them  retire  with  a  loss-  of  fourteen 
hundred    men. 

-Although  ilie  ground  may  appear  to  be  level,  it  may 
contain  hollow  roadfe,  ditches,  marshy  spots,  which 
may  be  totally,  concealed  by  drifts  of  snow  or  the  height 
6f  the  cfops.  From  this  results  the  necfessity'of  hav- 
ing the  front  and  flanks  of  a-  position  thoroughly  re- 
connoilered-;  an.d  if  this  cannot  be  done  beforehand-) 
skirmishers  should  bo  sent  out  to  precede  the  troops 
as  they  approach  the  enemy.  "^  .  ^, 

.When  at  the  battle  of  Talavcra,-July,  1809,  Sir  Ar- 
Ihur  Wellcsley  -ordered  Anson's  brigade  of  cavalry, 
composed  of  the 53d. Light  Dragoons  and  the  Ist  Ger- 
man Hussars,  to  charge  the  head  of  Villatte's  columns, 
the  brigade  went  off  at  a  canter,  and,  increasing  the 
speed  an  it  advanced;  x6,do  headlong  against  the  ene- 
my; but'in  a  few  moments  it  came  upon  thfe  brink  of 
a  hollow  cleft,  which  was  not  perceptible  at  a  distance. 
The  French,  throwing  themselves  into  squares,  opened 
'hc-ir  fire.  'Colonel  Arenstchild,  commanding  the  Hus- 
yars,  an  officer  of  forty  years'  experience,  promptly 
reined  up  at  the  brink;  but  the  23d,  under  Colonel 
iSej-mour,  continued  their  impetuous  career,  men  and 
iwjrses  falling  over  each  other  in- dreadful  confusion. 
^  The  success  of  a  charge  depends  upon  a  well  regu- 
1-ated  rapidity,  accelerated  by  degrees,  added  to  a  per- 
fect alignment,  which  "will  enable  the  whole  line  to 
reach  the*  enemy  at  the  same  time.  But  in  many 
cases,  the  greater  or  lesser  degree  of  boldness  of  the 
meai,  and  speed  of  tho  horses,  prevent  this;  and  a 
charge  in  line  is  often  only  a  rapid  succession  of 
charges,  of  whicli  the~  brayost- men  form  the, salient 
points.  These  a*e  the  reasons  which  so  often  causp 
undeeided  charges,-  and-  should  prevent  any  being 
made  on  too  exteiided  a-fiont.  The  failure  of  a  charge 
is  x^t  always  attributable  to  the  cowardice  of  the 
horsemen.  Slippery,  unequal  ground,  renders  the 
maioh  difficult ;  rains,  snows,  thaws^  cause  the  horsCvS 


TA0TIC8  AND  MaIJqEUVRES.  35- 

to  slip  ;  many  of  tliem  become  frightened;  in  such 
cases  no  vigor  can'  exist  in  the  niOvemcnt.s.  Sbme- 
times  great  dif^ordcr  will  be  occasioned  by  beginning 
the" charge  at  too  great  a  distance  ;  for,  the  troop  lead- 
ers, chirgi^ig  under  the  enemy's  fire,  Lose  their,  point's 
of.  direclion  ;  the  soldiei;  no  longer  marclios  straight 
before  him  ;  the  intervals  between  the  squadrons  dre 
lost,  and  they  get  jammed  up  together;  the  killed  and 
wounded  delay  the  general  movements;  the  cneroy 
charge ;  the  disorder  b(fComes  complete. 

The  gradual  incrcetse  of  speed  in  a'  charge  should 
be  attended  to  ;  otherwise,  both  men- and  horses  wiH 
be  breathless  when  they  reach  the  enemy.  In  most 
cases,  befdre  engaging,  the  cavalry  will  have  made  a 
tedious  march,  "^^hc"  horses,  worn  ont  with  want  oif 
food  anJ  the  weight  of  their  riders,  will,  if  u.- elessly 
gallopped,  be  too  much  fatigued,  after  one  or  two  char- 
ges, to  attempt  any  decided*  movements  during  the 
remainder  of  the  day;  besides,  if  the  charge  is.imme- 
'jjately  begun  at  a  gallop,  the  men  cannot  be  made  to 
keep  line.  It  was  the  deep  conviction  of  this  truth 
which  caused  General  Lasalie,  one  of  the  best  cavalry 
officers  oi'  his  day,  on  seeing  a  body  of  the  enemy's  cav-* 
airy  charging  at  full  gallop  for  a  long  distance,  to  ex  clafm 
— "  There  go  lost  men!"  and  it  was  soon  after  com 
plctely  routed  by  its  opponents,  who  had  advanced  at 
a  trbt..  There  arc,  however,  a  few  cases  in*  which, 
whatever  state,  the  cavalry  be  in,  the  charge  must  be 
begun  at  a  gallop.  For  exariiplc  :  when  an  axiibushed 
enemy  suddenly  attacks  cavalry,  it  must  then  incet 
the  attack  at  the  height  of  its  speed,  to  oppose  tKcen- 
emy  with  a  shock  equal  to  its  own. 

In  the  retreat  of  the  allies  from  Bautzen,  May,  1813, 
Blucher,  having  passed  his  main  column  across  tho 
bridge  -and  through  the  defile  of  Haynau,  still  de-< 
fendedthe  entrance  to  the  village  with  the  Skirmishers 
of  his  rear  guard  ;  but  finding  that  tlio  nature  ol  the 
sfTOund  in  rear  of  Haynau  favored  his  purpose,  he 
formed   five  regiments  of  cavalry  in  .mass  behind  the. 


86  RKMARKS  UPON  CAVALRY 

village  of  Baiulmansdorf,  in  a  situation  completely/ 
concealed  from  the  enemy's  view  by  the  village  and 
a-n  intervening  rise  of  ground.  This  ambuscade  was 
formed  obliquely  to^the  line  of  retreat  of  the  main  col- 
umn, which  traversed  an  uninclosed  country,  and  to 
the'  southward  of  that  line.  <When  all  was  arranged', 
three  regiments  forming  the  rear  guard  gave  up  the 
bridge  at  Haynau  and  retired,  following  the  main  col- 
umn to  a  good  rear  guard  position,  on  the  direct  road 
to  Liegnitz,  a  few  miles  from  Haynau.  Here  .'they 
halted  and  showed  front,  inviting  an  attack. 

As  soon  as  Ney's  advanced  guard  had  passed  the 
defile,  entered  the  plain,  and  deployed  to  attack  the 
Prussian  infantry  rear  guard,  a  preconcerted  signal 
was  given — the  burning  of  a  windmill.  The  allied 
<^avalry,  masked  till  that  moment,  now*  deployed  in 
two  lines  on  the  right  of  t^e  enemy,  and  moved  rap- 
idly onward  to  attack  hirii  in  flank.  It  was  necessary 
that  the  charge  should  be  made  at  a  gallop  the  whole 
way,  60  as  not  to  give  the  French  time  to  recover ; 
and  the  success  of  this  charge  Was  a  loss  to  the  French 
of  1500  men  and  eleven  guns. 

The  art  of  moving  cavalry — which  consists  in  con- 
cealing its  movements,  and  in  rapidly  bringing. to- 
gether a  superior  force  u]jon  the  w^eak  points  of 
the  enemy  ;  in  avoiding  useless  engagements,  in 
order  to"  overwhelm  him  ;  keeping  part  in  reserve,  and 
making  it  suddenly  appear  at  the  decisive  moment — 
this  art  cannot  be  so  ably  exercised  in  a  flat  and  open 
covintry,  although  this  is  supposed  to  be  best  far  cav- 
alry movements.  Districts  consisting  of  undulating 
plains,  sprinkled^  here  and  there,  with  woods,  villages 
and  farms,  where  the  hills  have  gentle  slopes,  and  the 
valleys  are  tolerably  wide,  will  enable  superior  officers 
to  obtain  the  greatest. success  with  inferior  forces*   . 

Cavalry  should  never  appear  before  the  eneiiiy  ex- 
cept to  engage.  To  keep  it  exposed  whole  hours, 
without  charging,  is  to  misunderstand  the  spirit  of 
this  service  and  to  destroy   its    rnorat  cotirage.     The 


TACTICS  AND  MANOEUVRKS.  87 

men  cannot  become  animated  at  the  sight  of  their 
■compaiiions  killed  or  wounded,  nor  the  hoiscs  fron) 
the  effect  of  i\ie  cannon  balls  and  shells  wliich  fall 
among^  them.  -It  is  tnic  that  cavalry  cannot  ahvavfi 
be  kept  slicltered,  in  an  action,  from  tlie  enemy's  fii-e 
until  the  inoment  for  charging.  Its  presence  is  some- 
times indispensable  in  certain  points  which  cannot 
remain  unprovided  with  troops,  and  there  may  be  no 
rising  ground  to  conceal-  it;  but  this  circumstance 
must  be  considered  an  unfortunate  exception.  Napo- 
leon's battles  present  many  examples  of  a  similar  USo 
of  cavalry,  which  often  obliged  it  to  be  renewed,  and 
finally  caused  its  ruin.  By  a  natural  consequence  of 
the  principle  above  stated,  cavalry  should  not  be  posted 
on  the  ground  it  is  to  defend,  but  in  the  rear  of  it. 
The  mechanism  of  cavalry  engagements  requires  that 
changes  sliould  succeed  one  another  rapidly,  so  that, 
its  efforts  being  continual,  the  advantage  may  remain 
with  the  most  obstinate  ;  but,  to  effect  this,,  there  must 
be  a  second  line  in  support,  and  in  many  cases  aTC- 
serve.  The  necessity  for  this  support  lies,  first  of  all, 
in  the  human  heart ;  men  expose  themselves  to  danger 
with  greater  confidence,  if  they  feel  that  they  have 
companions  in  their  rear,  ready  to  back  them  ;  it  is 
requisite,  also,  from  the  uncertainty  of  the  success  of 
cavalry,  and  in  consequence  of  the  disorder  which  fol- 
lows even  among  conquerors  ;  so  that,  an  able  enemy, 
possessing  a  reserve,  would  be  certain  of  obtaining 
the  final  advantage  over  an  imprudent  cavalry  which 
had  attacked  it  without  having  the  same  resource. 
Besides,  the  rally,  after  a  defeat,  would  be  excessively 
difiicult,  if  not  impossible. 

It  should,  however,  be  observed,  that,  in  case  there 
was  no  second  line  of  cavalry,  the  first  might  take  re- 
fuge in  rear  of  its  infantry.  Still,  in  such  a  case,  great 
loss  would  be  sustained,  and  the  advantage  not  easily 
obtained  again.  At  the  battle  of  Wurzburg,  the 
French  cavalry,  without  having  a  reserve,  engaged  the 
Austrian  cavalry,  whom  they  drove  back;  but  tho  lat- 


§3  EEM ARKS  UPON  CAVALRY 

ter  had  formed  a  second  line,  which,  having  re-estab- 
•lisliedthe  engagement,  not  only  repulsed  the  French 
Cavalry  but  completely  demoralized  it ;  for,  although 
the  fire  of  the  infantry  kept  the  conquerors  in  check, 
no  efforts  of  General  Jourdan  could  bring  back. his 
discouraged  cavalry  to  the  charge. 

The  second  line  is  generally  from  30(Xto  400  yards 
in  rear  of  the  first,  and  this  distance  is  considered  suf- 
ficient to  prevent  the  support  being  disordered,  should 
the  first  line  meet  with  a  repulse;  its  wings  should 
extend  beyond  those  of  the  latter;  this  formation  will 
enable  it  to  charge  the  enemy's  troops,  in  the  event  of 
their  taking  the  wings  of  the  first  line  in  flanker  rear ;  the 
support  may  also,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first  line, 
have  columns  in  rear  of  its  wings  ;  and,  ^Vhen  the  first 
line  chargers  at>a  gallop,  the  second  follows  at  a  trot. 

When  one  body  of  cavalry  has  defeated  another,  the 
conquerors  should  rally  and  mancauvre,  to  attack  the 
flank  of  the  troops  which  the  enemy  protected;  it 
was  fo  this  m.anosiivre  that  Conde,  at  the  age  of  22. 
owed  the  victory  of  Rocroi.  After  having  defeatct" 
the  Spanish  cavalry  of  the  left  wing>  he  ordered  Gas- 
sion  to  continue  the  pursuit  with  part  of  the  first  lint . 
whilst  he  himself,  with  the  remainder  and  the  support, 
broke  through  the  German  end  Ttalianjufantry-.  Hav- 
ing then  learnt  that  his  left-wing  was  defeated  ajid 
.pursued  b}'  the  Spanish  cavahy  of  the  opposite  wing, 
he  passed  in  rear  of  the  latter,  charged  th'eni,  and  re- 
took their  prisoners.  ■ 

There  only  remained  on  the  field  four  veteran  rogi- 
ments  of  Spanish  infantry,  who  were  formed  into  a 
solid  mass,  and  defended  by  eighteen  pieces  of  can- 
non, Conde  rallied  his  fatigued  cavalry,  and  after  a 
fourth  charge,  succeeded  in  penetrating  the  ranks  of 
this  hrave  infantry  ;  his  victory  was  complete.     , 

But  such  manoeuvres  require  a  great-  deal  of  cool- 
ness in  the  commanding  officer  ;  for  a  man  is  easily 
carried  away  by  the  appearance  of  the  first  advantage, 
and  neglects  the  opportunity  of  obtaining  a   greater. 


TACTICS  AND  MANOEUVUESi  89 

From  the  above  it  will  be  Been  that,  in  general,  a 
charge  of  cavalry  should  be  directed  upon  the  extrem- 
ity of  a  line,  and  not  upon  the  centre  ;  and  th;it  point 
which  will  soonest  enable  the  conqueror  to  cut  olfthe 
enemy's  line  of  retreat,  should  be  'the  one  selected  for 
attack. 

The  most  unfavorable  charge  ibr  cavalry,  »i.s  that 
which  is  directed  against  a  weJl  disciplined  infantry  ; 
for  infantry,  in  its  usual  formation,  present  about  t\v<> 
men  to  every  horsemali,  and  can  even  double  this 
number,  wheii  preparing  to  receive  cavalry.  Son*o 
.  tacticians,  struck  with  the  danger  to  which  infantry 
ie  exposed ■•  under  such  a  circumstance,  and  knowing 
the  injurious  iiaprcsaions  made  upon  young  soldiers 
by  the  menacing-  aspect  of  a  charge.,  have  proposed 
various  means  to:  defend  tjAom  from'-it. 

Amongst  others,  Oaebcrt-  proposed  to  fix  picquets, 
fastened  together  by  means  of  ropes,  in  front  of  the 
squares ;  and  BohsSn,who  'a  an  authority  in  cavalry 
movements,  approved  of  this  system  ;  but  any  one 
who  has  been  in  action,  knows  the  impossibility  ot 
making  use  of  either  of  the  above,  or  of  chevaux-dt- 
frise,  or  gf  crow's-feet,  which  v.ore  employed  when 
there  was  ho  rapidity  in  the  moveniionts.  It  is,  there- 
fore, only  bjiits  fire  and  able  formation,  that  infaotry 
can  expect  to  resist  cavalry. 

To  charge  infantry  there  arc  certain  favorable  mo- 
ments, which  should  be  instantly  seized,  and  wheh  its 
resistance  will  be  neither  long  nor  destructive  ;  these 
are  :  when  a  column  on  the  marcli  is  engaged  under 
a  well  directed  fire,  leaving  the  woundi?d  in  rear,  or 
appearing  to  hesitate;  it  should  then  be  taken  in 
flank;  such  was  General  Kellerman's  manwuvre  at 
Marengo.  He  was  in  line  with  a  feeble  brigade,  on 
the  right  flank  of  Desaix's  division,  and  concealed  by 
means  of  vines  hung  to  the  trees ;  the  9th  I^ight  In- 
fantry was  actively  engaged  with  a  column  of  Aus- 
trian grenadiers,  who  were  following  up  the  succesp 
which  had,  till  then,  been  obtained  by  the  Austrians, 


m    REMARKi-  UPON  CA7AIRY  TACTICS  AND  MAN«UVRE8. 

Kcllcrman  imnicdiately  formed  colutr.n,  left  in^ront, 
charged  and  dispersed  the  grenadiers,  which  decided 
the  victory  in  favor  of  the  French. 

Another  favorahh^  opportunity  for  chiirging  is,  when 
the  enemy's  line  is  altering  its  formation.  In  such  a 
case  no  time  sliould  be  lost,  but  the  charge  made  as 
rapidly  as  possible.. 

The  moral  state  of  the  enemy  should  always  be 
taken  into  account.  If  former  actions  have  proved  its 
valor,  no  attack  should  be  made  without  being  pre- 
ceded by  artillery,  otherwise  the  attacking  force  would 
subject  itself  to  serious  losses  without  any  result;  on 
the  other  hand,  a  dispirited  infantry  will  often  give 
way  :^t  the  mere  upprcach  of  a  body  of  cavalry.  In 
some  cases  cavalry  is  obliged  to  act  dismounted;  and 
althouirh  it  cannot  expect  to  he  equal  to  infantry,  it 
may  still  be  found  a  good  substitute.  Thus,  a  body 
of  cavalry,-  forming  the  rear  detachment  of  a  rear 
guard,  may  have  to  defend  a  bridge,  a  defile,  or  a  bar- 
ricade; whilst  the  remainder  of  the  rear  guard  contin- 
ues its  retreat ;  in  such  a  case  part  of  the  men  will 
have  to  dismount  and  keep  back  the  enemy  w-ith  the 
fire  of  their  carbines  ;  and  as  soon  as  they  consider  the 
rear  gunrd  in  safety,  tht-y  remount  and  rapidly  join  :i. 
In  liUe  manner  an  advance  guard  can  prevent  a  re- 
treating enemy  from  destroying  a  bridge,  or  making 
preparntions  for  defence  at  the  head  of  a  defile  ;  its 
tire. will  either  t^lop  t^csc  operations,  or  delay  them 
until  the  infantry  coracs  up.  In  this  manner  the 
French  dragoons,  having  dismounted,  prevented  the 
British,  in  the  retreat  to  Corunna,  1808,  from  blowing 
up  the  bridges  of -Pucnto  Fcrrera  and  Berleira ;  also, 
1811,  a  regiment  of  dismounted  cavalry  protected  the 
retreat  of  two  other  regiments  of  the  same  service, 
through  a  defile  near  Usagre  ;  but,  in  such  cases,  tho 
cavalry  soldier  acts  as  a  skirmisher,  docs  not  leave  his 
position,  fires  from  behind  some  natural  or  artificial* 
obstacle,  and  it  is  seldom  that  he  is  engaged  against 
other  troops  than  dismounted  cavalry,  iike  himself. 


RBCONNOISANCKS.  41 


RECONNOISANCES. 


A  reconnoisance  has  for  its  object  the  examination 
of  the  position,  strength,  movements  and  intentiona-jof 
the  enemy. 

To  be  able  to  reconnoitre  with  any  accuracy,  re- 
quires quickness  of  eye,  presence  of  mind,  a  great  deal 
of  prudence  and  resolution,  and  sometimes  even  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  warfare.  A  commander,  be- 
fore rtiaking  any  movement,  will  generally  use  every 
exertion  to  deceive  his  enemy ;  for  example,  if  a  gen- 
eral wishes  to  withdraw  his  army  from  the  face  of  the 
one  to  which  he  is  opposed,  he  will  generally  double 
and  advance  the  pickets  in  his  front,  in  order  the  bet- 
ter to  screen  his  movements.  It  will  thus  be  seen 
what  great  difficulty  attends  a  reconnoitering  party  in 
its  endeavors  to  ascertain  the  movements  and,  intentions 
of  an  enemy.  The  indications  discovered  frequently 
give  rise  to  very  varied  opinions  among  the  most  dis- 
tinguished and  experienced   officers. 

The  following  account  of  the  reconnoissance  which 
preceded  the  battle  of  Essling  in  1809,  will  illustrate 
this    point : 

"On  the  2lst  of  May,  between  twelve  and  one 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  Marshal  Massena  recannoiter- 
ed  the  line  of  outposts.  Various  reports  were  made  of 
a  rear  guard,  from  4000  to  5f)00  strong,  who  were  re-  . 
treating.  The  marshal  asked  Gen.  Pelet  what  he 
thought  of  it.  He  answered,  that  as  he  could  perceive 
a  glimmer  along  the  horizon,  extending  about  three 
miles,  it  must  bo  the  enemy's  bivouac  ;  and  that,  from 
the  works  carried  on  during  the  last  three  days,  added 
to  the  cannonade  of  the  previous  evening,  we  had  the 

2S 


42  RICONNOISANCES, 

whole  enemy  before  us,  but  that  it  was  easy  to  make 
certain  of  it  from  the  steeple  of  Aspern.  The  mar'shail 
went  up  there  and  recognizing  the  truth  of  his  obser* 
vations,  returned  to  the  Emperor.  At  daybreak  the 
Emperor  was  on  horseback.  The  marshals  around  him 
all  disagreed  as  to  the  enemy's  movements.  Lanncs 
considered  that  there  was  only  a  rear  guard,  of  from 
6000  to  8000  men,  which  ought  to  be  at  once  over- 
thrown. Bessieres  relied  on  the  reports  of  his  cavalry, 
who  had  assured  him  that  nothing  had  been  encoun- 
tered for  several  leagues.  Massena,  who  had  acquired 
experience  by  a  long  command  was  certain  that  the 
whole 'Austrian  ar;ny  was  in  front,  and  Mouton  agreed 
in  this.  Napoleon,  anxious  to  satisfy  himself,  advanc- 
ed beyond  the  ridge  of  Aspern  ;  but  he  could  get  nc 
further,  owing  to  the  enemy's  light  cavalry  having  ad- 
vanced since  daylight.  It  was  necessary  to  await  the 
cavalry  before  this  mask  could  be  penetrated.  Recon- 
noitering  his  own  position  Napoleon  was  continually 
between  the  outposts  and  the  bridges.  About  one 
o'clock  in  the  day  Gen.  Pelet  was  at  the  lines  of  the 
furthest  outposts.  Skirmishing  began;  the  ground 
o-radually  rising  in  front  of  him,  concealed  what  was 
going  on  beyond.  Suddenly  he  saw  three  heavy  masses 
directing  their  march  on  our  left  flank,  and,  as  they 
crowned  the  ridge,  forming  in  order  of  battle.  Thirty 
thousand  men  were  advancing  in  an  oblique  line  to- 
ward Aspern,  the  key  and  support  of  the  position.  He 
at  once  went  to  warn  the  marshal  of  the  approach  of 
the  columns,  which  in  five  minutes  would  be  upon 
him.  He  ordered  Gen.  Molitor  to  his  support,  and  an- 
nounced the  state  of  matters  to  the  Emperor. 

Had  the  opinions  of  Lannes  or  Bessieres  been  relied 
upon,  a  division  of  ten  thousand  men  would  probably 
have  been  pressed  forward  and  been  met  and  over- 
thrown by  the  advancing  columns  of  the  enemy.  To 
know  how  hard  to  press  the  pickets  in  these  cases,  and 
to  judge  by  their  actions  whether  they  are  a  mere  skel- 
eton left  to  cover  a  retreat,  or  whether  they  are  backed 


REC0NN0ISANCE8,  4« 

by  a  large  force  ready  for  battle,  requires,  as  wc  see, 
judgment,  experience  and  a  knowledge  of  war.  To 
learn  with  certainty,  it  is  frequently  necessary  to  send 
scouts  and  spies  around  to  the  enemy's  rear,  but  the 
length  of  time  necessary  to  get  information  in  this 
manner  frequently  causes  a  general  to  lose  the  best  op- 
portunity to  press  a  retiring  foe. 


44  IMPROTEMBNTS  £N 


IMPROVEMENTS    IN    CAVALRY 
ORGANIZATIONS. 

According  to  Polybius,  the  cavalry  of  the  Greeks 
consisted  ot  two  kinds  : 

1.  The  Caiaphracti  or  heavy  cavalry,  m  which  both 
rider  and  horse  were  well  covered  with  defensive  armor, 
the  former  armed  with  the  lance,  and  a  sabre  slung  from 
a  shoulder  belt. 

2.  A  light  cavalry  of  an  irregular  character,  who- 
were  without  defensive  armor,  consisting  of  archers  and 
lancers,  who  also  carried  a  sword,  javelin  and  a  small 
buckler.  A  body  of  cavalry  called  an  epiiagma,  was 
divided  into  two  equal  parts,  each  composed  alike, 
termed  Telea.  One  was  placed  on  each  wing  of  the 
line  of  battle. 

The  teles  was  subdivided  into  five  divisions,  the 
strength  of  each  subdivision  being  the  half  of  the  one- 
next  in  order  above  it.  The  lowest,  termed  Ila,  of  64 
hojsemen,  corresponding  to  the  modern  squadron,  was 
drawn  up  on  a  front  of  16  with  four  files,  and  was 
commanded  by  an  officer  with  the  title  of  Ilarch. 

The  Roman  cavalry  formed  a  privileged  class,  into 
which  only  those  were  admitted  who  paid  certain  tax. 
Tiiis  classification  being  jn,ade,  the  tribuas  named  10 
first  Sind  10  second  decuriofis  for  the  cavalry  ;  and  then 
in  concert  with  the  officers  thus  selected,  divided  the 
classes  into  manipali  and  turma,  assigning  to  each  its 
two  proper  officers;  whilst  these,  in  turn,  selected  the 
two  officers  in  each  maniple  who  acted  as  file  closers. 
Since  that  time  to  thepresent.day,  constant  changes  and 
improvements  have  been  made  in  the  formation  of  cav- 


CAVALRY   ORGANIZATIONS.  46 

airy,  tlie  most  manifest  change  being  the  diminution 
in  depth,  and  we  now  find  ourselves  adopting  tho  sin- 
gle rank  formation,  which  presents  a  far  different  sys- 
tem to  the  formation  in  ten  ranks  of  which  we  read  in 
the  earliest  histories  of  war. 


48  INSTRUCTIONS  TO  PICKETS. 


INSTRUCTIONS   TO  PICKETS. 

I.  When  an  officer  in  command  of  an  outpost  shall 
arrive  at  the  position  he  is  to  occupy,  he  will  immedi- 
ately throw  forward  from  one  third  to  half  of  his  com- 
mand, divided  into  three  or  more  pickets,  a  distance  of 
500  yards.  One  of  these  pickets  will  be  placed  on  the 
main  avenue  of  approach  and  the  others  on  its  right 
and  left  in  favorable  positions,  and  each  of  these''pick- 
ets  will  throw  forward  videttes  a  still  further  distance 
of  400  or  500  yards. 

II.  To  prevent  jiny  misconception  of  terms,  the 
main  body  of  the  outpost  will  be  denominated  grand 
guard.  The  detachments  in  advance  will  be  denomi- 
nated pic^cets  and  the  outer  chain  be  denominated  vi- 
dettes, 

III.  Immediately  upon  taking  his  position,  the  officer 
commanding  the  grand  guard  will  send  patrols  to  his 
right  and  left,  to  e«tablish  communication  and  learn 
the  position  of  the  grand  guards  upon  his  flanks. — 
These,  patrols  will  be  kept  moving  during  the  night  to 
prevent  the  possibility  of  a  vigilant  and  enterprising 
enemy  creeping  in  between  the  guards.  Patrols  will 
also  be  kept  moving  from  the  grand  guard  to  the  pick- 
ets and  videttes  to  insure  vigilance  on  their  part. 

IV.  From  3  o'clock  in  the  morning  till  sunrise  re- 
doubled vigilance  will  be  exacted,  and  patrols  will  be 
sent  forward  at  least  two  miles  in  advance  of  the  vi- 
dettes. 

V.  Pickets  and  videttes  must  remain  mounted  and 
ready  for  action  at  any  moment, 

VI.  At  the  grand  guard  not  more  than  one  third  of 
the  men  may  be  allowed  to  feed  and  water  at  the  same 

'time.    In  feeding  the  bridle  may  be  removed, -but  no 


INBTBUCTIONS  TO  PICKKTS.  4T 

trooper  on  any  outp'^st  will  be  permitted  to  tie  up  his 
horse  or  remove  his  saddle  under  any  circumstances 
whatever. 

VII.  By  day,  videttcs  should  be  placed  in  ^elevated 
positions  where  their  view  will  be  most  extended.  By 
night,  they  should  be  placed  Jiear  the  base  of  hills, 
where  they  will  be  obscured,  and  any  person  ap- 
proaching will  be  more  readily  seen  against  the  sky. 

VIII.  Pickets  and  grand  guards  will  choose  favor- 
\ble  positions  for  defence,  such  as  near  houses, 
barns,  fcncos,  stonewalls,   &c.,  &c. 

IX.  Great  care  will  be  taken  by  officer*  command- 
ing grand  guards,  to  see  that  all  outposts  have  an 
unobstructed  and  well  understood  line  of  retreat  to 
the  main,  body  of  the    command. 

X.  In  case  of  an  attack  upon  the  videttes,  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  grand  guard  will  immedi- 
ately dispatch  a  courier  to  the  main  body  of  the 
command  to  notify  the  commanding  officer.  He 
will  also  send  other  couriers  to  notify  the  grand 
guard  on  his  flanks. 

XI.  Videttcs  will  reserve  their  fire  until  the  enemy 
has  approached  sufficiently  near  to  enable  them  to 
discharge  their  fire-arms  with  probable  effect,  but  it 
is  their  duty  to  notify  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  grand  guard  of  the  first  indication  of  their  ap- 
proach. 

XII.  The  videttes  and  pickets  having  been  driven 
back  upon  the  grand  guard,  the  commanding  officer 
finding  his  position  no  longer  tenable,  may  fall  back 
slowly  upon  the  main  body  of  the  command,  on 
being   assured  that  it  is  ready  for  action. 

XIII.  When  any  patrol  or  detachment  of  any 
kind  approaches  the  main  body  of  the  command, 
whether  in  camp,  on  the  march,  or  while  engaging 
the  enemy,  they  will  send  forward  a  trooper  to  give 
notification  of  their  approach,  in  order  that  no 
doubt  may  arise  to  whether  they  are  friends  or  ene- 
mies. 


BUGLE    S/GNALS. 


97 


BUGLE   SIGNALS. 

NP  /._  THE  GENERAL  . 


^j  J3  J^  J^|[^  [jj"  ^v^  i^ 


i 


^a\r\\ 


444  4*  4 


AfPS.^  BOOTS   AND   SADDLES: 


>r.^.5._  TD    HOffSE. 


2C 


98. 


^lUgro  .Moderam 


BUeiF  SIGNALS. 
NO  4_  ASSEMBLY. 


AfP  S.^  TO  ARMS. 


f^r'^'Qir^tf  LjTgij: 


/^P  e._  TO   THE  STANDARD, 


BUGLT  S/G^AIS. 


95 


i 


jbtLm- 


jCZ 


zx 


^^ 


:?:q-r-T 


^ 


¥=^ 


^§ 


zz: 


»s 


>»  *••  *    1*: 


^ 


ZZZSEZ'TBE 


^ 


frn?^l  a-CfmlfCrJSJIifCM 


rv  «!.-»« iiiMtwm^wM\m  \m  i 


)  I  ^|>W|U  U  Lid  LI  H^ 


S 


^ 


^ 


1^ 


TT 


M — m- 


i 


/^P  ^_   #y4/f<r^. 


AUeffro 


BUGLf  S/GNALS. 


102. 


NPiJ.,-^    STABLE  CALL. 

itJumJL 


JSEjEaM. 


^ 


F^^f^ 


*^j; 


•^ 


^ 


9    ####  ^ 


tazf- 


\        f\^    ^S-i-9 


i 


=^- 


i'liu 


i 


y— y 


if  tf    # 


Pir  uxAA-^ 


/l^/'  /i'.-  WATERING  CALL. 


iLjIJL^r  q:^^ 


=p^ 


ty4/U^r 


hi 9  13.^  BREAKFAST 


UM\^-^^ 


^1^ 


wjsmpi 


ri#v[ff^ 


^ 


MJtULM. 


bJFPiijm 


/^ 


W.^  14..- ASSEMBLY  OF   GUARD. 


g.frrririr  rifi-i'ifi^^ 


N?  IS..  ORDERS. 
$n9.  0      ^ — MMJL 


i 


A^P//^.-  ASSEMBLY  OF  BUGLERS. 
p   ff  p  p  p 


fcrniL'i 


¥^ 


^ 


Q      s    -ft-» 


^^ 


n l-t- 


^ 


JfTW. 


f  JifTfy 


r  I  * 


s 


Jij"  a  siguaJ^plai/  lo  f/iiW  mark  .       @ 
2A>. 


»^  *♦  # 


^m 


Solo . 


©. 


•  *    •' 


104., 


.     BUGLE  SISNMS. 


#  ,  # 


=^=^ 


1^ 


jz 


rpiclr/ir-irng 


pU-JS 


Kzzs: 


m  m  m  m 


¥ 


tf     # 


t 


*mfff' 


TL 


^m 


p 


\f\y      -j —  —         ,'  I  \m  mwa, liiHni — 


s 


i 


1 .  m 


#      4» 


/K.^  /^._  FATIGUf  CALL 


Alh^!*0. 


lOTpCJ/tl^^^^ 


p  f  pp^ 


3 
4L4L4L 


itLTrjL 


t 


^ 


3r 


o^ 


? 


i 


A  ihffm. 


fk'P  /S.  „    Dl NNER  CALl  ■ 

toe 


105 


%. 


Aikffra 


NP^o...  n/STRfsi/rjofifS. 


i 


ff-^^-jJ-^  i'-«faS=t 


•  <  *  ■ 


^^^^^s^ 


Jl&egn. 


hfPS/...  OR  I  Li   CALL 


l^P^^.^OFffCERS  CALL. 


106.  Bi/Gl£  S/6/\/ALS.    ' 

/VP£3..TH£  RfCALL. 


^^^^^ndanit. 


I 


1 


i 


^ 


E30E 


X=E 


KZ=X 


x=z=x 


b^ 


±. 


N924..-  SICK  CALL. 


^  fr^lf  r|p^[^lfl;ffl-ffl 


4^.^i^.^_  TATTOO. 


p 


•>  #.#  1  •> 


,"■ — 


ih^M 


m  4.4  m  0 


s 


=F^ 


^ 


>>  J.J  J  J 


^^i 
W 


^ 


-0h4i4S~4- 


Si 


Bi^Gli  SIGNALS. 
76=\      /^P^S.-ro  exr/NGU/SH  l/GHTS. 

ifil    Allrg 


107 


'     ^   '    1 1  _  f  f  -T 


^^S^3 


FOR    THE   SERVICE  OF  SKIRMISHERS. 

f<9  /.-   FOUWAHD. 


^^^^^^m 


fi?^..  /^AlT 


^^=rrf=r=& 


NP3.^  TO  THS  IfFr. 


-^^m 


/VP4-.~  TO  THe  RIGHT 

,  Aliegrc  m 


/VPS.^  ABOUT 

9L  3 


^^^^^i 


//^7==  j  j^f  ^-  CHAffG£  amCT/Ofil  TO  THT  fi/G/^T 


3C 


/TV,  /^ 


^^^^^^^ 


B£/^l£   S/6/^AlS, 


108 


77^=1     J^Fr_c/^AA/6£  D//?£cr/mro r//rifn 


I 


#    I    § 


^7N 


E? 


«4-#-* -#■ 


^ 


/*^ 


gff^ 


*'     ^ 


JitocUraio . ' 


/V?S.-  Tf?OT. 


E 


i^zs: 


USCfK) 


hi/  r^i^"^ 


/V^  /^.  -  C0MAI£A/Cf  /7/P //V^?. 


i£^IL£;^ri^^^^f^ 


rj    Alhffro 


J^P  JI.^TO  C£AS£  £//?/A/S. 


lll\  uJ"^^^ 


w 


^ 


AtP  /J.  _  CMAffG£  AS  fORA$£/?S. 

JPr-tsbs.  ^    9    § 


^^^^^m 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PART  FIRST. 


TITLE  FIRvST. 


BASIS  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

ARTICLE   I. 

Fagt. 

Pornftation  of  a  regiment  of  ten  squadrons  in  line, . . .  ■  1 
Posts  of  the  ofiScers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of 

the  field  and  staff  of  a  regiment  in  line, 2 

Posts  of  the  officera  and  non-commiaaioued  officers  of 

a  squadron  in  line, '?> 

Assembly  of  a  regiment,  mounted, 4 

AMcmbly  of  a  regiment,  dismounted, 6 

Dress  parade  and  guard  mounting, 5 

The  standard, 7 

Salute  with  the  standard  and  sabre, 8 

The  order  of  battle,.  .^ s 

ARTICLE  ir. 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  column, 9 

Order  in  column  by  twos  or  fours, 9 

Order  in  column  of  platoons, ; '. . .  11 

Order  in  close  column, 12 

Order  in  double  column, 13 

Compliments  by  cavalry  under  review, IS 

Form  and  course  of  inspection, 16 

ARTICLE  111. 

Dt3ti«s  of  instructors, 3S 

ARTICLE  IV. 

Wvisiop,  order,  and  progression  of  Instruction, 19 


31  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 

ARTICLE   V.  .   . 

Oradation  of  instruclion, . . . : 20 

Recruit!?, 20 

Corporals, 21 

Sergeants, 21 

Officers, , 22 

ARTICLE  VI. 

Insti-uction  to  mount  without  saddle,  and  to  saddle,.  22 

Manner  of  vaulting, . ■  •  ,  22 

Manner  of  rolling  the  cloak, 23 

Manner  of  saddling, 23 

ARTICLE  VII. 

Of  training  horses  which  have  already  been  ridden, .  24 
Treparatory  Lesson.    To  make  a  horse  tractable  and 

steady  at  mounting,' 25 

To  bend  or  to  supple  the  horse's  neck, 26 

How  to  make. a  horse  obey  the  pressure  of  the  leg,-. .  29 

Circling  on  the  haunches, 31 

Reining  back, 82 

The  horse's  paces,  walk,  trot,  and  canter, 83 

Demi-pirouette, So 

Manner  of  accustoming  the  horses  to  leap 8& 

To  accustom  horses  to  firing  and  military  noises, ...  36 

Practice  of  paces  for  manoeuvre, 37 

ARTICLE  VIII.    • 

DefiaitioDB  and  general  principles, ST 

ARTICLE  IX. 

Signals, •  •  •  42 


TITLE  SECOND. 

INSTRUCTION  ON  FOOT. 

School  of  the  trooper,  dismounted, 45 

Position  of  trooper,  dismounted, 46 

Eyes  right— eyes  left, 46 

Right  face,  left  face,  about  face,  right— oblique  face, 

left— oblique  face, 4T 

Common  step, *^ 

To  change  feet, 4^ 

To  march  by  a  flank, *;* 

To  face  to  the  right  or  left,  when  marching, 49 

Ol'liQue  face  to  the  right  or  left  when  marching, —  o9 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  Ill 

Page. 

Quickstep, 50 

Double  quick  step, 51 

Sabre  exercise 52 

General  observations  and  directions, 62 

Manual  of  the  pistol, 64 

Inspection  of  arras .'  66 

Target  practice, ; 6T 

Platoon,  iquadron  and  regiment,  dismounted, 61 


TITLE   THIKD. 


INSTRUCTION  ON  HORSKBAOK, 

LESSON   }. 

School  of  the  trooper,  mounted, 71 

Position  of  the  trooper,  before  mounting, 72 

To  mount, 72 

To  dismount, 73 

position  of  the  trooper  mounted, 74 

The  use  of  the  reins, 74 

Thtt  use  of  the  lege, 75 

The  effect  of  the  legs  and  reins  combined 75 

To  march, 75 

To  halt, 76 

To  turn  to  the  right  and  to  the  left, 76 

To  turn  about  to  the  right  and  to  the  left, ] ,  77 

To  make  a  third  of  a  turn  to  the  right  aud  to  the 

left, 77 

To  rein  back,  and  to  cease  reining  back, 78 

To  file  cff, , 70 

LESSON   II. 

To  march  to  the  right  hand,  and  to  march  to  the  left 

hand, '. 79 

To  turn  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  in  marching 80 

To  halt,  and  to  step  off, 80 

To  pass  from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot 

to  the  walk, 81 

Changes  of  hand, 82 

To  turn  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  by  trooper  in  88 

marching, 83 

To  tnrn  about  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  by  trooper 

in  marching  on  the  same  line, 63 

The  same  moveraents  Ui  marching  ia  column,, ......  84 


IV  TABLE    OP   CONTENTS, 

LESSON   IIL 

Fagt. 

Of  th€  spur, , 86 

To  rcarch  to  the  right  hand  or  to  the  left  hand, 87 

To  pasB  from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot 

to  the  walk, , 88 

Change  of  direction  in  the  breadth  of  the  riding 

house, 88 

Change  of  direction  obliquel  j  by  trooper, 88 

To  march  in  a  circle, 90 

LESSON    IV. 

To  turn  to  the  right,'  or  to  the  left  by  trooper  in 

inarching, 01 

To  turn  about  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  the  troop- 
ers inarching  on  the  same  line  (or  abreast), 91 

The  same,  the  troopers  marching  in  column, 91 

To  pass  successively  from  the  head^to  the  rear  of  the 

column '. 92 

■>       Being  halted,  to  commence  the  move  at  a  trot, 93 

Marching  at  a  trot,  to  halt, 93 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  trot-out,  and  from  the 

trot-out  to  the  trot, 96 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop, 94 

To  passage  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  the  head  to 

the  wall, 95 

To  passage  to   the  right  or  to  the  left,  being  in    j 
column 97 

LESSON   V. 

To  take  the  snaflle  in  the  right  hand, 98 

To  drop  the  snaffle, 99 

The  principal  movements  of  the  bridle  hand, 99 

To  gather  the  horse, ^ . . , .  100 

To  march, 100 

To  halt, 100 

To  turn  to  the  right  in  marching, 100 

To"  turn  to  the  left  in  marching, 100 

To  turn  about  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  in  march' 


mg. 


10« 


To  make  an  oblique  turn  to  the  right  and  to  the  left 

in  marching, •• 101 

To  rein  back,  and  to  cease  reining  back, 101 

Exercise  of  the  4th  lesson  with  the  curb  bridle, 101 

To  passage  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,. . . , 102 

-LESSON   VI. 

Principles  of  the  gallop, 10*2 

Siercise  at  the  gallop  upon  right  lines, 103 

Exercise  at  the  gallop  on  the  circle IW 


.TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

LESSON  vir. 

Pago. 

Sxwcise  of  the  oth  lesson  with  the  sabpc  only,.,     ..  lOo 

MaiQual  of  arms  at  a  halt, 105 

To  fire  the  pistol, 107 

To  load  the  pistol, ,. .  lot 

iMpectlon  of  arms, 108 

S*bre  exerciee  at  a  halt, 109 

LESSON  vm. 

Manual  of  arms  in  marching, » 110 

Sabre  exercise  at  all  gaits, 110 

Leaping, 110 

To  leap  the  ditch, lU 

To  leap  the  feisce, Ill 

Individual  charge, Ill 

Circling  on  the  forehand  and  haunches,  and  demi- 

pirouette,. . ., v 113 

Target  practice 113 

Record  and  report*  of  target  firing, 1 14 

SOflOOt.  Of  THE  PLATOOW,  MOUNTED HX 

ABTfCLE   L 

(ieoeral  principles  of  alignment, 117 

Successive  alignment  of  files  in  the  platoon, 118 

Alignment  of  the  platoojL, 121 

To  break  the  platoon  by  nle,  by  twos,  and  by  fours.  121 

Direct  march  in  column  by  file,  by  twos  and  by  foura  122 

Change  of  direction, 128 

To  halt,  and  to  commence  the  march,  in  column.. . .  12^3 

Individual  oblique  march, ■.  124 

The  platoon  marching  iu  column  by  file,  by  twos,  or 
by  fours,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  to  the 

left,  and  to  the  right,. 124 

Manual  of  arms, 127 

AUncLE  11. 

To  form  twos  and  fours  at  the  same  gait, 127 

To  break  by  twos  and  by  file  at  the  same  gait, 129 

To  form  twos  and  fours  in  doubling  the  gait, 180 

To  break  by  twos  and  by  file  in  doubling  the  gait,. ..  181 

Sabre  exercise,. ]  32 

ARTICLE  IIL 

Direct  march  of  the  platoon  in  line, 188 

Countermarch, 188 

Wheelings, 1S8 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot, 140 

To  wheel  on  a  moYablc  pivot, » 14$. 


VI  TABLE    OF    GONTENTS. 

Page. 

Individual  oblique  march, 146 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  It  by  twos, 

or  by  fours,  at  the  same  gait, 146 

The  platoon  marching  in  column    by  twos  or  by 

fours,  to  form  it  at  the  same  gait 147 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  by  fours 

or  by  twos,  in  doubling  the  gait, 148 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos  or  by  fours, 

to  form  it  in  doubling  the  gait, .148 

Movements  by  fours,  the  platoon  being  in  column  or 

line , , 149 

ARTICLE  IV. 

Running  at  the  heads,  and  pistol  practice 152 

To  leap  the  ditch  and  the  fence, 163 

To  charge  by  platoon, 154 

Rallying, ; .• 156 

Skirmishing, ...,-... 155 

Prepare  to  fight  on  foot, 162 

SCHOOIv  OF  THE  SQX7ADR0N,  MOUNTED,. , 166 

ARTICW:   I. 

Successive  alignment  of  platoons  in  the  squadron. .      1€7 

Alignment  of  the  squadron, . . 168 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  form  a  column  of 

fours, 169 

To  break  the  squadron  to  the  right  or  left  to  march 

to  the  front, 169 

To  break  by  fours  from  the  right  to  march  to  the 

left, 150 

Direct  march  in  column  of  fours, 171 

Change  of  direction, 172 

Individual  oblique  march, 172 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  of  fours  to  march 

to  the  rear, 172 

Te  break  by  fours  to  the  right,  column  half  left, 

(right  or  half  right), 1T8 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  by  twos 

and  by  file,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  to 

the  left,  to  the  right,  or  to  the  rear, .- 178 

To  regulate  the  rapidity  of  gaits, 177 

Sabre  ex«rci8e, 177 

ARTICLE   IT. 

The   squadron  being  in  line,  to  form  it  in   open 

column, 178 

To  march  in  open  column, 170 

Changes  of  direction  by  succeseiTe  wlieell, 181 

2<ndiTidual  oblique  march,. 181 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  Vii 

Change  of  gait  in  open  column, "^fi2*' 

To  brcjik  by  four«,  by  twos,   and  by  file,  Vo  form 

twos,  foarg,  and  platoons  at  the  f>ame  gait,  jrh 

The  same  movements  in  doubling  ihe  gait         1  rt, 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  column*  to  march 

to  the  rear, ^q^ 

To  halt  the  column .'.'.".".'.".'.'.■''..■ jgg 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  coiiiran,' "to  'form 

hne  faced  to  the  left,  to  the  right,  to  the  front. 

and  to  the  rear, '      -,  co 

•  To  break  by  platoons io  the  ft-ont,'.'. '.'.'.'.'.'.'. 1 90 

T#  break  by  platoons  to  the  rear  from  the "liffht  'to 

march  to  the  left, ^    '  j^.^ 

Movement .  by  fours,  the  squadron  'being  "i'n  'open 

column, ° '  jj,^ 

ARTICLE    III. 

Direct  march  of  the  squadron  in  line  iq« 

Countermarch. ' ix^ 

Wheelings, ; ; ;  • ; ; }^« 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot, iXX 

To  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot,.       n'J^ 

Individual  oblique  march, on? 

Oblique  march  by  platoons, '.,.[   "" ' '  ^° 

The    squadron    being  in  line,  to 'cause * 'it  Vo* " cain 

ground  to  the  rear,  and  to  face  it  again  to  the 

front  by  fours, •  oo^ 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  march  it  Vo' th4  ■ 

rear  by  wheelinK  the  platoons  a))out,.  ook 
The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break 'it  to' tiie 

front  by  platoons,  and  to  reform  it  ortu 

The  same  movem«nts  in  doubling  the  gai't '  on-r 

Passage  of  obstacles,.. ;......   ...;'.' ■.■.■.','/ *  2O8 

ARTICLE    IV. 

The  charge, ^. g^,, 

Rallying, ^..;:; 209 

Skirmishing, ?i^* 

To  fight  on  foot, ■.  .".'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.■.■.'.■;.■;;;;;;;;    ^ 


208 


TABLE    OF    C0MENT8.  IX 


PART  SECOND. 
•-•-•- 

TITLE  FOURTH. 

EVOLUTIONS  OF  A  REGIMENT. 

-•'•  • 

GENERAL  RULES. 

ABTICLE   I. 

Formation  of  columms— their  march,  and  OBAiiGits. ....         a 

Alignment  of  the  regiment, 8 

To  form  a  column  of  fours — its  march  and  change  of 

direction, T 

To  form   an  open  column — its  march  and  change  of 

direction, g 

To  form  a  column  of  squadrons,  and  a  close  column        11 

To  march  in  a  column  of  squadrons,  and  in  a  close 

column,  and  their  change  of  direction, 17 

To  form  a  double  column— its  march  and  change  of 

direction, 20 

To  pass  from  a  column  of  twos  to  a  column  of  fours; 
to  an  open  column,  and  to  a  column  of  squad- 
rons, and  to  a  close  column, 9S 

To  pass  from  a  column  of  squadrons  and  a  close  col- 
umn to  an  open  column,  and  a  column  of  fours 
and  twos, 9(} 

ARTICLE   11, 
Formation  of  linb  from  thb  dipferknt  columns, 29 

To  form  line  from  the  column  of  fours,  and  open 
column,  faced  to  the  front,  obliquely,  to  the  left, 
right,  and  rear, S9 

To  form  line  from  a  column  of  squadrons  (or  col-  , 

nmn  of  attack),  faced  to  the  front,  left,  right » 
andrear, , S% 

24 


X  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

Page 
To  form  hne  from  close  column  faced  to  the  front, 

obliquely,  left,  right.,  and  rear, , . ,  g5 

To  form  line  from  doable  column  faced  to  the  front, 

right,  left,  and  rear, 41 

To  form  line  from  open  column  by  combining  two 

or  more  moTements, 48 

article  iii. 

The  Link — its  changes  akd  march, 46 

Changes  of  front, 46 

Movements  of  the  line  of  squadron  columns, 47 

The  march  in  line, 52 

ARTICLE  IV. 

ECHBLOHS, 57 

Echelons  by  squadron  fiom  line, St 

Echelons  from  column  of  squadrons,. 69 

Echelons  from  open  column, 60 

Formation  of  line  from  echelons, 62 

Echelons  by  half  regiment  or  wing, ^ 64 

Observations  on  echelons, '. 65 

To  retire  by  alternate  squadrons 66 

article  v. 

Charge, 66 

Observations  on  the  different  manners  of  charging, .  66 

Charge  In  line,. . .  * 68 

Charge  in  column, 72 

Special  bervige  of  cavalet  in  THte  tvest, 74 

The  camp, 74 

The  march, , T6 

Escorts, ■ •  77 


TITLE  FIFTH. 

EVOLUTIONS  OP  THE  LINE. 
Pbbliminabt  kdlks  akd  bbmaeks, 7P 

ARTICLB   L 
COLUMMB, 82 

Open  columns, ..'., • 81 

Their  march  by  the  rear  to  pas»  a  defile, 81 

Oolumn  of  gquadrons, 5^ 


taelk  of  contents.  xi 

Page. 
To  form  close  column  from  a  line  faced  to  a  flank, . .         81 

To  form  a  Close  column  from  an  open  column, 81 

The  march  and  change  of  direction  of  a  close  col- 
umn ;  its  countermarch ;  to  gain  ground  t>o  flan\^ 
or  rear ;  and  its  wheel  by  platoons  to  repel  a 

sudden  attack  in  flank, 81 

To  form  anil  advance  in  regimental  double  columns,        61 

To  reduce  tlicm  to  double  columns  of  foure, ....      .81 

To  face  and  march  to  the  rear, ^ 81 

Tb  pass  from  a  column  of  squadrons,  oi^  close  col- 
umn to  an  open  column;  from  an  open  column 
to  a  column  of  fours  ;  from  a  column  ofiours  to 
an  open  column  ;  and  from  an  open  cplumn  to  a 

column  of  squadrons,  and  a  close  column, 61 

To  form  close  columns  from  line  without  changing 

front, ' 82 

To  change  the  diroctlon  of  a  general  close  column. 

by  a  n^nk, 88 

ARTICLE  II. 
Formations  of  mkb, , 96 

To  form  liqe  from  an  open  column,  or  column  of 
squadrons,  to  the  right  or  left,  and  on  right  or 
on  left  into  line, 82 

To  form  line  to  the  front  from  double  columns,  and 
faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  head  or  rear  of  the 
columns, 88 

To  form  line  from  an  open  column,  where  a  part  has 
changed  direction,  in  the  several  cases,  by  com- 
bining two  or  more  evolutions, 82 

To  form  line  from  open  column  to  the  front,  oblique- 
ly, faced  to  the  right  or  left  rear,  on  the  rear  of 
the  column,  and  on  the  head  of  the  column, ....        8i 

To  forin  line  faced  to  the  front,  and  to  the  rear,  from 

cplumn  of  squadrons, 8t 

To  deploy  by  regiment  in  mass  and  in  echelon, 89 

To  deploy  the  close  column  to  either  flank, 89 

To  deploy  the  close  column  to  both  flanks, 90 

To  deploy  a  line  of   regimental  close  columns  or 

masses, 90 

To  form  line  on  the  left  flank  faced  to  the  left,  and 

and  on  right  flauk  faced  to  the  right,  from  the  ' 

close  column, 91 

To  form  a  line  of  double  columns,  in  two  lines,  faced 

to  the  right  or  left, 9« 

To  form  a  line  of  double  columns  in  line  faced  to  the 

rear, 92 

To  form  line  from  open  columns,  on  a  central  squad- 
ron faced  to  the  front, 92 


Xn  TABI.K    OF    CONTENTS.- 

To  form  line  from  open  column,  on  a  central  squad- 
ron, faced  to  the  rear, , 98 

ARTIOtE   III. 
Th8  line,. &8 

Changes  of  front, 98 

-Movements  of  the  line  of  squadron  columns 94 

The  march  In  line^i - 94 

The  brigade  in  two  lines, 96 

ARTICLE    IV.  . 
3SCHBLOK8, 99 

ARTICLE   V. 

The  chabqb, 101 

Application  of  the  general  rules  in  three  examy)les 

of  evolutions  of  a  division  of  two  brigades,  —      102 


TABLE    OF    CO>f TENTS,  -Yill 


PART  THIRD. 


SKIRMISH  DRILL  FOR  MOUNTED  TROOP?. 
ARTICLE  r. 

Composition  of  Company •  1 

Designation  of  Company ^ ij 

Posts  of  OflScers 8 

To  Link 4 

ARTICLE    II. 

Skirmlsii  drill ;,  preliminary  remarks, 5 

To  take  open  order  an0  to  return  to  close  order  (in 

line,) / 6 

Open  order  in  line — to  break  into  fours,  twos  and 

files, T 

In  column  of  Ole  to  form  twos,  open  order, ,  8 

In  column  of  file  to  form  fours,  open  order,. 9 

In  coluum  of  twos,  open  order,  to  form  fours,  open 

order, 10 

In  column  of  fours  to  form  twos,  open  or  close  order,  11 

in  column  of  twos  to  form  files,  open  or  close  order,  li» 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  line, 18 

ARTICLE  III. 

In  open  oi'der  column  of  fours ;  action  front  and  left,  14 

In  open  order  column  of  fours ;  action  rear  ancl  left,  16 

In  open  order  column  of  fours ;  action  right, 16 

In  open  order  column  of  fours ;  action  left, 17 

In  open  order  column  of  twos;  action  front  and  left,  18 

In  open  order  column  of  twos ;  action  rear  and  left,  19 

In  open  order  column  of  twos ;  action  right, 20 

In  open  order  column  of  twos ;  action  left, 21 

ARTICLE  IV. 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  when  dismounted,  22 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  column  of  fours,,  t ...  23 

After  deploying  as  skirmishers  to  commenae  action,  84 

Column  of  fours  open  order  to  retiirn  to  close  order,  26 


XtV  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS, 

^^. 

Column  of'twos  open  order  to  return  to  dose  ordei-,  96 

Column  of  file  to  form  fours  in  clc'se  order, 2T 

AETICLK    V.    ' 

Changes  of  the  Manual. 

To  sling  and  to  unsling  rill es, ,  28 

Concluding  remarks, 29 

Pag«. 

Remarks  rpos  Cavalry  Tactics  AND  Manceuvkes, 23 

Reconnoisancks,. 41 

IMPE0VEUE.NT8  IN  OaTALBT  ORCANIZATIOSS, 44 

Ikstrpctioks  to  Pickets, .♦ 46 


LIST  OF  PUBLICATIONS. 


A  STRANG-E   STORY, 

BY  FIR  K.  BULWBR  LY'TTON— Price $3  00 


.    -THE  CONFEDERATE, 

BY  A  SOUTH  CVnOLI  MAN— Price     ,..,..,     $1  25 

RAIDS  AND  ROMANCE  OF  MORGAN  AND  HIS  MEN, 

BY  MRS.  SALLIE  ROCHESTER  FORD—Price     ....     $8  50 

GREAT  EXPECTATIONS, 

BY  CHARLES  DICKENS,  (Boz,)— Price     ......     $8  00 

TANNHAUSER,  or  the  BATTLE  OF  THE  BARDS, 

A  POEM, 
BY  NEVILLE  TEMPLE  and  EDWARD  TREVOR— Price    .    $2  50 

THE  WAR  IN  NICARAGUA, 

BY  GENERAL  WILLIAM  WALKER, 

One  Volume,  13mo.  Cloth,  complete, $1  60 

Do.  Half  Calf, 2  60 

ROMANTIC  PASSAGES   IN  SOUTH- 
WESTERN  HISTORY, 

BY  HON.  A.  B.  MEEK— One  Volume,  12mo.  Cloth,     ,     .      $1  25 

lOynMnit^  on  ncvct pag*.") 


LIST  OF  PUBLICATIONS----Contlnued. 

THE  CODE  OF  ORDINANCES  FOR 
THE  CITY  OF  MOBILE, 

BY  HON.  ALEX.  McKIN3TRY— One  Volume,  8rao.  Sheep,    U  00 

'     IlEV.  DR.  P.  P.  NEELY'S  SERMONS,. 

One  Volume,  12mo.  Cloth, $1  25 

SOUVENIRS    OF    TRAVEL, 

BY  M'MB  OCTAVIA  WALTON  LEVERT, 

Half  Morocco  Gilt, $4  00 

Turk      do.      Ant.,       .     .     : 6  00 

Horizontal  Plowing  and  Hill-Side  Ditching, 

BY  DR.  N.  T.  SORSBY,  of  Ala. 
One  Volume,  Paper, 50  cents.. 

HARDEE'S 
RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACTICS, 

Two  Volumes,  24mo., |4  00 

SILAS  MARNER, 

BY  THE  AUTHOR  OP  "ADAM  BEDE,"— (Jti  Press.) 


Orders  from  abroad  are  respectfully  requested  to  give 

JHatind.  Directions  of  their  PostoflB.ces,  Landings,  or  Rail  Road 
Statlone. 

S.  H.  OOETZEL;  Mobile,  Ala. 


■^y 


-^'.- 


.^'^^A 


s^'-'r-^ 


W 


